Home

500 Series Console (Discontinued) - User

1. Remote Reporter RS232 RS485 33 377 33 378 8 COM3 RS232 o ia py 5 MIDI 10 MIDI THRU a MIDI Through The Keyboard compatible only 12 Keyboard nma BIN not auto detect ee es E e N C o GND Pa amp VGA1 amp VGA2 density D type socket colour Analog Red 0 0 7V 2 Analog Green 0 0 7V 3 Analog Blue 0 0 7 V No norte Connection E 7 H Sync V Sync 15 Pin D type Remote Faders 14 12 Analog input socket ith 10V supply pg REMINIT2 13 14 GND 33 379 33 380 15 REM10V eee ie ee re Printer socket Strobe Oo OT a 8 tat 4 Data 2 5 Data 3 14 Auto feed 15 Error Chapter 34 Ethernet Overview Strand Lighting Ltd recommends specifiers installers and users follow the Recommended Practice for Ethernet Cabling Systems in Entertainment Lighting Applications published by the Entertainment Services and Technology Association ESTA Copies of this document can be purchased from ESTA at 875 Sixth Avenue Suite 2302 New York NY 1001 Tel 1 212 244 1505 Fax 1 212 244 1501 BNC BNC BNC BNC BNC BNC Terminator Connector Connector Connector a Connector Terminator o Typical Small Network System ShowNet is comprised of the equipment that make up the nodes of a network and the cabling inter connects between each node An SN100 provides lighting services and the console can make use of these services by the use of the Et
2. ctriF8 Setup Screen let F9 Macro Sereen 0 Fo Profile Screen let F Report Screens ctrl F12 Help let FA Page Up Pgp tt ss lt s Page Down PgDn Last Sereen Space ts Other Wait W Delay E 25 281 Profile p Text Tab PB alt P Goto Hold Update Sub Page Stop Blackout Macro Shift Show Soft Keys alt ESC Exit Program crtl X P Keys i Co Po tr Poo i oe S PR Ps etrt o PPE tr PPP ett Playbacks PB 1 PB 2 Go g ctrl G Stop Back k alt K Cut u alt U y ctrl Home ctrl Page Up v ctrl end ctrl Page Down Mode ctrl A ctrl B Rate T o A Cc T lt ll 25 282 Chapter 26 Handheld Remotes Consoles with operating software version 1 4 or later can host several types of handheld remotes as listed below Designer s Remote R120 wired remote R120 radio remote for UK UK license exempt R120 radio remote for EU EU license exempt except UK R130 wired remote R130 radio remote US FCC license exempt Operating the R130 Handheld Remote iPaq WiFi Wireless Remote Operating Instructions SN110 Node Configuration Each handheld remote has a keypad for entering commands and an LCD display for command line feedback Channels under remote control will be shown in purple on console screens Note From Version 2 4 the F1 to F4 keys on all handhelds will fire pre assigned macros HHM1 to HHM 4 HHM1 to HHM3 on Designer s Remote Refer to Pre Assigned Macros Designer
3. 5 2 A Modes 1 ATT 5 ATT Ali Modes Patches output 1 with the default maximum frame to channel 5 colour attribute out 2 or out ATT ATT patches the output with the specified maximum frame to the channel attribute 1 5 2 2 0 A Modes 1 ATT 5 ATT 2 0 All Modes Patches output 1 with a maximum frame of 20 to the channel 5 colour attribute out ATT ATT sets the default maximum frame for the output without changing the existing patch 1 THRU 5 ATT ATT All Modes Changes outputs 1 to 5 to use the default maximum frame out ATT ATT sets the channel attribute to the specified maximum frame without changing the existing patch 1 ATT ATT 2 0 F All Modes Sets channel 1 attribute to a maximum frame of 20 Patching Non Dims You can patch an output to a channel set the output as a non dim and set its threshold If you omit the threshold the default threshold from the Default Non Dim field in the Show Setup Screen is used You can patch outputs as non dims to intensity channels with a single command but it requires two commands to patch an output as a non dim to an attribute channel NON is a soft key on the LCD Patch menu out NON patches the output as a non dim to the selected channel It sets the threshold to the default if the output is not a non dim or leaves the threshold alone if the
4. Configures this node for the Strand ShowNet network You can edit this file but be aware that the system may rewrite it when new software is installed You can add comment lines starting with or change the order of the lines To find out how to upgrade SN node software over the network see the file SW2ALL BAT on the SN software disk Address name amp type of this node on the network user edited my_nodeaddr xxx xxx xxx xxx Must be unique for each node my_nodetype 300 425 430 51 0 520 530 550 520i 530i 550i SN100 SN102 SN103 SN104 IOFTP DESIGNER_PC BACKUP_PC CS_PC NET_MON my_nodename is 8 characters max Must be unique for each node my_nodeaddr 192 168 0 70 my_nodetype 530 my_nodename denise Panelid user and system edited panelid_fdr 00 00 00 00 panelid_2fdr 00 00 00 00 panelid_3fdr 00 00 00 00 panelid_4fdr 00 00 00 00 panelid_5fdr 00 00 00 00 29 324 panelid_6fdr 00 00 00 00 panelid_7fdr 00 00 00 00 panelid_icc 00 00 00 00 panelid_smpte 00 00 00 00 panelid_1vicd 00 00 00 00 panelid_2vicd 00 00 00 00 panelid_3lcd 00 00 00 00 panelid_4lcd 00 00 00 00 panelid_shlcd 00 00 00 00 TCP IP Netmask user edited netmask 255 255 255 0 TCP IP Gateway user edited gateway 0 0 0 0 File server IP address user edited 0 0 0 0 means file server not used Used by consoles and PCs to locate the file server file_serv
5. FULL Command Line Makes channel 1 the current selection and sets its level to Full The 1 FULL syntax only works in the Live display FULL The existing current selection is unchanged but their levels are set to Full FULL appears on the LCD Live menu This only works in the Live display chans ON or chans ON selects the listed channels and sets their intensity levels to the on level The on level is set by the On Level field in the User Setup Screen initially 100 or the ON Level group group 993 1 The ON Level group takes precedence over the ON Level field For further information refer to Groups To set levels for the current selection to the on level omit chans 1 ON A Modes 1 ON Direct 2 Digit 1 ON Command Line Makes channel 1 the current selection and sets its level to the on level ON The existing current selection is unchanged but their levels are set to the on level 5 62 chans or chans or chans OFF selects the listed channels and sets their intensity levels to off To set levels for the current selection to off omit chans 1 All Modes 1 Direct 1 and 2 Digit 1 SHIFT Direct 1 and 2 Digit 1 Command Line 1 OFF Command Line Makes channel 1 the current selection and sets its level off Note f you use this command in the Live display when Tracking is on it sets channel levels to
6. CUE 2 6 Creates a new cue numbered 26 as a Move Fade Blank All other fields are set to default values CUE 2 7 ALL FADE Creates a new cue numbered 27 as an All Fade cue AF All other fields are set to default values CUE 2 8 CROSS FADE Creates a new cue numbered 28 as a Cross Fade cue XF All other fields are set to default values CUE 2 9 BLOCK CUE Creates a new cue numbered 29 as a Block Cue blank All other fields are set to default values Lightpalette CUE 2 6 Creates a new cue numbered 26 as a Tracking cue blank All other fields are set to default values CUE 2 7 HARD BLOCK Creates a new cue numbered 27 as a Hard Block cue BL All other fields are set to default values CUE 2 8 SOFT BLOCK Creates a new cue numbered 28 as a Soft Block cue blank All other fields are set to default values CUE 2 9 ALL FADE Creates a new cue numbered 29 as an All Fade Cue AF All other fields are set to default values Copying an Existing Cue With the Cue Spreadsheet Screen displayed and the cursor positioned alongside an existing cue you can create a new cue based on the details of the existing cue as shown Cue Tracking Off GeniusPro Only GeniusPro Default CUE 3 0 RECORD Creates a new cue numbered 30 and copies the field values of the cue alongside the cursor position CUE 3
7. Channels that are off in the selection will be removed from the submaster UPDATE SUB 1 All Modes Updates levels that have been modified in submaster 1 excluding levels of channels that were not already in the submaster SUB 7 UPDATE SUB 1 All Modes First selects all of the channels in submaster 7 then updates their levels in submaster 1 excluding levels of channels that were not already in the submaster Including the ADD ALL softkey in the update command includes level changes in channels that are not already in the submaster UPDATE ADD ALL SUB All Modes Updates levels in the specified submaster for channels that have been modified Includes modified channels that are not already in the submaster and channels that have been removed from the modified list by using SHIFT CLR Channels that are off in the selection will be removed from the submaster UPDATE ADD ALL SUB 1 All Modes Updates all channels that have been modified in submaster 1 including channels that are not already in submaster 1 SUB 7 UPDATE ADD ALL SUB 1 A Modes First selects all of the channels in submaster 7 then records their levels in submaster 1 including channels that are not already in the submaster 7 chan UPDATE SUB updates levels of the specified channels in the specified submasters to match the current Levels screen for the selected channels regardles
8. HHM1 to HHM4 are reserved for the functon keys F1 to F4 on R120 R130 Remote Handheld Units HHM1 to HHM3 only can be fired from F1 to F3 on a Designer s Remote Hand Held units The twelve keys on the front of a 300 Series LCD Monitor are used to fire preset macros The number of LCD monitors fitted is detected by the software and the preset macros reserved as follows 1 LCD Monitor 12 macros numbered 901 912 V1 V12 2 LCD Monitors 24 macros numbered 901 924 V1 V24 3 LCD Monitors 36 macros numbered 901 936 V1 V36 4 LCD Monitors 48 macros numbered 901 948 V1 V48 Note after loading from a pre version 2 0 show file the macro key macros may go to the wrong place as follows Original P1 7 macros 991 997 becomes LCD1 6 and 997 Original LCD1 6 macros 981 986 becomes SP11 14 985 986 Original SP1 7 macros 971 977 remain the same Original USER 998 remains the same To overcome this problem load the whole show then clear macros 971 997 at the Archive Clear display then load macros 981 986 starting from 991 and macros 991 997 starting from 951 18 216 Learning a Macro Before a Macro can be used it must first be recorded You can record a macro from any display by using the Learn command or you can record or edit a macro from the Macros display This section shows how to use the Learn command to record a macro Before you start recording a macro make sure that you are in the display from which you want to
9. MACRO 1MACRO 1MACRO 1MACRO LCD1 LCD2 LCD3 OLCD4 1LCD5 2LCD6 This window is mainly used when running the playback Each playback has a title line followed by a list of all recorded cues A yellow bar across the screen shows the last cue completed Cues in progress are shown with a red bar across the screen You can disable the yellow and red bars across the screen in the User Setup display by changing the X Playback Colours field in the User Setup Screen to something besides LIGHT PALETTE INVERT Using the X Playbacks Each playback has its own keys and soft keys and two sliders which are used to load run and control cues When the Playback Modes field in the Show Setup screen is set to SINGLE only the left hand set of controls Playback X1 can be used When it is set to SPLIT SINGLE not applicable to 300 series consoles either set of controls can be used When it is set to DUAL HTP or DUAL LTP the left set is Playback X1 and the right set is Playback X2 There is also a Rate Wheel which can be used by either playback to control fade times The playbacks can be used from any display The X Playbacks window in the Live display State screen and the left LCD show the current state of each of the playbacks X Playback LCD 10 136 The X Playback LCD shows the current cue being run and the wait delay or fade time for each playback This information is duplicated from the Live display In addition the LCD shows the curren
10. c if part 1 CROSSFADE MOVEFADE ALLFADE c if not part 1 MOVEFADE Up Down Delay a b Delay times in seconds or MAN MAN if playback is in manual fade mode c Blank Up Down Profile Profile numbes or DEFAULT if none assigned Command MACRO FX START FX STOP or NONE Attribute Fade Fade time in seconds or MAN MAN if playback is in manual fade mode Attribute Profile Proifile number or DEFAULT if none assigned 20 235 The Dimmer Summary Screen The dimmer summary report shows the following information for the dimmer specified and is updated once per second When one or more faults occur on a patched dimmer a one or two line error message will be displayed on all screens as shown in the following example Unpatched dimmers are ignored Fault on Output 1234 Load Error 200W expected 500W Only the last fault is displayed In order to view any other faults the operator must press the REPORT key and DIMMER LOG softkey to access the Dimmer Log screen Output Patched to channel Nondim Threshold Scaling Profile Filter s Rack Dimmer Node Learned Load Fault s Output Shows the specified output Patched to Channel Specifies the channel number to which the dimmer is patched Nondim Indicates whether or not the output is set to non dim Threshold Shows the threshold setting for the specified output Scaling Show the scaling set for the selected dimmer 20 236 Profile
11. i OIP 2 27 29 Edi CHN 2 27 Bd OIP 34 35 37 CHN 34 7 O P 42 45 CHN 42 45 O P 50 CHN 4 50 OUTFUT GROEREO PATCH 2 To show the Patch display press lt PATCH gt This display lets you view and edit the show patch and is also used when controlling outputs directly This section shows how to set up the show patch To learn how to configure the outputs on the rear of the console refer to The Output Connections Window of the Console Setup Screen For further information on controlling outputs from other displays refer to Direct Output Control The Levels Screen is not used for patching and is disabled The State screen shows the relationship between each output and each channel and can be displayed in output order or channel order see Customising the Patch Display You can use the Level Wheel to scroll the display and show outputs that are on other pages The current page number is shown at the bottom of the Wheel window When set to Output Order the outputs are shown in white Channels are shown in grey or yellow if not a 1 1 patch When set to Channel Order the outputs are shown in grey and channels are shown in white or yellow if not a 1 1 patch 13 179 The first two rows show the relationship between the output and channel numbers as follows O P The output number Double width outputs have a grey background CHN The channel or DMX input channel that the output is patched to When displayed in yellow
12. Clears defaults on entire patch Patching Channel Intensities Outputs can be patched to a channel intensity If the channel s intensity does not exist it is first created The scaling for the intensity is also set If you do not specify scaling the default from the Default Scale field in the Show Setup Screen is used An intensity channel is identified by the channel number by itself or followed by 1 13 188 Note Each output can have its own scaling even if more than one output is patched to the same channel out chan patches the output to the channel s intensity If the channel is not patched the default scaling is used Otherwise scaling is left unchanged 1 5 All Modes 1 5 1 Al Modes Patches output 1 to channel 5 intensity out chan patches the output with default scaling to the channel intensity 1 THRU 1 0 5 Al Modes 1 THRU 1 0 5 1 Al Modes Patches outputs 1 through 10 with default scaling to channel 5 intensity out chan patches the output to the channel s intensity with the specified scaling 1 5 7 5 Al Modes 1 5 1 7 5 A Modes Patches output 1with 75 scaling to channel 5 intensity out changes the output to use the default scaling without changing any other aspect of the patch 1 THRU 5 A Modes Changes output
13. Deleting Groups Groups can be deleted from the Group display This is a good way to delete groups if you are only going to delete a few To learn how to delete all groups or a range of groups refer to Clear Operations in the Archive Screen To delete a group press DELETE DELETE Deletes the current group GROUP 6 DELETE DELETE DELETE 6 Deletes group 6 12 174 Copying Levels From a Group You can record submasters cues groups and effect steps while you are in the Group display by copying the group levels The highlight must be on the group number the Group field Using recording commands while you are in the Group display copies the Group display levels to the target submaster cue group or effect step For example if the current group is 1 then CUE 2 RECORD will copy the levels from group 1 into cue 2 This also allows groups to be copied For example GROUP 4 RECORD will copy the levels from group 1 into group 4 12 175 Chapter 13 Patches This section describes the patch system which lets you set which channels control which console outputs Patching sets up the channel that controls each console output For intensity channels these outputs usually control dimmers or non dims which in turn control fixture intensity For attribute channels these outputs usually control scrollers which in turn control fixture colour Each channel can have an intensity an attribute or
14. Fade Times Each submaster has intensity up and down fade times and a single attribute fade time which is used for attribute changes When you move the fader from 0 to 10 the levels fade in over a period given by the up fade time Conversely moving the fader from 10 to 0 will fade the levels out over a period given by the down fade time If the up and or fade time is set to 0 the fade up and or fade down time is dependent on the speed of mechanical movement of the submaster fader If the fader is only partly moved the fade period depends on the amount the fader is moved For example with a fade time of 8 seconds moving the fader from 2 to 7 half of its travel will give a fade period of 4 seconds and then moving it to 9 quarter of its travel will give a fade period of 2 seconds You can enter fade values from one hundredth of a second to 59 minutes and 59 seconds as shown in the table Key Entry Shown as Value 0 01 0 01 One hundredth of a second 0 1 0 1 One tenth of a second 1 1 1 second 10 10 10 seconds 59 59 59 seconds 100 1 00 1 minute 125 1 25 1 minute 25 seconds 5959 59 59 59 minutes 59 seconds These times are also used by the bump buttons The fade times can be different for each submaster page Changing the page changes the submaster fader times SUB TIME RECORD Direct 1 Digit and Direct 2 Digit RECORD SUB TIME Command Line Mode records levels on the current display and a fade ti
15. If it is necessary to simulate the FX TIME key use the Alt 6 keys on a PC keyboard Changing Effect Type While Effect is Running The effect type is recorded in the effect but you can change it while the effect is running The bottom line in the Effects window shows the effect type for the current playback To change the effect type press FX TYPE and then press the desired type CHASE or BUILD Note Effect type on 300 Series consoles is changed from the Effect Screen using edit mode If it is necessary to simulate the FX TYPE key use the Alt 7 keys on a PC keyboard Changing Effect Direction While Effect is Running The effect direction is recorded in the effect but you can change it while the effect is running The bottom line in the Effects window shows the effect type for the current playback To change the effect direction press FX DIR and then press the desired direction FWD REV BOUNCE or RANDOM Note Effect direction on 300 Series consoles is changed from the Effect Screen using edit mode If it is necessary to simulate the FX DIR key use the Alt 9 keys on a PC keyboard 11 156 Updating Effects The effect default step time direction and type can be updated from a currently running effect once you have made changes using the effect playback buttons Updating an effect does not update channel levels in steps or other properties that you cannot access through the effect playback buttons The eff
16. Main giving sync Sync Transfer To Backup Main giving sync Sync Transfer To Main Main taking sync Backup Offline Show Bad M Backup Commands 29 334 Backup commands are available if both main and backup powered up with the state Main OK Backup OK No Sync displayed If states such as Main or Backup Gone Offline or Main or Backup Not Found are displayed these commands are not available Backup commands are accessed by pressing MORE BACKUP CMDS revealing the following set of soft keys M GIVE SYNC M TAKE SYNC M GIVE CTRL M TAKE CTRL BREAK SYNC and RESET DESK M GIVE SYNC Main give sync to backup the current show is transferred to the backup and only the main s outputs are enabled State sequence e Sync Transfer To Backup e Sync Backup Loading if the sync fails for any reason here see Shifted Backup commands below e Sync Connect To Backup e Sync Connect To Main e Main Active In Sync M TAKE SYNC Main take sync from backup the current show is transferred from the backup and only the main s outputs are enabled State sequence e Sync Transfer To Main e Sync Main Loading if the sync fails for any reason here see Shifted Backup commands below e Sync Connect To Backup e Sync Connect To Main e Main Active In Sync M GIVE CTRL Main give control to backup the main s outputs are disabled and the backup s outputs are enabled New state e Backup Ac
17. State Screen 30 345 Wait Type Up D 6 1 4 0 2 The Rotary Control window is located at the top right hand side of the LIVE display dual VGA only This window is used to display the attributes that are currently being controlled by the trackball and rotary controls Continuous attributes those patched with a zero frame count are displayed as DMX values 0 255 Examples of continuous attributes are Pan Tilt Iris CMY etc Discrete attributes those patched with a non zero frame count are displayed as frame numbers plus frame adjustment Examples of discrete attributes are Colour Gobo Prism etc An example sequence of displayed discrete values might be 1 Frame 1 fully in front of lamp 1 1 Predominantly Frame 1 plus 10 of Frame 2 1 2 Predominantly Frame 1 plus 20 of Frame 2 1 3 Predominantly Frame 1 plus 30 of Frame 2 1 4 Predominantly Frame 1 plus 40 of Frame 2 1 5 50 Frame 1 plus 50 of Frame 2 split colour 2 4 Predominantly Frame 2 with 40 of Frame 1 2 3 Predominantly Frame 2 with 30 of Frame 1 2 2 Predominantly Frame 2 with 20 of Frame 1 2 1 Predominantly Frame 2 with 10 of Frame 1 2 Frame 2 fully in front of lamp 2 1 etc Channel Control Syntax 30 346 Tracker extends existing intensity and colour Channel Control syntaxes All syntaxes are listed in the Command Summary mode The following Control Operations are covered in this section e Controlling Intensity and Attribut
18. Strand y LIGHTING GeniusPro amp Lightpalette Software Version 2 6 Operator s Manual Welcome Thank you for buying Strand Lighting control equipment We hope that you will find that your lighting needs are met by your new system and that you will enjoy exploring the new facilities that your new system offers You are provided with essential information to help you install and operate your system Please look through all the documents and keep them safely for future use If you have any difficulties please do not hesitate to contact Strand Lighting or any authorized Strand service center for advice This equipment is designed to operate from the mains electrical supply and contains voltages which if touched may cause death or injury It should only be operated in accordance with the instructions provided and for the purpose of a lighting control system Do not open the console There are no user serviceable parts inside Avoid spilling liquid on the equipment If this should happen switch the equipment off immediately at the mains To reduce the risk of fire or electric shock do not expose the equipment to rain or moisture For indoor use only This equipment is designed and manufactured to comply with international safety standards 1EC950 UL1950 CS950 and is intended for use as part of a lighting control system It must not be used for other purposes where there is a risk of safety to persons The equipment contains p
19. The examples shown immediately below are effect playback selections that you can use to replace fx where it appears in full command descriptions Note To load and run an effect on a 300 Series console press FX FX GO This will load the effect on the next available effect playback and start the effect running To load an effect without running the effect you can simulate the FX LOAD key using the ACII key command Alt 4 11 152 FX FX LOAD Direct 1 and Direct 2 Digit FX LOAD FX Command Line Specifies the effect number to load on the next available effect playback If the effect is already loaded it reloads it onto the same playback If the effect is loaded on multiple playbacks it reloads it onto the lowest numbered of these playbacks If the effect does not exist or all playbacks are loaded the command is ignored FX 1 FX LOAD Direct 1 and Direct 2 Digit FX LOAD FX 1 Command Line If effect 1 is already loaded selects that Playback Otherwise selects the first unloaded playback if any and loads it with effect 1 if recorded FX PB FX LOAD Direct 1 and Direct 2 Digit FX LOAD FX PB Command Line Specifies an effect and a playback to load If the effect does not exist the command is ignored FX 1 PB 2 FX LOAD Direct 1 and Direct 2 Digit FX LOAD FX 1 PB 2 Command Line If effect 1 is already loaded on Playback 2 selects it
20. This patches the output to the DMX Input Channel The default Scaling is used if this is not currently patched to a DMX Input Channel otherwise it is left unchanged 1 THRU 1 0 5 THRU 1 4 Patches output 1 to 10 to DMX Input Channel 5 to 14 scaling unchanged sel This patches the output to the DMX Input Channel default Scaling is always used as defined in Setup 1 5 Patches output 1 to DMX Input Channel 5 with default scaling sel 7 28 313 This patches the output to the DMX Input Channel with the specified Scaling 1 5 f7 5 Patches output 1 to DMX Input Channel 5 with 75 scaling sel The existing patch is unchanged but the DMX Input Channel is used with the specified Scaling 1 7 5 r Patch is unchanged but is set to DMX Input with 75 Scaling Using DMX In Dimmers Once you have configured a Submaster as DMX IN and set up the patch connect your DMX source to the DMX IN port and push the Submaster fader up You won t be able to see any changes in the LIVE screen as dimmer levels are not displayed Look at the lights being driven by your console those patched to the external source will be controlled by it and the levels mastered by the Submaster fader Using DMX In Channels Once you have selected a DMX Channel Submaster simply connect your DMX source to the DMX IN port and push th
21. Time Display Date Display Set Time Set Date At Time Macros Window Console Setup Screen Output Connections Window D54 AMX DMX1 4 Network Window Networker On Off Networker Video Slot NET1 NET4 Communications Window Reporter On Off Handheld Remote Communications Setup ASCII Remote Input GO Key Output Macro Trigger Remote Test Audio Input Macro Remote Trigger Macro Trigger Bytes a External Submasters Window Setting Access Rights O O O User Access Rights Window Console Access Rights Window Combined User and Access Rights Window e Locking the Console Memory e Dimmer Log Screen e The System Diagnostic Menu o The Status Log o The Network Diagnostics Screen o The Internal Diagnostic Screen e Exit and System Shutdown Chapter 21 Console Reporter Page 246 e Setting Up the Rack Configuration e Dimmer Fault Reporting e Dimmer Command Menu e Dimmer Log Screen e Output Filter Display e Recording a Dimmer Backup Scene Chapter 22 Notes Page 251 e Writing and Editing Notes e Loading Files e Viewing and Editing Configuration Files Chapter 23 Key Wheel VGA Remapping Page 253 e Loading the Map Configuration File e Remapping Keys 500 Series Consoles o Identifying Key Positions o Key Numbering e Remapping Keys 300 Series Consoles o Key Numbering e Key Functions e Key Remapping Examples e Remapping Console Wheels Rotaries and Trackball e Console Identifica
22. s console may have all channel control disabled Console files are in the same format as USR files they are called CON files instead The name should match the ShowNet node name defined in the 220NODE CFG file The console called MAIN will need a file called MAIN CON A default file is installed with the operating software to act as a template its name is CONSOLE CON This file is used if no specific CON files are created You can create a CON file for each console and PC by copying CONSOLE NEW which is created with the software To set up a new console s access rights copy the CONSOLE NEW file to lt node name gt CON and edit the access rights as required Note that there is no password line as consoles don t log in with passwords User access rights are combined with console access rights at login time as follows the combination of the current user and console is always shown at the Access Rights setup display COPY CONSOLE NEW CONSOLE1 CON Note If either user or console access rights disable a feature then the feature is disabled A feature is only enabled if both user and console access rights enable it The other sections of the console file are ignored if user logins are enabled the settings are taken from the user file instead If user logins are disabled and the Server application is installed then the settings in this file are used Login Display The login display is enabled by first editing the 220NODE CFG file
23. 0012 2 0013 0017 2 0018 CC 1 cc 1 0022 2 0023 0027 2 0028 0032 2 0033 0037 2 0038 0042 2 0043 0049 0050 Q 2 No Title 0003 2 cc 1 0008 2 0013 2 0018 2 cc 1 0023 2 0028 2 0033 2 0038 2 0043 2 0051 0004 CC 1 0009 0014 0019 0024 0029 0034 0039 0044 0004 2 CC 1 0009 2 0014 2 0019 2 0024 2 0029 2 0034 2 0039 2 0044 2 0053 0005 0010 0015 0020 0025 0030 0035 0040 0045 0054 GM FL FL 0005 2 0010 2 0015 2 0020 2 0025 2 0030 2 0035 2 0040 2 0045 2 0055 GENIUS Row order 25 channels per row 250 channels per page Channels are shown in order from left to right down the display Each row consists of 3 lines the channel number below which is the level and then a blank line Attribute levels are not shown Where the channel numbers are not sequential two consecutive columns will be used to show a single channel number for example 4000 4100 4200 4300 10 39 38 27 1 99 gt gt No Title GM FL FL 0001 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 0025 FL FL 80 40 20 20 20 0026 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 0050 0051 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 0075 40 40 4040 40 40 40 0076 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 0100 0101 02 03 04 05 06 07 08
24. 1 ALL FADE RECORD Creates a new cue numbered 31 changes the Cue Type to All Fade AF and copies the field values of the cue alongside the cursor position CUE 3 2 BLOCK CUE RECORD Creates a new cue numbered 32 changes the Cue Type to Soft Block Cue MF and copies the field values of the cue alongside the cursor position 8 107 Cue Tracking On or This Cue Only GeniusPro or Lightpalette GeniusPro CUE 2 6 RECORD Creates a new cue numbered 26 and copies the field values of the cue alongside the cursor position CUE 2 7 ALL FADE RECORD Creates a new cue numbered 27 changes the Cue Type to All Fade AF and copies the field values of the cue alongside the cursor position CUE 2 8 CROSS FADE RECORD Creates a new cue numbered 28 changes the Cue Type to Cross Fade XF and copies the field values of the cue alongside the cursor position CUE 2 9 BLOCK CUE RECORD Creates a new cue numbered 29 changes the Cue Type to Soft Block Cue blank and copies the field values of the cue alongside the cursor position Note Cue parts cannot be All Fade Lightpalette CUE 2 6 RECORD Creates a new cue numbered 26 as a Tracking cue blank and copies the field values of the cue alongside the cursor position CUE 2 7 HARD BLOCK RECORD Creates a new cue numbered 27 changes the Cue Type to Hard Block BL and copies the field values of the cue alongside the cursor positi
25. 1 ATTS ONLY Command Line Mode Press GROUP 1 TEXT Focus 1 All Modes entering the group text label from the external keyboard Press 1 GROUP 1 All Modes All attributes of channel 1 are displayed with the group text name Focus Note Any cues submasters and effects that are recorded when the group name is displayed on the live screen are linked to that group Any changes made to the group levels are reflected in the cue submaster or effect Press CUE 1 RECORD Direct Entry Modes or RECORD CUE 1 Command Line Mode Press lt CUE PREVIEWS to display the Cue Sheet Note that the level of all attributes are shown as Focus Press lt GROUPS gt to display the Group Screen The levels are shown at their set values Change the level of Pan and Tilt 80 by entering the following commands 1 3 8 Direct 1 Digit Mode or 1 3 8 0 Direct 2 Digit Mode or 1 3 8 Command Line Mode and 1 4 8 Direct 1 Digit Mode or 1 4 8 0 Direct 2 Digit Mode or 1 4 8 Command Line Mode Press lt LIVE gt to show the Live Screen up to 80 then showing Focus The word Focus for pan and tilt are displayed in blue rather than cian to indicate that the levels have been changed Colour Palettes 30 355 Colour Palettes are another application of the Preset mechanism used by Preset Focus Instead
26. 1 2 colour rotary 1 top 1 3 pan track ball sideways movement 1 4 tilt track ball up amp down movement The rotaries are even more flexible in that they can be paged through all remaining attributes of the selected fixture using the keys above the trackball Not all fixtures use all attributes and only the attributes which the selected fixture supports are placed under rotary control Note A fixture may comprise two completely separate devices namely a luminaire and a scroller at two completely separate DMX addresses They can still be controlled as one fixture A library of fixtures is held on the console s hard disk and is read at power up It is used during patch operations which is where fixtures are assigned to control channels 30 342 Trackball Keys The three keys located above the trackball are used as follows to manipulate channel attributes in a current selection Left Select Last attribute page Middle Hold down while moving the trackball or rotaries to put trackball or rotaries in Coarse movement mode Release to put back into default Fine movement mode See also Mouse Control of Features Right Select Next attribute page Middle Left Toggle Lock X trackball movement When locked moving the trackball left right will have no effect When X movement has been locked the Pan attribute will be displayed in Grey A Pan Locked warning is also displayed on the Status Window Middle Right To
27. 4 Moves the fixtures patched to outputs 22 to 52 to start on output 54 Press BACK to return to the LCD Set Patch Menu Swapping Patch Information Press SET from the LCD Patch Menu to display the LCD Set Patch Menu Press COPY SWAP to display the Copy Patch Menu Swapping Attributes Enter the output number or range of outputs of the attribute s to be swapped followed by the SWAP PATCH softkey and first output number of the attribute to be swapped with then A confirmation is requested after each command Press again 1 SWAP PATCH 1 0 Swaps attributes on output 1 and 10 1 THRU 8 SWAP PATCH 1 7 Swaps attributes on outputs 1 to 8 with attributes on the eight outputs starting on output 17 Press BACK to return to the LCD Patch menu Swapping Fixtures The position of individual fixture or a range of fixture can be swapped by entering the outputs used by the fixture to be swapped and the first output used by the fixture that it has to be swapped with Note The fixture or range of fixtures using the most number of outputs must be entered first Enter the output number or range of outputs of the fixtures s to be swapped followed by the SWAP PATCH softkey and first output number of the fixture or range of fixtures to be swapped with then 30 351 A confirmation is requested after each command Press again 2 5 THRU 3 0 SWAP PATCH 9 Swaps
28. A traditional control console will allocate one control channel and hence one DMX address to each of these fixture parameters and each channel has to be individually set or wheeled to a level to achieve the required position and look Quite a laborious process and quite a job for the operator to keep track of all those channel numbers The Tracker approach is radically different instead of upwards of a dozen channels per fixture only one is required with all the fixture parameters as attributes of the main control channel For example a moving fixture patched to control channel 1 has its colour wheel controlled as attribute 2 pan as attribute 3 tilt as attribute 4 and so on These attributes are referred to as channel 1 2 channel 1 3 channel 1 4 etc The fixture s lamp is always attribute 1 or channel 1 1 In this way with one channel per fixture the complexities of a rig full of fixtures become much more manageable without limiting functionality Using Attributes Attributes can be accessed directly using the decimal channel notation e g 1 5 Sets intensity attribute to 50 1 2 8 Sets colour attribute to frame 8 Each of these places the named attribute on the wheel for fine control However the real ease of use comes with the rotary controls 1 Places channel 1 and its attributes on the rotary controls The default ordering of the rotary controls is 1 1 intensity wheel
29. Command Line A channel level entry in Command Line format Used in syntax or field descriptions as a place holder for a number The symbol is never actually entered 1 34 Important Note Throughout this manual references to trackball should be taken as a generic term covering the series 500 trackball or Intellimouse Trackball The Strand Logo key on 300 Series consoles is equivalent to the SHIFT key on 500 Series consoles References to the SHIFT key in this manual apply equally to the Strand Logo key The ATT key 500 Series consoles is equivalent to the ATTRIB key on 300 Series consoles This manual refers to ATT Configuring European Keyboards The console is configured at the factory for the US ASCII keyboard You need to configure keyboards for other locales Refer to Country Keyboard Support 1 35 Chapter 2 Product Specifications General 300 Series 24 48 Manual Memory Console 300 Series 48 96 Manual Memory Console 300 Series Memory 125 Console 300 Series Memory 250 Console 300 Series Memory 400 Console 300 Series Memory 600 Console 300 Series 120 Submaster Console 520 Console 530i Console 550i Console 300 Series Consoles Model 24 48 Manual Memory 2 36 Intensity Channels 50 Attribute Channels 50 Submasters 24 VGA Monitors as Standard 1 DMX Outputs 1024 1536 No of Subs Super G Masters 24 Sub Pages 4 Cues 600 Cue P Backs 2 Max Simult Fades 100 M
30. For information on how to delete all macros or a range of macros from the Archive display refer to Clear Operations MACRO DELETE A Modes This deletes the specified macro You will be prompted to press the DELETE key a second time to confirm the deletion DELETE is a soft key which appears when you press MACRO MACRO 2 4 DELETE DELETE A Modes Deletes macro 24 Running a Macro Manually Recorded macros can be started manually linked to a submaster or cue run at console power up or run at a preset time Macros cannot be run while you are in the macro display but they can be run from any other display MACRO This runs the specified macro MACRO 2 4 All Modes Runs Macro 24 If the macro does not exist you will get a warning beep Any errors encountered while a macro is running are ignored but the remainder of the macro will still run P1 through P14 Shortcuts for macros 951 964 Pressing these runs the macro the same as using MACRO r P1 Runs macro 951 P1 Note P8 through P14 and therefore the associated macros are available only on 510 and 520 series consoles SHIFT P1 through SHIFT P14 Shortcuts for macros 971 984 Pressing these runs the macro the same as using MACRO r SHIFT P1 Runs macro 971 macro SP1 Note SHIFT P8 through SHIFT P14 and therefore the associated macros are available only on 510 and 520 series conso
31. PB RECORD Direct 1 and 2 Digit RECORD CUE 1 PB Command Line 10 133 Records levels into cue 1 and deletes any assignment cue PB changes the playback that the specified cue is assigned to without changing recorded levels If the cue doesn t exist and the command is confirmed creates a new cue with no levels but with the specified playback assignment You do not get an overrecord warning with this command if the cue exists CUE 1 PB A Modes Deletes the cue 1 playback assignment without changing any levels CUE 1 PB 2 Ali Modes Changes the cue 1 playback assignment to playback 2 without changing any levels Playback Mode The Playback Modes field in the Show Details window on the Show Setup Screen configures the number of playbacks and the playback mode SINGLE There is only one position in the cue sheet Playback assignments in the cue sheet are ignored and all cues are run on the X1 Playback SPLIT SINGLE There is only one position in the cue sheet which is advanced by running cues on either Playback Playback assignments in the cue sheet are ignored Note Series 300 consoles do not support Split Single Mode DUAL LTP There are two independent positions one for each playback in the cue sheet Outputs of the two playbacks are combined on a latest takes precedence basis For example with cues numbered 1 2 3 etc running three cues on Playback 1 would run cues 1 2 and 3 Th
32. RECORD Direct 1 and 2 Digit RECORD CUE 1 DELAY 2 Command Line Records levels into cue 1 and assigns a 2 second delay for down fades Sets the delay time for the up fade to the default time or leaves it as is if over recording CUE 1 DELAY 4 RECORD Direct 1 and 2 Digit 8 96 RECORD CUE 1 DELAY 4 1 Command Line Records levels into cue 1 and assigns a 4 second delay for up fades Sets the delay time for the down fade to the default time or leaves it as is if over recording cue DELAY changes the delay time of the specified cue without changing recorded levels You do not get an overrecord warning with this command if the cue exists If the specified cue doesn t exist creates a new cue with no levels but with the specified delay times If you only enter one number for time it is used for both the up and down delay times To enter separate up and down delay times use to separate the two numbers The first number becomes the up delay time and the second number becomes the down delay time CUE 1 DELAY Al Modes Resets cue 1 delay time to the non split default delay time in the User Setup Screen Cue Delay Up Down field CUE 1 DEL AY 4 All Modes Changes cue 1 up and down delay times to 4 seconds without changing any levels CUE 1 DELAY 4 2 Ali Modes Changes cue 1 up delay time to 4 seconds and its down delay time to 2 seconds without chang
33. Remote Submaster Fader 1 12 ft Bn 10 79 30 xx AUDIO LEVEL rt Bn 10 7A 30 xx undefined F Bn107B3000 AUDIOBEATEvent h Bn 10 7C 30 xx 232 Trigger Event rt Bn 10 7D 30 xx X2 Up Fader Ft Bn 10 7E 30 xx X2 Down Fader ht Bn 10 7F 30 xx undefined Lo Bn 11 00 31 xx MIDI_BEAT Event ht Bn 11 0131xx MIDLTRIGEvent st Bn 11 02 31 xx MIDI_BUMPKEY Event rt Bn 11 03 31 xx MIDI_BUMPKEY UP Event kt Bn 110431xx MIDLCKEYEvent Mo Bn 11 05 31 xx MIDI_CKEY UP Event ht Bn 11 06 31 xx MIDI_MACRO Event rt Bn 11 07 31 xx MIDI_WHEELUP Event kt Bn 11 08 31 xx MIDI WHEELDOWN Event hto Bn 11 09 31 xx Reserved MSC Go Next Q rt Bn 110A31xx s Reserved MSCGoQ kht Bn 11 0B 31 xx Reserved MSC Stop ht Bn 11 0C 31 xx Reserved MSC Load Next Q ht Bn 11 0D 31 xx Reserved MSC Load Q rt 28 317 Bn 11 0E 31 xx Reserved MSC Raw kt Bn 11 OF 31 xx XF Flash ht Bnii103im Blacko m Bn 11 11 31 xx Flash Solo kt Bn111231xx OffLach M Bn111331xx XManTime et Bn 11 14 31 xx AB Man Time rt Bn111531xx KAKey gt Bn111631xx KAKeyUp si Bniti73ixx o ksky o w Bn111831xx KSKey Up Wo Bn 11 1B 31 xx Trackerball Y Up rt Bn 11 1C 31 xx Trackerball Y Down rt Bn 11 1D 31 xx Rotary 1 Up rt Banes x RotarytDown i i s s CS Bn 11 1F 31 xx Rotary 2 Up rt Bn112031xx Rotary2Down st Bn 11 21 31 xx Rotary 3 Up kt Bn 11 22 31 xx Rot
34. Shows the output profile for the selected dimmer if any Filter s Shows fault conditions filtered out by the Console Reporter filter function Rack Dimmer Shows the dimmer rack associated with the selected dimmer Node Shows the node number associated with the selected dimmer Only applicable if Networker software is installed Learned Load Shows the learned load for the specified dimmer if any Fault s Shows the number of faults on the specified dimmer if any The System Report Menu Pressing the REPORT key will display the System Report screen and display the System Report Menu on the right hand LCD display The System Report Menu softkeys provide access to the Setup Screens Dimmer Log System Diagnostics screens and to the Exit function softkeys 20 237 The System Report Screen 8 32 28 _ BOSS S TEN REP ORE oS A ER System S Ste Intensity USED TOTAL Total 350 Cue Parts 1 2000 inUse 350 G s 12 1000 Free 0 Effe 0 14850 Macros 22 2000 Attribute Profiles 2 99 Total 250 Events 0 3000 inUse 8 Free 242 Local Print Jobs Live 1 Edit t CPU Ty pe 80486 Network Configuration Node Name denise Node Address 192 168 11 214 Sub Net Mask 255 255 255 0 Configuration CONS 000 000 000 104 221 089 OS v2d2 BETA S W Jan 25 1999 10 07 21 APPL GENPRO 350 COMPRO TR Fo PESTS nes A i Zie nE E SETS po Bias es mio i This screen is displayed when the REPORT key is pressed The System Status window sho
35. The manufacturer and console records are as follows Manufactuer Strand Console GENIUSPLUS The manufacturer specific keywords are as follows SET Title xyz Set Show title xyz CLEAR Effects CLEAR Profiles Profile nn Profile Number Curve 0 0 5 12 Profile setting Input level OutputLevel PatchAttr pp 1 3 lt lt 11 100 Patch an attribute channel to a dimmer scale value on page pp PatchXtra pp Extra patch data for fixtures moving lights on page pp Attr 1 99 HFF Used to define attribute levels in cues groups effects etc Blocked Used before channel lists in cues to show that these channels are blocked in a cue Tracking Used for tracking consoles Profile up dn Set profile s for a cue Remote nn Run remote cue Macro nn Set macro run by a cue LoopCount nn Repeat count for links Bumplind Bumpout BumpQuickLoad DimmerNames DimmerProfiles Dimmer6K lnhibit LoadEffect LoadGroup NoBump OverRange SplitFader PrFocus Effect nn Define an effect Alternate Bounce Build Negative Random LevRandom Reverse Step Time Steptime nn Step time for steps High nn High value for steps Low nn Low value for steps In nn In time for steps Dwell nn Dwell time for steps Out nn Out time for steps InDwellOut Control 36 397 36 398 Comma separated value file extension csv Comma seperated value files are intended to be compatibl
36. This lets you copy submaster levels on the same page Clearing Submasters To clear a submaster set all intensity levels and attribute levels for the submaster off or highlight the submaster number the SUB field in the State screen and use CLEAR For information about clearing all submasters or a range of submasters from the Archive display refer to Clear Operations in the Archive Screen CLEAR This soft key appears on the right LCD Submaster menu Press CLEAR twice a message appears to let you cancel To clear the submaster press CLEAR again To cancel press CLR or UNDO Using CLEAR sets all intensity levels and attribute levels in the selected submaster to 0 clears any macro or external fader and sets the submaster mode to Normal CLEAR can be used with a single submaster or with a THRU range CLEAR All Modes Clears the current submaster SUB 1 CLEAR All Modes Clears submaster 1 SUB 1 THRU 3 CLEAR All Modes Clears submasters 1 2 and 3 7 89 Copying Levels from a Submaster You can record submasters cues groups and effect steps while you are in the Submaster display The highlight must be on the submaster number the SUB field Using record commands while you are in the Submaster display copies the Submaster display levels to the target submaster cue group or effect step For example if the current submaster is 1 then RECORD CUE 2 Comman
37. This window allows the Admin User to check the access rights of the logged on user to use the various control aspects of each console on the network By selecting the console on the Console Field of the Console Access Rights window the access permitted by the combination of User Access Rights and Console Access Rights is shown on the Combined User and Console Access Rights window Selecting the ACCESS RIGHT softkey displays a MEMORY LOCK softkey and a BACK softkey to return to the previous LCD display For further information on locking the console memory see below 20 240 The System Diagnostics Menu Pressing the SYSTEM DIAG softkey from the System Report LCD menu provides access to the Status Log the Network Diagnostic display and the Internal Diagnostic display A BACK softkey returns to the previous LCD menu These screens are intended for use by a technician and provide no user data e The Status Log e The Network Diagnostics Screen e The Internal Diagnostic Screen The Status Log The Status Log is intended for use by a technician and does not provide any user data The softkeys CLEAR and TIME DATE N on the Status Log LCD menu should only be used by a technician Press BACK to return to the previous LCD menu To print the Status Log display press ARCHIVE PRINT PRINT LOG 20 241 The Network Diagnostics Screens Two different Network Diagnostics screens selectable by a CHANGE VIEW softkey provide a
38. UNDO to cancel the operation Delete a Local Disk Directory You can delete a directory on the local disk by using the DELETE key The directory must be empty before you can delete it 1 2 3 17 210 Press ARCHIVE BROWSE to get to the LCD Browse menu Switch to the directory you want to delete and make sure all shows in it are deleted You may wish to copy the shows to floppy disk before deleting them Switch to the parent directory of the directory you want to delete as described under Changing the Current Drive and Directory Use the Trackball or mouse to highlight the directory you want to delete Press DELETE to request the delete You will be asked to confirm this action Press DELETE to delete the directory or CLR or UNDO to cancel the operation If a mesage is displayed saying that the directory is not empty there may be backup copies of the show that have not been deleted Refer to Restoring or Deleting a Backup Copy of the Show to delete all backup copies then reselect the directory and press DELETE DELETE ee Formatting a Floppy Disk Before using a floppy disk it must be formatted To save time you can use preformatted floppy disks compatible with MS PC DOS either 720Kb or 1 44Mb disks If you need to format your own floppy disks follow the procedure below which formats a 1 44Mb disk You cannot format a 720Kb disk with on this console though you can use pre formatted 720Kb disks N
39. and grandmaster status The date and time format can be set in the Console Time window of the second Setup display State screen The show name is preceded by an asterisk when changes have been made to the show since you last saved it The profile graph is scaled in percentage and shows profile processor input levels across the bottom and output levels up the side When you create a new profile it starts as a linear curve 0 in 0 out 50 in 50 out etc The Current Profile The current profile is shown with a highlight on the State screen To change the current profile use NEXT LAST or the Trackball or mouse to move the highlight to the appropriate profile The highlight must be on the profile number the Profile field to change the current profile You must be in the Profile display before you can use the Trackball or mouse to change the current profile 19 225 PL FL FE 95 98 99 92 88 83 sina a T1 63 55 a7 33 30 5 90 95 100 Creating Profiles To create a new profile you must enter a non used profile number This will create a profile with a linear profile which can then be edited using end editing graph editing or a combination of the two PROFILE Creates a profile if it does not exist or makes profile the current profile PROFILE 1 Makes profile 1 the current profile if you are already in the Profile display Creates profile 1 if it doesn t exist MORE PROF
40. and the time it takes decreasing levels to reach their new settings the down fade time In cues with parts each part can have its own fade and delay times but the wait time applies to the whole cue and is taken from part 1 cue TIME RECORD Direct 1 and 2 Digit RECORD cue TIME Command Line Records the levels on the current display into the specified cue and assigns a fade time lf the cue already exists an overrecord message gives you the chance to cancel the recording Press RECORD again to record over the cue or CLR or UNDO to cancel the operation cue TIME OFF MAN RECORD Direct 1 and 2 Digit RECORD cue TIME OFF MAN Command Line 8 95 Records the levels on the current display into the specified cue and makes the cue into a manual fade If the cue already exists an overrecord message gives you the chance to cancel the recording Press RECORD again to record over the cue or CLR or UNDO tocancel the operation For examples of setting fade time refer to Recording Levels and Properties See also Assigning Fade Times to Attributes Delay Times Each cue has up and down delay times and a wait time which are used when the cue is run These can be set to values from one hundredth of a second to 59 minutes and 59 seconds as shown for Fade Times Delay times are used to delay the start of a fade from when you press GO You can split delay times into the time until the chann
41. c3instal exe installation utility c3instal z install file Help Files hcinstal exe GeniusPro Lightpalette help utility hcinstal z GeniusPro Lightpalett instal file Remote console Networker amp Utilities files 3 46 cninstal exe Networker amp Utilities installation utility cninstal z Networker amp Utilities install file SN Node software is included and used to upgrade SN10X nodes for use with GeniusPro and Lightpalette software refer to Networker for SN10X Software Installation When loading new operating software the disks must be installed in the following order 1 Networker for SN10X if SN10X nodes are being used 2 Operating Software 3 Networker amp Utilities 4 Console Help See also Installing Lightpalette or GeniusPro Software on PC Showport Software Installation Shownet Software Installation Loading Server Software 3 47 Chapter 4 Common Features The following topics are covered in this section Live Screen Locking the Console Faders and Keys Locking the Console Memory Error Messages Edit Field Protection Mouse Functions Live Screen This section describes the Live Screen and various windows and other indications which may be displayed when the lt LIVE gt key is pressed It should be noted that the exact layout of the Live Screen is dependent on the optional software and hardware installed on your system and the system setup This section covers the following topics O O
42. explicitly selected If you want to avoid level tracking when you subsequently modify cues you can set the Cue Tracking field to THIS CUE ONLY In this mode level changes are recorded into one cue and do not track through to subsequent cues For GeniusPro when the Cue Tracking field is set to OFF GeniusPro default cues are recorded as Cross Fades unless explicitly recorded as another type The Q ONLY TRACK key changes the state of the Cue Tracking field from ON to THIS CUE ONLY or from THIS CUE ONLY to ON for a single cue CUE 1 Q ONLY TRACK RECORD Direct 1 and 2 Digit RECORD CUE 1 Q ONLY TRACK Command Line Records cue 1 with altered tracking state as described above Recording a Text Label You can record a text label caption with each cue to help identify the cue CUE TEXT text RECORD Direct 1 and 2 Digit RECORD CUE TEXT text Command Line Records levels on the current display into the specified cue and assigns a text string caption to it CUE TEXT text changes the text string caption assigned to a cue without changing recorded levels Refer to Basic Recording for examples 8 109 Chapter 9 Running Cues see also Recording Cues X Playback This section contains the following topics e The Current Cue e Running Timed Cues Running Manual Cues Loading a Cue Loading a Cue with Overrides Changing Cue Direction Jumping Directly to a Cue Using the Ra
43. login_display 1 The login display provides user login validation mode changing easier than editing 220NODE CFG and quick re loading of the user s last saved show When all entries have been made pressing the LOGIN soft key accepts them If any entries cannot be accepted eg incorrect password an error message is displayed and the screen stays displays Otherwise the console Live display appears User name chosen from a list of all the USR files found in the program directory Password must match the entry in the user s USR file If this entry is blank nothing has to be typed Mode available modes are MAIN OFFLINE BACKUP and REMOTE MAIN The console starts with outputs active and can accept logins from other consoles or PCs OFFLINE The console start with all outputs disabled but the file server can still be accessed In all other respects the console behaves as an Offline Editor except that networking is enabled but no network video or mux is transmitted BACKUP The console will associate itself with the main console chosen elsewhere on the screen This console s status is shown in yellow and must display as on line for the backup console to connect to it REMOTE The console will log in as aremote console to the main console chosen elsewhere on the screen This console s status must display as on line and there must be room for another user to log in otherwise this console s login will be refused The user will
44. loop count in the last cue of the loop cue LOOP changes the loop count assigned to the specified cue without changing recorded levels If the cue does not exist this command creates a new cue with no levels but with the specified loop count You do not get an overrecord warning with this command To delete an existing loop count omit the loop count CUE 9 LOOP 6 A Modes Changes the cue 9 loop count to 6 CUE 9 LOOP A Modes Deletes the loop count assigned to cue 9 without changing recorded levels With dual playbacks each playback keeps track of loops separately There are a number of error conditions with Loops If any of these occur the playback will not run any more cues until explicitly reloaded e A cueis linked to a non existent cue e A loop is nested more than 4 levels This can happen if loops call themselves since this will nest infinitely e A subroutine return is linked to another cue e A cue is looped to a cue assigned to the other playback in one of the dual playback modes Within the above restrictions links and loops can be intermixed and used in any way Note Remember that you can also record cues as effect steps You may be able to implement some of your loops as effects thus effectively increasing the number of looping levels in a cue sequence Fade Cue Types When you are initially setting up cues you simply change the levels as necessary for each lighting stat
45. number above Type Shows the effect type which can be CHASE or BUILD You can change this property while the effect is running by pressing FX TYPE and then selecting the appropriate soft key Dir Shows the effect direction which can be FWD Forward REV Reverse BNC Bounce or RND Random You can change this property while the effect is running by pressing FX DIR and then selecting the appropriate soft key 11 151 Fade Time The up and down fade time for starting and stopping the effect You can change these properties while the effect is running by pressing FX TIME pressing FADE RATE and then increasing or decreasing the times using the Rate Wheel 500 Series only StepT The step time for the current step Stop Shows how the effect is to be stopped This can be AT 0 on Fx stop blank on Fx load LAST on last step XXXs after XXX seconds or XXXX after XXXX cycles You cannot change this property while the effect is running Next Shows the effect to be started when this effect is stopped if any This property only takes effect if you set the Stop After property to TIMER or CYCLES in the Effect display You cannot change this property while the effect is running Sub Shows the submaster to which the effect is attached if any You cannot change this property while the effect is running Text Shows the text label caption associated with the effect if any You cannot change this property while the effect is runni
46. of recording Pan and Tilt positions use any of the first 750 groups to record colours either gel number or CMY position for mixing units or a combination of both Give the groups meaningful text names such as BLUE GREEN L802 F324 When plotting assign colours using the 1 GROUP TEXT blue syntax The Preset display format can be used to see the colour names group text on live and preview screens You need an external keyboard connected to do this Attribute Filters The decimal notation used to identify the many attributes associated with fixtures with multiple attributes is shown in the ATC page This page also provides the facility to set up a series of six filter softkeys F1 to F6 The softkey functions displayed on the LCD display when the ATT key is pressed is dependent on the F1 to F6 titles shown in square brackets in the ATC Page You can edit the ATC page to change the softkey titles or the attributes associated with the softkey functions To edit the ATC Page softkey functions and attribute channels press lt MORE gt NOTES DISP LOAD FILES ATC PAGE You can edit the ATC functions and attribute channels using the notes editor By default the attribute filter softkeys are set to Position F1 Colour F2 Beam F3 Focus F4 Shutter F5 and User F6 Selecting one or more of the softkeys selects the levels recorded in the referenced group asociated with all of the function attributes relevant to the
47. the selection is immediatel set to the On value default 100 with all other lights switched off 1 REMDIM A Modes Makes channel 1 the current selection and sets all other channels to 0 REM DIM REM DIM All Modes If a current selection exists its channels are unchanged and all others are set to 0 If there is no current selection all channels are set to 0 after a second press of the key This is a very useful way to achieve a blackout 5 63 Fading in Intensity Channels in Time You can set a channel selection to reach the set levels over a period of time using the TIME key as shown 1 THRU 3 TIME 5 5 Set channels 1 to 3 inclusive from current level to 50 over a period of 5 seconds Direct Action Modes Time must be specified as 2 digit for Direct 2 Digit Mode 1 THU 3 5 TIME 5 Set channels 1 to 3 inclusive from current level to 50 over a period of 5 seconds Command Line Mode Fading In Attribute Channel Levels in Time You can fade in attribute channel levels in the same way as for intensity channels 1 8 TIME 5 5 Moves the channel 1 luminair pan to position 5 over a period of 5 seconds Direct Digit Modes 1 3 5 TIME 5 Moves the channel 1 luminair pan to position 5 over a period of 5 seconds Command Line Mode 5 64 Chapter 6 Basic Recording Cues groups effects and submasters are the four item types in which you can st
48. 1 through 5 scaling to the default out changes the output to use the specified scaling without changing any other aspect of the patch 1 THRU 5 1 5 0 A Modes Sets output 1 through 5 scaling to 150 Patching Double Width Outputs Some analog multiplexed dimmer systems have double width dimmer modules which take two consecutive output signals for example Strand s CD80 dimmers which take single width 2 4K or 6K dimmers or double width 12K dimmers These can be handled by unpatching the unused output or patching both outputs to the same channel For example if outputs 3 and 4 control a double width dimmer then we might patch as follows the output addresses are also shown assuming the default AMX mapping in the Setup display Output 1 2 3 4 5 Channel 1 2 3 4 5 DMX output 1 2 3 5 6 Outputs 5 onwards need to be changed from their default 1 to 1 patch The alternative is to define output 3 as a double width output in which case it will automatically take two output addresses The same patch would then appear as a default 1 to 1 patch as follows Output 1 2 3 A 5 Channel 1 2 3 4 5 6 DMX output 1 2 3 13 189 You must be very careful using this facility since outputs 4 are really outputs 5 since they are actually mapped to output address 5 In addition the last output is now ignored since its number is now one larger out 6k12k changes a normal output to a double width output
49. 2 2 COPY PATCH 4 4 Copies the fixture starting on output 22 to start on output 44 2 2 THRU 5 2 COPY PATCH 5 4 Copies the fixtures patched to outputs 22 to 52 to start on output 54 Press BACK to return to the LCD Set Patch Menu Copying Patch Screens You can copy the entire contents of Patch 1 to Live Patch 2 COPY PATCH confirmation required COPY PATCH Press BACK to return to the LCD Set Patch Menu Moving Patch Information Press SET from the LCD Patch Menu to display the LCD Set Patch Menu Press COPY SWAP to display the Copy Patch Menu Moving Attributes Enter the output number or range of outputs of the attribute to be copied followed by the 30 350 MOVE PATCH softkey and the output number where the attribute s has to be moved to then F A confirmation is requested after each command Press again 1 MOVE PATCH 1 0 PATCH 2 Moves attribute on output 1 to output 10 on Patch 2 1 THRU 10 MOVE PATCH 1 1 Moves attributes on outputs 1 to 10 to outputs 11 to 20 Press BACK to return to the LCD Set Patch Menu Moving Fixtures Enter the first output number of the attribute to be copied followed by the MOVE PATCH softkey and the first output number where the fixture has to be copied then 2 2 MOVE PATCH 4 4 Moves the fixture starting on output 22 to start on output 44 2 2 THRU 5 2 MOVE PATCH 5
50. 2 TIME STEP 1 D O OFF MAN Sets FX 1 step fade times for step 2 to dwell OFF Attribute Fade Time The attribute fade time controls the time it takes to change fixture attributes if there is a change on the same fixture between two steps of an effect Attribute fade time can be default black text or any value between 0 01 and 5 minutes and is initially set to the value of the FX Up Down field of the Default Times of the User Setup Screen Times below one minute can be specified hundredths of a minute This field can be set using the rollball or mouse to select the field and the level wheel or or keys to select the option Alternatively the field can be set using the command line as shown in the following examples FX 1 2 ATT TIME Sets FX 1 overall attribute fade in time for step 2 to Os FX 1 2 ATT TIME 3 Sets FX 1 overall attribute fade in time for step 2 to 3s Low and High Scaling Effect steps are either high or low The actual levels represented by high and low states are controlled by the Level and Low High Scaling fields and by the channel levels set in the effect The Low and High Scaling properties for steps scale the channel levels set in each step These numbers can be default black text or a percentage 0 100 and modify all channel levels in the specified step High Scaling sets the percentage of channel level to use for the on part of th
51. 25 Ground Sub 13 24 macro Pins 1 to 12 Submaster 13 to 24 macros Pins 13 to 25 Ground i Submasters 25 to 36 macros Sub 25 36 macros Pinga to te Pins 13 to 25 Ground Sub 37 48 macros Pins 1 to 12 Submaster 37 to 48 macros 27 303 Pins 13 to 25 Ground 300 Series Consoles DMX female 5 pin XLR Pin Description O Pin 1 Ground Pin 2 Data Pin 3 Data Pin 4 No connection Pin 5 No connection AUX female 6 pin XLR Pin Description Pin 1 Ground Pin 2 10VDC 100mA Pin 3 Data Pin 4 Data Pin 5 RS 232 transmit data Pin 6 RS 232 receive data Sbus RJ45 Pin Description Pini Data channel A Ping 0 Data channel A Ping Data channel B Pines Data channel B Pin 8 Ground 27 304 Parallel Printer 25 Pin D Type Socket Pin Description Pin 1 Strobe Pin 2 Data 0 Pin 3 Data 1 Pin 4 Data 2 Pin 5 Data 3 Pin 6 Data 4 Panz i bas o Pin 8 Data 6 Pin 9 Data 7 Pin 10 Ack Pin 11 Busy Pin 12 Paper end Pin 13 Selected Pin 14 Auto feed Pin 15 Error Pin 16 Init Pin 17 Select in Pin 18 25 Ground COM1 Pin Description Pin 1 Carrier Detect Pin 2 Receive Data Pin 3 Transmit Data Pin 4 Data Terminal Ready Pin 5 Signal Ground Pin 6 Data Set Ready Pin 7 Request to Send Pin 8 Clear to Send Pin 9 Ring indicator PS2 Mouse 27 305 Pin 1 Data Pin 2 No connection Pin 3 Ground Pin 4 5V DC Pin 5 Clock Pin 6 No connection PS2 Keyboard Pin 1 Data Pin 2 No
52. 48 49 0050 70 70 70 70 70 0051 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 0075 0076 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 0100 0101 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 0125 Sub Text Page 1 Bump Up Down Att FX Ext Mac Function Wheel sO ON OU amp wih gt Qr o The title bar shows the date and time display name show name and grandmaster status The date and time format can be set in the Console Time Window of the Show Setup Screen The show name is preceded by an asterisk when changes have been made to the show since you last saved it The Wheel window at the right shows the position within the submasters with the current submaster number next to it Before viewing or editing submasters make sure that you are in the correct page When you first open the Submaster display you get the current Live display Submaster page The page number is shown at the top of the Submasters window and can be changed while you are in the Submaster display without changing the current page in the Live display Once you go back to the Live display the current page in the Submaster display is set to match To change the current submaster page use SUB SUB F or SUB PAGE The highlight must be on the submaster number the SUB field To go directly to a submaster press SUB where is the submaster number Note On consoles wi
53. 5 to be replaced by channel 8 All Modes 6 THRU 8 A MOD FROM 5 Sets channel 5 to be replaced by channels 6 to 8 All Modes 14 193 Note When a fixture is paired in automod all associated attribute channels are automatically paired You can also Automod individual intensity or attribute channels using the decimal notation e g 3 1 A MOD FROM 6 1 PI You can Automod a channel to itself This would provide the opportunity to apply a scaling factor to the channel 6 A MOD FROM 6 3 Sets the intensity of channel 6 up 30 Note For Direct 2 Digit mode 30 must be entered as 30 When you have set up the Automod pairing press A MOD ON A warning will appear white on a magenta box USING AUTOMOD while Automod is active To reset the channels to normal operation press A MOD OFF to cancel Automod and clear the warning box Customising the Auto Mod Screen The Automod Screen can order the display in Destination order default or Source order Press the SOURCE ORDER softkey to display the paired channels in source order Press the DEST ORDER softkey to return the display to destination order Note where more than one destination channel is paired to a source channel and the display is in destination order duplicate destination channels are shown in black Similarly if more than one source channel is paired to a destination channel and the display is in source order the duplicate s
54. 7130 Fax 1 905 677 6859 Table of Contents Detailed Contents Chapter 1 Introduction Page 1 e Introducing GeniusPro and Lightpalette e Console RAM Memory e Password Registration e Console Differences o Model Numbers and Processor Speed o Features Available with New Electronics o 520 Series Differences o 300 Series Differences e Conventions Used in This Document e Configuring European Keyboards e Technical Assistance e Safety Warning e DOS License Agreement Chapter 2 Product Specification Page 25 e General e Number of Attribute Chanels Available Chapter 3 Loading Software Page 36 e Pre Installed Software e Upgrading Your Console Software e Adding Additional Channels or Applications to Version 2 2 or Later Software e Adding Additional Channels or Applications to Version 2 1 or Earlier Software e Checking the Software Version Number e Files Included on Installation Disk Chapter 4 Common Features Page 44 e Live Screen o Screen Format o Live LCD Menu o Title Bar Locking the Console Faders and Keys Locking the Console Memory Error Messages Edit Field Protection Mouse Functions Chapter 5 Working with Channel Levels Editing the Command Line Setting up the Channel Levels Window Channel Status Identification Channel Type Identification Selecting Channels Channel Selection List Current Channel Selection Extending the Current Channel Selection Selecting the Next or Last Channel Clearing the Current S
55. Auto Move When Dark removes the need to record Mark cues and have consoles automatically reposition lights while dark ready for next cue Not available on 430 consoles Preset Focus Positions allow you to record cues submaster and effects as links to focus positions groups Subsequent changes to the focus positions are automatically linked into the referencing cue submaster and effect Only available on Pentium based consoles Colour Palettes allow a library of colour assignments to be created and applied to scrollers or moving lights by name This section covers the following topics Attributes Tracker Displays Channel Control Syntax Patching Attributes Recording and Playback Referenced Groups Preset Focus Colour Palettes Attribute Filters Updating Attribute Filters from the Live Screen Fixture Library List Attributes This section introduces the concept of attributes and how they are used with Tracker The following topics are covered in this section o What Are Attributes o Using Attributes 30 341 o Trackerball Keys o Rotary Controls o Mouse Control Features Refer to Product Specification for information on maximum attribute channels What Are Attributes Today s moving fixtures have a much greater control requirement than varying the lamp intensity They typically now have movement control pan and tilt focus iris colour wheel cyan magenta yellow colour mixing gobos and often more
56. CHANNELS IN USE OFF All defined channels whether or not they are patched are shown on screen COMPACT Shows channels that are on or moved to zero at the last Channel Control or X playback action Channels that moved to zero at the last action disappear at the next action DISPLAY GROUP Only channels defined in the special Display group group 994 1 are shown on screen This lets you pick just the channels you want displayed AUTO Only channels that are actually being used in a show are shown on screen This lets you show a lot more channels on screen but the channels shown change as you add or subtract channels from submasters cues groups and effects When this feature is on the Display group is automatically updated to include channels as they are used in the current show CHANNELS IN SHOW Automatically displays the channels used in all cues suomasters and effects not groups or macros in the current show When selected the displayed channels will be updated whenever any of the current cues submasters or effects are changed or deleted or when a show file is loaded Live Screen Layout Configures what is shown in the default Live display State screen The default value for GeniusPro is PB SUBS The default for Lightpalette is PB PB The Live screen includes the X Playbacks windows only Lightpalette default SUBS The Live screen includes the Submasters window only FX The Live screen includes the Effects window only P
57. Console v2b2 and later node type defined in 220NODE CFG being overridden by the node type derived from the CS type Only valid if CS present Country Keyboard Support From software version 2 1 onwards the console has increased support of country specific keyboards This requires both the installation of the correct keyb DOS program and the setting of the environment variable 220KEYBOARD Running on DOS Add one of the following sets of 3 lines to your USEREXEC BAT file in the operating software directory France c dos mode CON CODEPAGE PREPARE 437 C DOS EGA CPI c dos keyb fr 437 c dos keyboard sys set 220KEYBOARD fr 37 404 Belgium c dos mode CON CODEPAGE PREPARE 850 C DOS EGA CPI c dos keyb be 850 c dos keyboard sys set 220KEYBOARD be Germany c dos mode CON CODEPAGE PREPARE 437 C DOS EGA CPI c dos keyb gr 437 c dos keyboard sys set 2200KEYBOARD gr Sweden c dos mode CON CODEPAGE PREPARE 437 C DOS EGA CPI c dos keyb sv 437 c dos keyboard sys set 220KEYBOARD sv United Kingdom c dosimode CON CODEPAGE PREPARE 437 C DOS EGA CPI c dos keyb uk 437 c dos keyboard sys set 220KEYBOARD uk United States c dos mode CON CODEPAGE PREPARE 437 C DOS EGA CPI c dos keyb us 437 c dos keyboard sys set 220KEYBOARD us Russia c dos mode CON CODEPAGE PREPARE 437 C DOS EGA CPI c dos keyb uk 437 c dos keyboard sys set 220KEYBOARD ru Note To togg
58. Console Setup Screen Note Reporter may be used in conjunction with Networker by setting Networker On in the Console Setup Display refer to Networker Software When one or more faults occur on a patched dimmer a one or two line error message will be displayed on all screens as shown in the following example Unpatched dimmers are ignored Fault on Output 1234 Load Error 200W expected 500W Only the last fault is displayed In order to view any other faults the operator must press the REPORT key and DIMMER LOG softkey to access the Dimmer Log screen In addition in order to draw the operator s attention to the fault condition the word Dimmer is displayed in red on the top line of the Status screen The error message is removed from the current display on the next key press however the Dimmer warning remains on the Status screen until the operator enters the Dimmer Log screen Note When the Channel Screen is displayed and one or more dimmer faults exist the channel number to which the faulty dimmer is patched will be highlighted in red Dimmer Command Menu Pressing the DIMMER key will display the Dimmer softkey menu as follows Note The DIMMER menu can be selected from any display except Setup Archive Notes Report and Help RE PATCH Re patches all dimmers patched to each channel or range specified on the command line Refer to_Direct Output Control UN PATCH Un patches all dimmers patched to ea
59. DISP PROFILE 1 Switches to the Profile display and makes profile 1 the current profile Creates profile 1 if it does not already exist Using End Editing End editing is primarily designed for setting the ends of the profile curve but you can also specify the value of any point on the curve 19 226 oo wo onoqcdd ono bel 4 7 1 1 5 0 90 95 100 Each end point and any point you add is an anchor point for a section of the curve and is shown in white rather than green When you add a point the curve is redrawn so that there is a straight line between the new point and the nearest anchor point s point level sets an anchor point specified by point to the level specified by level Anchor points are shown in white All other points in the profile are calculated to create straight lines between adjacent anchor points 0 5 Sets the level for the start of the fade zero input to 50 of the profile processor input level This may not be 50 of maximum intensity for a fixture since there are multiple factors that can modify the channel or output level before the profile is applied At this time the only anchor points in the profile are the two ends All other points are calculated between these two points 5 0 5 Sets the level for the centre of the fade 50 input to 50 of the profile processor input level The profile now has three anchor points All other points in
60. Default running a cue or effect or changing a submaster level will steal channels from the Channel Control Note In Lightpalette mode if a handheld or remote console selects a channel and then Autohold is switched off the channel cannot be stolen back by the main console Switch Autohold back on select and deselect the channel using the handheld or remote console then switch Autohold off SHIFT CLR can then steal the channels On Level Sets the default on level for use by the Channel Control ON command Levels set in the On group 993 1 or the On Handheld group 993 2 are used if they exist This number is used for any channel that is not set in these groups For further information refer to Groups A number from 0 to 100 default 100 setting the on level Up Down Sets the percent level change that the UP and DOWN softkeys represent A number from 0 to 100 default 5 giving the percent level change when the UP or DOWN keys are used Wheel Mastering Controls the way that the Level Wheel masters channels Its value can be SHAFT GeniusPro Default or PROPORTIONAL Lightpalette Default SHAFT When you move the Level Wheel the selected levels move up or down by the same amount For example with two channels at 10 and 40 wheeling by 10 will increase these to 20 and 50 respectively PROPORTION Each channel with a level moves up or down by an amount proportional to its level For example
61. FL If a channel has no level in this group it will not show on any of the Levels screens including the Group display If channel formatting is set to AUTO channels are added to the display groups as they are used This is an easy way to automatically create a display group based on channels actually used in the show Partition Console Partition 2 amp Partition 3 Determines what channels will be controlled by each console if the Channel Partitioning field in the Show Details window of the Show Setup Screen is set to ON All channels are initially set to their maximum setting in the Console Channels group and off in the other groups Channels can only be set to their minimum or maximum levels Setting a channel to a non zero value in one group sets it to its maximum level and removes it from its previous group Regardless of which console is generating level data all information is recorded in the main console Grand Master 1 Channels with levels in this group are controlled by Grand Master 1 All channels are initially set to FL and can only be set to off and FL For channels that overlap with Grand Master 2 the lower of the two output levels is used Grand Master 2 Channels with levels in this group are controlled by Grand Master 2 All channels are initially set to FL and can only be set to off and FL For channels that overlap with Grand Master 1 the lower of the two output levels is used X Playback 1 12 167 Channels with l
62. Has Taken Over Reconnect main and do Main Take Sync You need to power any remote console or PC down and up again to ensure it tracks again to main and backup Shutdown From Main Only allowed when not in sync use the backup command Break Sync first Use Shutdown on main console only to return to DOS A warning is given if remote users are logged in Tracking Backup Status Tracking backup status is displayed on the levels screen under the wheel bar States are the same on main and backup except for M Seen on Main only B Seen on Backup only 29 333 Backup has taken control because main has disappeared Backup Active In Sync M Backup controlling lights Backup Gone Offline Main cannot ee backup any more Backup Active No Sync Backup Gone Offline Backup died giving sync to main o main s show may be incomplete Main OK Backup OK No Sync Both on line not yet sync d Sync Break Connect Break sync command in progress Main i 7 k Sync Connect To Backup aoe Toba Main Active In Sync Main controlling lights 3 fi Main Not Found B re a has started and can t find Main Gone Offline B Backup can t see main any more Main is startin and has not yet Main Active No Backup M Main ore up y Backup i ecting to main Sync Connect To Main aaa ng l Sync Backup Loading Main giving sync Sync Backup Saving Main taking sync Sync Main Loading Main taking sync Sync Main Saving
63. IEC950 IEC65 UL1950 CS950 and are intended for use as part of a lighting control system They must not be used for other purposes where there is a risk of injury to people SN100 SN102 and SN103 are mains line powered They must not be used in any environment where they could come into contact with water or become damp They contain no user serviceable parts inside Refer to Strand or an authorized service agent for repair The ventilation holes on either end of the nodes must not be obstructed 33 372 SN100 and SN102 Controls amp Displays The LEFT and RIGHT keypad buttons provide navigation through all the Network Video Slots The UP button swaps the video sent to VGA Outputs 1 and 2 The recessed push button marked TEST swaps between BNC and RJ45 Ethernet interfaces LED s adjacent to each connector indicate which is active The SN100 faders are available as remote analogue inputs 11 and 12 The NETWORK OK LED flickers when valid Ethernet information is being received It flickers slowly when just video is received and rapidly when network DMX or network DMX and video is present SN100 Installation The SN100 can be mounted in three configurations e Table top e On wall using bracket supplied and cover supplied e n rigging with hook clamp not supplied amp safety chain not supplied using bracket supplied The SN100 has four rubber feet and can be used on any flat surface 33 373 By fitting the
64. LOAD FX Command Line loads an effect onto a playback This command is ignored if the specified effect does not exist FX 1 FX LOAD Direct 1 and Direct 2 Digit FX LOAD FX 1 Command Line If effect 1 is already loaded selects that playback then re loads it Otherwise selects the first unloaded playback and loads it with effect 1 if recorded FX PB 2 FX LOAD Direct 1 and Direct 2 Digit FX LOAD FX PB 2 Command Line Loads playback 2 with the current effect FX 1 PB 2 FX LOAD Direct 1 and Direct 2 Digit FX LOAD FX 1 PB 2 Command Line Loads playback 2 with the effect 1 Running an Effect Once an effect is loaded on a playback it can be started then paused and started again When the effect is started the levels fade in over the time recorded into the effect Stopping an effect fades the levels out over the recorded time and then unloads the effect The effect continues to run until it is unloaded The Effects window shows the current effect whether or not it is running with a white on grey playback number Loaded but not started effects are shown with green text for the step number step time and stop setting Running effects are shown by yellow text for the step number step time and stop setting Paused effects are shown by flashing yellow text for the step number FX GO starts the current playback if there is an effect loaded on it FX PB
65. No of Show File Backups 1 Memory 250 Intensity Channels 250 Attribute Channels 250 VGA Monitors as Standard 1 DMX Outputs 1024 1536 No of Subs Super G Masters 24 Sub Pages 4 Cues 600 Cue P Backs 2 Max Simult Fades 100 Macros 3000 Groups 500 Preset Focus Groups 500 Effects 300 Effect Steps Effect 99 Max Effect Steps 1500 Effect Playbacks 12 Profiles 99 SMPTE Events 2000 Patches 1 Atts Channel 99 Fixture Library 99 Handheld Remotes 2 Remote Video 9 No of Show File Backups 1 Memory 400 2 38 Intensity Channels 400 Attribute Channels 400 VGA Monitors as Standard 2 DMX Outputs 1024 1536 No of Subs Super G Masters 24 Sub Pages 4 Cues 600 Cue P Backs 2 Max Simult Fades 100 Macros 3000 Groups 500 Preset Focus Groups 500 Effects 300 Effect Steps Effect 99 Max Effect Steps 1500 Effect Playbacks 12 Profiles 99 SMPTE Events 2000 Patches 1 Atts Channel 99 Fixture Library 99 Handheld Remotes 2 Remote Video 9 No of Show File Backups 1 Memory 600 Intensity Channels 600 Attribute Channels 400 VGA Monitors as Standard 2 DMX Outputs 1024 1536 No of Subs Super G Masters 24 Sub Pages 4 Cues 600 Cue P Backs 2 Max Simult Fades 100 Macros 3000 Groups 500 Preset Focus Groups 500 Effects 300 Effect Steps Effect 99 Max Effect Steps 1500 Effect Playba
66. Patch menu The Copy Patch Menu Pressing COPY SWAP from the Set Patch menu displays the Copy Patch menu with softkeys COPY PATCH MOVE PATCH and SWAP PATCH These softkeys enable output attributes or fixtures to be copied moved or swapped within or between the Live or Edit Patch e Copying Patch Information e Moving Patch Information e Swapping Patch Information Copying Patch Information Press SET from the LCD Patch Menu to display the LCD Set Patch Menu Press COPY SWAP to display the Copy Patch Menu Copying Attributes Enter the output number or range of outputs of the attribute s to be copied followed by the COPY PATCH softkey and the output number or first output number where the attribute s has to be copied then A confirmation is requested after each command Press again 13 183 1 COPY PATCH 1 0 Copies attribute 1 to output 10 1 THRU 10 COPY PATCH 1 1 Copies attributes on outputs 1 to 10 to outputs 11 to 20 Press BACK to return to the LCD Set Patch Menu Copying Fixtures Enter the first output number or range of outputs of the fixture s to be copied followed by the COPY PATCH softkey and the first output number where the fixture has to be copied to then A confirmation is requested after each command Press again 2 2 COPY PATCH 4 4 Copies the fixture starting on output 22 to start on output 44 2 2 THRU 5 2 CO
67. START and END numbers must be between 1 and 512 OUT specifies that DMX data coming in on the network at the specified global network channel offset will be sent out of the DM X Port specified The first and last dimmers sent out for the outgoing DMX frame are specified by the START and END numbers OFF Specifies that this port is not being used for DMX Field Name Description my_nodeadar IP of this device my_nodetype Type of device see comment for list my_nodename Name of Hees eee characters netmask Net mask for advanced use use default IP of main console for use by backup or console_addr remote consoles file_server_addr IP of file server Networker Node Configuration File The following is an example of a typical net node configuration file for an SN102 29 327 Copyright c Strand Lighting Ltd 1994 98 All rights reserved Networker node configuration file 220node cfg 70 1 Configures this node for the Strand ShowNet network You can edit this file but be aware that the system may rewrite it when new software is installed You can add comment lines starting with or change the order of the lines To find out how to upgrade SN node software over the network see the file SW2ALL BAT on the SN software disk Address name amp type of this node on the network my_nodeaddr xxx xxx xxx xxx Must be unique for each node my_nodetype 300 4
68. The single scene presets offer a larger channel capacity using the Auto Hold feature to set up a blind scene as in a normal 2 scene preset desk Channel faders always correspond numerically to the lowest numbered faders Single Scene Preset Single Scene Preset uses the Auto Hold feature of the X Playback faders as shown in the following example Preset 1 Preset 2 1 Ensure that the 1 and 2 Preset master faders are completely in the home position as shown and that all channel faders are at zero 2 For the purposes of the example ensure that the time faders are set to zero in order to see the instantaneous response when cross fading 3 Set faders 1 through 4 to 8 80 4 Move the Preset 1 and Preset 2 faders together to the top Scene 1 fades in on stage 5 Move Preset 2 down to zero to hold the scene in memory on stage 6 Move Preset 1 down to start to set the next scene 7 Set faders 1 through 2 to zero fader 3 to full fader 4 to 5 50 and faders 5 through 6 to 8 80 8 Move the 1 and 2 Preset faders back up to the top position This crossfades between scene 2 and the live scene on the preset faders Note The Preset Faders will only pick up and gain control of the channel faders after they have been moved to the zero fully down position When a scene is on stage you can modify the scene by moving the channel faders including adding removing channels When the scene is 7 91 held by moving Preset 2
69. Two Scene Preset 7 72 Submaster Pages There are either five or six submaster pages depending on the model each with its own separate set of recorded submasters The Live display and Submaster display keep track of the current submaster page separately and the submaster faders take their data from the Live display By changing to a different page when you go to the Submaster display you can edit submasters without changing the data loaded on the faders Note The 120 Submaster version of the 300 Series console has only one page of submaster page Changing the current Live display submaster page reloads the submaster faders with new levels and fade times and changes the Submaster display submaster page to match Note Changing the current Live display submaster page does not change the submaster output until it is reloaded by moving the fader to 0 or 10 for inhibitive submasters When you record to or from a submaster while in the Submaster display you are recording to or from the current page of the Submaster display When you record to or from a submaster while in any other display you are recording to or from the current page of the Live display The current page number is shown at the top of the Submasters window on the State screen SUB Changes the current page to the next page For example if at page 3 this will change to page 4 At the end page this changes to the first page SUB Changes the current page t
70. a fixture patched to outputs 25 through 30 with the same fixture patched to outputs 9 through 12 Note The required number of outputs must be available in the swap to position otherwise the swap cannot take place and an invalid range error message displayed If say an eight output fixture is being swapped with a six output fixture all eight outputs will be swapped including any attributes on the other two outputs Range Patching Multiple patching of channels and fixtures is achieved as follows 1 THRU 5 1 0 THRU 1 4 Patches channels 10 14 to outputs 1 5 1 THRU 5 1 4 THRU 1 0 Patches channels 14 10 to outputs 1 5 1 THRU 2 0 4 THRU 8 FIXTURE 1 Patches outputs 1 to 20 to channels 1 to 8 and patches fixture 1 to each patch 1 THRU 2 0 8 THRU 4 A FIXTURE 1 Patches outputs 1 to 20 to channels 8 to 1 and patches fixture 1 to each patch Deleting Attribute Channels The configured maximum number of attribute and intensity channels is displayed in the Patch Status window This window also shows the number of channels in use and the number free If the quota of attributes has been used up and more are required one of two things can be done From the Patch Display delete unused attribute channels using the CHAN DELETE syntax e g CHAN 1 2 THRU 1 9 9 DELETE CHAN DELETE CHAN BACK or From the Patch Display delete un
71. and unlocked Error Messages If the Buzzer Volume is set to ON in the User Setup Screen the console beeps and displays an error message below the Command Line if entries do not fit with the current syntax or values are out of range The console also beeps and posts a message on screen if an entry needs to be confirmed or cancelled To confirm the action you usually press the same key again or press To cancel the action press CLR or UNDO Note If the optional Console Reporter software is installed and a fault has occurred on a patched dimmer the fault condition is displayed on all screens below the command line For futher information on dimmer fault reports refer to Console Reporter Edit Field Protection 4 52 An edit field protection feature prevents accidentally changing existing settings when carrying out channel control operations This feature affects the Cue Sub Macro X Playback and Group screens When the user enters any of these screen by pressing the appropriate key all editable fields are displayed in yellow non editable and the trackball can only be used to scroll up and down the list of Cues Subs Macros etc Similarly when the Fx screen is displayed The trackball will only scroll the existing effects or effect steps using the EDIT STEPS EDIT FX softkeys All existing effect properties are displayed in yellow The user can still perform all channel control functions and create and record new
72. and Unloading an Effect You can stop and unload an effect from any playback using the FX STOP key as shown FX 1 PB 2 FX STOP Direct Entry 1 and 2 Digit FX STOP FX 1 PB 2 Command Line You can also stop and unload all effects from all playbacks using the syntax FX 0 FX GO Ali Modes 11 157 The following alternative commands apply to 500 series consoles FX 0 PB 2 FX LOAD Direct Entry 1 and 2 Digit FX LOAD 0 PB 2 Command Line Selects playback 2 and unloads the effect from it if any FX 0 FX LOAD Direct Entry 1 and 2 Digit FX LOAD 0 Command Line Unloads all effects from all playbacks FX LOAD 0 PB 2 Direct Entry 1 and 2 Digit Selects playback 2 and unloads the effect from it if any Using Effects in Cues and Subs You can control effects with cues by assigning the effect to one cue for starting and a different cue for stopping For information on assigning effects to cues turn to Assigning an Effect in Recording Cues Note Stopping an effect from a cue with zero fadeout time sometimes causes the effect to step on one more step after being stopped Use a 2 part cue with a 0 1s delay between parts The earlier part stopping the effect and the later part setting the required cue level You can control effects with submasters by assigning the effect to a submaster Moving the submaster away from zero starts the effect and moving it back to zero stops
73. and loads it with effect 1 if recorded FX PB 2 FX PAUSE Ali Modes If playback 2 is loaded selects the playback and then pauses or restarts it If the playback is not loaded loads the current effect onto the playback FX 1 PB 2 FX PAUSE Ali Modes If effect 1 is loaded on playback 2 selects then pauses or releases it If effect 1 is not loaded on playback 2 selects playback 2 and loads it with effect 1 if recorded 11 155 Stepping an Effect You can step through an effect manually by setting the Step Control field in the Effects display to MANUAL and then loading the effect To step the effect to the next step make sure the desired playback is the current playback and press FX STEP each time you want to move to the next step Changing Effect Times while Effect is Running The fade and step times are recorded in the effect but can be changed while the effect is running To change the fade time of an effect press FX TIME then press FADE RATE and use the Rate Wheel on consoles with two wheels or the Level Wheel on consoles with one wheel to increase or decrease the fade time Both the up and down fade time will be changed To change the step time of an effect press FX TIME then press STEP RATE and use the Rate Wheel to increase or decrease the step time This changes the step time for all steps proportionally Note Effect times on 300 Series consoles are changed from the Effect Screen using edit mode
74. as described under Installing Help under DOS 3 1 or later If the DOS installation fails try disabling SHARE or SMARTDRV lines in the PC s AUTOEXEC BAT file You can enable them again after installation WARNING You should disable Norton Commander because it can cause hard disk corruption when running operating software on a PC Installing the Networker amp Utilities Software from Windows 9X vi 8 9 10 25 276 Insert the Networker amp Utilities disk in the floppy drive Open the A drive window and double click on the installation icon as follows C5INSTAL lt Enter gt for non i 400 or 500 Series consoles or CIINSTAL lt Enter gt for 500i Series consoles or C3INSTAL lt Enter gt for 300 Series consoles You will be given a choice of platform e g 3 300 Series 4 400 Series 5 500 Series B Backup PC O Offline Editor F File Server Press B to install the backup PC software Specify either GeniusPro or Lightpalette installation by typing g or i This should match the console software type You will be prompted to enter a destination path for the Backup PC software By default the software will be installed in C geniusp or C lightp Enter a destination directory name of 8 characters or less or accept the default destination by pressing lt Enter gt You will be prompted to enter a destination path for the show files By default the show files will be stored in C shows Enter a destination path or accept
75. attribute outputs red Profile number assigned to attribute if applicable cyan Profile for attributes controlled by the Tracker software refer to Patching Attributes N magenta The non dim threshold non dims red background The output level of an output under direct control To learn how to control outputs directly from other displays refer to Direct Output Control The Status window at the top right gives information on the intensity and attribute channels as follows Intensity Channels Total The total number of intensity channels available This depends on the number of installed channels In Use The number of intensity channels currently created Patching to a previously unused intensity channel increases this value Free The number of unused intensity channels Deleting an intensity channel increases this value Attribute Channels Total The total number of attribute channels available This depends on the number of installed channels In Use The number of attribute channels currently created Patching to a previously unused intensity channel increases this value Free The number of unused attribute channels Deleting an attribute channel increases this value 13 180 Output Numbers 500 Series Consoles A 500 Series console can control 2048 outputs in four banks of 512 through the four DMX ports In addition using Networker Software the outputs can be sent via the network The network has 4096 virt
76. backup cues simply and easily The following topics are covered in this section Setting Up the Rack Configuration Dimmer Fault Reporting Dimmer Command Menu Dimmer Log Screen Output Filter Display Recording a Dimmer Backup Scene Setting Up the Rack Configuration The configuration of the dimmer racks is set up in a file called 220RACK CFG which can be edited The file 220RACK CFG determines the configuration of each dimmer rack and must be edited for each console To set up and edit the Reporter Rack Configuration file press the lt MORE gt key and select the NOTES DISP soft key to display the Notes Menu then select LOAD FILE then CONF FILES and RACK CONFIG The user can setup and edit the rack configuration file 220RACK CFG using the Notes editor to set up the rack RACK RACK_NUM ADDR PORT NODE where RACK_NUM 1 to 99 ADDR SMX rack processor address 1 to 250 PORT COM1 COM2 4AUX1 4AUX2 4AUX3 NODE IP address of SN10Xx XXX XXX XXX XXX A node address of 0 0 0 0 is interpreted as the local console At start up Reporter will automatically interrogate all configured racks to determine the mapping between rack and dimmer id to console output This configuration is used when reporting any subsequent dimmer faults 21 245 Dimmer Fault Reporting The optional software if enabled by the password may be toggled On or Off in the Reporter On Off field of the Communications window of the
77. both so a dimmer and a scroller can both be patched to the same channel The Live display shows both the intensity and the attribute levels for each channel The Tracker software allows multiple attributes per channel For information on how to patch multiple attributes and complete fixtures refer to Tracker Software An output can control any device capable of taking an AMX192 D54 500 Series only or DMX512 signal and translating it into a command including scrollers and other moving light fixtures The outputs from the patch system can be further manipulated within the console by DMX signal assignment refer to Qutput Connections Window of the Console Setup Screen and again at the input of many dimmer racks There are 2 Patches available 1 only on 300 Series consoles called patch 1 and patch 2 The patch that is currently being used by the output is called the live patch The patch currently being edited is called the edit patch You can set either patch to be the live patch and either patch to be the edit patch If you set the live and edit patch to the same number changes you make will show immediately on stage If you set the live and edit patches to be different changes you make in the patch will not show on stage The following topics are covered in this section Output Properties The Patch Display Selecting Outputs Changing Live and Edit Patches The Copy Patch Menu Changing the Output Numbering Style Customising the Patch
78. bottom of the State screen and Levels screen respectively When OFF GeniusPro Default they are not shown Default Times Window The Default Times window is in the User Setup display and lets you set the default times for recording or running cues and effects The fields within the Default Times Window are desribed as follows X Back Cut Cue Fade Up Down Cue Delay Up Down Cue Wait FX Step FX Step In Dwell Out FX Up Down Undo Time X Back Cut The default times when going back to a cue in the X Playback using STOP BACK and cutting to a cue in an X playback using CUT two separate values They can be any value between 0 and 59 minutes 59 seconds and are initially set t 0 0 Times below one minute can be specified in the range 0 1 to 59 seconds Cue Fade Up Down The default up and down fade times recorded in a newly created cue The up and down times are separate fields They can be any value between 0 and 59 minutes 59 seconds and are initially set to 5 5 seconds Times below one minute can be specified in the range 0 1 to 59 seconds Cue Delay Up Down The default up and down delay times recorded in a newly created cue The up and down times are separate fields They can be any value between 0 and 59 minutes 59 seconds and are initially set to 5 5 Times below one minute can be specified in the range 0 1 to 59 seconds Cue Wait The default wait time recorded in a newly created cue It can be OFF or any val
79. button is pressed the channel levels are bumped Releasing the bump button releases the bump KEYS OFF The bump buttons are disabled Text Labels You can record a text label caption with each submaster to help identify the submaster The submaster text label is entered using the external keypad SUB TEXT text RECORD records levels on the current display into the specified submaster and assigns a text label caption to it SUB TEXT text changes the text label caption assigned to a submaster without changing recorded levels For examples refer to Recording Levels and Properties in Basic Recording Updating and Adding to Submasters UPDATE SUB changes levels in the specified supmaster as necessary based on channels that have been modified live red or purple channels on the Live display This command excludes channels that are not already in the submaster and channels that have been removed from the modified list by using SHIFT CLR Note When using submasters the UPDATE key is set to default to update only channels already in the submaster Pressing the UPDATE key as part of a submaster command syntax e g UPDATE SUB is the same as entering UPDATE CHANS IN SUB So when updating a submaster to include 7 81 only changes in channels already inthe submaster there is no need to use the CHANS IN softkey The CHANS IN softkey is used as necessary when updating cues
80. channels each of which can include both attributes and intensities The current selection can be set or modified using the keyboard to set the channel levels using the level wheel to adjust the intensity level Alternatively the Live Menu softkeys can be used to set the intensities of the selected channels to full or increase or decrease the levels by a preset percentage or to flash or bump the channels Channel Selection Lists Selection lists consist of elements modifiers and operators Elements can be channels cues groups effect steps or submasters If you specify a cue group effect step or submaster you are specifying all of the channels recorded in that item and the level you specify in the command sets the level of all the channels e The modifiers are NEXT and LAST e The operators are THRU and THRU ON If you start a selection list with an element any existing selection from the Channel Control you are using channels with red or magenta background is cancelled and an entirely new selection list is started for the Channel Control If you start a selection list with the or modifiers the new elements are simply added or subtracted from any existing selection for the Channel Control see also Extending the Current Selection If there is no current selection starting a selection list with or will cause an error 5 58 The examples shown immediately below are command segments you can use to
81. channels 1 512 in the submaster and are combined with effects playbacks and other submasters on a highest takes precedence basis The local submaster controls the level of the DMX input Recorded submaster levels are ignored Submaster channels can be stolen by the Channel Control This facility is only available with the Communiqu Pro software For more information see Communiqu Pro Software Only one submaster can be a DMX Channel Submaster DMX DIMR DMX Dimmer Submaster The local submaster controls the level of the DMX input and thus the levels of any dimmers patched to DMX inputs Recorded submaster levels are ignored Only one submaster can be a DMX Dimmer Submaster This facility is only available with the Communiqu Pro software For more information see Communiqu Pro Software Only one submaster can be a DMX Dimmer Submaster SUB SUPER Submaster Supermaster The submaster fader controls the level of all submasters Channels are controlled by individual submasters which are in turn controlled by the Submaster Supermaster Only one submaster can be the Submaster Supermaster If no submasters are assigned as the Submaster Supermaster all submasters can be controlled between 0 and 10 FX SUPER Effect Supermaster 7 77 The submaster fader controls the overall level of all effects Channels are controlled by the effects which are in turn mastered by the Effect Supermaster Recorded submaster levels are ignored Only one submas
82. channels will be updated whenever any of the current cues submasters or effects are changed or deleted or when a show file is loaded Channel Status Identification The levels in the Live screen use colours to indicate channel status as follows e blank Show channels that are off CAhite on red Shows intensities controlled by the console channel control To remove the channels from channel control press CLR EAL nite on magenta Shows intensity channels controlled by the hanheld remote channel control To remove the channels from channel control press CLR Channel levels turn red to indicate they have been changed red on black Shows channels changed by a channel control but no longer actively controlled To clear this indicator press SHIFT CLR magenta on black Shows an intensity channel controlled by an X Playback that is fading up a on black Shows an intensity channel controlled by an X Playback that is fading down 32 on black Shows an attribute channel controlled by an X Playback that is fading up or down cyan on black Shows channels controlled by a stopped X Playback ellow on black Shows channels controlled by a submasters white on grey shows channels controlled by an effect playback O on grey Shows unselected channels on Hold Only the channel control can change its level black on red Shows selected channels on Hold ellow on red Shows channels mastered by
83. connection Pin 3 Ground Pin 4 5V DC Pin 5 Clock Pin 6 No connection VGA female 15 pin high density D type Pin Description Pint Analog Redo 0o7y Pin2 AnalogGreen0 07V ts Ping ti sts lt s s SSS Analog BU 0 7V Pins o Noconnection gt o Pin 5 Self Test Pin 6 Red ground Pings o Blue ground SS Ping No connection key Pin 10 Ground Pin 11 Ground Pint2 Noconnection gt Pin13 o H sync TTL 27 306 Pin 14 V sync TTL Pin 15 No connection 640x480 pixels 16 colours 60Hz refresh This port is compatible with both VGA and SVGA monitors Port 1 is the main console display output Port 2 is the additional channels display output in Dual VGA mode TFT Panellink Pin Description Pin 1 TX1 Pinza TXB Ping SAD Ping SAD Pns S S S Pin 6 TXC Ping GND Pins BM Pind BAM Pinto GND Pin 11 TX2 Pint2 TXB Pints GND Pinta GND Pints XO Pin 16 TXO Pint BV Pints 2 GND Pin19 lt sS Sb Dta Pin20 t lt lt i CS ata eH SMPTE Input Pin Description Pin 1 GND Pin 2 Audio Pin 3 Audio 27 307 MIDI male 5 pin DIN Pin Description Pint Notconnected lina y eoa o Pina Notconnected Pin 4 Data Pin 5 Data Submaster macros1 24 Pins 1 to 12 Submaster 1 to 12 macros Sub 1 12 macros Pins 13 to 25 Ground i 24 Sub 13 24 macro Pins 1 to 12 Submaster 13 to macros Pins 13 to 25 Ground 300 Series Module
84. consoles only FX Effect keys 520 consoles only RK Record keys 520 consoles only DSK Display keys PK P keys PBK Playback keys TBK Trackball keys K 510 Show Controller keys 1 31 BMP Sa B 520 1 24 530 1 30 Key numbering 23 254 Key numbering Channel Control Keys Effects and Record Keys 530 550 CEELEEE CEELI upone prenut a 20 2 22 23 2a gennad of EE Effect Keys 520 Record Keys 520 Display Select Keys 1 42 3 4 s 6 7 8 9 fio 13 12 BHEE UEA HAAg Notes ai ee Playback Control Keys Trackball Keys 510 Keys Bei Cele Note A amp B cannot be remapped Only keys listed in the Map Configuration File can be remapped Unlisted keys retain their original function Keys marked with an x next to the number identify key positions that are currently unused 4 To disable a key set its function to NULL 5 When keys are represented by two numbers some double width keys only specify the lowest number on the key 6 SHIFT key functions cannot be remapped SHIFT key functions retain their original function 7 A maximum of four functions can be assigned to a key e g CUE 1 2 Each function should be separated with commas and a comma placed after the last function e g CUE Bump Keys Bump keys are numbered from 1 to 54 and are identified as follows 2 BMK_n Where is the console type and n is the bump key number Note 520 consoles have only 24
85. create your channel lists You can then use combinations of these command segments to replace chans where it appears in full command descriptions Adds elements to the channel list 1 3 Adds channels 1 and 3 to the channel list SUB 1 SUB 2 Adds channels recorded in submasters 1 and 2 to the channel list SUB 1 2 Adds channels recorded in submasters 1 plus channel 2 to the channel list CUE 1 PART 2 SUB 1 Adds channels recorded in cue 1 part 2 plus channels recorded in submaster 1 to the channel list removes elements from the channels that are already on the channel list Since all command processing is from left to right you can specify a large range then subtract a range from the currently listed channels and then add back one or two channels in the range you subtracted 1 THRU 3 2 Adds channels 1 and 3 to the channel list SUB 1 THRU 3 2 Adds channels recorded in submasters 1 through 3 minus channel 2 to the channel list THRU specifies a range of elements to the channel list This has a higher priority than and 1 THRU 3 3 THRU 1 Adds channels 1 2 and 3 to the channel list 1 THRU LAST Puts all channels on the channel list SUB 1 THRU 3 Adds channels recorded in submasters 1 through 3 to the channel list 1 THRU 2 6 THRU 7 1 THRU 7 3 THRU 5 Adds channels 1 2 6 and 7 t
86. cue they are once again blocked The next time you change a channel in a previous cue it will again be blocked by the cue To allow tracking through a Hard Block Cue you need to change it into a Soft Block Cue or a Tracking cue Hard Block Cues show all zero levels with an explicit zero in the Cue Preview display Channel levels are white because they are set in the cue not tracking from the previous cue Creating a New Cue Unless otherwise specified a new cue is always recorded as a cross fade if tracking is off ora Move Fade if Cue Tracking is on Note When Cue Tracking is on MF Move Fade is not displayed in the Type field if a new cue is created or a cue is specified as Move Fade using the MOVE FADE softkey cue creates a new cue with all fields set to the default value Cue Tracking Off GeniusPro Only GeniusPro Default CUE 2 6 Creates a new cue numbered 26 as a Cross Fade cue XF All other fields are set to default values CUE 2 7 MOVE FADE Creates a new cue numbered 27 as a Move Fade cue MF All other fields are set to default values CUE 2 8 ALL FADE Creates a new cue numbered 28 as an All Fade cue AF All other fields are set to default values CUE 2 9 BLOCK CUE Creates a new cue numbered 29 as a Soft Block Cue MF All other fields are set to default values 8 106 Cue Tracking On or This Cue Only GeniusPro or Lightpalette GeniusPro
87. cue without stopping these effects use LOAD CUE GO Using the Rate Level Wheel to Change Fade Progress 500 Series Consoles Normally cue fades progress automatically However you can use the Rate Wheel to change the fade progress of all currently running cues or parts on either X playback or change the rate of a single running cue or cue part On consoles with two wheels the Rate Wheel is next to the X playbacks Do not confuse it with the Level Wheel On consoles with only one wheel the single wheel is the Level Wheel normally and the Rate Wheel while rate functions are active To put all fades on a playback under Rate Wheel control press the RATE softkey above the appropriate playback The left LCD changes to UNRATE UPRATE and DOWNRATE UPRATE and DOWNRATE are toggle keys so that you can control the up fade rate the down fade rate or both When you first press RATE both are highlighted Changing the current fade rate does not change the recorded fade time for any cues or parts Rather it changes the time remaining for cues that are running when you press RATE If there is more than one cue or cue part running when you press RATE the Rate Wheel changes their fade rates proportionally The Rate Wheel loses control of fades when all fades are completed or when a new fade is started To move the cursor gt up or down and select a single cue or part for Rate Wheel control press up or down
88. each end Nodes are connected by BNC T pieces which are generally connected directly to nodes Each segment must be grounded at one end only Spurs from the backbone to the nodes are not permitted The maximum length of the backbone is 308m 607ft with up to 30 nodes spaced at least 0 5m 1 5ft apart BNC connectors and cables are not very rugged and need to be handled with care Removing a terminator or breaking the segment along any part of its length will stop all communications so this topology is not particularly secure This topology is generally only suitable for very small systems those with no more than 2 nodes It has the advantage over other topologies that the network does not require power for hubs etc to operate and when cable runs are very short say from console to backup this may be the cheapest and most reliable option Thin Net Thin Wire 10BASE2 10B2 Star 34 382 BNC BNC BNC BNC BNC BNC BNC BNC Terminator Connector Connector Terminator Terminator Connector Connector Terminator wie Coax Cable BNC T BNC T Coax Cable BNC T LS AL I Ls ALF Eal _ __ Lee Ea FZ a CONSOLE CONSOLE 4 PORT THIN NET REPEATER n MSIN LSR Lal E AOF i rE E IN I A l Again this uses 500hm coaxial cable with 500hm BNC connectors but in a star topology At the centre of the star a partitioning repeater links the segments of the star together when they are operating correctly but isolates them
89. eg 8192 kbytes tested ok indicates 8Mbytes installed If you have only 4Mb in a non i or 16Mb on ani console you must upgrade to at least 8Mb old electronics or 16Mb new electronics or 32Mb for i consoles BEFORE installing this version of software Strand Service or your supplier will upgrade your console contact them for details You can run the non software version in an i console which only has 16Mb of RAM Older non i consoles cannot be fitted with more than 8Mbytes but all newer consoles with the built in network connectors can be fitted with up to 32Mbytes non Pentium Pro or Pentium Il or 64Mbytes Pentium Pro or Pentium Il Fitting more memory improves performance in all areas of operation Macro Trigger Card An optional digital input card can now be used as a macro trigger device The card is RS part number 192 0056 and is enabled by setting a DOS variable MACRO_CARD_IO_BASE to the IO base address of the card which should be 310 The card s jumpers should be set to this address too Invalid IO addresses cause the card to be ignored The card is also ignored if the variable is not set which is the normal case only special purpose systems need this card The card has 16 data lines which are used as follows Line 1 8 macro number 1 255 binary encoded Line 16 data active strobe which causes the console to read Lines 0 7 Line 9 15 direct trigger to macros 9 15 ignoring strobe See below for more detail
90. eg smartdrv and TSR programs 13 Currently PCs with no maths coprocessor e g 486SX do not run the software correctly 386 286 and 86 processors are also not suitable 14 Strand Lighting cannot guarantee correct networking operation under all Win9x setup conditions 25 279 Designer s Keypad The Designer s Keypad is supplied pre programmed and can be used with Off Line Editor or PC Software The Designer Keypad provides direct simulation of the main console keys and controls A standard PC keyboard can be used at the same time as the Designer s Keypad by plugging the Designer s Keypad into the PC keyboard port and plugging the PC Keyboard into the Pass Thru connector on the rear of the Designer s Keypad Keyboard Map Select Channel digits Cue Coc Cue Part P Group G Submaster S Fx F Dimmer B Record Record R Rec Time Rec Sub Rec Mode o Q Only Track Q Channel Control O Last L Tho Thun i enter Att Attrib A On O Ful So Off Ctrl O Rem Dim 25 280 Undo Z Clr backspace ts User Po WheelUp Home Wheel Down En Effects Playbacks Fx Dir lat9 Fx Sel lata Fx Type fat Fx Time Fx Rate late Fx Pause ath Fx Load alt 4 Fx Stop RS Fx Go cata FX Step alt 1 FX Go Stop 2 pK Display Select More alt R Preview Screen etl F2 Sub Sereen 0 tA FB Live Screen ctrl F4 Group Sereen o tT FH Patch Screen lett F6 Fx Screen et F7 Archive Sereen
91. fade in out times to 0 01sec FX 1 TIME 3 2 Sets FX 1 overall intensity fade in out times to 3 and 2 secs respectively FX 1 TIME 3 4 Sets FX 1 overall intensity fade in time to 3sec FX 1 TIME 2 Sets FX 1 overall intensity fade out time to 2sec FX 1 2 TIME STEP TIME 3 Sets FX1 step 2 Step Time to 0 3 sec FX 1 2 TIME STEP 1 D O Sets FX 1 step fade times for step 2 to in 0 dwell OFF out 0 FX 1 2 TIME STEP l D O 2 S 4 2 F Sets FX 1 step fade times for step 2 only to in 0 2 dwell 0 3 out 0 2 FX 1 2 TIME STEP 1 D O 2 1 1 L 2 Sets FX 1 step fade times for step 2 to in 0 2 out 0 2 11 142 Alternatively you can vary the fade rate by pressing FX TIME selecting FADE RATE and using the Rate Wheel or Level Wheel on consoles without a rate wheel to increase or decrease the fade time Effect Mode The Mode property controls how the effect combines with other effects and with the other playbacks and faders This property can only be changed from the Effects display in edit mode using the trackerball to select the field and the level wheel or or keys to change the option It is initially set to indHTP indHTP Independent Highest Takes Precedence mode combines the effect with all other output sources on a highest takes precedence basis If you u
92. for the fade will now be taken from the playback faders acting as time controls The scales for time are on the outside of the two faders and are marked from 0 to infinity To instantly complete a fade press INST To return to normal mode where the fades continue automatically press AUTO Changes made while you were in Manual Time mode remain on the fader but all new cues will be run using their recorded times Updating and Adding To Cues 9 120 UPDATE cue changes levels in the specified cues as necessary based on channels that have been modified including channels that are not already in the cues Channels that are off in the selection are removed from the cues The cues must already exist Note The UPDATE command for cues defaults to updating all channels including channels that are not already in the cue UPDATE cue is the same as UPDATE ADD ALL cue When updating a cue to include all channels it is therefore not necessary to include the ADD ALL softkey in the syntax UPDATE CUE 1 A Modes Records all channels that have been modified live into cue including channels that are not already in the cue SUB 7 UPDATE CUE 1 A Modes First selects all of the channels in submaster 7 then records their levels in cue 1 including channels that are not already in cue 1 UPDATE CHANS IN cue changes levels in the specified cues as necessary based on channels that ha
93. have a unique Internet address Once software is installed on an SN100 it will contain a default 220node cfg configuration file This default config file has an address of 192 168 000 70 stored in it If an installation requires multiple SN100 s on a network it is imperative that they all have unique internet addresses 29 326 The NETMASK is the subnet mask which is fixed and should not be changed this NETMASK allows for 252 units on this subnet The format of the Internet address is AAA BBB CCC DDD where AAA BBB CCC and DDD are decimal number between 0 and 255 with the subnet mask shown and the default Internet address suitable Internet addresses can be formed as follows 192 168 000 XXX where XXX cannot be 0 or 255 In a system that contains 5 SN10X s for example a suitable Internet configuration would be Node Internet address SN100 a 192 168 000 70 SN100 b 192 168 00 71 SN100 c 192 168 00 72 SN100 d 192 168 000 73 SN100 e 192 168 00 74 DMX data input and output is controlled by the use of the DMX keyword The DMX keyword has the following syntax DMX Port Type Start End Slot where Port is either 1 2 3 or 4 Type specifies whether the Port is IN OUT or OFF IN specifies that DMX data coming in on the specified Port should be placed on the network at the specified global network slot the first and last dimmers sent out from the incoming DMX frame are specified by the START and END numbers The
94. have only one property which can be specified when recording or edited later You can record a text label caption with each profile to help identify the profile Predefined Profiles There are 2 predefined profiles These are e Profile 98 S Curve e Profile 99 Square Note You cannot delete or edit the predefined profiles 19 224 Viewing and Editing Profiles You can view and edit profiles in the Profile display Since you must be in the Profile display to define profiles and to change their characteristics there is no difference between editing and recording profiles This section covers the following topics The Profile Display The Current Profile Creating Profiles Using End Editing Using DMX Values for Points Using Graph Editing Deleting a Profile 0000000 The Profile Display The Profile Display To show the Profile display press MORE in the Display keypad and then press PROF DISP To view a specific profile use NEXT LAST profile or the Trackball or mouse to highlight the profile number The Levels screen still shows the Live display when the State screen is in the Profile display You cannot change channel levels with any of the channel control commands However you can use the submaster faders X playbacks and effect playbacks to change channels levels and record the results into submasters cues groups or effect steps The title bar shows the date and time display name show name
95. have their network settings preconfigured with a specific IP address of 192 168 0 61 anda subnet mask of 255 255 255 0 If you are supplying your own remote or if you have more than one on your system you must assign either the default address or a unique address for each device To set the IP address on your iPaq from the main screen select Start Settings Network Adapters Compaq Wireless Ethernet Adapters Properties In the Properties screen select use specific IP address and then enter both the IP address and the subnet mask and select OK Follow the directions on screen to have your system accept these changes Note Users who provide their own hardware may have a different Ethernet adapter and should select the one that is appropriate to their hardware Reminder Each remote on your system must have a unique IP address Wireless Access Point ira i e Aj Settinos x 1932 Compaq Wireless Ethernet Driver C Use server assigned IP address Use specific IP address IP address 192 168 O 61 Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 IP Address Name Servers Each system must have at least one network Wireless Access point and if you purchased your system from Strand Lighting at least one has been provided in your lighting system Each Access point has a normal operating range of 300 feet 100 meters No special set up is required for these devices simply plug them into a ShowNet network connection or hub and connect
96. i 217 220 221 222 223 b m 227 230 231 232 233 237 240 241 242 243 247 250 251 252 253 257 m 260 261 262 263 267 g 270 271 272 273 277 280 281 282 283 287 290 291 292 293 297 4 K GALAXY Column order 30 channels per column 300 channels per page channels are shown in order from top to bottom across the display Each row consists of the channel number followed by the level Attribute levels are not shown 10 39 38 27 1 99 gt gt GM FL FL 61 3 s 271 62 272 63 273 64 3 t t 274 65 4 t M 275 66 A 276 67 2 t H 277 68 278 69 279 70 r s i 280 Tt 281 72 282 73 3 3 s 8 283 74 284 75 r 285 76 H H t 286 77 287 78 288 79 H 289 80 7 s f 290 81 g 291 82 292 83 293 84 294 85 3 t 295 86 4 4 296 87 297 88 i g v 298 89 299 90 300 LP Row order 20 channels per row 200 channels per page The same as LP100 except that more channels are shown If the channel has both an intensity and an attribute then both are shown 10 39 38 27 1 99 gt gt No Title GM FL FL 0001
97. if a fault should occur such as an open circuit improving fault immunity Each segment of the star must be treated as a separate Thin Net segment with 500hm BNC connectors at each node and 50ohm BNC terminators at each end Typically only one node would be connected on each segment for maximum fault immunity Nodes are connected by BNC T pieces which are generally connected directly to nodes Each spur must be grounded at one end only Spurs from the segment to the nodes are not permitted The maximum length of each segment is 185m 607ft with up to 30 nodes per segment spaced at least 0 5m 1 5ft apart BNC connectors and cables are not very rugged and need to be handled with care Removing a terminator or breaking the segment along any part of its length will stop all communications on that segment only so this topology is more secure than the Thin Net Backbone This topology is best for larger systems those with more than 2 nodes Twisted Pair UTP 1OBASET 10BT Star This uses 4 pair Un screened Twisted Pair UTP telecommunication cable In order to guarantee reliable operation the cable used should be either category 3 4 or 5 compliant with EIA TIA568 spec For the highest reliability and compatibility with future higher speed networks category 5 cable is recommended Permanently installed twisted pair cabling should use solid conductor cable as this is cheaper and has a higher performance but should not be subjected to rep
98. in diagnostics as follows using a PC keyboard and the supplied adapter 1 Press Ctrl X to exit from the application and return to DOS 2 Restart the application in test mode by typing 2200s TEST in the c 2200s directory and follow the on screen prompts 3 The optional command line switches MASTER and SLAVE can be used with the TEST switch to perform back to back Ethernet tests with two SN10X Nodes Preserving Configuration Files When installing a new release the existing 220NODE CFG file gets overwritten with a default config file supplied in the install disk or the remote install compressed file The installation utility will first copy the existing 220NODE CFG to 220NODE OLD in the same directory before overwriting it This provides a mechanism for re instating the old configuration file via the batch file RECOVER BAT which the user supplies in the C 2200S directory As described above the install utility will look for the batch file RECOVER BAT and run it if it exists at the end of the installation process As a minimum the RECOVER BAT file should contain the following copy 220NODE OLD 220NODE CFG v y If the old config file is not re instated then the result of loading the new release on all SN10Xs will be that they will all have the same IP address and therefore create confusion in the consoles and pc s running the ioftpxxx programs The batch file RECOVER BAT can be easily copied to the SN100 and SN102 as they cont
99. indicates that it is not a 1 to 1 patch the output number is not the same as the channel number blank The output is unpatched grey white or yellow The intensity channel that the output is patched to This is the channel number that appears in all of the Levels displays Shown in grey Output Order or white Channel Order to indicate a one to one patch or yellow if it is not a one to one patch 2 yellow The output is patched to attribute 2 colour and is shown in yellow to indicate it is not a 1 to 1 patch The standard attribute colour is shown with a 2 after the channel number Other attributes use other numbers following the channel number To use any attributes except colour you need the Tracker Software D magenta Indicates that the output is patched to a DMX input channel This can only be used when the Communiqu Pro Software is installed For additional information refer to DMX_IN Communiqu Pro Software 3rd row The scaling threshold or maximum frame number followed by the profile assigned to the output if any see Scaling Value To reduce screen clutter scaling values of 100 default are not shown on the display The profile refer to Assigning Output Profiles is red unless it is for an attribute controlled by the Tracker Software refer to Patching Attributes in which case it is cyan blank The item is unpatched grey The intensity scaling intensity outputs green The maximum frame number
100. is supported by Windows NT or 95 can be used See adapter and or PC documentation for full instructions 2 Configure Windows1 to run TCP IP over you Ethernet adapter For Windows 95 Network Setup install the appropriate Adapter and the TCP IP Protocol Configure the 32 367 TPC IP Protocol with your chosen IP address See your Windows documentation or help for more for full instructions Running ShowNet Software To run ShowNet either Select ShowNet from your Windows Start menu Click on the ShowNet icon from Windows Explorer Select Start Run and enter c ShowNet ShowNet Type Start c ShowNet ShowNet from a DOS Any Windows network drivers which provide a standard WINSOCK interfaces and use the TCP IP protocol can be used All ShowNet 2_0 Neil Description Modified User Date IP Mask a Name Type IP Address af Name Start Length End a Name Description Download User Date Last Mod Type Name Pot UniverseName Offset DMX IN a Download Failure Log Form View 32 368 Pop Up Speed Menu The right hand mouse button pops up a context sensitive speed menu Options which cannot be selected are greyed out Options usually act on the selected field and are Menu Option Description New Creates new Site Node Universe or Patch Clone Copies current Site Node Universe or Patch to new one Delete Deletes current Site Node Universe or Patch Find Pop up find dialogue box Sort Up Sorts current field in ascendi
101. key or DISPLAY touch key on the 310 to cycle through the various menus as follows MACRO SUBS BROWSE EVENT PLAYBACK BACKUP SETUP and back to MACRO etc Entry to the displayed Macro LCD menu is achieved using the key combination SHIFT DISPLAY Note The SHIFT touch key on the 310 is set to toggle between On and Off It is therefore not necessary to hold down the SHIFT key when selectingg Shift function However it is necessary to press the SHIFT key again to deselect the function A STOP SHOW pushbutton Red button on the 310 is provided to enable the operator to stop the pre programmed lighting show and apply a pre defined safe lighting condition On the 510i this panel button is protected from accidental operation by a hinged cover On both the 510i and 310 the illuminated button will flash when selected The operation of the button is mapped to macro 997 as well as the 500 Series console STOP key function The LED in the STOP SHOW button will flash if any Stop key mode is selected e g BLACKOUT STOP ATTS or ST ATTS BO During playback the operator can prevent any unauthorised use of the panel pushbuttons except STOP SHOW by means of a DISABLE KEYS keyswitch with removable key When locked the condition is displayed on the panel LCD the keyswitch LED 510i only is illuminated and the LCD dims Fourteen panel buttons when operated with or without the SHIFT key depressed will apply one of 28 pre s
102. let you link to a series of cues in another part of the cue sheet They consist of a forward link from a calling cue to the first cue in the series and a value of Rtrn for the Link property in the last cue in the series You must set the Loop property of the calling 8 102 cue to at least 1 if you want the subroutine to return If you set it to zero the playback will stop once it reaches the last cue in the subroutine the one with the Link property set to Rtrn Once called when the subroutine returns it starts the cue after the calling cue You can call subroutines from more than one place in the cue sheet For example suppose that you have a series of 4 cues that need to run each of 12 times that a certain character appears You could copy the series of cues 12 times This is time consuming and takes up 48 cues worth of memory in the console Or you could record the 4 cues in series with high cue numbers for instance 800 801 802 and 803 to keep them out of the way of your normal cue sheet numbers and turn this series into a subroutine by setting the Link property of the last cue 803 in this case to Rtrn Now you can call these cues from as many places as you want If you set the Link property of cue 2 to 800 the start of the subroutine and the Link property of cue 15 to 800 and the Loop properties of both of these cues to 1 then your cues will proceed as follows 1 2 800 801 802 803 3 14 15 800 801 802 803 16 Wh
103. lets you print channel attributes as well as intensities Level Changes Only prints only items with changes in them 17 213 1 Item per Page makes sure that each new item printed starts at the top of a page Leaving this off conserves paper if you are printing the whole show New Line at Channel Break otherwise puts the start of each new channel range after some channels were skipped on a new line This is normally off and an upright bar is used to indicate skipped channels Landscape otherwise Portrait lets you change the direction of printing on the page It is normally off in which case all printing is in portrait orientation Clear Operations Pressing ARCHIVE CLR displays the Archive Selection window in the State screen and the LCD Clear menu This lets you clear all or part of the show Note You cannot undo a clear operation If the show needs to be used again make sure that it is saved onto local disk or floppy disk before clearing it For information on how to save refer to Saving a Show NUMBER FROM WHOLE SHOW Si A A Se ve 1 If you are not already in the Clear menu press ARCHIVE CLR 2 From the Archive Selection window in the State screen select the parts of the show to clear or select Whole Show Use the Trackball or mouse to move the red highlight and or to select or clear the parts to clear 3 Press CLEAR A message appears that the clear is about to be done 4 Press C
104. mouse button lock the tilt function and pressing the wheel button and right mouse button locks the pan function A warning is displayed in the Status Window when either Pan or Tilt or both are locked e Turning the intellimouse or intellitrackball wheel selects the attribute as indicated by an arrow to the right of the attribute e Turning the wheel while holding the wheel button depressed applies the course adjustment mode Limited functionality is can be provided with a two or three button mouse as described below The two button mouse ball performs the X and Y functions of the 500 series trackball pan and tilt The left and right buttons step forwards and backwards through the attributes of the selected fixture as indicated by an arrow to the right of the attribute Further pressing the left or right buttons when the arrow is on the last or first attribute will display the last or next ATC page respectively On a three button mouse pressing the centre button and moving the mouse left or right changes the value of the selected attribute Pressing the middle button and left button together will lock the tilt function and pressing the middle button and right button together will lock the pan function Tracker Displays This section describes the displays which are used by the Tracker application and covers the following topics 30 344 o Smart Channel Display o Rotary Controls Window Live Display State Screen Smart Channel Disp
105. multiple versions of this EULA such as multiple translations and or multiple media versions e g in the user documentation and in the software In this case you are only licensed to use one 1 copy of the SOFTWARE PRODUCT Export Restrictions You agree that you will not export or re export the SOFTWARE to any country person entity or end user subject to U S export restrictions You specifically agree not to export or re export the SOFTWARE i to any country to which the U S has embargoed or restricted the export of goods or services which as of May 1999 include but are not necessarily limited to Cuba Iran Iraq Libya North Korea Sudan Syria and the Federal Republic of Yugoslavia including Serbia but not Montenegro or to any national of any such country wherever located who COMPANY knows intends to transmit or transport the product s back to such country ii to an end user you know or have reason to know will utilize the SOFTWARE in the design development or production of nuclear chemical or biological weapons or iii to any end user who has been prohibited from participating in U S export transactions by any federal agency of the U S government 3 UPGRADES AND RECOVERY MEDIA If the SOFTWARE is provided by Manufacturer on media separate from the SYSTEM and is labeled For Upgrade Purposes Only Upgrade SOFTWARE you may install one copy of the Upgrade SOFTWARE onto the SYSTEM as a replacement copy for the SOFTW
106. of a second to 59 minutes and 59 seconds as shown for Fade Times cue ATT TIME RECORD Direct 1 and 2 Digit RECORD cue ATT TIME Command Line Records the levels on the current display into the specified cue and assigns an attribute fade time If the cue already exists an overrecord message gives you the chance to cancel the recording Press RECORD again to record over the cue or CLR or UNDO to cancel the operation CUE 1 ATT TIME 4 RECORD Direct 1 and 2 Digit RECORD CUE 1 ATT TIME 4 Command Line Records levels into cue 1 and assigns an attribute fade time of 4 seconds cue ATT TIME changes the fade time assigned to the specified cue s attributes without changing recorded levels If the cue doesn t exist this command creates a new cue with no levels but with the specified attribute fade time assigned You do not get an overrecord warning with this command if the cue exists CUE 1 ATT TIME 5 A Modes Changes the attribute fade time for cue 1 to 5 seconds without changing any levels or other cue properties 8 99 See also Fade Time Assigning Fade Profiles to Attributes You can assign a profile to the attribute change for the cue RECORD cue ATT PROFILE RECORD records the levels on the current display into the specified cue and assigns a fade profile for attribute changes in the cue If the cue already exists an overrecord messa
107. of the User Setup Screen as follows Macro Tablet Mode Grid to Use No of Macros INTUOS or MACRO LOW 20 x 10 200 CONCEPT A4 INTUOS or CONCEPT A4 MACRO MED 20 x 20 400 INTUOS or CONCEPT A4 MACRO HIGH 40 x 20 800 INTUOS A4 OS MACRO LOW 20 x 16 320 INTUOS A4 OS MACRO MED 20 x 32 640 INTUOS A4 OS MACRO HIGH 40 x 32 1280 INTUOS A3 MACRO LOW 20 x 20 400 INTUOS A3 MACRO MED 20 x 40 800 INTUOS A3 MACRO HIGH 40 x 40 1600 Fitting the Macro Tablet Template Insert template under protective screen The top of the template should align with the bottom of the Graphic Tablet Quick Point Area The top markers on the template should align with the markers on screen This gives left right alignment only Let the template and protective screen drop down The crosshair markers in the lower section of the screen should align with the template although some fine adjustment may be required iE ON TE Using the Macro Tablet The top left macro button on all macro tablet overlays is pre defined as Macro number 1001 All other macro tablet buttons are pre defined in rows from left to right so the bottom right macro button on a 1600 macro overlay is Macro 2600 You can activate each macro simply by touching the macro button using the macro tablet pen or pointing device This is the same as pressing the MACRO button m the console followed by the macro number 18 222 Defining Learning Editing and Deleting Ma
108. of up to 28 cues Although this display only shows a few channels at a time it lets you easily see how channels are being used in successive cues You can make changes to cues while in this display just like you would in the standard Preview display 9 128 Note If when using channel to select a channel on a new page records an unwanted zero in move fade cues use channel the CHAN softkey Levels Screen Colours Channel levels in the Levels Screen have different colours depending on the cue type and the level itself green The intensity level is lower than the previous cue magenta The intensity level is higher than the previouscue blue The attribute level is changed from the previous cue white The intensity level is fixed Tracking On The intensity or attribute level is fixed Tracking Off cyan The intensity or attribute level is the same as the previous cue Tracking On grey The intensity or attribute level is the same as the previous cue Tracking Off white on grey The attribute level is fixed Tracking Off State Screen Fields Fields on the Preview display State screen show the current values for cue properties The fields in this display are the same as in the X Playback window of the Live display with the following addition Note The fields in the Cue Sheet version of the State screen are identical to the fields in the Live Screen You cannot see the attribute time and attribute profile GeniusPro from
109. on DOWN UP Decreases Increases the intensity of the specified channel s by the percentage set in the Up Down field of the Control Modes window of the User Setup screen The default value is 5 FLASH Flashes the currently selected channel s Refer to Flashing Channel Levels BUMP Bumps the currently selected channels Refer to Bumping Channel Levels THRU ON Used to select a channel range including only channels whose intensity level is greater than 0 Refer to Channel Selection List Title Bar During initialisation for about 15 secs the applications available on the console are flashed on the title bar at the top of each screen After initialisation the title bar shows the Current Time and Date the current Show Name and the setting of the Grandmaster Fader s The date and time can be set in the Console Window of the Show Setup Screen The show name is preceded with an asterisk if changes have been made to the show since it was last saved On consoles without fixed submaster faders you have the option of setting any one 300 Series consoles or two 520 Consoles submasters as grandmaster 1 GM1 or grandmaster 2 GM2 If no submasters are set as grandmasters the software automatically set the grandmaster level to full FL 4 5 Memory and Console Locked Indicator When the memory has been locked Memory Locked is shown on a red background on the screen header In order to avoid accidental changes to a show y
110. one fade profile number it is used for both the up and down fades To enter separate up and down fade profiles use to separate the two numbers The first number becomes the up fade profile and the second number becomes the down fade profile Separate fade profiles can be assigned to each cue part To delete an assigned fade profile omit the fade profile number Separate fade profiles can be assigned to each cue part To delete an assigned fade profile omit the fade profile number CUE 1 PROFILE 3 RECORD Direct 1 and 2 Digit RECORD CUE 1 PROFILE 3 Command Line Records levels into cue 1 and assigns fade profile 3 to both the up and down fades CUE 1 PROFILE 3 1 RECORD Direct 1 and 2 Digit RECORD CUE 1 PROFILE 3 1 Command Line Records levels into cue 1 and assigns fade profile 3 to the up fade and fade profile 1 to the down fade CUE 1 PROFILE 1 RECORD Direct 1 and 2 Digit RECORD CUE 1 PROFILE 1 Command Line Records levels into cue 1 and assigns fade profile 1 to the down fade The up fade profile is set to 0 if this is a new cue or left as it is if over recording CUE 1 PROFILE 3 RECORD Direct 1 and 2 Digit RECORD CUE 1 PROFILE 3 Command Line 8 98 Records levels into cue 1 and assigns fade profile 3 to the up fade The down fade profile is set to 0 if this is a new cue or left as it is if over recording
111. or a double width output to a normal output Double width outputs are shown on the Patch display State screen as a grey bar 1 6k12k All Modes Toggles output 1 between normal and double width Assigning Output Profiles Any output can have a profile assigned to it Profiles let you change the fade characteristics of the output You cannot assign a profile to a non dim output Since profiles set here are assigned to outputs rather than channels you can use them to compensate for dimmers with different output curves fixtures with different specifications for colour frame start and stop location gel strings that have stretched and other output related differences out PROFILE assigns the profile to the selected outputs All other output information is left as is The profile number appears in red next to the scaling or maximum frame value 1 PROFILE 5 A Modes Assigns profile 5 to output 1 out out PROFILE assigns outputs to a channel and then assigns a profile to the outputs You cannot patch an output and assign a profile in a single command You can assign one profile to many outputs in a single command The profile number appears in magenta next to the scaling or maximum frame value 2 1 THRU 2 5 3 2 1 THRU 2 5 PROFILE P A Modes Patches outputs 21 through 25 to channel 3 and then assigns profile 5 to the outputs Patching Channel Attributes Th
112. particular fixture Attribute filters is similar to Preset Focus except that when a fixture wthin a referenced group is set to the group level you can use the ATT key and use one or more softkey to select only the particular functions that you wish to set to the recorded reference group value e g 2 5 ATT POSITION COLOUR 1 Sets only the position and colour attributes of the fixture on channel 25 to the levels recorded in the referenced group Group 1 Updating Attribute Filters from the Live Screen When in the Group Screen and with one of the referenced groups highligted you can update the referenced group from the Live Screen using the syntax chans ATT Attribute Filter Softkey LIVE 5 0 ATT POSITION LIVE Direct Action Modes 5 0 ATT POSITION LIVE Command Line Mode The positional attributes of the current referenced group is updated to the current live on stage position of the fixture on channel 50 Fixture Library List The fixture library defines the fixture codes used by the FIXTURE command on the PATCH screen The fixture library is updated from time to time by Strand If you have a new fixture you wish to add please contact you nearest Strand Lighting office The Fixture will be added to the standard fixture list Alternatively you can edit the Fixture Library file which is read when the console is started or the fixture library changed 30 356 Fixtures can be modified or ne
113. play back the macro Or make sure that the first keystroke puts you into the correct display This is particularly important if soft keys are used in the macro since these will generally have a different effect if the macro is played in another display MACRO LEARN LEARN or key LEARN LEARN key represents the actual LCD key P key or User key This starts recording the specified macro Note MACRO is at the bottom of the console Do not confuse this with MACRO in the display keypad LEARN is a soft key which appears when you press MACRO Press the keys you want to record into the macro To finish the macro recording press MACRO MACRO While the macro is being recorded the display prompt shows MACRO LEARN in flashing red as a reminder Note The macro actions will be carried out while recording is in progress Up to 120 keys can be recorded in a macro recording automatically finishes if this limit is reached MACRO 2 4 LEARN CUE 2 0 GO MACRO MACRO Records Macro 24 to run cue 20 Note Macros containing SHIFT get stuck in shift mode as if the key is held down permanently e g CUE SHIFT NEXT RECORD n order to overcome this problem add another SHIFT key after the key on which it operates e g CUE SHIFT NEXT SHIFT RECORD 18 217 Deleting a Macro Macros can be deleted from any display This is a good way to delete macros if you are only going to delete a few
114. properties clears the current selection from the Channel Control type TIME changes the fade time of a submaster cue group or effect without changing recorded levels CUE 1 TIME A Modes Sets cue 1 fade time to the manual fade up and down MAN MAN CUE 1 TIME 4 A Modes Changes cue 1 up and down fade times to 4 seconds without changing any levels SUB 1 TIME 4 2 Al Modes Changes submaster 1 up fade time to 4 seconds and its down fade time to 2 seconds without changing any levels FX 1 TIME 2 A Modes Changes the effect 1 down fade time to 2 seconds without recording new levels Does not change the up fade time CUE TIME 4 All Modes Changes the current cue up fade time to 4 seconds without recording new levels Does not change the down fade Editing In a Preview Blind Display When you are in a blind display the Submaster Preview Group and Effect displays changing a level or property automatically records it into the currently displayed item Preview Group or Effect Changing Channel Levels 6 70 You can use Channel Control commands for example 1 1 CUE 1 5 to set and record channel levels Some of the soft keys and the Level Wheel are not available in preview blind displays Otherwise the syntax for recording is the same from all locations Changing Properties Properties for setup cues submasters effects a
115. running identical configurations of GeniusPro or Lightpalette to work together as main and backup consoles PCs for added security of operation Notes 1 Identical configurations means that main and backup should be registered with the same applications and number of channels If the backup is a PC this requires that it should have a serial numbered dongle available since version 2 0 software which enables the PC to be registered with a password just like a console 2 Any two types of console can be used as a main backup pair but non i consoles may not be able to have enough channels 3 Backup PCs do not need to be fitted with dual VGA cards because video screen modes track correctly without them During normal operation the main desk runs the show is in control and generates wired or network DMX to drive the lights The backup console will be in exactly the same state as the main console in synchronization sync and will execute all commands the main console executes tracking but will not output DMX or other information Should the main console fail or become disconnected from the backup console the backup console will take control of the show and start to output DMX levels This change over happens in a matter of a few seconds during which the lighting levels are maintained 29 331 But first in order to get the backup into sync the operator of the main console must give sync to the backup This can take a minute or so
116. share the show currently loaded in the selected main console 31 364 Main console this selects a console from those detected on the ShowNet network for connection in Backup and Remote modes There is no need to define this list anywhere the system detects it for you Show to load a value of 0 will not load a show when the LOGIN soft key is pressed A value of 1 to 5 will select the show of that number from the list at the bottom of the screen which are the shows that the user last saved This is a quick way of returning to work on your last show but remember that any show already in the main console you are logging in to will be replaced by this new show so all users need to agree on the use of this facility The initial values for these fields come from the 220NODE CFG file Logging In Without Using The Login Display If you want to start a console with one user s settings you can disable the login display and specify a user name and optional password by editing the 220NODE CFG file login_display 0 user_name fred user_pw letmein Seeing Who Else Is Logged In To find out who else is logged in to the main console you are using you can look at Network Diagnostics via the soft key at the REPORT display The logged in users are coded C1 always the main console C2 C3 etc other remotes and are marked with their user and node names in user node format You can also press SHIFT and MORE together to look at the
117. starting on output 22 to start on output 44 2 2 THRU 5 2 MOVE PATCH 5 4 Moves the fixtures patched to outputs 22 to 52 to start on output 54 Press BACK to return to the LCD Set Patch Menu Swapping Patch Information Swapping Attributes Press SET from the LCD Patch Menu to display the LCD Set Patch Menu Press COPY SWAP to display the Copy Patch Menu then enter the output number or range of outputs of the attribute s to be swapped followed by the SWAP PATCH softkey and first output number of the attribute to be swapped with then A confirmation is requested after each command Press again 1 SWAP PATCH 1 0 Swaps attributes on output 1 and 10 1 THRU 8 SWAP PATCH 1 7 Swaps attributes on outputs 1 to 8 with attributes on the eight outputs starting on output 17 Press BACK to return to the LCD Patch menu Swapping Fixtures The position of individual fixtures or a range of fixtures can be swapped by entering the outputs used by the fixture to be swapped and the first output used by the fixture that it has to be swapped with Note The fixture or range of fixtures using the most number of outputs must be entered first Press SET COPY SWAP to display the Copy Patch Menu then enter the output number or range of outputs of the fixtures s to be swapped followed by the SWAP PATCH softkey and first output number of the fixture or range of fixtures to be sw
118. technician with network addresses and status information and provide the facility to enable or disable network nodes using the ENABLE and DISABLE softkeys or to clear the event counter using the CLEAR COUNTS softkey For information on the contents of the Network Diagnostic display please refer to the Networker Software de Addr de gt 192 168 11 214 denise Power on time 09 06 47 Ethernet address 00 2 F C9 95 A5 20 242 N ndPt wWeErr Ack RevPvct gt 192 168 11 214 UDP 1 2510 000 2226 000 0000 2510 000 0000 000 0000 7 15 12 07 15 20 243 The Internal Diagnostics Screen The Internal Diagnostics screen provides the technician with detailed technical information regarding the operation of the console The technician may also run the factory test software using the TEST softkey in conjunction with an external keyboard Pressing the BACK softkey returns to the previous menu Exit and System Shutdown Important Note You must always shut down the console using the correct procedure described below Do not shut down by simply switching off the console or isolating the mains supply Before shutting down the console you should make sure that you have saved the current show by pressing lt ARCHIVE gt SAVE SHOW SAVE SHOW To shut down press lt REPORT gt EXIT SHUTDOWN If you have not saved the show or the setup a warning will appear on screen If you wish to save the setup or the show press SAVE
119. the Trackball to any field in the group you want to edit Levels for the highlighted group will be displayed on the Levels screen but to edit these levels you will need to highlight the group number You can also use NEXT or LAST to change groups if the highlight is on the group number 12 173 You can also page through the group list by using the Level Wheel Creating a New Group To switch to the Group display and create a new group press lt GROUP gt GROUP where is the new group number To create a new group while you are in the Group display press GROUP where is the new group number You will be warned that you are creating a new item Press again to create and display the new group or CLR or UNDO to cancel the command The lt GROUP gt display key is at the top of the console Do not confuse it with the lower GROUP key Viewing Group Channel Levels To view the recorded levels in a group select the required group The levels are then shown in the Levels screen Channels which are off are shown with a blank level Channels which are on At 0 are shown with a level of 0 Editing Group Levels Once you have selected the required group highlight the group number the Group field select channels and modify them using the same commands as for channel control for example 1 1 CUE 1 5 and so on The Level Wheel cannot be used to change levels while you are in the Group display
120. the default location by pressing lt Enter gt The Strand Lighting licence agreement is displayed on screen Press any key to scroll the display If you agree with the terms of the licence press Y or press N to terminate the installation The Networker software will install on your PC 11 If the installation was successful Instal Successful is displayed on screen 12 Press Ctrl F12 followed by F2 three times to return to the desktop 13 Proceed to install the Help file as described under Installing Help under DOS 3 1 or later Installing the Help File Using DOS 3 1 or Later TD 7 8 9 Insert the disk HCINSTAL in the floppy drive ant type A HCINSTAL to install tyhe help file You will be given a choice of platform e g 3 300 Series 4 400 Series 5 500 Series B Backup PC O Offline Editor F File Server Press O to install the Off Line Editor or B to install the Backup PC Software Specify either GeniusPro or Lightpalette installation by typing g or i This should match the console software type You will be prompted to enter a destination path for the Off Line Editor or Backup PC software By default the software will be installed in C geniusp or C lightp Enter a destination directory name of 8 characters or less or accept the default destination by pressing lt Enter gt You will be prompted to enter a destination path for the show files By default the show files will be stored in C shows Enter a destin
121. the effect Viewing and Editing Effects Once you have recorded effects you can view and edit them in the Effect display You can also use the Effect display to create new effects The following topics are covered in this section The Effect Display Effect Setting Fields Fx Step Fields Creating a New Effect Assigning Fade Times to Effects Assigning Profiles to Effects Creating Effect Steps Viewing Step Channel Levels Editing Step Channel Levels Deleting Effect Steps Copying Levels from an Effect Step 11 158 The Effect Display To show the Effect display press lt FX gt in the display keypad not FX in the Levels keypad Note Changing levels while in this display records the changes into the current effect step without requiring a record command 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 0025 60 60 60 60 60 0026 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 0050 0051 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 0075 0076 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 0100 0101 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 0125 igs and Step Defaults gt Fade Up S Next FX Fa n Lp Profile La Tin Sten Control Fx Step Time In Dwell Out The Effects Screen GeniusPro LowiHigh Scaling 11 159 FL FL FL FL FL FL FL FL 40 40 4040 40 40 Settings and Step Defaults Fade Up St
122. the following examples FX 1 LEVEL NORMAL Sets FX 1 intensity type for all steps to Normal FX 1 LEVEL NEGATIVE Sets FX 1 intensity type for all steps to Negative FX 1 LEVEL NORM NEQG Sets FX 1 intensity type for all steps to Normal Negative 11 143 FX 1 LEVEL NEG NORN Sets FX 1 intensity type for all steps to Negative Normal FX 1 LEVEL RANDOM Sets FX 1 intensity type for all steps to Random Next Fx You can have a new effect automatically start at the end of any effects for which the Stop After property is set to Time or Cycles The Next Fx property determines whether a new effect is started and what the new effect number is This property can only be changed from the Effects display and is initially set to OFF You can set the Next Fx to be any other effect number or OFF This field can be set using the in edit mode using the trackballball to select the field and the level wheel or or keys to select the option Alternatively the field can be set using the command line as shown in the following example FX 1 NEXT FX 2 Sets FX 1 follow on FX to Fx 2 Assigning Fade Profiles to Effects The Profile property lets you assign a profile to the fade up and fade down times The profile applies to both the fade up and the fade down To learn how to create a profile refer to Profiles This field can be set in edit mode using the trackball to select the fie
123. the new channel number will then create a new channel For further information on deleting channels refer to Deleting Channels Note Deleting a channel is different from unpatching Deleting removes the channel from all channel displays and removes all its recorded levels Unpatching only removes the association between the channel and the output Channel levels are preserved so that if it is repatched to the same or another output the previous levels reappear The number of free and used channels is shown in the Status Window of the Patch Screen Selecting Outputs Most patch commands act on a selection of 1 or more outputs Outputs can be specified in standard output number format where outputs are numbered from 1 to the maximum number available or in Universe Dmx format The two formats can be used interchangeably and can be used in the same command The examples shown immediately below are commands you can use to create the output list before patching them to a channel You can use these commands to replace out where it appears in full command descriptions Outputs are not actually selected until you press to end the selection list Note Since these examples are only part of a command the key where applicable is not shown These selections will only work in the Patch display puts the specified output on the output list 1 Puts output 1 on the output list 1 6 Puts output 6 on the output list adds
124. the profile are calculated to create straight lines between these anchor points point clears the anchor point specified by point The cleared anchor point is shown in green again and all interim points are calculated to create straight lines between the remaining anchor points 5 0 Clears the anchor point at the 50 input level There are only two anchor points remaining the end points and the remaining points are calculated to create a straight line between these points 19 227 Using DMX values for Points You can specify points and levels using DMX values rather than percent value This lets you specify more precise curves than is possible with percent values point DMX level sets the anchor point specified by point to the DMX level specified by level The anchor point can be from 0 to 100 while the level can be from 0 to 255 The display will show the nearest percent level for the specified DMX level but the system will use the DMX level 1 0 DMX 3 0 Sets the 10 point to a DMX level of 30 This shows on screen as 12 DMX point DMX level sets the anchor point specified by point to the DMX level specified by level Both numbers can be any number from 0 to 255 Unlike the syntax for specifying points by percent there is no used in this command Since the graph view can only display 100 points and 100 levels once you specify a point using this method for a prof
125. the specified output to the output list 1 8 Puts outputs 1 and 3 on the output list 3 4 6 S 5 6 Puts outputs 1070 and 1080 on the output list THRU adds a range of outputs to the output list 1 THRU 3 or 3 THRU 1 Puts outputs 1 2 and 3 on the output list 2 4 THRU 5 1 8 or 5 1 6 THRU 2 6 Puts outputs 516 through 518 on the output list L removes an output from the output list It only removes outputs that are already in the list 1 THRU 3 2 Puts outputs 1 and 3 on the output list 1 THRU 3 2 4 Puts outputs 1 3 and 4 on the output list 13 182 Changing Live and Edit Patches 500 Series Consoles only There are 2 separate show patches The Patch display always shows the Edit Patch You can edit one patch while the other is live The current Live Patch and Edit Patch numbers are shown in the top left corner of the LCD Patch menu and on the bottom of the Status Window of the Patch Screen To change the Live Patch Press SET on the LCD Patch menu to show the LCD Set Patch menu Press LIVE You will be asked to confirm this action Press LIVE It can take several seconds for the Live Patch to change Press BACK to return to the LCD Patch menu a To change the Edit Patch 1 Press SET on the LCD Patch menu to show the LCD Set Patch menu 2 Press EDIT 3 Press BACK to return to the LCD
126. the unit to a mains power supply Your handheld remote will automatically identify the base station and connect to it Due to radio interference in your installation more than one base station may be required and additional units may be added at any time Contact Strand Lighting for assistance in configuring a multiple base station system Once all base stations are configured your iPaq will connect to the nearest and strongest signal Wireless Handheld Remote operating instructions Contact Strand Lighting or your nearest Authorized Service Center if you need assistance with your installation Operation To begin using your remote select Start and Programs on your remote Look for the Strand Remote application and select it The remote will immediately open the application to the first 26 294 screen You must now select the console and remote port that you wish to connect to From the first screen select Console and Select to open the console selection display Enter the IP address of the console with which you wish to connect The default address for all Strand consoles is 192 168 0 68 however Your system may be configured differently or if you have multiple consoles you will have different addresses for each console To find the address of any console select the report display on the desired console The IP address is in the bottom third of the first report screen Enter the address of the console you wish to access and the port you wish to
127. to down fades as follows CUE 8 PROFILE 6 7 LOAD Assigns the following profiles to Cue 8 Profile 6 to the Upfade profile 7 to the down fade and uses any attribute fades if already assigned Loads to X1 or X2 Playback as selected Direct Action Modes LOAD CUE 8 PROLFILE 6 7 As above for Command Line Mode CUE 6 ATT PROFILE 4 LOAD Assigns profile 4 to the attribute fade profile of cue 6 and loads to X1 or X2 Playback as selected Direct Action Modes LOAD CUE 6 ATT PROFILE 4 As above for Command Line Mode Undoing a Profile You can undo the learn action using the UNDO key This will restore the profile field in the cue to the state before the learn took place UNDO PROFILE Undoes the last profile learn action 19 230 Chapter 20 Report Displays Entering a channel number cue number or cue part or dimmer number prior to pressing the REPORT key will display the Channel Cue or Dimmer Summary Report for the channel cue or dimmer number entered Pressing the REPORT key without pressing any other keys will display the System Report Screen and the System Report Menu on the right hand LCD providing softkey access to all other reports and functions listed below The System Diagnostic Menu and associated displays are designed for use by a technician during fault finding and system testing and do not contain any user information This chapter contains the fol
128. to zero you can add channels to the scene and increase the levels of existing channels but you cannot decrease the levels of existing channels or remove existing channels Two Scene Preset X1 10 0 Preset 1 Preset 2 When set to Two Scene Preset Mode half of the channel faders are controlled by the Preset 1 fader and the other half by Preset 2 fader Similarly the fade times for each scene are controlled by the time faders A dipless cross fade between scene 1 and scene 2 is achieved by moving both Preset Faders together Scene 1 is indicated on 300 Series consoles by a red LED Scene two is indicated by a green LED Both scenes are indicated by green LEDs on 500 Series consoles X2 Time Faders Preset 1 Preset 2 Fade Fade Time Time You can set the fade time between 0 and 59min 59 secs for Preset 1 and Preset 2 using the X2 faders on 500 Series consoles or the separate time faders on 300 Series consoles When set to zero the fade time is governed by the rate at which the Preset 1 and Preset 2 faders are moved manually When set to a value greater than zero the fade time for each Preset Fader is the individual fade times set by the time faders 7 92 Chapter 8 Recording Cues see also Running Cues X Playbacks This section describes how to set up and record the levels and properties of individual cues and cue parts To show the Cue Sheet press the lt PREVIEW gt key The following topics are covered e Cue and
129. used on the same channels If the same channel is used in two exclusive submasters the last submaster to move off zero steals that channel INHIBIT Inhibitive submaster Acting like a grandmaster fader the submaster fader masters all output channels that have any intensity recorded in the submaster Channels with only attributes recorded in the submaster are ignored Channels under control of an inhibitive submaster appear on the Levels screen with yellow text on a red background if they have a level or as a red block with no text when they are at zero You can use the Channel Control to bring channel levels up to the current level of the submaster Multiple inhibitive submasters which control the same output channels are combined on a lowest takes precedence basis S LIGHT Sound To Light Submaster 500 Series Consoles only Submaster intensities are combined with effects playbacks and other submasters on a highest takes precedence basis Attributes are combined on a latest takes precedence basis The local submaster controls the maximum level of sound to light and the external Audio Input controls the level of the submaster up to that maximum Submaster channels can be stolen by the Channel Control This facility is only available with the Communiqu Pro software For more information see Communigu Pro Software Only one submaster can be a Sound To Light Submaster DMX CHAN DMX Channel Submaster The DMX input signals become levels for
130. while the delete is being processed 1 DELETE CHAN DELETE CHAN All Modes Deletes channel 1 completely intensity and attributes 1 1 DELETE CHAN DELETE CHAN All Modes Deletes channel 1 intensity 1 2 DELETE CHAN DELETE CHAN All Modes Deletes channel 1 attribute 3 THRU 5 DELETE CHAN DELETE CHAN Al Modes Deletes channels 3 4 and 5 completely intensity and attributes After you are finished deleting channels press BACK to return to the LCD Patch menu Note A line is shown on the Live Screen to indicate that intensity channels have been deleted You can now assign the deleted intensity channel s to attribute channel s Deleting Unpatched Attributes Unpatched attributes resulting from deleting a patched fixture can be removed using the CHAN softkey to display the Channel Menu then the CLEAN ATTS softkey thereby freeing the attributes for use elsewhere The CLEAN ATTS softkey can be used to remove unpatched attributes from the entire patch screen or from a particular output or range of outputs You will be required to press the CLEAN ATTS softkey a second time to confirm the action 1 THRU 1 0 CLEAN ATTS Deletes unpatched attributes from outputs 1 to 10 If any of the unpatched attributes are contained in a Cue or Group confirmation is required before deletion The BACK soft key returns you to the LCD Patch menu 13 187 Renumbering Channels Aft
131. will display the preview screen for the selected function and show the Cue Group Sub or FX levels for each channel The distribution of channels across three and four screen systems is as described above 3 When the Playbacks field in the Show Details window of the Show Setup Screen is set to Single or Split Single not 300 series only X Playback 1 window is shown However if the field is set to Dual LTP or Dual HTP both X Playback 1 and X Playback 2 windows are displayed on the Live Screen For further information refer to the Playbacks in the Show Setup Screen 4 With the Tracker software installed on a dual screen system a Rotary window is displayed on the Live Screen The entries in this window show the attributes currently being controlled by the trackerball the top two entries and the four rotary controls to the right of the trackerball For further information refer to Tracker Software for 300 series refer to Mouse Control of Features 5 The Wheel window shows movements of the wheel for the selected channel s with the lowest intensity Live LCD Menu The Live Menu on the Channel Control LCD indicates the last Channel Cue Effect and Group to have been selected together with the following softkeys 300 Series consoles can support either one or two monitor 300 Series 400 and 600 Memory consoles are supplied with two LCD monitor modules FULL Sets the currently selected channels to full
132. you need not configure each device with a unique address Point to Point Communication For point to point communication used for Tracking Backup Multi Console Server and ShowNet configuration IP addresses are used and MUST be unique otherwise there will be an address conflict and the network will fail For advanced diagnostic and maintenance purposes unique addresses are also required Default IP Addresses Strand equipment is supplied from the factory with the following IP addresses Equipment Type IP Address Net Mask File Server PC 192 168 000 66 255 255 255 0 Backup console or PC 192 168 000 67 255 255 255 0 Main console or PC 192 168 000 68 255 255 255 0 29 323 Remote console or PC 192 168 000 69 255 255 255 0 SN100 102 103 104 Node 192 168 000 70 255 255 255 0 You can use these default addresses unless e You intend to use multiple MAIN REMOTE or BACKUP consoles or PCs on the same network e You intend to use ShowNet configuration software in which case all SN10X node addresses must be unique 220node cfg Network Configuration File The 220node cfg network configuration file is present on all nodes consoles and PCs You can edit it using the DOS EDIT command to change many aspects of Networker operation This is a sample 220node cfg file from an 530 Console Copyright c Strand Lighting Ltd 1994 2000 All rights reserved Networker node configuration file 220node cfg 79 2
133. zero If you record these channels a zero level is recorded in the cue only if levels changed from previous cues Otherwise off is recorded in the cue and levels track through from the previous cue If you use this command in the Cue Preview display the channels appear at their levels from the previous cue since turning a channel off rather than setting it to zero makes it track chans 0 selects the listed channels and sets their intensity levels to zero To set levels for the current selection to zero omit chans 1 0 Direct 1 Digit 1 0 0 Direct 2 Digit 1 0 Command Line Makes channel 1 the current selection and sets its level on at 0 Note If you use this command in the Live display when Tracking is on it sets channel levels to zero If you record these channels a zero level is recorded in the cue only if levels changed from previous cues Otherwise off is recorded in the cue and levels track through from the previous cue If you use this command in the Cue Preview display the channels are forced to zero and tracking for those channels is blocked at the cue chans REM DIM selects the listed channels and sets all other intensity channels to 0 If the selected intensity channels are all at 0 they are set to the on level as set in the Setup display This feature is useful if a designer wants to check the focus of one or more lights By selecting the light s to be checked and pressing REMDIM
134. 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 0020 80 80 80 80 40 30 10 3 0021 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 3 37 3 3 0040 0040 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 57 58 59 0060 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 0061 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 0080 0081 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 0100 0101 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 0120 0121 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 0140 0141 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 0160 0167 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 0180 0181 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 0200 LP100 Lightpalette Default Row order 20 channels per row 100 channels per page The same as LP except that fewer channels are shown If the channel has both an intensity and an attribute then both are shown 10 39 38 27 1 99 gt gt No Title GM FL FL 0001 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 0020 80 80 80 80 40 30 10 3 0021 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 3 37 3 3 0040 0040 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 57 58 59 0060 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 0061 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 0080 0081 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 0100 GENIUS GeniusPro Default Row order 25 channels per row 250 channels per page Same as GENIUS except that attribute levels are shown
135. 09 10 1112 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 0125 0126 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 0150 0151 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 7374 0175 0176 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 0200 0201 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 0225 0226 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 0250 GEMINI Row order 10 channels per row 300 channels per page Channels are shown in order from left to right down the display Each row consists of 1 line the channel number is shown before each level Attribute levels are not shown 10 39 38 27 4 99 gt gt No Title GM FL FL 4 FL 2 3 7 9 10 11 12 13 i l Tet 19 20 21 22 23 L m 27 29 30 31 32 33 37 39 40 41 42 43 i f 47 r 49 50 51 52 EEH 57 4 59 60 61 62 63 67 69 70 71 72 T3 L L 4 Te 4 79 80 81 82 83 L 87 89 90 91 92 93 J 97 4 99 100 101 102 40 103 107 r 110 111 112 113 117 120 121 122 123 127 130 131 132 133 137 140 141 142 143 147 4 150 151 152 153 H 157 160 161 162 163 s 167 f 170 171 172 173 177 180 181 182 183 187 190 191 192 193 L j 197 200 201 202 203 207 210 211 212 213 t
136. 1 THRU 2 UNPATCH Al Modes Outputs 1 and 2 become the current selection and are unpatched DIMMER out selects the listed outputs and sets their levels to DIMMER 1 1 Direct 1 Digit DIMMER 1 0 1 Direct 2 Digit DIMMER 1 1 Command Line Makes output 1 the current selection and sets its level to 1 This cannot be done in Direct 1 Digit entry mode DIMMER 1 3 1 Direct 1 Digit DIMMER 1 3 1 0 Direct 2 Digit DIMMER 1 3 1 Command Line Makes outputs 1 and 3 the current selection and sets their levels to 10 DIMMER out FULL selects the listed outputs and sets their levels to Full 100 FULL is a soft key on the LCD Patch menu It appears after you press DIMMER 1 FULL A Modes Makes channel 1 the current selection and sets its level to Full 15 197 DIMMER 1 3 A Modes Makes channels 1 and 3 the current selection and sets their levels to off Setting DMX Levels Normally output levels are set from 0 to 100 However the actual DMX level is an 8 bit number ranging from 0 to 255 The DMX soft key lets you set output levels to exact DMX levels if necessary Setting actual DMX levels gives you more precise control over the levels you set The display will show the nearest standard 00 to FL level rather than the exact DM X level you set DIMMER out DMX selects the s
137. 2 analog inputs from the REMOTE connector in which case the fader level is combined with the analog input level on a highest takes precedence basis Each analog input can only be used once Submaster Bump Modes You can record a bump mode for each individual submaster To record a bump mode you must be in the Submaster display To change the bump mode press SUB to see the submaster display and hold down the SHIFT key and move the trackball to change to edit mode Select the Bump field for the appropriate submaster and use the or keys or the level wheel to change the bump mode All submasters are initially set to Flash mode Off Pressing the bump button does nothing Fish Flash Pressing the bump button is same as moving the submaster fader to 10 The output is set to the level of the Flash Supermaster Solo Solo Pressing the bump button leaves the output of the submaster the same All other non bumped submasters as well as effects cues and the Channel Control are set to zero The Flash Supermaster is ignored F S Flash plus Solo Pressing the bump button is same as moving the submaster fader to 10 The output is set to the level of the Flash Supermaster All other non bumped submasters as well as effects cues and the Channel Control are set to zero Mac Disables the bump button s flash and solo operation and instead allows it to trigger the macro with the same number as the bump button not the macro assigned to the
138. 3 40 163 44 164 45 165 46 166 47 f 167 48 168 49 z 169 50 n 170 51 171 2 t 172 EEH 173 54 g 174 55 175 56 176 57 177 58 178 59 179 60 180 PRESET Shows the name of the preset focus group rather than the level on completed fades 10 39 38 27 1 99 gt gt No Title GM FL FL 0001 0002 0003 0004 0005 0006 0007 0008 0009 0010 80 80 80 80 3 0022 0023 0024 0025 0026 0027 0028 0029 0030 40 40 40 0032 0033 0034 0035 0036 0037 0038 0039 0040 90 10 30 0042 0043 0044 0045 0046 0047 0048 0049 0050 0052 0053 0054 0055 0056 0057 0058 0060 0062 0063 0064 0065 0067 0068 0072 0073 0074 0075 0077 0078 0082 0083 0084 0085 0087 0093 0094 0095 Smart Channel Display The TRACKER options are only used when the Tracker software is loaded refer to Smart Channel Display Tracker Software for more details Auto Channel Page When ON the default setting a channel level automatically pages the display to show the channel or in the case of the Patch display in output order to show the output When OFF there is no automatic paging Its value is OFF or ON Channel Formatting Controls whether or not all channels will be shown on screen When all channels are not shown discontinuities in the channel listing are shown with Its value is OFF default AUTO COMPACT DISPLAY GROUP or
139. 3 press the third bump key from the left on the top row e Once you have reset the panel configuration yoy must press SAVE to save the new panel configuration After pressing SAVE you will require to shutdown and restart the console e If you have removed one or more fader panels you most clear the configuration by pressin CLEAR This will extinguish all the LEDs and reset all faders in the 220node cfg file to 00 e You can then set the panel fader numbers using the bump keys as previously described e Press SAVE and shutdown and restart the console To leave the Orders Menu press the BACK softkey Conventions Used in This Document The following conventions are used throughout this document CUE The console keys This example shows the key labelled CUE lt SETUP gt The display keys These are above the right LCD on the console and are shown in italics to distinguish them from other keys with the same name The LCDs are the three small display areas across the centre of the console BACK The console soft keys these are the row of 4 or 6 unmarked keys whose function can change depending on what you are doing This example shows the soft key labelled BACK wheel Level Wheel movement trackball Trackball movement fader Fader movement Bump 1 A submaster bump button Direct Entry 1 Digit A channel level entry in Direct Entry 1 Digit format Direct Entry 2 Digit A channel level entry in Direct Entry 2 Digit format
140. 30 520 530 550 520i 530i 550i SN 1 00 SN102 SN104 DESIGNER_PC BACKUP_PC CS_PC NET_MON my_nodename is 8 characters max Must be unique for each node my_nodeaddr 192 168 11 218 my_nodetype sn102 my_nodename juliette TCP IP Netmask netmask 255 255 255 0 TCP IP Gateway gateway 0 0 0 0 Port 1 4 Directn in out off Set to off when used as aux Start 1 512 Specifies range within the 512 End 1 512 DMX channels NetSlot 1 18432 Start network DMX slot Priority blank 1 3 Up to 3 priorities can be specified per channel the highest priority active channel will be used HTP blank htp Set to htp to HighestTakesPrecedence up to 3 active priority channels A channel is active if it has been seen on the network within the past 30 seconds Multiple DMX lines are used to set up multiple priorities or to configure sub ranges of DMX channels DMX Port Directn Start End NetSlot Priority HTP 29 328 DMX 1 out 1 512 1 DMX 2 out 1 512 1 DMX 3 out 1 512 1025 DMX 4 out 1 512 1537 Configuration end SN10X Node Self Test Software SN10X nodes are supplied with comprehensive built in test software which verifies correct operation at power up If a fault should be detected a message will appear on the VGA1 monitor and the Fader LEDs will flash Contact your dealer or Strand service department for more information Service engineers can access the built
141. 4 default is DMX OUT for NET1 and OFF for the rest Start and End default is 1 512 513 1024 1025 1536 The range of output numbers from the Patch that is mapped to the connector from 1 to 4096 The maximum between each Start and End is 512 outputs Communications Window The Communications window is in the Console Setup display and lets you configure the external communications ports file Cl LIGHTP HELP ENG PAGE31 HTM 4 of 7 6 17 2005 7 36 12 AM Console Setup For information on the network features of these options and before attempting to select any non LOCAL net node please refer to Networker The following fields are described in this section e Reporter On Off e Handheld Remote Communications Setup e ASCII Remote Input e GO Key Output e Macro Trigger Output e Remote Test e Audio Input Macro 500 Series Consoles Only e Remote Trigger Macro 500 Series Consoles Only e Trigger Bytes 500 Series Consoles Only Reporter On Off Sets the status and the serial port that the Reporter is connected to and is only used when the Communiqu Pro software is loaded It cannot be set to the same port as the Handheld Remote For more information refer to Console Reporter Handheld Remote Communications Setup On 500 Series Consoles fitted with Intel Pentium II or Intel Pentium Pro processors i Series all three AUX ports can be used to connect handheld remotes All other consoles support either one or two handhe
142. 4 Data terminal ready Pin 5 Ground Pin 6 Data set ready Pin 7 Request to send Pin 8 Clear to send Pin 9 Ring indicator 27 301 General purpose RS232 baud rates 1200 to 38400 COM1 port and COM port 2 VGA female 15 pin high density D type Pin Description Pint Analog Redo 0o7y o Pina AnalogGreen0 07V tt Pin3 i ists lt s sS Analog BU O 7V Pins Noconnection gt o Pin 5 Self Test Pin 6 Red ground Pin 8 Blue ground Pin 9 No connection key Pin 10 Ground Pin 11 Ground Pint2 Noconnection gt o Pin13 o H sync TTL Pini4 o Vsync TTL Pin 15 No connection 640x480 pixels 16 colours 60Hz refresh This port is compatible with both VGA and SVGA monitors Port 1 is the main console display output Port 2 is the additional channels display output in Dual VGA mode PS2 Ports Pin 1 Data Pin 2 No connection Pin 3 Ground Pin 4 5V DC Pin 5 Clock Pin 6 No connection COM1 and COM2 27 302 Pin Description Pin 1 Carrier Detect Pin 2 Receive Data Pin 3 Transmit Data Pin 4 Data Terminal Ready Pin 5 Signal Ground Pin 6 Data Set Ready Pin 7 Request to Send Pin 8 Clear to Send Pin 9 Ring indicator Ethernet 10BT RJ45 Pin Description 1 Data Tx Daa x Data Rx Data Rx Not connected Not connected Not connected sit Not connected ts i Submaster Macro Inputs Pins 1 to 12 Submaster 1 to 12 macros Sub 1 12 macros Pins 13 to
143. 5 46 47 48 49 0050 0051 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 0075 0076 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 0100 0101 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 0125 Text Group Screen GeniusPro 12 172 FL FEFPLFLFL Group Screen Lightpalette The Group display Levels screen shows the recorded channel levels intensity levels and attribute levels of the current group The Levels screen background is grey rather than black to show that levels changed in this display are not being changed live The Group display State screen shows a page of groups and their associated fields The current group is highlighted with a red background The Wheel window at the right indicates the position within the current submasters The number shows the index of the current group For example the first second and third groups have index 1 2 and 3 The index is independent of the group number The only editable group property is Text which is shown in the Text field of the Group display State screen This property lets you attach a text label caption to the group for easy recognition To go directly to a group press GROUP where is the group If the group does not exist you will be warned that you are creating a new item Press again to create the new group or CLR or UNDO to cancel the command To move between existing groups move
144. 6 submaster pages for 500 Series consoles and 5 pages for 300 Series consoles there are actually 6 and 5 submasters for each fader respectively The following topics are covered in this section Channel Faders Submaster Pages The Current Submaster Recording Submaster Levels Recording Submaster Properties Using Submaster Faders Gang Loading of Subs The Submaster Window Viewing and Editing Submasters One and Two Scene Preset Channel Faders A channel fader is a fader that controls the level of one channel only and is used extensively in One and Two Scene Preset mode On 500 series consoles all faders are submaster faders with all the features described in this section of the manual You can also use the submasters as channel faders as described in One and Two Scene Preset mode 300 series consoles are designed on a modular basis The basic 300 series building block comprises an external processor unit a command module and a 24 way fader module configured as submasters Additional fader panels can be physically and electronically coupled to the basic unit to provide additional channel faders for use with one and two scene preset Note If you add or subtract fader panels from a 300 Series console you must reconfigure the numbering of the fader panels as described in the Introduction section of this manual All faders on 500 series consoles are configured as submaster faders but can be used as channel faders refer to One and
145. 95 A5 2 4 192 168 021 68 console 1 550 On Line 00 20 AF C9 95 A5 2 4 192 168 021 69 console2 520 On Line 00 20 AF C9 95 A5 2 4 IOFTP Accessing a File Server All consoles and PCs which have been configured to access the server can view the server s disk drives as easily as viewing their own Simply go to the Archive display by pressing the Archive key The file server appears as another drive below the local floppy A and hard C drives If the server drive is not visible try going back to the Live display then reselecting Archive If it is still not visible check Network Diagnostics to see if the file server device is there To connect to the server drive go to the Browse menu move the selection bar to the server drive and press After a few seconds the file server becomes the current drive Show can be saved to and loaded from the server in the same way as with local drives User Logins One user needs to be responsilble for maintaining other users logins and access rights this is the administrator This is the user which is preconfigured with Server software and is named admin with no password set although you may prefer to define one Admin is like any other user and is set with all access rights enabled as indeed any user can be but is recognised for special treatment by the software This includes being allowed to edit any user s access rights at Access Rights setup More than one admin user can be
146. ARE originally installed on the SYSTEM and use it in accordance with Section 1 of this EULA You may also install additional copies of the Upgrade SOFTWARE as replacement copies onto additional SYSTEMS which are the same brand and model as the SYSTEM and contain a duly licensed copy of the same version and language release of the SOFTWARE ADDITIONAL SYSTEMS provided that 1 Manufacturer has supplied a corresponding serialized sticker for each additional copy of the Upgrade SOFTWARE and 2 you affix a serialized sticker per Manufacturer s instructions for each unit of Upgrade SOFTWARE you install If the SOFTWARE is provided by Manufacturer on separate media and labeled Recovery Media Recovery Media you may not make a copy of the SOFTWARE as described in Section 1 for archival purposes Instead you may use the Recovery Media solely to restore or reinstall the same version and language release of the SOFTWARE as originally installed on the SYSTEM and thereafter use the SOFTWARE as restored or reinstalled in accordance with Section 1 of this EULA A single unit of Recovery Media may be used by you to restore or reinstall the SOFTWARE on ADDITIONAL SYSTEMS 4 COPYRIGHT All title and copyrights in and to the SOFTWARE including but not limited to any images photographs animations video audio music text and applets incorporated into the SOFTWARE the accompanying printed materials and any copies of the SOFTWARE are owned by MS or
147. Auto Mod Screen Deleting Auto Mod Channels Updating the Show from the Auto Mod Screen What is Auto Mod If a lamp blows during a show you can set AutoMod to temporarily transfer control of the blown lamp source to drive another channel or channels destination AutoMod allows you to apply a scaling factor to compensate for the difference in light intensity between the source and destination luminaires The AutoMod facility allows you to permanenly update the show to incorporate any temporary settings made in Automod You can enter a maximum of 87 AutoMod pairs Destination and Source and include a scaling factor for each pairing of 10 to 90 1 digit mode 1 to 99 2 digit mode When you set one or more channels to be replaced by another the channels are replaced in all cues subs groups and effects during playback mode Using Auto Mod The AutoMod Screen is displayed when you press lt MORE gt AUTOMOD If there are no Automod instructions the body of the screen will be blank The following examples show how to set up an AutoMod instruction 8 A MOD FROM 3 Sets channel 8 to the current level of channel 3 on an htp basis and sets channel 3 to zero All Modes 8 A MOD FROM 3 8 Sets channel 3 to be replaced by channel 8 at 80 of its current level on an htp basis Direct 1 Digit Mode Note For Direct 2 Digit mode 80 must be entered as 80 8 A MOD FROM 3 THRU 5 Sets channels 3 to
148. B SUBS The Live screen includes the X Playback windows and the Submasters window GeniusPro default PB FxX The Live screen includes the X Playback windows and the Effects window PB SUBS Fx The Live screen includes the X Playback windows the Submasters window and the Effects window EVENT The Live screen includes the Event window only PB EVENT The Live screen includes the X Playback windows and the Event window PB EVENT FxX The Live screen includes the X Playback windows the Event window and the Effects window Note The Live display can also be changed to the other formats by pressing SHIFT LIVE Repeatedly pressing LIVE while holding down SHIFT cycles through the Live display formats X Playback Colours Sets the colours used in the X Playback window of the Live display Its value is GENIUSPRO based on GeniusPro displays LLGHTPALETTE based on the original Lightpalette displays or LIGHTPALETTE INVERT Lightpalette displays with a yellow bar across the X Playback window for the current cue The default value for GeniusPro is GENIUSPRO The default for Lightpalette is LIGHTPALETTE INVERT X Playback Order Sets how cues will be displayed in the X Playback window of the State display It can be set to HISTORY CUE SHEET GeniusPro Default or CUE SHEET Lightpalette Default The cue sheet section shows the cues as they are recorded The history section when shown shows the cues in the order they were executed and shows th
149. CUE 1 PROFILE RECORD Direct 1 and 2 Digit RECORD CUE 1 PROFILE Command Line Records levels in cue 1 and deletes any assigned fadeprofiles cue PROFILE changes the fade profile assigned to the specified cue without changing recorded levels If the cue doesn t exist this command creates a new cue with no levels but with the specified fade profile assignment You do not get an overrecord warning with this command if the cue exists CUE 1 PROFILE A Modes Deletes the fade profile assigned to cue 1 without changing recorded levels CUE 1 PROFILE 2 A Modes Changes the up and down fade profiles assigned to cue 1 to fade profile 2 without changing recorded levels CUE 1 PROFILE 4 2 A Modes Changes the up fade profile assigned to cue 1 to fade profile 4 and the down fade profile to fade profile 2 without changing recorded levels CUE 1 PROFILE 2 A Modes Changes the down fade profile assigned to cue 1 to fade profile 2 without changing recorded levels Does not change the up fade profile CUE 1 PROFILE 2 Ali Modes Changes the up fade profile assigned to cue 1 to fade profile 2 without changing recorded levels Does not change the down fade profile See also Asigning Fade Profiles to Attributes Assigning Fade Times to Attributes You can assign a fade time to the attribute change for the cue This can be set to values from one hundredth
150. Cues Subs Macros Effects and Effect Steps When the SHIFT key is held pressed while moving the trackball all fields in the current display become green editable Pressing the key returns to the edit field protection mode Mouse Functions GeniusPro and Lightpalette software supports a range of mice and trackballs including the intelli type mouse and trackball to mimic the trackball trackball softkeys and rotaries on the 500 series consoles Any of the mouse options can be used with either 500 or 300 series consoles for the control of attributes and to mimic the other functions of the trackball e g moving the highlight on the setup screens scrolling the help screens and activating help hyperlinks PS2 mice should be plugged into the PS2 port and serial mice should be plugged into one of the COM ports unless the mouse is dual function i e PS2 Serial On the 300 Series consoles the intellitrackball may be connected to the PS2 port on the Processor unit or on the command module Alternatively the intellitrackball may be plugged into either the COM1 port on the processor unit or the COM2 port on the command module using the appropriate adaptor Important Note Throughout this manual references to trackball should be taken as a generic term covering the series 500 trackball or the trackball of a two or three button or Intelli type mouse or trackball In the event of a mouse trackball not being available or inoperable al
151. D Browse menu Switch to the drive and directory that you want to save to as described above Press BACK to return to the LCD Archive menu Name the show if it is a new show refer to Naming the Show Press SAVE SHOW to request the save You will be asked to confirm this action Press SAVE SHOW to save the show or CLR or UNDO to cancel the operation oe a Now that you have set up the show name and the destination you can use ARCHIVE SAVE SHOW SAVE SHOW to save the show periodically to the default drive Note When you save a show all data including Setup information is saved regardless of what you check in the Archive display 17 207 Loading a Show You can store and load shows from floppy disk or local disk Storing a show on floppy disk is a good way to transfer shows between consoles or store a copy in another location Note Show files from this version of operating software cannot be loaded into previous versions Before loading the software ensure that version 2 4 software is loaded in the console or PC Storing a show on the local disk is also a convenient and quick way to save and retrieve shows that you use often If you are running shows in repertory you can easily retrieve the correct show for the day To load a show proceed as follows 1 Press ARCHIVE to get to the LCD Archive menu If you don t want to load the whole show use to turn the WHOLE SHOW field off Then use the Trackball or m
152. DE sn100_2 etc where sn100_1 and SN100_2 are the network names of your SN nodes as defined in their 220node cfg files or as seen using the IOFTPDOS WHO command 4 Ifthe node to be downloaded to is running v2 0 software create a file called 220node cfg in the C SN100 directory containing my_nodeaddr 193 195 164 99 my_nodetype 10FTP my_nodename 10FTP 5 Make sure that the first 3 numbers match those of the node addresses This step is unnecessary if the node is running v2 1 or later 6 Run SW2ALL Remote Install from an SN100 SN102 Ensure that the latest release is installed in the SN100 SN102 Type CTRL X to abort from the Networker program back to DOS Determine the IP address of the Networker you wish to update or the node name Assume this value to be nodeid Then type the following at the DOS prompt COPY A REMSETUP D IOFTPDOS LOGIN nodeid PUT d remsetup z d remsetup z IOFTPDOS LOGIN nodeid PUT d remsetup ins c 220os install bat Then wait for at least 5 minutes to ensure that the software has been installed in the remote unit Remote Install from a PC 1 Ensure that the console has both Operating Software and Networker Utilities version 2 1 or later All node types can be downloaded to they are all referred to here as SN100 2 Go to DOS at the console and make a new directory C SN100 If it already exists delete its contents Copy the SN100 Operating Software floppy to C SN100 In C
153. Display Deleting Channels Deleting Unpatched Attributes Renumbering Channels Default Patching Clearing Default Patching Patching Channel Intensities Patching Double Width Outputs Assigning Output Profiles Patching Channel Attributes Patching Non Dims Patching DMX In Unpatching 13 176 Output Properties Outputs have the following editable properties which can be specified when patching or edited later e Output Type e Output Profile e Scaling Value Types Each output can be set to one of several types Unpatched No channel number The output is not patched to any channel and so its output is always 0 see Unpatching Intensity The channel number is white or yellow if it is not a one to one patch and the output is grey in Channel Order In Output order the Output is white and the channel number is grey or yellow if it is not a one to one patch The intensity output is patched to a channel intensity The output has a Scaling Factor shown in grey below the channel number which modifies the basic channel level and can range from 0 to 200 A value of 100 has no effect a value of 0 disables the output its value is always 0 For example with a level of 80 on the Live display scaling of 50 would cause an output of 40 Scaling values over 100 cause the output to reach its full intensity faster than other outputs For instance if the scaling is 150 the output will be at 75 when the channel it is patched to is stil
154. E PRINT to show the Print display 2 Use the Trackball or mouse to highlight the Type field in the Printer Setup window 3 Use the Wheel to select a printer tyoe compatible with the printer connected to your system lf you are not sure which printer type will work best try printing few cues with each printer setting 4 If you are printing a show select the parts of the show to print from the Archive Selection window or select Whole Show Use the Trackball or mouse to move the red highlight and or to select or clear the parts to load Type the desired numbers in the FIRST LAST and NUMBER FROM fields 5 Select the channels you want to print You can select a range of channels in use and a range of channels not in use that you want to print Channels in use are channels that are used in any cue group effect or submaster not just channels in cues and includes intensity and attribute channels 6 Select the printing options you want Press PRINT SHOW DIMMER LOG STATUS LOG or NOTES to start printing 7 To cancel printing while it is in progress press STOP To go back to the LCD Archive menu press BACK While the console is printing a Print Operation Complete message shows printing progress from 0 to 100 PRINT SHOW prints all of the items you checked in the Archive Selection window Printing options available for this print mode are Print Channels Includes channel levels for each item Add Attributes
155. E however If you leave the value blank the existing value for that token in the console will be used a blank password means that none needs be entered It is recommended that all users access rights are explicitly set to avoid inheriting too many or too few rights from the previous logged in user To find out what user setup values are used in the file experiment by saving user setup when logging out and look at the file each time Configuring Access Rights Each user s access rights are defined in their user file This example shows all access rights enabled to disable any one replace the 1 with a 0 acc_record 1 Can record from Live acc_patch_fix 1 Can patch new fixtures requires Tracker acc_spec_grps 1 Can change special groups display partition etc acc_stp_user 1 Can change User Setup acc_stp_show 1 Can change Show Setup acc_stp_cons 1 Can change Console Setup acc_cons_mode 1 Can change console mode at the login display acc_printer 1 Can use the printer acc_show_loc 1 Can save or delete shows on local disk drives acc_show_svr 1 Can save or delete shows on the server disk drives acc_chan_ctrl 1 Can use channel control to set levels acc_playback 1 Can run cues on the X playbacks 31 363 Console Access Rights Each console as well as each user has a login configuration file This allows physical consoles to have particular rights irrespective of who logs in For example a designer
156. Effect step properties are discussed later in this section Edit Mode You can record or edit the effect properties using keyboard command as described in the following paragraphs Alternatively you can set up and edit the overall effect properties and the effect step properties while in the Effect Screen by holding down the SHIFT key and moving the trackball to change the fields from non edit mode yellow to edit mode green In edit mode you can highlight a field and set its value using the level wheel or the or key or by entering a numerical value from the keypad as appropriate To return the the non edit mode press Recording Effect Text You can record a text label caption with each effect to help identify the effect FX TEXT text changes the text string caption assigned to an effect without changing recorded levels For examples refer to Basic Recording Recording Effect Type Effects can be either chases or builds You can control this property from the Effects display or by pressing FX TYPE and selecting the appropriate option from the appropriate LCD menu FX 1 FX TYPE CHASE Sets FX 1 type to chase FX 1 FX TYPE BUILD Sets FX 1 type to build Chase Only one step is high at a time and steps are played sequentially according to direction property As each step runs its levels go high and all other levels in the effect go low Build One step at a time goes high but pr
157. F or any existing macro number from 0 to 2999 Top of Page User Setup Screen This display lets you control how the console operates and displays information The User Setup screen is displayed when you press the REPORT key followed by the ADV SETUP softkey then the USER SETUP softkey The User Setup Screen may also be accessed by pressing the SETUP key This key permits access to only the Setup Screen Three softkeys are available at this point DEFAULT Sets the highlighted field to the factory default In certain fields the default setting is dependant on the setting of the GENIUSPRO PALETTE field BACK Returns to the previous display MEMORY LOCK Refer to Locking the Console Memory IM e DIRECT 1 DIGIT The fields within the four windows of the User Setup Screen are descibed under the window title as follows Control Modes Window Display Options Window Default Times Window Console Window Control Modes Window The Control Modes window is in the User Setup display and lets you configure how channels are controlled The fields within the Control Modes Window are desribed as follows Channel Control Mode CC Auto Hold Mode On Level Up Down Wheel Mastering Wheel Sensitivity Stop Key Channel Control Mode Controls the channel command syntax accepted by the console lts value is COMMAND LINE DIRECT 1 DIGIT or DIRECT 2 DIGIT COMMAND LINE Lightpalette Default Comman
158. FIRE Run macro p FO 7F id 02 cf08 F7 ALL OFF Blackout on b F0 7F id 02 cf09 F7 RESTORE Blackout off k FO 7F id 02 cf 0a F7 Big Stop then Load first FO 7F id 02 cf Ob F7 GO OFF CUE Load cue 0 I Strand System Exclusive 28 319 Strand Lighting ID 00 20 01 ch Channel number pp Product code 01 MX 02 GSX 03 LBX 04 430 05 530 ff Function code 00 configuration 01 synchronisation nn Channel capacity 127 maximum mm Model Mask 01 Genius 02 Kaleidoscope 04 Communiqu FO 00 20 01 ch pp 00 nn mm F7GSX nn Channel Genius r t System Real Time Messages Timing Clock for stepping F effects F9 undefined Start Clock for stepping FA effects Continue Clock for stepping FB r effects FC Stop Clock for stepping p effects FD undefined FE Active Sensing Break in p comms FF System Reset MIDI Trigger Macro Communiqu Pro also supports a user definable MIDI trigger facility that can be programmed to run a macro when a user specified message of up to three bytes is received To configure go to the MIDI window in the Show Setup Screen In the MIDI Trigger Macro field enter the number of the macro that is to be triggered In the MIDI Trigger Bytes field enter the three trigger byte values in decimal you require When Macro is OFF or all three bytes are OFF no triggers occur When a trigger is received the specified macro will be executed Bytes set
159. FX GO loads the specified or current effect onto the specified playback and starts it FX 1 FX GO Ali Modes If effect 1 is already loaded this selects that playback then starts it Otherwise it selects the first unloaded Playback if any loads it with effect 1 if recorded and starts it FX PB 2 FX GO Ali Modes Loads the current effect onto playback 2 and starts it FX 1 PB 2 FX GO Ali Modes Loads effect 1 onto playback 2 and starts it Effects can also be run from cues refer to Assigning an Effect in Cues and X Playbacks or from submasters see Assigning Effects and Macros in Submasters Pausing an Effect An effect can be paused this stops any more steps running but it does not stop any fade in or fade out caused by FX GO and does not unload the effect The step number in the Effects window will remain fixed while the effect is paused This command is ignored if the playback has not been started or has nothing loaded on it Paused effects are shown by flashing yellow text for the FX Step field Press FX PAUSE to pause a running effect Press FX PAUSE again to resume running the effect FX PB FX PAUSE pauses the specified playback FX 1 FX PAUSE Al Modes If effect 1 is already loaded selects that playback then pauses or restarts it If effect 1 has never been started and paused this command is ignored If effect 1 is not loaded selects the first unloaded playback if any
160. Faders Bump Keys 530 consoles have 30 and 550 consoles have 54 23 255 Alternative Key Expansion Board This keyboard replaces faders 255 48 and bump keys 25 48 on a 550 console To enable this keyboard the switches SW1 and SW2 on the back of the panel should be set to 4 and 3 respectively When remapping this keyboard the keys relate to Bump keys 25 to 48 as follows 550_BMK_ Where is the number in the key layout below 46 48 47 46 45 a4 44 43 42 44 4039 cao rf ababsbaTe Remapping Keys 300 Series Consoles Key Numbering The syntax used to identify keys to be remapped is as follows 300_KEY_n where n is from 1 to 127 as shown in the diagrams below P Keys HEE Seer ics FX Keys Display Keys 23 256 lela PISS saasa Function Keys aeaa aaas EJA EAE Mode Keys Eged X Playback Keys EEE AKEL wo d Select Keys E AIEEE S i Channel Control Keys a a Pars rar rc fa x xa Pele ealesltod E E E E aA 23 257 Key Functions Key values may be set to NULL key disabled or to one of the functions listed in 220map cfg Key Remapping Examples The following examples show how to remap keys 520 PBK_17 RECORD Remap playback key 17 LOAD X Playback 1 on a 520 console to operate as a RECORD key 530_FXK NULL Disables Effects key 1 left hand softkey on 530 console 530_PK_7 PB 1 Remaps tp P7 key on a 530 cons
161. For GeniusPro recording a new cue sets it as a Cross Fade when Tracking is off or a Move Fade when Tracking is on unless otherwise specified Recording over an existing cue does not change the fade type unless you explicitly change it e For Lightpalette All new cues are Tracking Cues unless you explicitly specify that they should be Block Cues or All Fade Cues Recording over an existing cue does not change the cue type unless you explicitly change it e Recording a cue blind in the Cue Preview display does not affect the console output The cue needs to be loaded and run for the new levels to appear on stage e The default wait fade and delay times are assigned to new cues unless you specify values for them in the record command The defaults for these values are given by the Cue Fade Cue Delay and Cue Wait fields in the The Default Times Window of the User Setup display e Recording over an existing cue leaves these values alone unless you explicitly change them e Recording a new cue sets it with no links loops macro or effect Recording over an existing cue leaves these values alone unless you explicitly change them e The last recorded cue appears at the bottom of the X Playback window if the Show Last Recorded Cue field in the User Setup display is ON e You can record just the intensities or just the attributes to a cue by adding INTS ONLY or ATTS ONLY to the command line before RECORD e g CUE 1 0 INTS ONLY RECO
162. IFT FX SEL selects the highest numbered playback FX FX SEL Selects the lowest numbered playback on which the specified effect is loaded or if the effect is not yet loaded selects the next available playback and loads the effect If the effect does not exist the command is ignored FX 1 FX SEL Ali Modes If effect 1 is already loaded selects that Playback as the current playback Otherwise selects the first unloaded Play back and loads it with effect 1 if recorded FX PB FX SEL Loads the specified or current effect onto the specified playback FX PB 1 FX SEL Ali Modes If the current effect is already loaded on playback 1 selects it as the current playback Otherwise selects playback 1 and loads it with the current effect FX 1 PB 2 FX SEL A Modes If effect 1 is already loaded on playback 2 selects it as the current playback Otherwise selects playback 2 and loads it with effect 1 if recorded Loading an Effect An effect can be loaded onto one or more of the effect playbacks After loading the playback is stopped and set to step 0 where it does not contribute to the output Any previous effect on this playback is unloaded Other commands will also load the effect if it is not already loaded Use Alt 4 on an ASCII keyboard if it is necessry to simulate the FX LOAD key when using a 300 series console 11 154 FX FX LOAD Direct 1 and Direct 2 Digit FX
163. INSTAL lt Enters gt for 300 Series consoles You will be given a choice of platform e g 3 300 Series 4 400 Series 25 273 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Install 1 2a 4 25 274 5 500 Series B Backup PC O Offline Editor F File Server Press B to install the Backup PC Software Specify either GeniusPro or Lightpalette installation by typing g or i This should match the console software type You will be prompted to enter a destination path for the Backup PC software By default the software will be installed in CAgeniusp or C lightp Enter a destination directory name of 8 characters or less or accept the default destination by pressing lt Enter gt You will be prompted to enter a destination path for the show files By default the show files will be stored in C shows Enter a destination path or accept the default location by pressing lt Enter gt The Strand Lighting licence agreement is displayed on screen Press any key to scroll the display If you agree with the terms of the licence press Y or press N to terminate the installation The Backup PC software will install on your PC This may take some time If the installation was successful Instal Successful is displayed on screen Type CD geniusp or CD lightp as appropriate If you have elected to save the operating software in another directory type the name of the directory in place of geniuspro or lightpalette Type geniusp lt Enter gt
164. Indep Exclusive Submaster Exclusive Inhibitive Submaster Inhibit Sound to Light Submaster S Light 500 Series Consoles only DMX Channel Submaster DMX Chan DMX Dimmer Submaster DMX DMNR Submaster Supermaster Sub Super Effects Supermaster FX Super Flash Supermaster Flash SPR Grandmasters GM1 GM2 Audio Threshold Supermaster AUDO THR 500 Series Consoles only Midi Ratio Supermaster MIDI RATI NORMAL Pileon submaster Default Submaster intensities are combined with effects playbacks and other submasters on a highest takes precedence basis Attributes are combined on a latest takes precedence basis Selecting a channel with the Channel Control steals it from the submaster 7 76 INDEP Independent submaster Submaster intensities are combined with effects playbacks and other submasters on a highest takes precedence basis Attributes are combined on a latest takes precedence basis Submaster channels can not be stolen by the Channel Control but the Channel Control can increase the channel intensity over the submaster level Once you decrease the channel level to below the submaster level the submaster level will take over again EXCLUSIVE Exclusive submaster Submaster intensities are as recorded in the submaster and modified by the submaster fader the Submaster Supermaster and the grand master They are not changed when cues or effects run when other submasters are changed or when channel control is
165. LEAR to clear the selected items or BACK to cancel the operation 17 214 Chapter 18 Macros Macros let you record and then play back a regularly used sequence of commands For example you could record a macro with the commands to load and then run a particular cue Running this macro will then replay all of these commands Macros can be recorded from any display and then played back using a macro playback key or a macro playback command or by assigning the macro to a cue or submaster Once recorded they can be viewed and edited in the Macro display With the optional A4 or A3 macro tablet you can activate up to 1600 macros using a pen or pointing device on a macro button grid placed on a Wacom Intuos or Concept 2012 A4 graphic tablet There are up to 3000 macros numbered 0 to 2999 Each macro can contain up to 120 keys Most keys can be recorded into a macro Trackball movements can also be recorded but you cannot use the wheels faders and rotaries within a macro You must use the numeric keypad to enter numbers A macro cannot call another macro This chapter contains the following topics e Macro Properties Pre Assigned Macros Learning a Macro Deleting a Macro Running a Macro Manually Running a Macro Automatically Viewing Macros Creating a New Macro Editing Macros e Macro Tablet Macro Properties Macros have only one property which can be specified when recording or edited later You can record a text label
166. LIMIT TRIP Note By default the filter status of all fault types is Off e g no filtering or all fault conditions displayed on the Dimmer Filter display When one or more of the above softkey commands are included in the command line the fault type is inhibited from the Dimmer Filter display To re instate a fault type include the command before the softkey as shown DIMMER 2 3 4 5 FILTER OVERLOAD OV ERHEAT HIGH DC Sets Overload and Overheat filter On not displayed and resets the High DC filter Off displayed for faults on dimmer number 2345 DIMMER AT CHAN 2 THRU 5 FILTER OUTPUT LIMIT LOAD LIMIT Sets Output Limit and Load Limit filter On not displayed for faults on dimmers patched to channels 2 to 5 DIMMER 2 3 4 5 THRU 2 3 5 0 SHIFT FILTER Sets all filters of dimmers 2345 to 2350 to On all fault displays inhibited in range DIMMER 1 FILTER Sets all filters of dimmer 1 to Off such that all fault conditions on dimmer 1 are displayed DIMMER 2 3 4 5 REPORT Shows the summary display for dimmer 2345 DIMMER AT CHAN 1 2 3 4 REPORT Shows the summary display for the first dimmer patched to channel 1234 Note Dimmer Filter settings cannot be printed 21 247 Dimmer Log Screen Pressing the REPORT key and the DIMMER LOG softkey will display the Dimmer Log screen comprising a scrolling display showing a maxim
167. Live display State screen When the X Playback Format field in the User Setup Screen is SPREAD SHEET the property associated with each display field is indicated by the title line When the X Playback Format field is EXPANDED or EXPANDED FADE TIME the fields are labelled to their left The GeniusPro default setting for the X Playback Format field is SPREAD SHEET The playback that will run this cue If there is no playback number x the cue will be assigned to the next available playback Cue The recorded cue number P The cue part 1 to 12 if it is a Move Fade Otherwise blank Type The type of recorded cue when Tracking is off When Tracking is on yp cue type is not shown XF Cross Fade default AF All Fade MF Move Fade The split fade times If not split only the up fade time is shown Up Down Fade times can be from one hundredth of a second to 59 minutes and 59 seconds as shown for Fade Times or manual off The way in which fade progress and remaining time is shown depends on the X Playback Format field in the User Setup display The wait time Blank if the wait time is off While a cue is running Wait the remaining wait time appears under this value The colour indicates its state The cue split delay times If not split only the up fade delay is shown Blank if there are no delays Shows initial delay times before Delay a cue is run the time remaining in the delay while a cue is running and the original delays again whe
168. N RECORD Direct 1 Digit and Direct 2 Digit RECORD CUE 1 TIME OFF MAN Command Line Records levels and a manual fade time into cue 1 The manual fade time applies to both the up and down fade times The following records levels on the current display into the specified cue effect step or submaster and assigns a fade time to the item You cannot record fade times in groups SUB 4 ATT TIME 5 RECORD Direct 1 Digit and Direct 2 Digit RECORD SUB 4 ATT TIME 5 Command Line Records levels and a 5 second colour attribute fade time to submaster 4 CUE 1 ATT TIME 4 RECORD Direct 1 Digit and Direct 2 Digit RECORD CUE 1 ATT TIME 4 Command Line Records levels and a 4 second colour attribute fade time into cue 1 FX 1 2 ATT TIME 2 RECORD Direct 1 Digit and Direct 2 Digit RECORD FX 1 2 ATT TIME 2 Command Line Records levels into effect 1 step 2 Assigns a 2 second colour attribute fade time to effect 1 Undoing Record The last record command can be undone This restores the last recorded cue group effect or submaster to its previous state UNDO RECORD UNDO REC SUB and UNDO REC TIME all undo the last record command regardless of how it was recorded Note The REC TIME key is not available on 300 series consoles Changing Properties Without Recording Levels You can change properties in any of the preview screens by holdi
169. NDED FADE TIME the fields are labelled to their left The Lightpalette default setting for the X Playback Format field is EXPANDED Q The recorded cue number P The cue part 1 to 12 if it is a Tracking Cue Otherwise blank The split fade times If not split only the up fade time is shown Fade times can be from one hundredth of a second to 59 minutes and 59 Time seconds as shown for Fade Times or manual off The way in which fade progress and remaining time is shown depends on the X Playback Format field in the User Setup display 9 113 Wait Delay Link Loop Macro FXGo FXStop Playback Profile Att Prof The wait time Blank if the wait time is off While a cue is running the remaining wait time appears under this value The colour indicates its state The cue split delay times If not split only the up fade delay is shown Blank if there are no delays Shows initial delay times before a cue is run the time remaining in the delay while a cue is running and the original delays again when the fade completes The colour indicates their state Used for cue linking and looping blank There is no link The number of the cue that will be run after this cue if the loop count is not exhausted Rtrn This is a loop return cue and marks the end For cues linked to previous cues indicates how many time the loop will pass through this cue For cues linked to the start of a subroutine indicates
170. O The Channel Control also lets you modify cues submasters effects steps and groups blind though the Level Wheel The syntax used to enter command in the command line is determined by the setting of the Channel Control Mode field in the User Setup Screen To change the Channel Control Mode press SETUP and select the Channel Control Mode For further information on Channel Control Modes refer to Channel Control Mode This section contains the following topics e Editing the Command Line Setting up the Channel Levels Window Channel Status Identification Channel Type Identification Selecting Channels Channel Selection List Current Channel Selection Extending the Current Channel Selection Selecting the Next or Last Channel Clearing the Current Selection Setting Levels with the Keypad Using Recorded Items in Channel Lists Attribute Groups Attribute Filters Referenced Groups Using the Level Wheel Setting Attribute Levels Setting DMX Levels Copying Channel Levels Undoing Level Changes Holding Channels on the Channel Control 5 55 e Restoring Playback Levels Flashing Channel Levels Bumping Channel Levels Channel Check Changing Levels in Preview Blind Display Fading in Intensity Channels in Time Fading in Attribute Channels in Time Editing the Command Line At any time before a command on the command line is complete you can move back through the command line to correct it CLR Clears the
171. O 4 48 Live Screen Format Live LCD Menu Title Bar 10 30 38 27 199 Se NO Title 0001 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 0025 0026 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 0050 0051 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 0075 0076 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 0100 0101 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 0125 X Playback This Cue Only Wheel wn Delay Wait Link Loop Cmd Page 1 Submasters Sub Text Sub Text Sub Text Sub 8 Live Screen Format GeniusPro Single Screen Live Screen Layout set to PB SUBS Wheel X Playback Tracking On Al E 2o Cs 6 THRU S FULL DOWN UP FLASH AJBUMP ON Live Screen Format Lightpalette Single Screen Live Screen Layout set to PB The layout of the Live Screen is dependent on the number of video displays 1 2 3 or 4 connected to your system and the selection of the Live Screen Layout options To select the number of screens adjust the Number of Screens field of the Console window in the User Setup screen To select one of the live screen layout options adjust the Live Screen Layout field of the Console window in the User Setup screen For information on number of screens on 500 and 300 series consoles refer to Number of Screens The layout of the channels on the Live Screen Channel Level
172. OUTPUT ORDERED PATCH No Tithe oP M PALS Pirouet 4 6 2 PALS Pirouette 16 PRES Pirauetie 16 Cole 27 35 1200XR Hyperbean The Copy Patch Menu Pressing COPY SWAP from the Set Patch menu displays the Copy Patch menu with softkeys COPY PATCH MOVE PATCH and SWAP PATCH These softkeys enable output attributes or fixtures to be copied moved or swapped within or between the Live or Edit Patch Copying Patch Information 30 349 e Moving Patch Information e Swapping Patch Information Copying Patch Information Press SET from the LCD Patch Menu to display the LCD Set Patch Menu Press COPY SWAP to display the Copy Patch Menu Copying Attributes Enter the output number or range of outputs of the attribute s to be copied followed by the COPY PATCH softkey and the output number or first output number where the attribute s has to be copied then A confirmation is requested after each command Press again 1 COPY PATCH 1 0 Copies attribute on output 1 to output 10 1 THRU 10 COPY PATCH 1 1 Copies attributes on outputs 1 to 10 to outputs 11 to 20 Press BACK to return to the LCD Set Patch Menu Copying Fixtures Enter the first output number or range of outputs of the fixture s to be copied followed by the COPY PATCH softkey and the first output number where the fixture has to be copied to then A confirmation is requested after each command Press again
173. Otherwise selects Playback 2 and loads it with effect 1 if recorded FX PB FX LOAD Direct 1 and Direct 2 Digit FX LOAD FX PB Command Line Selects the specified playback If there is no effect loaded in it the command is ignored FX PB 2 FX LOAD FX LOAD FX PB 2 Selects Playback 2 The Current Playback All commands can apply to the current playback Only one Playback can be the current playback This playback is shown in white on grey in the Effects window The current playback is different from the current effect which is shown in the LCD FX SEL selects the next higher numbered playback as the current playback If necessary use Alt 8 on the PC keyboard to simulate the FX SEL key for 300 Series consoles FX SEL All Modes Selects the next higher numbered playback as the current playback For example if the current playback is 3 pressing FX SEL selects playback 4 Another press selects playback 5 At the highest numbered playback pressing FX SEL selects playback 1 FX PB selects the specified playback as the current playback SHIFT FX SEL Al Modes Selects the next lower numbered playback as the current playback 11 153 SHIFT FX SEL Al Modes Selects the next lower numbered playback as the current playback For example if the current playback is 5 pressing SHIFT FX SEL selects playback 4 Another press selects playback 3 At playback 1 pressing SH
174. PY PATCH 5 4 Copies the fixtures patched to outputs 22 to 52 to start on output 54 Press BACK to return to the LCD Set Patch Menu Copying Patch Screens You can copy the entire contents of Edit Patch Screen to Live Patch screen Press SET from the LCD Patch Menu to display the LCD Set Patch Menu Press COPY SWAP to display the Copy Patch Menu Press COPY PATCH confirmation required COPY PATCH The contents of the Edit Patch are copied to the Live patch Press BACK to return to the LCD Set Patch Menu Moving Patch Information Press SET from the LCD Patch Menu to display the LCD Set Patch Menu Press COPY SWAP to display the Copy Patch Menu Moving Attributes Enter the output number or range of outputs of the attribute to be copied followed by the MOVE PATCH softkey and the output number where the attribute s has to be moved to then r A confirmation is requested after each command Press again 1 MOVE PATCH 1 0 PATCH 2 Moves attribute 1 to output 10 on the non edit patch screen 1 THRU 10 MOVE PATCH 1 1 Moves attributes on outputs 1 to 10 to outputs 11 to 20 Press BACK to return to the LCD Set Patch Menu 13 184 Moving Fixtures Enter the first output number of the attribute to be copied followed by the MOVE PATCH softkey and the first output number where the fixture has to be copied then 2 2 MOVE PATCH 4 4 Moves the fixture
175. Part Numberin e Recording Cue Levels e Recording Cue Properties Cue and Part Numbering All cues can comprise up to 12 parts numbered from 1 to 12 Each cue consists of a minimum of 1 part e g Cue 1 Part 1 Cue 3 2 part 12 etc If a part number is not specified using the PART softkey PART hardkey on 300 Series consoles when recording a cue part 1 is automatically assumed When a cue is run all parts of the cue are run together For the maximum number of cues refer to Product Specification If you initially record whole number cues only you can use a decimal cue number for instance 3 5 to insert extra cues between whole numbers You can insert decimal cues 1 through 9 between any two consecutively numbered cues Entering a 0 is optional in a cue number and is the same as if omitted cue 1 is the same as cue 1 0 Examples of cues in cue sheet order are A first full numbered cue same as 1 0 A 3 hp O 100 999 9 last possible cue When a cue is run all of its parts are run together If you record a channel in a cue part that has already been recorded in another part of the same cue the new level latest recorded level is used for the channel Cue wait times macros links loops and commands apply only to the cue as a whole but separate delay times and profiles can be used on each part If a cue is referenced without specifying a part part 1 is assumed Cross Fade Block and All Fade cues can only ha
176. R COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL DIRECT LIFE SUPPORT MACHINES OR WEAPONS SYSTEMS IN WHICH THE FAILURE OF JAVA TECHNOLOGY COULD LEAD DIRECTLY TO DEATH PERSONAL INJURY OR SEVERE PHYSICAL OR ENVIRONMENTAL DAMAGE If you acquired this EULA in the United States this EULA is governed by the laws of the State of Washington If you acquired this EULA in Canada this EULA is governed by the laws of the Province of Ontario Canada Each of the parties hereto irrevocably attorns to the jurisdiction of the courts of the Province of Ontario and further agrees to commence any litigation which may arise hereunder in the courts located in the Judicial District of York Province of Ontario U S GOVERNMENT RESTRICTED RIGHTS Introducing GeniusPro and Lightpalette Strand s lighting control consoles with GeniusPro and Lightpalette software offer you the flexibility to choose and upgrade your console software including the basic operating software through an integral floppy disk drive This flexibility lets you update when you need to without having to buy new hardware The maximum number of channels and attributes available depends on the hardware performance and is different for various consoles Please contact Strand Lighting for specifics All application software with the exception of the Server software is supplied as standard on all consoles The Communiqu Pro software is used to add SMPTE MIDI MIDI Show Control DMX input ex
177. RD Direct Digit RECORD CUE 1 0 ATTS ONLY Command Line Note For 520 and 300 Series Consoles you must include the REC MODE key in the command in order to display the INTS ONLY and ATTS ONLY softkeys e g CUE 1 0 REC MODE INTS ONLY RECORD Direct Digit RECORD CUE 1 0 REC MODE ATTS ONLY Command Line Recording Cue Properties 8 94 Cues have the following properties that can be specified when recording or edited later Fade Time Delay Time Wait Time Assigning Fade Profiles Assigning Fade Times to Attributes Asigning Fade Profiles to Attributes Assigning an Effect Assigning a Macro Links Subroutines and Loops Fade Types Cue Types Creating a New Cue Copying an Existing Cue Level Tracking Recording a Text Label Fade Times Each cue has up and down fade times that are used when the cue is run You can enter fade values from one hundredth of a second to 59 minutes and 59 seconds as shown in the table Key Entry Shown as Value 0 01 0 01 One hundredth of a second 0 1 0 1 One tenth of a second 1 1 One second 10 10 Ten second s 100 1 00 One minute 1000 10 00 Ten minutes 1025 10 25 Ten minutes twenty five seconds 5959 59 59 Fifty nine minutes fifty nine seconds The fade times control the time for the cue to fade to 100 of its recorded levels You can split fade times into the time it takes increasing levels to reach their new settings the up fade time
178. S Dutch or RUSSIAN For further information on setting the display language refer to Country Keyboard Support Channel Display Controls the way that levels are shown on the Levels display The Channel Display field can be set to CONTROL GENIUS GEMINI GALAXY LP LP100 the Lightpalette default GENIUS the GeniusPro defult GALAXY or PRESET This layout is modified by the Channel Formatting field and the Smart Channel Display field depending on how you are using channels in cues and what channels are currently selected Note The following assumes that the Number of Screens is set to 2 CONTROL Row order 10 channels per row 100 channels per page Intensity channels and attribute channels are shown in order from left to right down the display Each row consists of 3 lines the intensity channel number and attribute channel number if applicable followed by the last control function to have controlled the channel Channel Control e g CC1 Cue and X Playback number Q 1 Effect e g FX Submaster and Submaster Page e g S 1 followed by the the intensity or attribute level 10 39 38 27 1 99 gt gt 0001 Q 2 0006 0011 0016 0021 0026 0031 0036 0041 0001 2 0002 Q 2 Q 2 0006 2 0007 Q 2 0011 2 0012 0016 2 0017 CC 1 0021 2 0022 0026 2 0027 0031 2 0032 0036 2 0037 0041 2 0042 0047 0048 Q 2 Q2 LIVE 0002 2 0003 Q2 CC 1 0007 2 0008 Q 2
179. SETUP or SAVE SHOW Press SHUTDOWN again to shutdown the console On 300 Series consoles the shutdown display will be shown then the console will be shut down automatically On 500 Series consoles the shutdown display will be shown telling you that you may now shutdown the console In the latter case shut down the console using the On Off button on the console 530 and 550 consoles only or the mains On Off switch on the back of the console 520 consoles Note If you have a 530 or 550 console with an On Off swich on the back of the console make sure that this switch is left in the On position 20 244 You can shutdown and restart the console using the EXIT amp RESTRT softkey Server Software Installed If the optional Server software is installed and User Logins are enabled you can log out as the current user by pressing LOGOUT LOGOUT which will display the LOGIN Screen giving you the opportunity to either shutdown the console using the SHUTDOWN softkey or for another user to login using the LOG IN softkey Refer to Server Software 20 245 Chapter 21 Console Reporter Console Reporter is a standard software package for use with Strand s 500 and 300 Series consoles and GeniusPro and Lightpalette software It is used to monitor and report temperature electronic status and system and load information for all SV Series dimmers This facility allows the user to know the status of all lamps on a rig and to record rack based
180. SN100 edit the file SW2ALL BAT as follows a Change REM CALL SW2NODE NodenameORipAddress1 to CALL SW2NODE sn100_1 CALL SW2NODE sn100_2 35 392 etc where sn100_1 and sn100_2 are the network names of your SN nodes as defined in their 220node cfg files or as seen using the IOFTPDOS WHO command 5 If the node to be downloaded to is running v2 0 software create a file called 220NODE CFG in the C SN100 directory containing my_nodeaddr 193 195 164 99 my_nodetype lIOFTP my_nodename IOFTP 6 Make sure the first 3 numbers match those of the node addresses You don t need to do this step if the node has v2 1 or later Run SW2ALL A message saying Installation Successful appears on the PC 9 The node will then take 5 minutes to install the new software 9 x Assigning New IP Addresses All Networkers shipped from factory have the same default IP address which is 192 168 021 70 and a node name of sn100_1 This means that for a system with more than one Networker unique IP addresses have to be assigned Note that the IP address may also have been defaulted by the installation program if the file recover bat was not created by the user in the C 2200S directory of the Networker The unique IP address assignment can be achieved easily in a SN100 SN102 by editing the file 220NODE CFG appropriately You will need a screen and keyboard connected to it and a floppy disk with and editor program You can make
181. Shownet Configuration Software Shownet Software Installation Windows Network Configuration Running Shownet Software Pop Up Speed Menu Editing the Shownet Configuration O e O 0 e Shownet Sites Window Shownet Nodes Window Shownet Universes Window Shownet Patches Window Shownet Ports Window Shownet Command Buttons Chapter 33 SN100 and SN102 Network Nodes SN100 and SN102 Safety SN100 amp SN102 Controls and Displays SN100 Installation SN102 Installation SN100 and SN102 Interface List Chapter 34 Ethernet Overview Cabling Systems eo eo eo O e Thick Net Thin Net Thin Wire 1OBASE2 10B2 Backbone Thin Net Thin Wire 1OBASE1 10B2 Star Twisted Pair UTP 10BASET 10BT Star Optical Fibre Network Topology eo O Ethernet 4 3 2 Rule Ethernet Hubs Page 367 Page 372 Page 381 xxiii o Typical Ethernet Configurations Ethernet Card Installation on Older Consoles Chapter 35 Networker for SN10X Software Installation Displaying the Current Version Number Floppy Disk Installation Remote Installation Remote Installation from an SN100 SN102 Remote Install from a PC Assigning New IP Addresses Chapter 36 Showport File Conversion Showport Software Installation Running Showport Software Showport File Formats Chapter 37 Additional Information XXIV Notes on Upgrading Old Software Problems Starting the Software Fitting RAM Me
182. T H E L L 0 Command Line Records levels and the text string HELLO into cue 1 SUB 1 TEXT RECORD RECORD Direct 1 Digit and Direct 2 Digit RECORD SUB 1 TEXT Command Line Records levels into submaster 1 and deletes any assigned text string Recording Fade Times 6 67 The following records levels on the current display into the specified cue effect step or submaster and assigns a fade time to the item You cannot record fade times in groups For effects the times you record are for the effect fade up and fade down times not for step times For submasters fade times are recorded into the current page If you only enter one number for time it is used for both the up and down fade times To enter separate up and down fade times use to separate the two numbers The first number becomes the up fade time and the second number becomes the down fade time To delete an assigned time omit the time value You can enter fade values from one hundredth of a second to 59 minutes and 59 seconds as shown in the table Range Value 0 01 59 99 Hundredth of a second 0 1 59 9 Tenth of a second 1 59 Seconds 1 00 59 59 Minutes Seconds Note When setting times associated with effect steps e g step times In Dwell Out times and attribute fade times the maximum time that can be entered is 5 minutes e g enter 500 For cues you can also record a manual fade time using the OFF MAN key Cues r
183. T A Hewlett Packard DeskJet or LaserJet printer or compatible HP COLR DJ A Hewlett Packard Colour DeskJet printer or compatible Prints colours as they appear on screen ASCII OUT efault Text only This can be selected if the printer is none of the above Paper Size A4 default 210mm x 297mm 8 5 x 11 216mm x 279mm 8 5 x 12 German A3 297mm x 420mm 8 5 x 14 U S legal size 17 212 14 5 x 11 Computer fanfold paper 132 column 11 x 17 U S tabloid B size Port Sets the parallel port that the printer is connected to LPT1 default Printer connected to the first parallel port This is marked PRINTER on the rear of the console FILE Will print to a file on the local disk The file is put in the SHOW subdirectory and its name is based on the current show name with a txt extension Net Node Sets the location of the printer to Local or the specified Network Node Local Default The main console Network Node Name Alternative printer location Printing From the Print display you can print all or part of the show by pressing the PRINT SHOW softkey In addition by using DIMMER LOG STATUS LOG or NOTES you can print the contents of the Dimmer Log or the Status Log or the Notes pages Since the default printer is ASCII you should be able to print without selecting a specific printer However for the best possible printouts with your printer you should set the printer type first 1 Press ARCHIV
184. The Effect Step Control must be set to MIDI The number of timing signals received before the effect steps are advanced can be adjusted on the effect playback by adjusting the MIDI RATIO supermaster fader Communiqu Pro also receives two additional MIDI timing commands STOP which halts the effect and START which continues running the effect A MIDI device normally sends out these commands when the tempo is stopped or started MIDI Show Control MIDI Show Control MSC is a sub set of the MIDI Specification dedicated to controlling show equipment Communiqu Pro currently supports the recommended Minimum Set which is defined as a Simple Controlled Device no time code basic data only More specifically GO Acts as a normal GO button and resumes a fade after it has been stopped RESUME Starts the next cue it does not resume the previous fade GO CUE Go cue where is a specific cue same as CUE GO STOP Stops the current fade FIRE Runs user macro from 0 to 127 LOAD Loads the X playback with cue ALL_OFF Blackout on RESTORE Blackout off RESET amp GO_OFF Go Cue 0 Note All playback actions take effect only on X playback 1 28 315 MSC output is activated when the MSC ID Tx option in the MIDI Window in the Show Setup Screen is set to a value between 0 and 127 If the MSC ID Tx is OFF no MSC messages are transmitted Received MSC messages are only accepted if the MSC ID Rx matches the received
185. The last submaster in the range from 1 to the highest submaster number for the console Initially set to the highest submaster number for the console Profiles The recorded profiles from the Profile display A profile range can be specified Initially this is from 1 to 99 and selects all profiles FIRST The first profile in the range from 1 to 99 Initially set to 1 LAST The last profile in the range from 1 to 99 Initially set to 99 NUMBER FROM Renumbers the specified range of profiles starting with this number This lets you load profiles from other shows without erasing the same numbered profiles in the current show Macros The recorded macos from the Macros display A macro range can be specified Initially this is from 0 to 2999 and selects all macros FIRST The first macro in the range from 0 to 999 Initially set to 0 LAST The last macro in the range from 0 to 999 Initially set to 999 NUMBER FROM Renumbers the specified range of macros starting with this number This lets you load macros from other shows without erasing the same numbered macros in the current show Fixtures The fixtures from the Patch display A fixture range can be specified Initially this is from 1 to 99 and selects all fixtures FIRST The first fixture in the range from 1 to 99 Initially set to 1 LAST The last fixture in the range from 1 to 99 Initially set to 99 Auto Mod Automod pairs from the Auto Mod Screen You must select the complete Auto Mo
186. UE 1 INTS ONLY Command Line GROUP 1 ATTS ONLY RECORD Direct 1 Digit and Direct 2 Digit RECORD GROUP 1 ATTS ONLY Command Line Records group 1 with attribute levels and erases intensity levels Note When recording cues on 300 Series and 520 consoles the REC MODE key is used to display the Cue Type options and the INTS ONLY and ATTS ONLY softkeys on the LCD display To record cues with INTS ONLY or ATTS ONLY when using a 520 or 300 Series console you must therefore include the REC MODE key in the command as follows CUE 1 REC MODE INTS ONLY RECORD Direct 1 Digit and Direct 2 Digit 520 and 300 Consoles only RECORD CUE 1 REC MODE INTS ONLY Command Line 520 and 300 Consoles only Records cue 1 with intensity levels and erases attribute levels Recording Without Submasters and Effects If you are in the Live display you can use type to record the console output levels minus any levels being provided by submasters and effects This command does not work from any of the preview displays SUB 1 REC SUB A I Modes Records submaster 1 without submasters and effects 6 66 Note For 300 consoles use SHIFT RECORD in place of REC SUB SHIFT RECORD is the same as REC SUB on 500 series consoles Recording Specific Channels You can specify the channels you want to record in a cue group effect step or submaster This is done by prefixing any of the commands
187. Viewing and Editing Cues Chapter 10 X Playbacks Page 110 e Assigning Cues to X Playbacks e Playback Mode e The X Playback Window GeniusPro e The X Playback Window Lightpalette e Using the X Playbacks e X Playback in Manual Fade Mode Chapter 11 Effects Page 133 e The Current Effect Step e Recording Effect Step Levels e Recording Effect Properties o Effect Text o Effect Type o Effect Direction o Effect Fade Times o Effect Mode o Effect Level o Next Fx o Assigning Fade Profiles to Effects o Stop After Field o Step Control Field o Step Default Values Field e Recording Effect Step Properties o Step Time Field o In Dwell and Out Times Field o Attribute Fade Time Field o Low and High Scaling Field e Using Effect Playbacks vi o The Effects Window o The Effect Supermaster o Effect Playback Selection o The Current Playback o Loading an Effect o Running an Effect o Pausing an Effect o Stepping an Effect o Changing Effect Times While Effect is Running o Changing Effect Types While Effect is Running o Changing Effect Direction o Updating Effects o Updating Effects from the Live Screen o Unloading an Effect Using Effects in Cues and Subs Viewing and Editing Effects o The Effect Display o Effect Setting Fields o Effect Step Fields o Creating a New Effect o Assigning Fade Times to Effects o Assigning Profiles to Effects o Creating Effect Steps o Viewing Step Channel Levels o Editing Step Channel Levels o De
188. When you are controlling only one cue to return to controlling all of the running cues or parts press UNRATE RATE To toggle the up fade rate control between on and off press UPRATE When there is a bar above this soft key the Rate Wheel changes the fade time of channels which are fading up To toggle the down fade rate control between on and off press DOWN RATE When there is a bar above this soft key the Rate Wheel changes the fade time of channels which are fading down 9 118 To return the fader to normal functioning press UNRATE Changes you made with the Rate Wheel still apply to running cues or parts but the Rate Wheel no longer controls any fades Using the Level Wheel to Change Fade Progress 300 Series Consoles Normally cue fades progress automatically However you can use the Level Wheel to change the fade progress of all currently running cues or parts on either X playback or change the rate of a single running cue or cue part To put all fades on a playback under Rate Wheel control press the appropriate RATE key Both RATE keys are toggle keys which set the status of the rate control for either X playback and operate as follows First Press Up and Down Fade Both UP and DN LEDs illuminated Second Press Up only Fade UP only LED illuminated Third Press Down only Fade DN only LED illuminated Fourth Press Unrate Both UP and DN LEDs extinguished Selecting Up rate Down rate or both automatically chan
189. XE loaded as part of Networker Utilities and using the right mouse button create a shortcut to it on the desktop 12 Double click on the shortcut and you should see a command window with the IOFTP gt prompt If it disappears quickly the network card could not be accessed Contact Strand Lighting for assistance Configuring A File Server The ioftp programs use the 220NODE CFG file to set its network address in the same way as consoles and PCs my_nodeaddr 192 168 021 66 my_nodetype ioftp my_nodename server All consoles and PCs on the ShowNet network which access the file server must name the file server IP address in their own 220NODE CFG files file _server_addr 192 168 021 66 To disable file server access at any time restore this line to its factory default file_server_addr 0 0 0 0 Operating A File Server You must first create the directory structure you require to hold your show files and any other file types you intend to store Next run IOFTPDOS DOS or IOFTP32 Win9x NT as described above Once you can see the IOFTP prompt the file server is working and is ready to be accessed by other ShowNet devices To check that other ShowNet devices are on line and available use the WHO command which gives a similar display to Network Diagnostics at a console lIOFTP who 31 361 NODE_ADDRESS NODE_NAME TYPE STATUS ETHERNET_ADDRESS VERSION 192 168 021 66 server BK_PC On Line 00 20 AF C9
190. above with the channel selection to record The THRU and THRU ON are used to select the channels to record chan SUB 2 records the currently selected channels into the submaster without changing any other recorded levels 1 SUB 2 RECORD Direct 1 Digit and Direct 2 Digit 1 RECORD SUB 2 Command Line Records channel 1 levels into submaster 2 without changing any other recorded levels 1 3 THRU 5 SUB 2 RECORD Direct 1 Digit and Direct 2 Digit 1 3 THRU 5 REC SUB SUB 2 Command Line Records channels 1 3 4 and 5 levels into submaster 2 without effects and submasters and without changing any other recorded levels Recording Text Labels You can use the Record command to record levels and properties to a new or existing cue You can record more than one property at a time when recording cues groups effects or submasters The order of the properties in the command does not matter but you can use each property only once per command The following records levels on the current display into a cue group or submaster and assigns a text string caption to it For effects the levels are recorded into the specified step and the text is assigned to the effect as a whole For submasters the text applies to all pages To delete an assigned text string omit the text CUE 1 TEXT H E L L 0 RECORD Direct 1 Digit and Direct 2 Digit RECORD CUE 1 TEX
191. acros 3000 Groups 500 Preset Focus Groups 500 Effects 300 Effect Steps Effect 99 Max Effect Steps 1500 Effect Playbacks 12 Profiles 99 SMPTE Events 2000 Patches 1 Atts Channel 99 Fixture Library 99 Handheld Remotes 2 No of Show File Backups 1 Remote Video 9 Model 48 96 Manual Memory e Intensity Channels 100 e Attribute Channels 100 e VGA Monitors as Standard 1 e DMX Outputs 1024 1536 e No of Subs Super G Masters 24 e Sub Pages 4 e Cues 600 e Cue P Backs 2 e Max Simult Fades 100 e Macros 3000 e Groups 500 e Preset Focus Groups 500 e Effects 300 e Effect Steps Effect 99 e Max Effect Steps 1500 e Effect Playbacks 12 e Profiles 99 e SMPTE Events 2000 e Patches 1 e Atts Channel 99 e Fixture Library 99 e Handheld Remotes 2 e Remote Video 9 e No of Show File Backups 1 Memory 125 e Intensity Channels 125 e Attribute Channels 125 e VGA Monitors as Standard 1 e DMX Outputs 1024 1536 e No of Subs Super G Masters 24 e Sub Pages 4 e Cues 600 e Cue P Backs 2 e Max Simult Fades 100 e Macros 3000 e Groups 500 e Preset Focus Groups 500 e Effects 300 e Effect Steps Effect 99 e Max Effect Steps 1500 e Effect Playbacks 12 e Profiles 99 e SMPTE Events 2000 e Patches 1 2 37 Atts Channel 99 Fixture Library 99 Handheld Remotes 2 Remote Video 9
192. ads a cue into the playback This does not affect the output until you press GO to run the cue To load the current cue omit the cue number The CUE field in the right LCD shows the current cue CUE LOAD Direct 1 and 2 Digit LOAD CUE Command Line Loads the current cue into the playback CUE 1 2 LOAD Direct 1 and 2 Digit LOAD CUE 1 2 Command Line Loads cue 1 2 into the playback LOAD 1 2 A Modes Loads cue 1 2 into the playback the CUE key is assumed CUE GO Loads and runs the cue It is equivalent to CUE LOAD followed by GO CUE GO Al Modes Loads and runs the current cue CUE 1 2 GO All Modes Loads and runs cue 1 2 Loading a Cue With Overrides The cue times links and profiles can be temporarily overridden when loading the cue using the same syntax as when recording the cue In addition you can load any cue as a Move Fade Tracking Cue regardless of how it was recorded This does not permanently change the properties of the cue CUE TIME 2 3 DELAY 4 WAIT 5 LOAD Direct 1 and 2 Digit LOAD CUE TIME 2 3 DELAY 4 WAIT 5 Command Line Loads the current cue into the playback with up and down fade times of 2 and 3 seconds down delay time of 4 seconds and wait time of 5 seconds CUE 2 LOAD Direct 1 and 2 Digit Loads cue 2 into the playback and forces it to be a Move Fade GeniusP
193. again to toggle the console lock off On the 510i show controller turn the keyswitch to the locked position and remove the key Remote Consoles Note Remote Consoles use Point to Point communications in which IP addresses are used and MUST be unique Remote Console PC allows one Main and several Remote consoles to work together on the same show file at the same time The main and remote need not have the same configuration of software or hardware Each console PC user has their own command line and screen but shares the same show cues groups effects etc The main console and all remote consoles and PCs must have Operating Software and Networker Utilities software of the same version loaded Networker Utilities software is loaded using the same Archive menu sequence as for Operating Software In addition you can load the Server application to use the Login display with its easy mode change and login facilities Without Server you need to force remote mode without using the login display as described below The following topics are covered in this section Remote Console Configuration Setting Remote Console Mode Without Using the Login Display Using Remote Console Submasters Remote Console Status Remote Console Controls Channel Partitioning Viewing Other User s Displays O 0 0 O 00 Remote Console Configuration You can use consoles or PCs as main or backup consoles Ensure that the same version of the operating softw
194. ain a floppy drive However the only method for the SN104 is to download it via the IOFTPxxx program The procedure for doing it is as follows 1 Determine the node name or IP address of the SN104 2 Create the batch file locally on the PC which you will use to run the IOFTPxxx program 29 329 Assuming that the file is in the directory from which you will run IOFTPxxx run the following IOFTPxxx LOGIN nodename PUT RECOVER BAT LOGOUT QUIT Network DMX Note Network DMX uses Broadcast communication in which IP addresses are not used First in the Network section of the Console Setup Screen set Networker to ON Then set the NET1 4 Network DMX ports to OUT This outputs console DMX to the network in 4 ranges often called Universes if they are 512 bytes long Range defaults for 430 520 530 and 550 Start End Slot 1 512 1 513 1024 513 1025 1536 1025 1537 2048 1537 Range defaults for 510i 520i 530i and 550i fitted with Pentium Pro processors Start End Slot 1 1024 1 1025 2048 2049 2049 3072 2049 3073 4096 3073 The Start address is the number of the first Output see Output in Patch synonymous with Dimmer which is output on the Network DMX port The End address is the number of the last Output see Output in Patch synonymous with Dimmer which is output on the Network DMX port The Slot address is the starting point in the network DMX slot range of 1 to 18432 where the DMX OUT port range is broadcast to If more
195. alog 5 volt output with up to 384 channels Audio female 3 pin XLR Pin Description Pin 1 Ground Pin2 s iH Pina C i Mono balanced audio input dynamic range 10mV 10v Remote Analog female 15 pin D type Pin Description Pin 1 Remote inputi Pin 2 Remote input2 Ping o Remoteinpt3 Pin 4 Remote input 4 Pind Remoteinput5 Pine Remoteinput6 Pin 7 Remote input7 Pin 8 Remote input8 Pin 9 Remote input 9 Pinto o Remoteinptto Pini Remoteinputtt Pin 12 Remote input12 Pin 13 Ground Pin 14 Ground Pin 15 10 VDC 25MmA Analog 0 10V remote fader or switch inputs which can be supplied from the current limited source at pin 10 or from an external 10VDC source MIDI male 5 pin DIN Pin Description Pin 1 Not connected Pin 2 Ground Pin 3 Not connected Pin 4 Data 27 300 Pins Data Asynchronous serial 1 start bit 8 data bits 1 stop bit no parity 31250 baud Printer Port female 25 pin D type Pin Description Pin 1 Strobe Pin 2 Data 0 Pin 3 Data 1 Pin 4 Data 2 Pin 5 Data 3 Pin 6 Data 4 Pin Data 5 Pin 8 Data 6 Pin 9 Data 7 Pin 10 Ack Pin 11 Busy Pin 12 Paper end Pin 13 Selected Pin 14 Auto feed Pin 15 Error Pin 16 Init Pin 17 Select in Pin 18 25 Ground Normal and extended Centronics parallel port modes LPT1 Serial Ports 1 amp 2 male 9 pin D type Pin Description Pin 1 Data carrier detect Pin 2 Receive data Pin 3 Transmit data Pin
196. and Faders o MIDI Note o MIDI Message o MIDI Trigger Macro e Audio Input Macro e ASCII Remote Control Output e ASCII Remote Go Output e ASCII Remote Control Input e SMPTE Time Code Events o Event List o Time Code Format and Synchronisation o Event List Menu XIX o Inserting and Deleting Events o Editing Event Labels Cues and Commands o Selecting Events for Time Editing o Editing Timecodes o Moving or Copying Events with Time Edit Commands o Searching for Events Using Time Edit Commands o Timecode Event Playback Screen o Setting the Event Playback Start and Stop Time o Setting Resetting the Internal SMPTE Clock o Stepping the Light Show Timing o Changes in SMPTE External Clock Input Chapter 29 Networker Software Network Port Selection Node Addresses Broadcast Communication Point to Point Communication Default IP Addresses 220node cfg Network Configuration File SN10X Configuration File Format Network Node Configuration File Example SN10X Node Self Test Software Preserving Configuration Files Network DMX Network Video Tracking Backup o Overview of Tracking Backup o Configuration for Tracking Backup o Tracking Backup Status o Tracking Backup Commands Page 322 o Shifted Backup Commands o Testing Backup Takeover o Console Lock on Backup e Remote Consoles o Remote Console Configuration o Setting Remote Console Mode Without Using the Login Display o Using Remote Console Submasters o Remote Console St
197. and would normally be done when the console is first powered on When disconnected the main and backup console can both run different shows provided they are configured not to output network DMX or video to the same slots at the same time and cause a conflict The status of the backup and main is always displayed in a small window under the wheel bar Configuration for Tracking Backup You can use consoles or PCs as main or backup consoles To guarantee tracking both main and backup must have identical passwords number of channels applications loaded This now also applies to PCs now that PC dongles are registered with channels and applications Note PCs no longer need to have a dual VGA card A PC used for backup should also have its number of submasters set to match those of the main This can be done by creating a file called USERINIT BAT in the backup PC program directory with a line according to the main console type If the main is a 520 the line should be SET 220NUMSUBS 24 If the main is a 530 SET 220NUMSUBS 30 If the main is a 550 SET 220NUMSUBS 54 This file does not need editing after installing new software Never edit the AUTOEXEC BAT or CONFIG SYS files these are recreated when new software is installed A backup console with a different number of submasters to the main also needs 220NUMSUBS setting to match the main You must have a floppy disk in main and backup drives if you use disk archive ope
198. ands 300 Series Differences A special version of the GeniusPro Lightpalette operating software and the application software packages has been developed to run on 300 series consoles While all of the functionality available on the 500 series consoles is also available on 300 series consoles a number of keys on the 500 series consoles are omitted from the 300 series consoles Specifically the REC TIME SUB PAGE BUMP MODE FX SEL FX DIR FX TIME and FX LOAD keys are not available on the 300 series consoles The 300 series consoles have an intellimouse in place of the trackball and rotaries and have only one LCD display It should be emphasised unless specifically stated otherwise that all software functions described in this manual are available within all consoles Where keys are omitted there are other methods of achieving the same result e g Edit Mode by using an ASCII Keyboard and PC Emulation Template by creating a macro to simulate the key function or by key remapping Note The Strand logo key on 300 Series Consoles is equivalent to the SHIFT key on 500 Series consoles Differences in operation between 500 and 300 series consoles are explained at the appropriate points in this manual The functions performed by the trackball on a 500 series console can be performed on a 300 series console using the Microsoft Intellimouse Trackball connected to the PS2 or COM ports on the command module processor unit When a mouse
199. ange the current cue together with its intensity or attribute level a Intensity change b Attribute change or frames 20 232 Used in Cues The first and last cues having an effect on the selected channel Cue Moves Up The total number of cross fade and movefade cues that increase the level of the channel a Total cues which change intensity or attributes b Total cues that change specified attribute Cue Moves Down The total number of cross fade and movefade cues that decrease the level of the channel a Total cues which change intensity or attributes b Total cues that change specified attribute Controlled By X PLAYBACK FX PLAYBACK SUBMASTER or CHANNEL CONTROL followed by user node HAND HELD or blank if not controlled Hold Status Whether the channel or channel attribute is held autoheld or not held Active in Special Groups List of special groups that specify the channel GM1 GM2 X1 X2 ON PREHEAT DISPLAY or NONE Channel Partitioning The name of the channel partitioning group specfying the channel as user node or NONE or PARTITIONING OFF The Cue Summary Screen Command Syntax a CUE REPORT No cue or part specified uses current cue b CUE 1 2 3 4 REPORT No Part specified Cue 0 is allowed c CUE 1 PART 2 REPORT Part specified 20 233 Playback CUE Status X Playback Intensities Moving Up Dow Wait Time intensities Set But Unchanged Link t
200. antee its performance Win95 NT PC Server Making a standalone server on a Win95 or NT PC is not as simple as running the above DOS commands in a DOS box it won t work You need to follow the steps under Windows Network Configuration in the ShowNet Configuration Software In short 1 2 AM 31 360 If you have not yet configured your Ethernet card under Win9X NT follow the supplier s instructions for doing so Add this line to the end of your AUTOEXEC BAT startup file WINPKT 0x7e Then restart Windows Insert the Networker and Utilities Disk in the floppy drive and open the 3 1 2 floppy A window in Windows Explorer or Windows NT Explorer Double click on CNINSTAL exe above version 2 3f You will be given a choice of platform e g 3 300 Series 4 400 Series 5 500 Series B Backup PC O Offline Editor F File Server To install the File Server type F If the installation program detects that operating software is present it will prompt you to load into the same directory If not you can specify any directory The Strand Lighting licence agreement is displayed on screen Press any key to scroll the display If you agree with the terms of the licence press Y or press N to terminate the installation 9 The File Server software will install on your PC 10 If the installation was successful Instal Successful is displayed on screen 11 Using Windows Explorer or WindowsNT Explorer to locate OFTP32 E
201. apped with then A confirmation is requested after each command Press again The following example assumes that a PALS Piouette 16 is patched to outputs 25 through 28 and a PALS Pirouette is patched to outputs 9 through 12 2 5 THRU 3 0 SWAP PATCH 9 Swaps a PALS Pirouette 16 patched to outputs 25 through 30 with a PALS Pirouette patched to outputs 9 through 12 Press BACK to return to the LCD Patch menu 13 185 Note The required number of outputs must be available in the swap to position otherwise the swap cannot take place and an invalid range error message displayed If say an eight output fixture is being swapped with a six output fixture all eight outputs will be swapped including any attributes on the other two outputs Changing the Output Numbering Style To change the Patch display between showing standard output numbers and showing output numbers in Universe Dmx format press DMX OUTPUT 1 Press SET on the LCD Patch menu to show the LCD Set Patch menu Press DMX OUTPUT If the patch previously showed standard output numbers these change to Universe Dmx format If output numbers were shown in Universe Dmx format they will now be shown as standard output numbers 3 Press BACK to return to the LCD Patch menu Note Regardless of how the output numbers are displayed on the Patch Screen you can mix and match formats in your output selection commands Customising the Patch Dis
202. apter 17 The Archive Screen Archive Selection Window Show List Window Software Operations eo e Password Operations Loading Operating Software Page 176 Page 193 Page 196 Page 199 ix o Loading Application Software e Disk Operations o Why Save a Show o Storing Floppy Disks o Naming the Show o Changing the Current Drive and Directory o Saving a Show o Loading a Show o Restoring or Deleting a Backup Copy of the Show o Local Disk Functions Creating a Local Disk Directory Copy a Show Delete a Show from the Local Disk Delete a Local Disk Directory Formatting a Floppy Disk Write Protecting the Floppy Disk e Print Operations o Printer Setup o Printing e Clear Operations Chapter 18 Macros Page 200 e Macro Properties e Pre Assigned Macros e Learning a Macro e Deleting a Macro e Running a Macro Manually e Running a Macro Automatically e Viewing Macros e Creating a New Macro e Editing Macros e Macro Tablet o Setting Up the Macro Tablet o Using the Macro Tablet o Fitting the Macro Tablet Template o Defining Learning Editing and Deleting Macro Tablet Macros e Macro Trigger Card Chapter 19 Profiles Page 215 e Profile Properties e Predefined Profiles e Viewing and Editing Profiles o The Profile Display o The Current Profile o Creating Profiles o Using End Editing o Using DMX Values for Points o Using Graph Editing o Deleting a Profile o Profile Learn Viewing and Editin
203. are are installed on both main and remote Ensure that Networker amp Utilities is loaded on both main and remote 29 337 Ensure that the main and remote console 220node cfg files are setup as shown below My_nodeaddr needs to be unique for both consoles Edit main 220node cfg my_nodeaddr 192 168 000 68 my_nodetype 530 console type my_nodename main on_line 1 IP address of main console to connect to user edited console_addr 192 168 000 68 Define how this node starts up user and system edited O remote or 1 backup or 2 main console backup_mode 2 Edit the remote 220node cfg my_nodeaddr 192 168 000 69 my_nodetype 530 console type my_nodename remote IP address of main console to connect to user edited console_addr 192 168 000 68 Define how this node starts up user and system edited 0 remote or 1 backup or 2 main console backup_mode 0 Setting Remote Console Mode Without Using The Login Display If a console is to always start as a remote logged in to a particular main console edit 220NODE CFG like this login_display 0 console_addr 192 168 0 68 or whatever the main console s address is backup_mode 0 Other fixed startup modes are main backup_mode 2 backup backup_mode 1 Using Remote Console Submasters When a remote console logs in its submaster faders control the same submasters as the faders on the main console For a fader to take contr
204. ary 3 Down kt Bn 11 23 31 xx Rotary 4 Up rt Bn 11 24 31 xx Rotary 4 Down rt Bn 11 25 31 xx PB Wheel Up ht Bn 11 26 31 xx PB Wheel Down rt Bn 11 27 31 xx Reserved Colour keys kt Bn 11 28 31 xx Reserved MTC rt Bn 11 A9 31 xx Bn 11 7F 31 xx undefined Bn 12 xx Bn 2F xx Bn 30 xx LSB of Fader Events see above O Bn31xx LSB of Misc Events see above Bn 32 xx Bn 7F xx undefined Note Off 8n nn xx bump key nn release r Note Off 28 318 9n nn xx xx 00 bump key nn release x gt 0 bump key nn press Polyphonic Key Pressure Program Change Channel Pressure Pitch Bend System Common Messages FO Start of Exclusive see below ki F3 xx Song Select ho F6 TuneRequet ho F7 End of Exclusive see below kt System Exclusive Midi Show Control MSC id MSC ID 00 6f 7F All Call cf MSC Command Format 01 Lighting 7F All Call dd Up to 5 bytes of optional data specifying cue number tt Up to 10 bytes of optional data specifying cue number and fade time mm macro number FO 7F id 02 cf 01 F7 GO CUE Hit GO key r FO 7F id 02 cf 01 dd F7 GO CUE Load and GO FO 7F id 02 cf 02 F7 STOP CUE Hit STOP key r FO 7F id 02 cf03 F7 RESUME CUE Hit GO key y TIMED GO CUE Load and FO 7F id 02 cf 04 tt F7 GO time gora a n FO 7F id 02 cf 05 dd F7 LOAD CUE Loa FO 7F id 02 cf 06 F7 SET FO 7Fid02cf07mmF7
205. as struts however take care whilst working inside that you do not lean on the lid or tip the console forward causing the lid to close 34 388 4 Remove the blanking plate covering the aperture in the rear labelled Network Card by removing the small pan head screw on the top of the blanking plate inside the console 5 Insert the network card into the now free slot ensuring it is correctly seated Secure the card with the screw previously removed 6 Configure the Ethernet Card as described below then close the top of the console and secure it to the base with the three pan head screws on underside near the front Configuring the Ethernet Card Parameter Settings Note I O Base Address 300h Interrupt 10 Ethernet Port BNC RJ45 AUI Plug and Play BIOS OFF This must be turned off To change the defaults or run the Ethernet card self test software follow these instructions Make sure you have a PC keyboard connected to the console Power up the console Exit from the startup sequence with CTRL BREAK or from the operating software with CTRL X Run the 3C5X9CFG EXE program supplied on a floppy disk with the network card Using the on screen menus change the parameters as desired Select the test option and ensure that all tests pass Exit from the network card configuration utility Power down the console a ee oS OS 34 389 Chapter 35 Networker for SN10X Software Installation Notes 1 Networker for SN10X softwa
206. ata in database file formats for subsequent off line analysis It only runs under Windows 9X or Windows NT and converts show files between the following formats Ascii Light Cues Strand Show Files Comma Separated Values The following topics are covered in this section e Showport Software Installation e Running Showport Software e Showport File Formats Showport Software Installation Showport software is available as part of the GeniusPro or Lightpalette Networker Utilities Disk To complete the installation of Showport you must exit GeniusPro or Lightpalette to DOS and do the following Create a directory mkdir c showport Move to directory cd c showport Copy showport install file to directory zip _sh exe is found in the operating software directory after installation of the Networker Utilities copy zip_sh exe c showport zip_sh exe Expand zip file zip_sh Select language help file and copy to showport help file e g 36 395 copy english msg showport msg After installation read the RELEASE2 TXT in the operating software directory for further important notes on PC configuration If the DOS installation fails try disabling SHARE or SMARTDRYV lines in the PCs AUTOEXEC BAT file You can enable them again after installation WARNING You should disable Norton Commander because it can cause hard disk corruption when running operating software on the PC Running Showport Software Once ShowPort is runnin
207. ate the new cue or CLR or UNDO to cancel the command 9 123 0o0O0 00000000900 0 090 BO O88 Be Oe BO BO Be Oe Be i MOESSON l 900 000000000000 00060 00 6000000000600 0009000000 X Playbacks Tracking On Wheel ol DELETE RENUM FROM SHEETP XREF Cue Preview Screen Cue Sheet Mode Lightpalette Spread Sheet Mode To show the main cue editing screen press SPREAD SHEET to switch to Spread Sheet mode 9 124 ASEM AIE oe cae i aal 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 45 46 ar 48 49 0 50 50 60 50 50 FL 0151 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 0175 0176 77 78 79 80 81 82 63 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 96 99 0200 0201 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 0225 0226 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 0250 Type pi wn A Delay a n oop Cmd Wheel XF 0 0 xe es alo vas XF 0 9 Net On Main XF wo EAAS User Serena Main Actve NoBackup aus a ae RR ETE Se 80 80 8060 10 10 30 40 40 40 60 86 40 24 30 0 0 0 00 0 0 60 0 9 0 60 06 0 0 6 09600 000000000 0000 0 090 0 2 0 0 A Ma 0 0 0 8 O80 8 8 8 Oe 8 8 0 90 0000000090080 000860 000 Type Up Dowr n Jelay Wait Link Loop Cmd Wheel Profile rofile Text AF 5 5 OFF BL OFF OFF Net On Main OFF para eset User Si ee Main Active NoBackup ESAE ESS AEEA 4 5 CUE 6 i DELETE RENUM FROM PART SHEET XREF 9 125 Cue Preview Scree
208. ation One of the Live menus enables you to fire the pre assigned macros HHM1 HHM2 HHM3 and 26 288 HHM4 refer to Pre Assigned Macros The combination of the F5 SHIFT and F1 MODE softkey allows you to access the additional sofkeys in Live or Patch mode F2 PROF F3 GROUP F4 DELAY F1 GOTO F2 DIMMER F3 WAIT R130 Handheld Remote HEE G ia jem fe ff ee LF ee 7 8 19 lake Dee Felt Dt Hs This section refers to the following remote handhelds for use with the Strand 300 400 and 500 series consoles and GeniusPro or Lightpalette software Part Number Description Contents 66128 Wired Remote NA Wired Remote 902 928 Mhz for USA FCC License exempt 66125 Radio Remote NA Battery Charger 120v PSU Belt Holster Wrist Strap 902 928 Mhz for USA FCC License exempt 66121 Base Station NA Battery Eliminator 120v PSU Base Station Cable e All parts require Operating Software V1 4 or later Please contact your dealer or Strand if you do not have this software e Check with local licensing authority before using radio units outside licence exempt areas This section covers the following topics o Installing and Configuring the R130 Handheld Remote o Operating the R130 Handheld Remote 26 289 Installing and Configuring the R130 Handheld Remote This section describes the installation and configuration of the following Installing the R130 Wired Remote Installing t
209. ation path or accept the default location by pressing lt Enter gt The Strand Lighting licence agreement is displayed on screen Press any key to scroll the display If you agree with the terms of the licence press Y or press N to terminate the installation The Help file will install on your PC 10 If the installation was successful Instal Successful is displayed on screen Installing the Help File Using Window 9x l 3 Insert the help disk in the floppy drive Open the A drive window and double click on the installation icon HCINSTAL You will be given a choice of platform e g 3 300 Series 4 400 Series 5 500 Series B Backup PC O Offline Editor F File Server Press O to instal the Offline Editor or B to install the backup PC software 25 277 5 Specify either GeniusPro or Lightpalette installation by typing g or i This should match the console software type 6 You will be prompted to enter a destination path for the Backup PC software By default the software will be installed in C geniusp or C lightp Enter a destination directory name of 8 characters or less or accept the default destination by pressing lt Enter gt 7 You will be prompted to enter a destination path for the show files By default the show files will be stored in C shows Enter a destination path or accept the default location by pressing lt Enter gt 8 The Strand Lighting licence agreement is displayed on screen Press any key
210. ator may move the lt marker to a different event using the SHIFT key and the softkeys displayed on the Event List as follows LAST Sets the lt marker and clock time to the last event NEXT Sets the lt marker and clock time to the next event BEGIN LIST Sets the lt marker and clock time to the first event on the list END LIST Sets the marker and clock time to the last event on the list The following softkeys clear any incomplete commands UNBUMP ALL Unbumps any bumped submasters STOP FX Stops all running effects Playback Display and Menu The layout and content of the Playback Display is determined by the options selected on the setup screen and the individual cue levels and properties attributed to each cue when first recorded using the lighting control console The 510i and 310 panels are designed as show playback units and do not provide direct editing facilities for cues without the aid of an external video display and keyboard or remote control The Cues and X Playback menu on the 510i and 310 panels are intended to provide the operator with the facility to view the cue list to select and load individual cues and to run the cue or cue sequence on demand The display shows the cue list for X1 or X2 A gt marker shown to the left of the cue number identifies the current cue The percentage completion of the last run cue is also displayed The next cue to run is indicated with a lt marker after the cue number T
211. ature that ensures that you have received a reliable supported and legal copy of the program Your completed registration will also enable us to keep you informed of all the latest advances in the programs you have purchased The following topics are covered in this section Pre Installed Software Upgrading Your Console Software Adding Additional Channels or Applications to Version 2 2 or Later Software Adding Additional Channels or Applications to Version 2 1 or Earlier Software Checking the Software Version Number Files Included on CD Pre Installed Software If you have purchased a new lighting control console the operating software is pre installed and configured so that you can use your system immediately In order that we can provide you with an efficient software support service it is important that you register the software Please complete the Software Registration Form supplied and return it to Strand Lighting Upgrading Your Console Software Note Due to new installation file names you can only upgrade the operating software to version 2 4a if version 2 3f is already installed on your console To obtain version 2 3f operating software refer to the Strand Internet site on http www strandlighting com or obtain the software from the 2 4a CD To verify the integrity of the operating software run the crccheck utility from DOS e g gt A gt CRCCHECK 5 files checked is displayed if all files are OK If you rec
212. atus o Remote Console Controls o Channel Partitioning o Viewing Other User s Displays e Remote Ports Chapter 30 Tracker Software Page 341 e Attributes o WhatAre Attributes o Using Attributes o Trackerball Keys o Rotary Controls o Mouse Control of Features e Tracker Displays o Smart Channel Display o Rotary Controls Window Live Display e Channel Control Syntax o Controlling Intensity and Attributes o Copying Channel Attributes e Patching Attributes o Patching Attributes to a Single Channel o Patching Fixtures o The Copy Patch Menu Copying Patch Information Moving Patch Information Swapping Patch Information o Range Patching e Recording and Playback o Attributes in Cues o Attributes in Submasters o Attributes LTP Intensities HTP o Auto Move While Dark e Referenced Groups Preset Focus e Colour Palettes e Attribute Filters e Updating Attribute Filters from the Live Screen e Fixture Library List Chapter 31 Server Software Page 358 e Creating a Standalone File Server Using a PC o Loading Networker amp Utilities on a PC using DOS 3 1 or later o Windows 95 NT PC Server o Configuring a File Server o Operating a File Server o Accessing a File Server e User Logins o Configuring Logins o Configuring Access Rights o Console Access Rights o Login Display o Logging In Without Using the Login Display o Seeing Who Else is Logged In o Exit Softkey e Integrating File Server and Logins xxii Chapter 32
213. bass beat and is only used when the Communiqu Pro software is loaded For more information refer to Audio Input Macro Remote Trigger Macro The macro that will be run from the Remote Control Input and is only used when the Communiqu Pro software is loaded For more information refer to ASCII Remote Control Input Trigger Bytes These three fields are only used when the Communiqu Pro software is loaded Refer to MIDI Trigger Macro for more detail External Submasters Window The External Submasters window is in the Console Setup display and lets you configure which internal submasters are run by the external submasters The node address of up to 12 external submasters can be set in this window In addition a scaling factor of between 80 and 120 can be file Cl LIGHTP HELP ENG PAGE31 HTM 6 of 7 6 17 2005 7 36 12 AM Console Setup applied to compensate for variations in signal levels between the console and the external equipment This functionality is only available with the Communiqu Pro software loaded See the Communiqu Pro for more detail For information on the network features of this option please refer to the Networker Top of Page file Cl LIGHTP HELP ENG PAGE31 HTM 7 of 7 6 17 2005 7 36 12 AM Show Setup Screen Show Setup Screen The Show Setup screen is displayed when you press the REPORT key followed by the ADV SETUP softkey then the SHOW SETUP softkey This display lets you control how values relati
214. bump button The submaster bump buttons are also controlled by the KEYS LATCH soft key accessed using the BUMP MODE key This softkey appears in the centre LCD consoles with 3 LCD displays or right LCD consoles with 2 LCD displays as labels above the soft keys The setting of the this softkey determines the operation of the submaster bump keys and the operation of the BUMP softkey on the channel control 7 80 display The other softkeys FLASH SOLO and FLASH SOLO control the action of the BUMP softkey on the channel control display and have no effect on the submaster bump keys For information on setting the action of the channel control BUMP softkey refer to Bumping Channel Levels Press this key to view the current setting A bar above the label shows the current mode Press BUMP MODE again to return to normal operation For consoles without a BUMP MODE key refer to Console Differences The KEYS LATCH softkey can only be selected when the FLASH softkey is also selected In SOLO or FLASH SOLO modes the KEYS LATCH is automatically disabled The KEYS ON and KEYS OFF soft keys have effect on the Submaster bump keys When KEYS LATCH is selected pressing and releasing the submaster bump keys bumps the levels until the bump button is pressed again KEYS LATCH When selected pressing and releasing a submaster bump key bump the levels until the bump button is pressed again KEYS ON While the bump
215. caption with each macro to help identify the macro In the text label for a macro any text after an exclamation point will be sent to the Macro Trigger Output port if you have the Communiqu Pro software the Macro Trigger Output field in the Console Setup Screen is set to On and the associated Net Node Port Baud and Config fields are set up correctly Refer to ASCII Remote Control Output 18 215 Pre Assigned Macros There are up to 3000 macros numbered 0 to 2999 Macros 951 to 964 are reserved as macros P1 to P14 You can access these macros directly using P1 through P14 or through the numeric keypad as macros 951 to 964 Macros 971 to 984 are reserved as macros SP1 to SP14 You can access these macros directly using SHIFT P1 through SHIFT P14 or through the numeric keypad as macros 971 to 984 Keys P8 through P14 and SHIFT P8 through SHIFT P14 are available only on 520 and 300 series consoles However you can access these macros from the keyboard on 530 and 550 consoles using 958 to 964 and 978 to 984 respectively Macros 991 to 996 are reserved as macros LCD1 to LCD6 You can access these macros directly through the centre LCD buttons or the first four through the four centre unlabelled keys in consoles with only 2 LCD displays or through the numeric keypad as macros 991 to 996 Macro 998 is reserved for the USER macro You can access this macro directly using USER or through the numeric keypad as macro 998
216. ch channel or range specified on the command line Refer to Direct Output Control AT CHAN Specifies that the number following in the command line is a channel number rather than a dimmer number Note The AT CHAN softkey enables the operator to address dimmer command line entries to channels patched to dimmers without knowing the dimmer numbers 21 246 BACKUP Enables a dimmer backup scene to be recorded In the event of a major failure the dimmer backup condition can then be set manually at the dimmer rack The following examples show how to set a backup scene for a dimmer rack RECORD DIMMER BACKUP 8 Command line DIMMER BACKUP 8 RECORD Direct digit Records backup scene 8 for all racks 1 99 recordable RECORD DIMMER BACKUP 8 TIME 5 Command line DIMMER BACKUP 8 TIME 5 RECORD Direct digit Records backup scene 8 and sets fade time of 5 seconds GOTO DIMMER BACKUP Instructs all dimmer racks to fade the backup scene in the recorded fade time 1 99 user recordable 0 blackout 254 fully on dimmer FILTER Displays a softkey menu enabling the operator to determine which fault types will be displayed on the Dimmer Filter display Note The commands shown below are used to set up the format of the Dimmer Filter display No action is taken until the DIMMER FILT softkey is selected from the Dimmer Log screen HIGH DC OVERLOAD OVERHEAT OUTPUT ERROR LOAD
217. channel if channel currently selected else next cue LAST A Modes last channel if channel currently selected else last cue REM DIM Ali Modes selected channels to on level and all other channels off Function Keys F1 to F4 The functions of keys F1 to F4 are determined by a combination of the F5 SHIFT softkey and the F1 MODE softkey which is available when the F5 SHIFT softkey is selected There are three Live Menus and one Patch Menu which are toggled using the F1 F5 key combination One of the Live menus enables you to fire the pre assigned macros HHM1 HHM2 HHM3 and HHM4 refer to Pre Assigned Macros The combination of the F5 SHIFT and F1 MODE softkey allows you to access the additional sofkeys in Live or Patch mode F2 PROF F3 GROUP F4 DELAY F1 GOTO F2 DIMMER F3 WAIT 26 292 Wireless Handheld Remote operating instructions Wireless Remote Operating Instructions Overview Strand Lighting s wireless handheld focus remote provides a wide range of console functions in a convenient flexible package using a Compaq iPaq Pocket PC with a wireless Ethernet card The system employs the Ethernet 802 11b WiFi compatible communications standard to provide reliable performance for facilities of any size The wireless remote will operate with any Strand console that supports network access including all 300 with network card installed and 500 series control systems Setup If you purchased you
218. ck s Channel Levels Channel Levels Submasters Channel Levels Channel Levels Effects Channel Levels Channel Levels X Playback s Submasters Channel Levels Channel Levels X Playback s Submasters Effects Channel Levels Channel Levels Events Channel Levels Channel Levels X Playback s Events Channel Levels Channel Levels X Playback s Events Effects Channel Levels Channel Levels Four Screens Screen 1 Screen 2 Screen 3 Screen 4 X Playback s Channel Levels Channel Levels Channel Levels Submasters Channel Levels Channel Levels Channel Levels Effects Channel Levels Channel Levels Channel Levels X Playback s Submasters Channel Levels Channel Levels X Playback s Submasters Effects Channel Levels Channel Levels Events Channel Levels Channel Levels Channel Levels X Playback s Events Channel Levels Channel Levels Channel Levels X Playback s Events Effects Channel Levels Channel Levels Channel Levels 4 50 Notes 1 The third and fourth screen only ever shows channel levels The number of channels displayed on the channel display screen s depends on whether GeniusPro or Lightpalette are being used and on the setting of the Channel Display field in the User Setup Screen Pressing PAGE UP or PAGE DOWN displays the next screen of channels 2 When the CUE GROUP SUB or FX key is pressed the 2nd 3rd and 4th screen if fitted
219. cks 12 Profiles 99 SMPTE Events 2000 Patches 1 Atts Channel 99 Fixture Library 99 Handheld Remotes 2 Remote Video 9 No of Show File Backups 1 120 Submaster Intensity Channels 600 Attribute Channels 400 VGA Monitors as Standard 2 DMX Outputs 1024 1536 No of Subs Super G Masters 120 2 39 Sub Pages 4 Cues 600 Cue P Backs 2 Max Simult Fades 100 Macros 3000 Groups 500 Preset Focus Groups 500 Effects 300 Effect Steps Effect 99 Max Effect Steps 1500 Effect Playbacks 12 Profiles 50 SMPTE Events 2000 Patches 1 Atts Channel 99 Fixture Library 99 Handheld Remotes 2 Remote Video 9 No of Show File Backups 1 500 Series Consoles 520 Console 2 40 Intensity Channels 200 Attribute Channels 200 VGA Monitors as Standard 2 DMX Outputs 1024 1536 No of Subs Super G Masters 24 Sub Pages 6 Cues 2000 Cue P Backs 2 Max Simult Fades 200 Macros 3000 Groups 1000 Preset Focus Groups 750 Effects 600 Effect Steps Effect 99 Max Effect Steps 14850 Effect Playbacks 30 Profiles 99 SMPTE Events 3000 Patches 2 Atts Channel 99 Fixture Library 99 Handheld Remotes 4 Remote Video 9 No of Show File Backups 10 520i Series Console e Intensity Channels 250 or 350 e Attribute Channels 250 e VGA Monitors as Standard 2 e DMX Outputs 1024 1536 e No of Subs Super G Master
220. cleared If you lose the new files you can get them back by re installing the software All comment lines are moved to the top of the files when these files are updated after clearing or loading a show and when the Notes editor is used You can preserve your LIB files through software installation by copying them from OLD s using RECOVER BAT Site Configuration Files OS BAT This is NOT a site configuration file If you edit this file your changes will be lost when you install new software Instead edit files starting with USER which OS BAT runs for you if they exist They are all optional the software will run without them USEREXEC BAT optional At every startup the console AUTOEXEC BAT file looks for a file called USEREXEC BAT and if it exists it is run This file is not installed with the software you 37 402 provide it yourself You can use it to log on to a network file server install your keyboard language support set DOS environment variables such as 220maxmem or anything else required at startup USERINIT BAT optional Every time the console is started from DOS using OS GENIUSP or LIGHTP USERINIT BAT is run if it is there Use it to set enviroment variables or to force a console to log in as a remote to another main by adding the line ECHO gt REMOTE CFG RECOVER BAT recommended After new Operating Software is installed the RECOVER BAT batch file is run if it exists Again you provide it if it is n
221. commended Recommended for long runs 50 125 110 ohm UTP External 62 5 125 Cable 22 26AWG RASA OT 50 Ohm Coax Transceiver 80 125 2 pairs Drop 100 140 micron core BNC isolated D type 15 pin Connector 8 pin RJ 45 ground N Series male Female dual ST 10BASE FL Maximum 2 0 km 1 24 Segment 100m 330ft Team OOM 50m 165ft miles FOIRL Length standard 500m 1640 ft 1 0 km 0 62 miles Minimum Cable Length 0 6m 2ft 0 5m 1 5ft 2 5m 8 2ft 0 0 Between Nodes Maximum Number of Nodes per 2 30 100 2 2 Segment Twisted Pair Wiring RJ 45 Pin PDS 258A Wire Color 10BT UTP 1 T2 White Orange stripe Transmit 2 R2 Orange White stripe Transmit 3 T3 White Green stripe Receive 4 R1 Blue White stripe 5 T1 White Blue stripe 6 R3 Green White stripe Receive T T4 White Brown stripe 8 R4 Brown White stripe Network Topology Ethernet network topology as referred to in networking terms is simply a map of how a system is or will be laid out Depending on the type of equipment in an installation the topology can be either a linear or star configuration or a combination of the two Each run of cable in a LAN is known as a segment hence a LAN Local Area Network can be made up of one or more segments A linear network topology is one that is made up of directly interconnected segments a node exists at each segment intersection A star network topology is one where each node is 34 385 connected to a central hub The hub establishes
222. connect to and press OK The WIFI port you select must be enabled on the console you are addressing for the remote to operate Note that the second option under the console selection menu is Exit Exit terminates the focus remote application Select Console x 19 29 fok Enter IP address of console to connect to el Fl Be Select port to use on console v2 5d E Modes You are now ready to select an operation mode and use your remote All actions are confirmed by the command line display on the remote This display is generated by the console and confirms that all data entries are received There are four operating modes Channel control Record X Playback and Patch Channel Control 26 295 This mode allows you to select channels groups and submasters This mode is ideal for focus sessions and allows users access to all dimmers and moving light attributes This mode operates exactly the same as level setting on a control console Record The record display adds keys for recording cues groups and submaster assignment in addition to allowing access to channel levels All basic level setting is available in this display Note that the Update command on each remote will only update channels that have been under control of the remote Playback Playback mode gives users access to both console playbacks Cues may be loaded started and stopped For dual playback operation the console must have this function enabled in Se
223. cro While the SHIFT key is depressed or toggled On 310 an alternative set of LCD softkeys is displayed as follows LAST 8 Displays the previous eight macros NEXT 8 Displays the next eight macros MACRO 100 As before MACRO 100 As before FIRST MACRO As before RUN As before Note Macros 951 to 964 and 971 to 984 are reserved for the fourteen macro keys on the 510i panel and 310 on screen softkeys Pressing P1 to P14 selects and runs macros 951 to 964 respectively Pressing SHIFT P1 to P14 selects SP1 to SP14 and runs macros 971 to 984 respectively All 28 macros can be selected and run from the macro display as described above Pressing the USER button on the panel applies macro 998 Pressing the STOP SHOW button runs macro 997 Submasters Display and Menu The 510i and 310 Submaster Display and Menu enables viewing and play back of up to 54 submasters previously recorded using a Series 500 or Series 300 console The display shows eight subs at a time from the currently selected sub page and displays the sub number level text and associated macro against each sub The currently selected sub is identified by a gt marker after the sub number Using the LCD softkeys the operator can scan through the six pages of subs select a sub from the displayed page and increment decrement or bump the sub level as follows LAST Moves the marker to the previous sub on the page NEXT Moves the marker to the
224. cro Tablet Macros Macros assigned to the macro tablet are defined learned edited and deleted in the same way as macros assigned to the console Refer to instructions contained in this section 18 223 Chapter 19 Profiles Profiles let you change the fade characteristics of cues effects and outputs For cues you can assign profiles separately to the up fade down fade and attribute fade times For effects the profile applies to the fade up and fade down times of the effect not an effect step You can modify the fade characteristics of a fixture intensity by attaching a profile to the intensity output for the fixture and modify the movement characteristics of the fixture by attaching profiles to appropriate attribute outputs You can modify profiles in 1 or 5 increments graphically or through the command line or with DMX values 0 255 through the command line When you are editing with 256 step resolution the points are displayed as coordinates rather than as a graph Profiles can be recorded viewed and edited only from the Profile display Once recorded they can be attached to cues effects or outputs This section shows you how to create the profiles and contains the following topics e Profile Properties e Predefined Profiles e Viewing and Editing Profiles e Profile Learn o Viewing and Editing Learned Profiles Stopping the Learn Process O o Assigning Profiles o Undoing a Profile Profile Properties Profiles
225. cue stops the effect If the cue exists an overrecord message gives you the chance to cancel the recording To rerecord the cue press RECORD again To cancel the recording press CLR or UNDO For GeniusPro effects run by cues are stopped if you use CUE CUT or CUE GO except in Move Fade cues To go to a new cue without stopping these effects use CUE GO if the cue is a Move Fade or CUE LOAD GO for any fade For Lightpalette Effects run by cues are stopped if you use GOTO CUE To go to anew cue without stopping these effects use LOAD CUE GO 8 100 The effect starts positive effect number or stops negative effect number when you run the cue The up fade time of the cue overrides the fade up time of a starting effect The down fade time of the cue overrides the fade down time of a stopping effect To delete an assigned effect omit the effect number CUE 1 FX 2 RECORD Direct 1 and 2 Digit RECORD CUE 1 FX 2 Command Line Records levels into cue 1 and assigns effect 2 start to it CUE 2 FX L 2 RECORD Direct 1 and 2 Digit RECORD CUE 2 FX 2 Command Line Records levels into cue 2 and assigns effect 2 stop to it CUE 1 FX RECORD Direct 1 and 2 Digit RECORD CUE 1 FX Command Line Records levels into cue 1 and deletes any assigned effect cue FX changes the effect start or stop assigned to the specified
226. cue without changing recorded levels If the cue doesn t exist creates a new cue with no levels but with the specified effect assignment You do not get an overrecord warning with this command if the cue exists CUE 1 FX A Modes Deletes the effect assigned to cue 1 without changing recorded levels CUE 1 FX 3 All Modes Changes the effect assigned to cue 1 to effect 3 start without changing recorded levels CUE 2 FX 3 A Modes Changes the effect assigned to cue 1 to effect 3 stop without changing recorded levels Assigning a Macro RECORD cue MACRO RECORD records the levels on the Live display into the specified cue and assigns a macro to it If the cue already exists an overrecord message gives you the chance to cancel the recording To rerecord the cue press RECORD again To cancel the recording press CLR or UNDO When the cue is run the macro is automatically started To delete an assigned macro omit the macro number CUE 1 MACRO 3 RECORD Direct 1 and 2 Digit RECORD CUE 1 MACRO 3 Command Line Records levels into cue 1 and assigns Macro 3 to it CUE 1 MACRO RECORD Direct 1 and 2 Digit RECORD CUE 1 MACRO Command Line Records levels into cue 1 and deletes any assigned macro cue MACRO changes the macro assigned to the specified cue without changing recorded levels If the cue doesn t exist creates a new cue w
227. cues from the Archive display refer to Clear Operations in the Archive Screen DELETE This soft key appears on the LCD Preview menu and deletes the cue parts Either a single part or a single THRU range can be specified If you do not specify a part number part 1 is deleted This can be used with and THRU keys DELETE DELETE Direct 1 and 2 Digit DELETE Command Line Deletes the current cue part 1 CUE 1 DELETE DELETE Direct 1 and 2 Digit DELETE 1 Command Line Deletes cue 1 part 1 CUE 1 PART 2 DELETE DELETE Direct 1 and 2 Digit DELETE 1 PART 2 Command Line Deletes cue 1 part 2 CUE 1 THRU 3 DELETE DELETE Direct 1 and 2 Digit DELETE 1 THRU 3 Command Line Deletes cues 1 part 1 to cue 3 part 1 Renumbering Cues Renumbering changes the cue numbers so that they start at 1 and increase in increments of 1 that is 1 2 3 cue parts are also renumbered similarly Decimal point cues are changed to whole number cues but the order of cues remains the same You can renumber the whole cue sheet or specify a start cue for renumbering Link properties in the cues are updated to reflect the new cue numbers RENUM renumbers all cues starting at cue 1 RENUM RENUM All Modes Renumbers all cues two key presses CUE FROM RENUM RENUM renumbers all cues starting with the cue specified to new numbers starting with the Fr
228. d Screen Setup The configuration from the Setup Screens 17 201 The Show List Window The show list appears at the bottom of the Archive display when you press ARCHIVE To move the highlight to the show list press BROWSE FILES To move the highlight back to the Archive Selection window press BACK Archive Selection ww SELECT PAGE FIRST LAST NUMBER Patch FROM Cues Groups Effects WHOLE SHOW _ Macros Profiles Events Submasters Fixtures Auto Mod ATC Pages Setup Show Cues Date Time Filename Backups C J 6 13 01 99 15 42 showt A v2d2 78 O9 7 99 12 24 show2 oe Net On Main inte e User Current Show Show to Save Show to Load Copy Delete Restore TA Sa S No Title Disk Directory Main Active NoBackup Ceasar The following show list data is displayed Local Disk The current drive and directory when it is on the internal hard disk drive This is the drive and directory to which the currently loaded show will be saved Server Disk The current drive and directory when it is on the server hard disk drive Only available if the Server application software is installed and properly configured Floppy Disk The current drive and directory when it is the floppy disk Current Show Show to Save Show currently loaded in console Show to Load Copy Delete Restore The file name and address of the show selected to Load Copy Delete or Restore The following data is displayed for each show Show The show
229. d Line or CUE 2 RECORD Direct Entry will copy the levels from submaster 1 into cue 2 Submasters are recorded into the current submaster page of the Submaster display You cannot copy submasters between pages Since submasters are recorded into the current submaster page of the Submaster display this copies the submaster to a different submaster in the same submaster page There is no direct way to copy a submaster to another page You can copy submasters to another page indirectly by following the steps below which use the Live display to record the contents of page1 submaster 1 into page 3 submaster 4 Go to the Live display and make sure all channels are off Press SUB PAGE 1 to set the initial submaster page Press SUB 1 FULL to set the submaster levels in the current display Press SUB PAGE 3 to change the submaster page for 300 series consoles the SUB PAGE key can be simulated using the V key on an ASCII keyboard Press SUB 4 RECORD Direct Entry Mode or RECORD SUB 4 Command Line Mode to record the new submaster Note On consoles without a SUB PAGE key refer to Console Differences One and Two Scene Preset All 300 and 500 series control desks can be set up to operate as a conventional single or two scene preset lighting desk with or without a submaster bank 300 series control desks are provided with two PB MODE keys which are used to set the functions of th
230. d out faults for each output are indicated by a yellow tick under the particular fault type Recording a Dimmer Backup Scene This Reporter feature enables a backup scene to be recorded In the event of a major failure the dimmer backup scene can then be set manually from the dimmer rack Up to 99 different backup scenes can be recorded The following examples show how to set a backup scene for a dimmer rack DIMMER BACKUP 8 RECORD Records the dimmer backup scene 8 for all racks Direct Action Mode RECORD DIMMER BACKUP 8 Records dimmer backup scene 8 for all racks Command Line Mode You can also record a backup fade time within a backup command as shown DIMMER BACKUP 8 TIME 5 RECORD Records dimmer backup scene 8 and sets a fade time of 5 seconds Direct Action Mode RECORD DIMMER BACKUP 8 TIME 5 Records dimmer backup scene 8 and set a fade time of 5 seconds Command Line Mode GOTO DIMMER BACKUP 8 Instructs all dimmer racks to fade to the backup scene 8 in the recorded fade time All Modes 21 250 Chapter 22 Notes Notes provides the user with the facility to type edit and save notes to access the Readme First file containing release text about the software installed on the console and to load view and amend the Attribute Control Page ATC Page Fixture Library and the files associated with the Network Configuration Key Wheel and VDU Remapping configuration an
231. d remotes can be connected to any AUX port AUX 3 only for old electronics e All 4 DMX ports are supported DMX 4 is of opposite gender to the others for use as a DMX input although it can be set as a fourth output DMX 3 is available as an input with old electronics e New SMPTE input port accessible via the Audio connector 520 Series Differences Apart from the number of submaster faders the 520 and 520i have a number of mechanical differences from the other consoles as follows e 520 and 520i does not have an On Off button and Stop button at the top of the console An On Off switch is fitted at the rear of the console e 520 and 520i does not have Grandmaster faders You can assign submasters as Grandmasters faders e 520 and 520i does not have a separate Rate Wheel the Level Wheel doubles as a Rate Wheel e 520 and 520i does not have a centre LCD e 520 and 520i has only four centre softkeys 1 32 e 520 and 520i has 14 direct macro keys rather than 7 e 520 and 520i has the floppy disk drive fitted below the front of the console 520 Series LCD Softkeys 520 series consoles have no centre LCD The soft menus which pop up on the centre LCD on other consoles for BUMP MODE FX TIME etc use the right LCD on 520 series consoles CUE GROUP and SUB no longer pop up INTS ONLY and ATTS ONLY soft keys on 520 series consoles To access these keys press the REC MODE key when required during CUE GROUP and SUB comm
232. d the Console Reporter Rack Configuration This section covers the following topics e Writing and Editing Notes e Loading Files e Viewing and Editing Configuration Files Writing and Editing Notes The Notes Menu is accessed by pressing the MORE key and NOTES DISP softkey which displays the Notes Page This page which is initially blank provides the facility to type messages or notes using the external keyboard The Notes Page operates like a normal text editor When you come to the end of a line the cursor will automatically move to a new line Pressing the Return key will create a blank line You can use the trackball or mouse to position the cursor for insertion or deletion or you can use the keyboard left right up or down keys To cut a line of text position the cursor on the line and press the CUT LINE softkey To copy a line position the cursor on the line and press the COPY LINE softkey You can paste a line of text which has been cut or copied by positioning the cursor on a blank line and pressing the PASTE LINE softkey Once you have completed typing your note you can save it to file by pressing the SAVE FILE softkey Loading Files The LOAD FILES softkey allows you to load any saved notes pages and if you have the Tracker software installed you can load and edit the ATC pages and Fixture Library see Fixture Library List It also provides a means of viewing the Readme First file to learn about changes made whe
233. d the command is ignored To cut to the current cue shown in the Live LCD Menui omit the cue number These commands force the cue to its correct final state for intensity levels and attribute levels regardless of the current Tracking setting Note Delay times and assigned effects and macros are ignored CUE CUT Direct 1 and 2 Digit GOTO All Modes GOTO CUE All Modes Cuts to the current cue CUE 1 2 CUT Direct 1 and 2 Digit GOTO 1 2 A Modes GOTO CUE 1 2 A Modes Cuts to cue 1 2 For GeniusPro you can temporarily override the default Cut time when cutting to a cue by using the same syntax as when recording the cue This has no effect on the recorded cue This is the same as the equivalent GO command except that any delay times are ignored 9 117 CUE TIME 2 3 CUT Direct 1 and 2 Digit GeniusPro Cuts to current cue with up and down fade times of 2 and 3 seconds GOTO CUE PB cuts to the specified cue and runs it on the specified playback GOTO CUE 5 PB 2 Direct 1 and 2 Digit Cuts to cue 5 on playback 2 GeniusPro Effects run by cues are stopped if you use CUE CUT or CUE GO To go to a new cue without stopping these effects use CUE LOAD GO for any fade or CUE GO if the cue is a Move Fade Lightpalette Effects run by cues are stopped if you use GOTO CUE or CUE GO To go to a new
234. d the second number becomes the down fade time FX 1 TIME A Modes Resets effect 1 fade time to the non split default effect time in the Setup display FX Up Down field FX 1 TIME 4 All Modes Changes effect 1 up and down fade times to 4 seconds without changing any levels FX 1 TIME 4 2 Al Modes Changes effect 1 up fade time to 4 seconds and its down fade time to 2 seconds without changing any levels FX 1 TIME 2 All Modes Changes effect 1 down fade time to 2 seconds without changing any levels Sets the up fade time to the time in the Setup display FX Up field if this is a new effect or leaves it as is if over recording F FX 1 TIME 4 Al Modes Changes effect 1 up fade time to 4 seconds without changing any levels Sets the down fade time to the time in the Setup display FX Down field if this is a new effect or leaves it as is if over recording Assigning Profiles to Effects fx PROFILE assigns a fade profile to the effect Since no levels are changed you get no rerecord warning with this command To learn how to create and edit profiles refer to Profiles To delete an assigned fade profile omit the fade profile number FX 1 PROFILE 3 A Modes Assigns fade profile 3 to effect 1 FX 1 PROFILE A Modes Deletes any fade profile assigned to effect 1 Creating Effect Steps 11 163 To add a new effect step to the current effec
235. d to do Mem Lock The handheld remote can control channels and play back cues but cannot record anything PB Lock The handheld remote can control channels and record cues and other memory items but cannot play back cues or effects Mem PB Lock The handheld remote can control channels but cannot record or playback cues MemLock lt 900 The handheld remote can control channels and play back cues and effects but can only record cues with numbers 900 and higher Full Enabled The handheld remote is fully functional the default Cue Sheet Macros This is the general term given to macros which can be triggered indirectly rather than by direct macro keys or commands Sources include Cue sheet timecode events 510i and 310 bump inputs and local fader control MIDI external submasters audio input remote trigger and optional macro tablet The Cue Sheet Macros setup item determines the command line on which these macros run When set to LAST HANDHELD these macros run on the last available handheld to prevent console command lines and displays from being affected When set to MAIN CONSOLE these macros run on the main console to enable screen operations to be carried out by these macros The MIDI Window The MIDI window is in the Show Setup display and lets you configure the external MIDI communications ports These settings are only used when the Communiqu Pro software is loaded For more information refer to Communiqu Pro The Timecode Op
236. de This causes Win95 98 to exit automatically when the shortcut is run and to restart when you exit the program 8 The OLE Backup PC software will not run on a PC with a 3 COM network card connected to a non Strand PC network The PC must be booted off the network before running the OLE If the network card is not a 3 COM card it may be run on the PC network 9 The OLE Backup PC software will not run under Windows3 x or Windows NT but will run under Windows 95 and Windows 98 10 The backup PC software only works with 3 COM network cards connected to a lighting network 11 Ensure that the network configuration protocol is set up correctly in the Settings Control Panel Network Protocol of Windows 95 98 You should see an item marked TCP IP and also a 3COM item if you are using the 3COM 3c5x9 Etherlink III card Under TCP IP properties you need to specify the same IP address you set in your 220NODE CFG file together with a subnet mask value of 255 255 255 0 All other TCP IP settings should be off default or blank The 3COM settings should show a TCP IP binding 12 When running the software you may get an error message saying you do not have enough memory You must have 16Mb or more of RAM in your PC to run the software and more than 32Mb of RAM to run the i software version If the program exits with exit code 1 99 or reports a memory error then you need to reduce the memory used by DOS Things to check include ram disks disk caches
237. de full emulations of the console Operating Software on a standard PC Off Line Editor provides the following facilities Read and Write show files Generate Printouts Edit Cues Groups Patch Effects Submasters Preview on screen all recorded elements of show PC Backup Software provides the following e Link to Ethernet network using the supplied Network Card and Networker software e Operate as Tracking Backup to a main console or PC e Operate a Designer s Remote to a main console or PC with independent command line and screens e Provide standalone PC Show Controller use network for DMX distribution SN series nodes The following topics are covered in this section e Prerequisites e Installing the Offline Editor Software o Installing Offline Editor Using DOS 3 1 or later o Installing Offline Editor Using Windows9X e Installing the Backup PC Kit o Installing the Ethernet Card Configuring the Ethernet Card Installing the Dongle Installing the Backup PC Software from DOS Installing the Backup PC Software from Windows 9X Installing the Networker amp Utilities Software Using DOS 3 1 or Later o Installing the Networker amp Utilities Software Using Windows 9x Installing the Help File Using DOS 3 1 or Later Installing the Help File Using Windows 9X Running the Software Offline Editor or Backup PC Notes on Running Offline Editor or Backup PC Software Designer Keypad Keyboard Map 000000 Prerequisites Before start
238. dheld Remote Installing the R120 Wired Remote Installing the R120 Radio Base Installing the R120 Radio Handheld Remote R120 Base Pinouts o Operating the R120 Handheld Remote e R130 Handheld Remote o Installing and Configuring the R130 Handheld Remote Installing the R130 Wired Remote Installing the R130 Radio Handheld Remote Installing the R130 Radio Base R130 Base Pinouts o Operating the R130 Handheld Remote e iPaq WiFi Wireless Remote Operating Instructions o SN110 Node Configuration xvii Q Overview Chapter 27 Console Connectors 500 Series Consoles O O O O DMX 1 2 3 and 4 AUX 1 2 and 3 D54 Audio Remote Midi In Thru Out Printer Port Serial Ports VGA PS2 Ports COM1 and COM2 Ethernet 10BT Submaster Macro Inputs 510i 300 Series Processor Unit O O DMX 1 and 2 AUX 1 and 2 Sbus 1 4 Parallel Printer COM1 PS2 Mouse PS2 Keyboard VGA TET Panellink SMPTE Input MIDI In Thru Out Submaster Macros 1 24 310 300 Series Modules xviii Page 298 o Sbus 1 4 o Serial Port o PS2 Port o IFT Panellink Chapter 28 Communiqu Pro Page 311 e External Submasters o Setting Up External Submasters o Setting Up an External Submaster as a Macro Trigger e DMX In o Setting Up DMX In Submasters o Patching DMX In Dimmers o Using DMX In Dimmers o Using DMX In Channels e MIDI o Controlling Effects Using MIDI o MIDI Show Control o MIDI Keys
239. don t have to press MACRO MACRO If the macro does not exist it creates the macro and starts editing Once the macro is in editing mode keys and Trackball movements are recorded onto the end of the current contents To stop recording press MACRO MACRO Note The actions will not be carried out while editing You can record up to 120 keys in a macro Editing automatically finishes if this limit is reached MACRO 2 4 CUE 2 0 GO MACRO MACRO This adds the keystrokes into macro 24 that will run cue 20 CLR deletes the last key while editing the macro This key cannot be recorded into the macro while editing it although it can be recorded by MACRO LEARN Macro Tablet This section covers the following topics Setting Up the Macro Tablet Using the Macro Tablet Fitting the Macro Tablet Template Defining Learning Editing and Deleting Macro Tablet Macros 0000 18 221 Setting Up the Macro Tablet A Wacom Intuos A4 A4 Oversize or A3 graphic tablet can be used with the main console or a net node on the COM1 or COM2 port When the Macro Tablet field of the User Setup Screen is set to INTUOUS A4 INTUOUS A4 OS or INTUOUS A3 and the PORT field set to COM1 or COM2 you can define macros and activate them from a A4 or A3 macro tablet overlay A number of different standard overlays are available on the version 2 4 CD The overlay to use depends on the setting of the MACRO TABLET and MODE fields
240. dow You cannot delete parts of a show Press BROWSE FILES to get to the LCD Browse menu Switch to the drive and directory containing the show you want to restore as described under Changing the Current Drive and Directory Use the Trackball or mouse to highlight show name Press BACKUP VIEW to see a list of backup copies for the selected show 7 Use the Trackball or mouse to highlight the backup version you want to load or delete lal Nm 17 208 8 Press LOAD BACKUP to request the load or DELETE to delete the backup version You will be asked to confirm this action 9 Press LOAD BACKUP again to load the backup or DELETE again to delete the backup copy or CLR or UNDO to cancel the operation 10 The selected backup copy of the show will be loaded deleted Depending on the size of the show loading the show may take some time Note Once you load a show if you don t change the current drive and directory you can use ARCHIVE SAVE SHOW SAVE SHOW to save the show periodically to the same drive and directory Local Disk Functions Although shows are saved by default to the shows directory on the local disk you can add directories change them for saving shows and delete directories and shows as needed to help you organize your shows You can have up to 200 directories on your local disk and can save up to 200 shows per directory depending on the capacity of the local disk and the size of your
241. ds are mainly only carried out after you press although it is sometimes not required In general the syntax is action first then object for instance RECORD CUE 1 Channel levels are entered as a single digit number which represents a multiple of 10 or a double digit number which lets you enter fractions of 10 1 0 2 sets channel 1 to 2 1 3 sets channel 1 to 30 1 4 5 sets channel 1 to 45 DIRECT 1 DIGIT GeniusPro Default Commands are carried out as soon as they are fully entered although the key is required for some commands In general the syntax is object first then action for instance CUE 1 RECORD Channel levels are entered as a single digit number which represents a multiple of 10 This can be followed by and a second digit for fractions of 10 1 0 J 2 sets channel 1 to 2 1 3 sets channel 1 to 30 1 4 5 sets channel 1 to 45 DIRECT 2 DIGIT Commands are carried out as soon as they are fully entered although the key is required for some commands In general the syntax is object first then action for instance CUE 1 RECORD Channel levels are entered as a two digit number 1 0 2 sets channel 1 to 2 1 3 0 sets channel 1 to 30 1 4 5 sets channel 1 to 45 CC Auto Hold Mode When ON Lightpalette Default channels cannot be stolen from the Channel Control by cues subs and effects When OFF GeniusPro
242. ds the intensity and attribute levels on the current display into the specified cue group effect step or submaster For submasters levels are recorded into the current page SUB 1 RECORD Direct 1 Digit and Direct 2 Digit RECORD SUB 1 Command Line Records current display levels into submaster 1 CUE 3 4 RECORD Direct 1 Digit and Direct 2 Digit RECORD 3 4 Command Line Records current display levels into cue 34 FX 1 2 RECORD Direct 1 Digit and Direct 2 Digit RECORD FX 1 2 Command Line Records current display levels into effect 1 step 2 6 65 Recording Only Intensities or Attributes You can record only the intensities or only the attributes to a cue group or submaster by adding INTS ONLY or ATTS ONLY to the command line When you record with INTS ONLY all attribute information is erased When you record with ATTS ONLY all intensity information is erased and for Lightpalette only channels are set to Cue Tracking GROUP INTS ONLY RECORD Direct 1 Digit and Direct 2 Digit RECORD GROUP INTS ONLY Command Line Records the current group with intensity levels and erases attribute levels SUB 1 ATTS ONLY RECORD Direct 1 Digit and Direct 2 Digit RECORD SUB 1 ATTS ONLY Command Line Records the sub 1 with attribute levels and erases intensity levels CUE 1 INTS ONLY RECORD Direct 1 Digit and Direct 2 Digit RECORD C
243. e a channel at 55 would go to 45 Any levels under 0 are limited at 0 5 61 E 0 1 Direct 1 Digit E 0 1 Direct 2 Digit 0 1 Command Line The existing current selection is unchanged but their levels are decreased by 1 chans UP selects the listed channels and increases their intensity levels by the percentage set in the Up Down field in the User Setup Screen Control Modes window The default is 5 and will be used in examples To set levels for the current selection omit chans 1 UP Command Line Makes channel 1 the current selection and increases its level by 5 For example a channel at 55 would go to 60 Any levels over 100 are limited at 100 UP appears on the LCD Live menu chans DOWN selects the listed channels and decreases their intensity levels by the percentage set in the Up Down field in the User Setup Screen Control Modes window The default is 5 and will be used in examples To set levels for the current selection omit chans 1 DOWN Command Line Makes channel 1 the current selection and decreases its level by 5 For example a channel at 55 would go to 50 Any levels under 0 are limited at 0 DOWN appears on the LCD Live menu chan FULL or chan FULL selects the listed channels and sets their intensity levels to Full 100 To set the current selection to Full omit chans 1 FULL A Modes 1 FULL Direct 2 Digit 1
244. e Channel Control is used to manually select and modify channel levels to record submasters cues groups and effects or for overriding the recorded show The Main Console Remote Consoles and Handheld Remotes have separate channel controls and operate independently of each other on a latest takes precedence basis Using remote consoles requires the Networker software See the Networker Software for more details A channel can have an intensity an intensity plus attributes or just attributes Once a channel is selected in the Live display you can change the intensity with the Level Wheel and the attributes with the Trackball and the rotary controls In other displays you can control the intensity and all attributes but not at the same time If the CC Auto Hold Mode field in the User Setup Screen is set to OFF GeniusPro default and you select channelss using the channel controls they are stolen from effects submasters except independent submasters and effects or X playbacks which are controlling those channels Effects set for latest takes precedence instead of independent operation steal back channels only when a new effect is run Submasters steal back channels when the fader is moved off 0 or a bump button is pressed X playbacks steal when a new cue is run When ON Lightpalette Default channels cannot be stolen from the Channel Control by cues subs and effects Or you can return to the state before channel changes by pressing UND
245. e Offline Editor software will install on your PC This may take some time If the installation was successful Instal Successful is displayed on screen Type CD geniusp lt Enter gt or CD lightp lt Enter gt to open the appropriate directory Type geniusp lt Enter gt or lightp lt Enter gt to run the Offline Editor Close the Offline Editor and return to DOS to install the help file press Ctrl F12 followed by F2 three times Install the Help file as described under Installing the Help file under DOS 3 1 or Later Repeat step 12 and 13 to run the Offline Editor Refer to the Keyboard Map or to the template at the back of the Operator Guide to simulate the console keys using the PC keyboard Installing Offline Editor Using Windows 9X Nn The following procedures assume that the software is being installed from floppy drive A to drive C Open the A drive window and double click on the installation icon as follows C5INSTAL lt Enters gt for non i 400 or 500 Series consoles or CIINSTAL lt Enters gt for 500i Series consoles or C3INSTAL lt Enters gt for 300 Series consoles You will be given a choice of platform e g 3 300 Series 4 400 Series 5 500 Series B Backup PC O Offline Editor F File Server To install the Offline Editor software type O Specify either GeniusPro or Lightpalette installation by typing g or i This should match the console software type 25 271 6 You will be prompted to enter a destina
246. e On Level field in the User Setup Screen ON 2 amp ON3 Controls the ON level for channels controlled from the remote consoles All channels are initially off blank level If a channel has a level in this group the ON level is taken from the group If not the ON level is taken from the On Level field in the User Setup Screen ON Handheld Controls the ON level for channels controlled from the handheld remote All channels are initially off blank level If a channel has a level in this submaster the ON level for the handheld remote is taken from the submaster If not the ON level is taken from the On Level field in the User Setup Screen Display console Controls what channels will be shown on the main console level displays if the Channel Formatting field in the User Setup Screen is set to DISPLAY GROUP All channels are initially set to FL and can only be set to off and FL If a channel has no level in this group it will not show on any of the Levels screens including the Group display If channel formatting is set to AUTO channels are added to the display groups as they are used This is an easy way to automatically create a display group based on channels actually used in the show Display 2 amp Display 3 Controls what channels will be shown on the remote console level displays if the Channel Formatting field in the User Setup Screen is set to DISPLAYGROUP All channels are initially set to FL and can only be set to off and
247. e Submaster fader up You will see the DMX IN Channels on the LIVE screen in white Changes in the incoming levels will be displayed on the LIVE screen and mastered by the Submaster fader The DMX Channel Submaster can then be used just like other Submasters except that any channels defined in the submaster memory are ignored MIDI This feature allows show playback to be controlled from a MIDI show controller MIDI is used to link equipment with a MIDI interface together Communiqu Pro support different parts of the MIDI Specification to achieve different degrees of remote control for console functions Full information on MIDI can be obtained from The International MIDI Association IMA 23634 Emelita Street Woodland Hills CA 91367 USA Tel 818 598 0088 Fax 818 346 8578 28 314 This section covers the following topics Controlling Effects Using MIDI MIDI Show Control MIDI Keys and Faders MIDI Note MIDI Message MIDI Trigger Macro 0000080 Controlling Effects Using MIDI MIDI sends time information to keep equipment in synchronisation with each other often referred to as tempo A master device normally a sequencer or keyboard sends out these timing signals at regular intervals Speed up the tempo and more signals are sent reduce the tempo and fewer signals are sent Communiqu Pro can receive these timing signals and use the frequency at which they are received to control the speed of a running Effect
248. e above the channel numbers Changes to the standard fixture e g Inverting Pan are displayed in cyan Pan and Tilt can also be swapped and or inverted on a fixture 3 5 FIXTURE 2 1 Patch output 3 channel 5 to fixture 21 2 0 FIXTURE 2 3 Patch output 20 to fixture 23 using output 20s current channel 3 FIXTURE NEXT NEXT Browse fixture names on command line and patch output 3 to selected fixture 3 FIXTURE LAST LAST Browse fixture names on command line and patch output 3 to selected fixture 3 5 FIXTURE 2 1 SWAP P TILT 30 348 Patch output 3 channel 5 to fixture 21 swap Pan and Tilt for the fixture 3 FIXTURE 2 1 INVERT PAN Patch output 3 to fixture 21 invert Pan 3 FIXTURE 2 1 INVERT TILT Patch output 3 to fixture 21 invert Tilt 3 FIXTURE INVERT TILT Inverts Tilt on the fixture patched to output 3 To delete a patched fixture ensure that the patch display is in output order then patch a blank fixture starting with the same output number e g 3 FIXTURE Unpatches the fixture patched to output 3 To default the range back to the original mapping enter the range of outputs used by the unpatched fixture and press DEFLT e g 3 THRU 1 1 DEFLT Note that the only other way to unpatch a fixture is to default the whole patch press DEFLT twice 8 32 28 24 01 99
249. e and then record the cue When you start running cues or go back to make changes or add new cues you need to know how the console treats unchanging levels Unless explicitly overridden GeniusPro records all cues as Cross Fades Cue Tracking field in Show Setup Screen Off Default With Cue Tracking On GeniusPro records all new cues as 8 104 Move Fades shown as blank in Cue Type field To record a cue which only changes the channel levels that change in the cue you must record a Move Fade cue Unless explicitly overridden Lightpalette records all cues as Tracking Cues shown as blank in Cue Type field Note Cue Tracking cannot be set to Off when using Lightpalette See also Level Tracking Move Fades MF GeniusPro Only A Move Fade remembers only the channels for which levels change All other channels are not remembered Levels set in a cue track through subsequent cues until they come to a cue which explicitly sets those levels You can play up to 128 Move Fades at once between the two playbacks Cues with separate up and down fades count as two fades for this total Running more than 128 cues stops the oldest running cue When you use GOTO CUT or LOAD if you have tracking off only the channels that move in the target cue will change levels If you have tracking on the channel levels are adjusted as though you took all of the cues leading up to the specified cue Move Fades are abbreviated as MF on displays u
250. e at the high level In time can be default black text or any value between 0 01 and 5 minutes and is initially set to the value of the FX Step In Dwell Out field of the Default Times of the User Setup Screen Times below one second can be specified in hundredths of a second The Dwell property is the time that an activated step will remain in its high state Dwell time can be default black text OFF Dwell time Step time or any value between 0 01 and 5 minutes and is initially set to the value of the In field of the Step Defaults Times below one minute can be specified in hundredths of a minute The Out property is the time from when the dwell time ends until the channel levels are at the low level Out time can be default black text or any value between 0 01 and 5 minutes and is initially set to the value of the Out field of the Step Defaults Times below one minute can be specified in hundredths of a minute This field can be set using the trackball to select the field and the level wheel or or keys to select the option Alternatively the field can be set using the command line as shown in the following examples 11 147 FX 1 2 TIME STEP D O 2 1 S 4 2 1 Sets FX 1 step fade times for step 2 only to in 0 2 dwell 0 3 out 0 2 FX 1 2 TIME STEP 1 D O 2 1 2 Sets FX 1 step fade times for step 2 to in 0 2 out 0 2 FX 1
251. e default location by pressing lt Enter gt 8 The Strand Lighting licence agreement is displayed on screen Press any key to scroll the display 9 If you agree with the terms of the licence press Y or press N to terminate the installation 10 The Backup PC software will install on your PC 11 If the installation was successful Instal Successful is displayed on screen 12 Open Windows Explorer and locate the Backup PC filename geniusp or lightp or the aternative name allocated in step 6 13 If the default filename was used a shotcut gp_95 or Ip_95 is available within the directory Drag the shortcut to the desktop or cut paste to another location Rename the shortcut to Offline Editor You can now run the software by double clicking on the shortcut icon 14 If you used a different name in step 6 locate the shortcut gp_95 or Ip_95 and use the right mouse button and select Properties Select the Program tab and change the Cmd Line and Working Directory to match the alternative location 15 Alternatively you can run the Backup PC software by double clicking on the geniusp bat or lightp bat files in the geniusp or lightp directory or alternative location 16 Press Ctrl F12 followed by F2 three times to return to the desktop 17 You must now proceed to install the Networker amp Utilities software from the disk supplied Refer to Installing the Networker and Utilities Software Under DOS 3 1 or Later and Insta
252. e effect step Low Scaling sets the percentage of channel level to use for the off part of the effect step To set the low level at 10 of the recorded channel levels set it to 10 If you have a channel at FL the actual output level for the channel when it is off will be 10 If you have a channel at 80 the actual output level for the channel when it is off will be 8 The Low Scaling property is initially set to the value you set in the Low field of the Step Defaults for the effect The High scaling property is initially set to the value you set in the High field of the Step Defaults for the effect 11 148 This field can be set using the rollball or mouse to select the field and the level wheel or or keys to select the option Alternatively the field can be set using the command line as shown in the following examples FX 1 2 LO HI LEVEL Sets FX 1 low and high levels for step 2 to 0 and 100 FX 1 2 LO H I LEVEL 4 Sets FX 1 low level only for step 2 to 40 FX 1 2 LO HI LEVEL 4 4 8 Sets FX 1 low and high levels for step 2 to 40 and 80 FX 1 2 LO HI LEVEL 1 0 0 Sets FX 1 high level only for step 2 to 100 Using Effect Playbacks The Effect Keypad provides keys for controlling the effect playbacks The Effect Supermaster if one is assigned masters the levels of all effects regardless of whether they are being played on an effect
253. e executed times rather than the recorded times X Playback Format Sets how cues will be displayed in the X Playback window of the State display It can be set to SPREAD SHEET GeniusPro Default EXPANDED Lightpalette Default or EXPANDED FADE TIME SPREAD SHEET setting displays a heading bar in the X playback windows of the Live display and shows all values below the appropriate heading During a fade the recorded fade time is replaced by the number of seconds left in the fade and the percentage complete is shown to the left of this EXPANDED setting displays no heading bar in the X playback windows of the Live display but puts the type of value for instance Time next to the value During a fade the recorded fade time remains and the number of seconds remaining in the fade is shown to the left of this EXPANDED FADE TIME setting displays no heading bar in the X playback windows of the Live display but puts the type of value for instance Time next to the value During a fade the recorded fade time is replaced by the number of seconds left in the fade and the percentage complete is shown to the left of this Show Last Recorded Cue When ON GeniusPro Default the last recorded cue is shown at the bottom of the X Playback window of the State display When OFF Lightpalette Default the last recorded cue is not shown Screen Menus When ON Lightpalette Default the centre LCD menu and the right LCD menu 2 Sceens are shown at the
254. e floppy disk thereby enabling the upgrade software to be reinstalled on the console if it become necessary Checking the Software Version Number To see what operating software version is installed in your console and which options are currently enabled Press lt REPORT gt to show the System Report display The APPLICATION field shows the applications installed For example GENPRO COMPRO TRK REP NET SVR shows that GeniusPro software is installed and the CommuniquePro Tracker Reporter Networker and Server application software is installed The OS Channels field shows the operating software version number and the number of channels If the floppy disk version number is greater than the installed version number you should update the software by following the steps in Upgrading Your Console Software Files Included on Disk GeniusPro and Lightpalette operating software is issued on CD The files are contained in the Software directory as shown Common Files File checksums can be found in C 220o0s crcfile crc crcecheck exe Checksum testing utility crcfile cre Contains checksums for the other files licence txt Software licence agreement release txt Release notes GeniusPro and Lightpalette Files 500 series non i c5instal exe installation utility cdinstal z install file GeniusPro and Lightpalette files 500 series i ciinstal exe installation utility ciinstal z install file GeniusPro and Lightpalette files 800 series
255. e functionality of the keys on a 500 series control desk to be remapped within the control surface to suit specific user requirements The remapping facility also enables certain key groups VGAs rate wheels and other controls to be assigned to duplicate functionality and allows keys wheels to be assigned to a separate user within the system thereby creating a virtual remote console within any 500 or 300 series control desk This section covers the following topics e Loading the Map Configuration File e Remapping Keys 500 Series Consoles Identifying Key Positions Key Numbering Alternative Key Expansion Board Bump Keys Key Functions Key Remapping Examples e Remapping Console Wheels Rotaries and Trackball e Console Identification e Remapping VGA Screens OO e O O Loading the Map Configuration File Press the MAP CONFIG softkey The existing or default Map Configuration file is displayed with full instructions on how to remap up to four alternative functions to each key and to remap the functions of the console playback and channel control wheels rotaries trackball and VDUs Remapping Keys 500 Series Consoles Identifying Key Positions The syntax used to identify keys to be remapped is as follows XXX_YYY_n where XXX is the console type 520 530 550 YYY is the key type as shown below n is the key number 23 253 Key Type Function CCK Channel control key ERK Effect and Record keys 530 and 550
256. e in one of 750 groups Groups 1 750 On playback the values of the intensities and or attributes are obtained from the Group they are linked to instead of being obtained for the Cue Submaster or Effect they are recorded in This lookup is done each and every time the Cue Submaster or Effect is replayed Thus if the value of an intensity or attribute in a Group is changed every Cue Effect or Submaster that uses this Group will play back the linked channel with the new value When used to record focus positions pan and tilt this facility is referred to as Preset Focus 30 354 The following example shows how to set up Preset or Referenced groups in this instance Preset Focus 10 11 Press CUE 1 LOAD GO All Modes You will see the Pan and Tilt Attributes fading Press lt SETUP gt and set Smart Channel Display to TRACKER PRESET Press lt PATCH gt and patch a fixture as follows 1 FIXTURE 5 All Modes Press lt LIVE gt and press 1 to show the Smart Channel display Use the trackball or mouse to set the Pan and Tilt attribute to 50 or enter 1 3 5 Direct 1 Digit Mode or 1 3 5 0 Direct 2 Digit Mode or 1 3 5 Command Line Mode and 1 4 5 Direct 1 Digit Mode or 1 4 5 0 Direct 2 Digit Mode or 1 4 5 Command Line Mode Press GROUP 1 ATTS ONLY RECORD Direct Entry Modes or RECORD GROUP
257. e may need editing to free more memory The smartdrv command SMARTDRV S tells you how much memory is used by smartdrv The command smartdrv in your autoexec bat file will need modifying to change the maximum memory used If you have 2 numbers at the end of the smartdrv command in your AUTOEXEC BAT file modify them to give the correct amount of memory required for the application If you don t have these numbers then smartdrv will use its default values which may be too large Change the command line to add the two numbers to the end A typical command line for an 8M byte PC allocates 1500 kbytes as follows C DOS SMARTDRV 1500 150 5 To run the OLE Backup PC software HIMEM SYS must be loaded If it is not an error message 32rtm error Couldn t initialize DPMI32VM OVL will be given when running the software To install HIMEM SYS add the line DEVICE HIMEM SYS at the top of the file CACONFIG SYS using the EDIT command at DOS 6 The OLE Backup PC software does not change the DOS PATH to include its install directory Edit the PATH line in the file C AUTOEXEC BAT to include the software directory specified if required 7 The Properties right mouse button of the gp_95 or Ip_95 shortcut icon can be used to fix problems Persistent problems when running the shortcut icons can be fixed by running exclusively in MSDOS mode To do this bring up the shortcut Properties select the Program tab and then the advanced button and set MSDOS mo
258. e output can be patched to a channel attribute If the attribute does not exist it is first created The maximum frame for the attribute is also set If the maximum frame is not specified the default from the Default Frame field in the Show Setup Screen is used The maximum frame number cannot be changed if more than one output is patched to the same channel attribute All except one output must be unpatched before changing the maximum frame number Note Frame numbers start at 0 zero This means that a scroller with 16 frames has frames numbered from 0 to 15 and should have a maximum frame number of 15 A channel can have both attribute and intensity non dim parts This is done by setting two separate outputs to the same channel one as an intensity 1 non dim and another as an attribute 2 non dim 13 190 An attribute part of a channel is identified by the channel number followed by 2 the Tracker software controls up to 99 attributes per channel For advanced attribute patching refer to Tracker Software out 2 or out ATT patches the output to the channel attribute If the output is not patched the default maximum frame is used Otherwise the maximum frame is left unchanged 1 5 2 A Modes 1 ATT 5 All Modes Patches output 1 to channel 5 attribute 2 colour out 2 or out ATT patches the output with the default maximum frame to the channel attribute 1
259. e that you have a series of cues that you need to call from many places in the show but the series needs to run more than once In this case you want to set up a subroutine loop Set up a subroutine as described above but set the Loop property of the calling cue to the number of times you need the sequence to repeat If necessary you can have a different number of repetitions each time you call the subroutine Note In general if you want to create a loop with a series of cues only once use a linked loop but if you want to use the loop multiple times during the show create a subroutine loop Loops can be nested up to 4 levels which means you can have loops within loops If you explicitly load a playback all loop counts are cleared so that when you run the sequence again it will run the loops the correct number of times 8 103 cue LOOP RECORD Direct 1 and 2 Digit RECORD cue LOOP Command Line Records the levels from the current display into the specified cue and assigns a loop count to it If the cue already exists an overrecord message gives you the chance to cancel the recording To rerecord the cue press RECORD again To cancel the recording press CLR or UNDO CUE 9 LOOP 5 RECORD Direct 1 and 2 Digit RECORD CUE 9 LOOP 5 Command Line Records levels into cue 9 and sets the cue loop count to 5 For looping subroutines put the loop count in the calling cue For standard loops put the
260. e the macro number of the macro to run when the submaster is moved off zero Function Controls how the submaster is used For further information about supermasters and other submaster functions refer to Submaster Functions Bump Controls the submaster bump mode Refer to Submaster Bump Mode 7 88 Viewing Submaster Channel Levels To view the recorded levels in a submaster select the required submaster The levels are then shown on the Levels screen Only submasters set to Normal Independent Exclusive Inhibitive or Sound To Light functions use the channel levels Channel levels are ignored in other submaster modes Channels which are off are shown with a blank level Channels which are on at 0 are shown with a level of 0 For Inhibitive mode intensity channels with levels including on At 0 are inhibited and attribute channels or channels which are off are ignored For Normal Independent and Exclusive modes on At 0 and off are treated as a level of 0 Editing Submaster Channel Levels Once you have selected the required submaster and put the highlight on the submaster number the SUB field you can select channels and modify them using the same commands as for channel control for example 1 1 CUE 1 5 and so on The Level Wheel cannot be used to change levels If a submaster is referenced in a channel command for example SUB 1 then the submaster from the current page in the Submaster display is used
261. e two X Playback faders 500 series consoles have no PB Mode key The keyboard equivalents are Ctrl A and Ctrl B The options are as follows Pressing the appropriate PB MODE key 300 Series Consoles or Ctrl A Ctrl B 500 Series Consoles will display the following LCD softkey menu for the playback Note You must press the appropriate PB MODE key or Ctrl A Ctrl B to return to Live mode after you have selected the playback mode X2 Playback AUTO FADE GeniusPro Lightpalette normal operating mode refer to X Playbacks section MAN FADE GeniusPro Lightpalette manual operating mode refer to X Playbacks section X1 Playback 7 90 1 SCENE 24 SUB where the maximum faders is the number of faders less 24 2 SCENE 24 SUB where the maximum faders per scene is the number of faders less 24 divided by 2 1 SCENE 0 SUB where the maximum faders is the total number of faders 2 SCENE 0 SUB where the maximum faders per scene is the number of faders divided by 2 AUTO FADE GeniusPro Lightpalette normal operating mode refer to X Playbacks section MAN FADE GeniusPro Lightpalette manual operating mode refer to X Playbacks section The selected preset mode for X1 Playback is shown in the submaster window of the Live Screen Submaster faders dedicated to channel faders are shown in black Note For 530 and 550 series consoles the six supersubmaster faders are not included in the faders available for single scene or two scene preset
262. e with most spreadsheet packages Processing can be performed on show data using a speadsheet and the results can be converted back into a console specific format or ascii light cues format The data are stored in several separate csv files which reside in a single directory The filename you specify to ShowPort is actually the name of this directory Each file in the directory represents a different part of the show file The first line contains the column headings as text strings and the following lines contain the corresponding data The files generated are cuelist csv Cue Part Text UpTime UpDelay DownTime DownDelay Wait CrossFade Link LoopCount ProfileUp ProfileDn Remote Effect Macro SplitFader cuelev csv Cue Part Channel Level Blocked Preset grplist csv Group Text grplev csv Group Channel Level Preset sublist csv Submaster Text TimeUp TimeDown BumpInd BumpOut BumpQuickLoad BumpNone OverRange Effect Group Macro Inhibit sublev csv Submaster Channel Level Preset fxlist csv Effect Text LevelType EffectType Direction Steptime Up Dwell Down Lo High fxlev csv Effect Step Channel Level Preset fxstep csv Effect Step Steptime Up Dwell Down Lo High patch csv Patch Mux Channel Min Max Profile 6k 12k Fixture Threshold Steps MuxIn SwapPanTilt InvPan InvTilt First Last Notes about the representation of values Channel numbers are whole numbers except if channel attributes are used when they are a decimal number with
263. each signal from the connector has its own number from 1 to 512 The two numbers are used together so that the 123 rd output from the 2nd DMX connector is addressed as 2 123 The two DMX connectors are output from the console The remainder of the DMX connectors must be n the network The patch does not directly configure the mapping of output numbers to the output multiplex signals For further information on setting up the console output to patch output mapping refer to Output Connections Window of the Console Setup Screen Channel Numbers Refer to Product Specification for number of intensity and attribute channels You can increase the number of attribute channels beyond the purchased maximum by deleting intensity channels and assigning them as attribute channels Channel attributes are specified by a decimal point as follows using channel 10 as an example 10 channel 10 intensity 10 1 channel 10 intensity displayed as 10 10 2 channel 10 attribute The standard software allows one attribute colour per channel The Tracker software lets you specify multiple attributes per channel attribute numbers 2 to 99 The default patch numbers channels from 1 to the number of channels purchased and assigns them only intensities To use a new channel number and assign it an intensity you must first delete a channel with intensity This will delete the levels of that channel in all cues submasters 13 181 effects and patches Patching to
264. eated bending or twisting 34 383 Connections from fixed wiring should terminate in wall sockets or patch panels from which connections to consoles SN100s or repeaters should be made via patch leads These leads use multi stranded wire for added flexibility A typical configuration for a star topology using UTP cable requires the use of a HUB Repeater or Concentrator At the centre of the star a hub links the segments of the star together when they are operating correctly but isolates them if a fault should occur such as an open circuit improving fault immunity UTP HUB RJ45 Connector CONSOLE Each segment of the star is a separate point to point twisted pair connection If one branch of the star fails only one node would be affected except for the route from the console to the HUB The maximum length of each twisted pair segment is 100m 330ft Optical Fibre Fibre Optic Ethernet systems have distinct cost and implementation disadvantages that limit their use as a direct inter node connection medium However fibre optic systems can provide a powerful backbone technology due to Higher data handling capacity Noise immunity Allow for 100mhz and higher data rates A segment can be up to 3000m in length Availability of Bridges repeaters and routers Comparison Table 34 384 Description Twisted Pair Thin Net Thick Net AUI Fibre R ded R ded Not Not Recommended Beene ecommendcec Re
265. ecorded fade times and will be automatically sequenced 10 137 Chapter 11 Effects Effect playbacks are used to run repeated sets of lighting states called effects Each lighting state in an effect has a set of intensity and attribute levels and is called an effect step The effect playbacks let you run effects in a variety of ways to give different chase build and random output levels Refer to the Product Specification for number of effect playbacks Note The FX SEL FX DIR FX TIME and FX LOAD keys are omitted from 300 Series consoles If you are a 300 Series console user and require to use the functions controlled by these keys use an external keyboard in conjunction with the keyboard template at the back of this manual to simulate the keys or use Edit Mode This chapter contains the following topics The Current Effect Step Recording Effect Step Levels Recording Effect Properties Recording Effect Step Properties Using Effect Playbacks Using Effects in Cues and Subs Viewing and Editing Effects The Current Effect Step The current effect step is shown in the FX field on the LCD This is the last step which has been referenced and can be used in a step selection All step recording commands act on a single step which is shown in the command descriptions below The THRU and THRU ON keys cannot be used in a step selection The examples shown immediately below are effect step selections that you can use
266. ecorded with a manual fade time are loaded to the X Playback when you press GO but must be faded using the X Playback faders Manual fade times apply to both the up and down fade times SUB 1 TIME 4 RECORD Direct 1 Digit and Direct 2 Digit RECORD SUB 1 TIME 4 Command Line Records levels and up and down fade times of 4 seconds into submaster 1 SUB 1 TIME 1 4 2 RECORD Direct 1 Digit and Direct 2 Digit RECORD SUB 1 TIME 1 4 2 Command Line Records levels and up and down fade time of 1 min 42 secs into submaster 1 CUE 1 TIME 4 4 2 RECORD Direct 1 Digit and Direct 2 Digit RECORD CUE 1 TIME 4 2 Command Line Records levels an up fade time of 4 seconds and a down fade time of 2 seconds into cue 1 FX 1 2 TIME 2 RECORD Direct 1 Digit and Direct 2 Digit RECORD FX 1 2 TIME 2 Command Line Records levels into effect 1 step 2 Assigns a 2 second down fade time to effect 1 Sets the up fade time to the default if the effect is cleared or has never been recorded or leaves it as it is if over recorded 6 68 CUE 1 TIME 4 4 RECORD Direct 1 Digit and Direct 2 Digit RECORD CUE 1 TIME 4 Command Line Records levels and a 4 second up fade time into cue 1 Sets the down fade time to the default if the cue has never been recorded or leaves it as is if overrecording CUE 1 TIME OFF MA
267. ect must be loaded and running with the changes when you do the update UPDATE TIME FX updates the effect default step in dwell and out times as scaled by the Rate or Level Wheel and the step direction and type from the playback currently running this effect The effect levels and other effect properties are not changed UPDATE TIME FX 1 Updates times from the Playback in effect 1 Note You cannot update individual steps of an effect If the default step time was overridden in a step the step time for that step will not be updated Note UPDATE FX n RECORD does not update levels or step times recorded in individual steps which override the default times In this case re record the effect Updating Effects from the Live Screen When in the Effects Screen with EDIT STEPS selected you can update an effect step in accordance with the levels in the Live Screen using the syntax chans LIVE 1 THRU 5 LIVE Direct Action Modes 1 THRU 5 LIVE Command Line Mode Updates the levels of channels 1 to 5 in the current effect step to the levels in the Live Screen on stage If any of the selected channels are not already in the effect step they are added to the effect step You can record the complete current stage lighting scene in the current effect step using the syntax 1 THRU LAST LIVE Direct Action MOdes 1 THRU LAST LIVE Command Line Mode Stopping
268. ected or B or C on the playbacks the cursor moves to the next or last existing cue The cursor gt on screen next to the cue number shows the current cue With dual playbacks each playback has its own current cue The examples shown immediately below are command segments you can use to select a cue number You can then use combinations of these command segments to replace cue where it appears in full command descriptions Note Since the following examples form only part of a command they are not related to channel control mode and the final where appropriate is not shown CUE PART specifies the current cue with a specific part number CUE Specifies the current cue part 1 CUE PART 2 Specifies the current cue part 2 CUE CUE Specifies the current cue with a specific part number CUE CUE 2 Specifies the current cue part 2 CUE PART Specifies a specific cue CUE 1 Specifies cue 1 part 1 CUE 1 PART 2 Specifies cue 1 part 2 CUE 1 2 PART 3 Specifies cue 1 2 part 3 CUE NEXT PART specifies the next cue after the current cue If the current cue is the highest cue number this specifies the lowest cue number CUE NEXT Specifies the cue part 1 after the current cue CUE NEXT PART 2 Specifies the cue part 2 after the current cue CUE LAST PART Specifies the previous cue before the current cue If the current cue is the lowest cue number th
269. ed please try again If this happens use SHIFT M TAKE SYNC to do a quick sync withou transferring the show file To get main back in control after backup has taken over use SHIFT M TAKE SYNC to doa quick sync withou transferring the show Testing Backup Takeover Once main and backup are in sync you can use the Main Give Control to test that the backup outputs are working Use Main Take Control to restore main s outputs To test automatic backup takeover when in sync switch off the main or disconnect its network cable After the network timeout period expires several seconds the backup state changes to Backup Active No Sync and its outputs are enabled When the main is powered up again or reconnected its state also changes to Backup Active No Sync and its outputs stay disabled 29 336 To restore control to main at this point you can do Main Take Sync at either console which will transfer the show as well in case any changes were made while main was off If no show changes were made you can hold SHIFT down while pressing Main Take Sync which does a quick sync ie no show transfer Console Lock On Backup Normally the backup console controls are active when in sync Commands entered on the backup are echoed back to the main so both consoles stay in sync To prevent the controls on the backup console being accidentally pressed they can be locked out by pressing the keys SHIFT HELP together Use SHIFT HELP
270. ed so that there is a straight line between the anchor points on either side of the deleted point You cannot delete end points They are always anchor points trackerball or mouse Highlights the point you wish to delete DELETE POINT DELETE POINT Deletes the point and recalculates all points between the two anchor points that were adjacent to it Deleting a Profile Profiles can be deleted in the Profile display This is a good way to delete profiles if you are only going to delete a few For information on deleting all profiles or a range of profiles from the Archive display refer to Clear Operations in the Archive Screen PROFILE DELETE PROF DELETE PROF or PROFILE DELETE PROF or Select profile with trackball mouse or NEXT or LAST keys then DELETE PROF DELETE PROF Deletes the selected specified profile Profile Learn You can create fade profiles for up down and attribute fades by selecting one of the two X Playbacks selecting a profile number and pressing the LEARN softkey on the Profile LCD Menu followed by Running the next cue by pressing GO X1 or GO X2 or moving the appropriate X Playback fader off zero will start the profile learn process Note A profile learned in this way is not permanently assigned to the cue It is only used once when the GO X1 or GO X2 key is pressed Movement of the X Playback fader including the Up and Down Fade Time and all movements of the fade
271. een When partitioning is enabled no channel can be assigned to both users at the same time When you add a channel to a partition group it is automatically removed from the other partition groups Viewing Other Users Displays 29 339 At main or remote consoles you can view the current display of the other console by pressing SHIFT MORE together To return to your local display press SHIFT MORE again The status display below the wheel bar shows which console display is selected Remote Ports Using the NET NODE field of the Console Setup Screen you can reassign local console ports to be connected to corresponding ports on an SN100 or SN102 Remote Handheld Connecting a handheld remote to the remote connector on an SN100 or SN102 means you have to set the Net Node field of Handheld Remote Communications Setup in the Console Setup Screen to the name of the SN node Only COM2 is valid for the port Notes 1 Older SN100 s remote connectors were not wired correctly Contact Strand Service if your SN100 remote connector does not work 2 Some SN102 s remote connectors were not wired for output If your handheld keys work when connected to an SN102 but the display does not update contact Strand Sevice Remote Printing You can specify the NET NODE name of another PC or SN100 102 at the Printer Setup in the Archive Print display Note Do not send very long printouts to SN nodes as they have limited file buffer memory N
272. eived the operating software by e mail or from the Strand Web Site copy them to DOS floppy disk high density 1 44Mb and run crccheck from DOS to verify before installing If you are upgrading your console software please procede as follows 3 44 et nm oo x If you are using SN10X nodes install the Networker for SN10X software as described in Networker for SN10X Software Installation If not proceed to step 3 Wait for software to install and for the SN10X nodes to initialize Turn on your console and wait for it to initialize Insert disk entitled Operating Software and press lt ARCHIVE gt SOFT LOAD SOFT LOAD LOAD Wait for software to install and for console to initialize Insert disk entitled Networker amp Utilities and press lt ARCHIVE gt SOFT LOAD SOFT LOAD LOAD Wait for software to install and for console to initialize Insert disk entitled Console Help Files and press lt ARCHIVE gt SOFT LOAD SOFT LOAD LOAD Complete the Software Registration Form supplied and return it to Strand Lighting Note If you are upgrading software that is older than V2 0 refer to Upgrading Old Software Adding Additional Channels or Applications to a Console using an Upgrade Disk If you are adding additional channels or adding optional applications to your console and software version 2 2 or later is already installed please proceed as follows l 2 3 4 5 Turn o
273. el You can use the Level Wheel to fade individual cues in and out without putting them on an X playback thereby disrupting the remainder of the cue flow CUE wheel fades the specified cue on Levels are combined on a highest takes precedence basis with cue and effects playbacks and submasters Channel levels increase as you move the Level Wheel up away from you CUE wheel fades all channels from the specified cue off Channel levels decrease as you move the Level Wheel up away from you Viewing and Editing Cues Once you have recorded cues you can view and edit them in the Preview display You can also use the Preview display to create new cues Note Changing levels while in this display changes the recorded levels in the current cue without a record command and without warning you The Preview Display To show the Preview display press lt PREVIEWS in the Display keypad The Preview display Levels screen shows the recorded channel levels intensity levels and attribute levels of the current cue The Levels screen background is grey rather than black to show that levels changed in this display are not being changed live To change output levels you must be in the Live display The Preview display State screen shows the recorded cues The current cue is shown in the CUE field on the right LCD and also has a cursor gt next to it in the Preview display State screen To move between cues use NEXT and LAST or
274. el s of the current selection Decrease level s of the current selection NEXT Next channel if a channel is selected otherwise next cue LAST Last channel if achannel is selected otherwise last cue REM DIM Set current selection to On and turn all other channels Off Recording amp Playback RECORD CUE 1 Record current levels into cue 1 GO Run the next cue on X PLAYBACK 1 26 284 Alternative Keys using 0 SHIFT 1 0 FULL Sets channel 1 to Full 1 50 UPDATE CUE 6 Updates channel 1 at 50 in cue 6 Direct Digit 1 mode only 1 50 0 UPDATE CUE 6 Updates channel 1 at 50 in cue 6 Direct Digit 2 mode only 1 50 0 UPDATE CUE 6 Function Keys F1 to F3 On an empty command line the functions of keys F1 to F3 are determined by a combination of the 0 SHIFT key and the DISPLAY key which alternates between additional function softkeys and softkeys which will fire the pre assigned macros HHM1 HHM2 and HHMS3 refer to Pre Assigned Macros The combination of the 0 DISPLAY and F1 MODE softkey allows you to access the additional sofkeys in Live or Patch mode F2 PROF F3 GROUP F1 GOTO F2 DIMMER F3 WAIT R120 Handheld Remote Ss E Strand gharg 7 C ee co This section refers to the following remote handhelds for use with the Strand 300 400 and 500 series consoles using GeniusPro or Lightpalette software 26 285 Part Number Description Conten
275. election Setting Levels with the Keypad Using Recorded Items in Channel Lists Attribute Groups Attribute Filters Referenced Groups Using the Level Wheel Setting Attribute Levels Setting DMX Levels Copying Channel Levels Undoing Level Changes Page 48 e Holding Channels on the Channel Control e Restoring Playback Levels e Flashing Channel Levels e Bumping Channel Levels e Channel Check e Changing Levels in Preview Blind Display e Fading in Intensity Channels in Time e Fading in Attribute Channels in Time Chapter 6 Basic Recording Page 55 e Recording Levels and Properties e Changing Properties Without Recording Levels e Editing in a Preview Blind Display e Copying from a Preview Blind Displa Chapter 7 Submasters and Channel Faders Page 65 e Channel Faders e Submaster Pages e The Current Submaster e Recording Submaster Levels e Recording Submaster Properties o Setting Submaster Properties o Fade Times o Fader Properties o Submaster Functions Pileon Submaster Normal Independent Submaster Indep Exclusive Submaster Exclusive Inhibitive Submaster Inhibit Sound to Light Submaster S Light DMX Channel Submaster DMX Chan iii DMX Dimmer Submaster DMX DMNR Submaster Supermaster Sub Super Effects Supermaster FX Super Flash Supermaster Flash SPR Grandmasters GM1 GM2 Audio Threshold Supermaster AUDO THR Midi Ratio Supermaster MIDI RATI o Exter
276. els are similar and have the same mechanical features The difference is the type and speed of the processor used in the motherboard as follows e 520 Consoles Pentium Processor e 520i Consoles Pentium Pro or Pentium Il Processor Model 510i Show Controller This is a rack mounted lighting controller designed primarily to serve the lighting requirements of the themed environment market and to operate over a network as a backup unit to a main console This controller runs the same operating and application software as the other consoles however the user interface is completely different refer to 5101 3210 Show Controller Backup Unit The 510i is only available with the latest Pentium Processor Features Available with 500 Series New Electronic Sub System All 500 series consoles are now fitted with the latest Pentium Processor and a new style electronic sub system enabling additional features that were not possible with previous slower processors You can check if your console is fitted with the new electronics by checking the position of the Ethernet Port on the rear of the console which on consoles fitted with new electronics is fitted on the same panel as the DMX AUX ports rather than being an optional expansion card although a second network card can be fitted in addition to the built in port The new electronics provide the following additional facilities e Built in Ethernet Ports no built in ports on old electronics e Handhel
277. els whose levels are increasing start to fade the up delay time and the time until the channels whose levels are decreasing start to fade the down delay time In cues with parts each part can have its own fade and delay times but the wait time applies to the whole cue and is taken from part 1 cue DELAY RECORD Direct 1 and 2 Digit RECORD cue DELAY Command Line records the levels on the current display into the specified cue and records a delay time If the cue already exists an overrecord message gives you the chance to cancel the recording Press RECORD again to record over the cue or CLR or UNDO to cancel the operation If you only enter one number for time it is used for both the up and down delay times To enter separate up and down delay times use to separate the two numbers The first number becomes the up delay time and the second number becomes the down delay time Separate delay times can be assigned to each cue part To delete an assigned delay time omit the time value CUE 1 DELAY 4 RECORD Direct 1 and 2 Digit RECORD CUE 1 DELAY 4 Command Line Records levels into cue 1 and assigns up and down delay times of 4 seconds CUE 1 DELAY 4 2 Direct 1 and 2 Digit RECORD CUE 1 DELAY 4 2 Command Line Records levels into cue 1 and assigns an up delay time of 4 seconds and a down delay time of 2 seconds CUE 1 DELAY 2
278. en running two cues on Playback 2 would also run cues 1 and 2 stealing the channels in common with Playback 1 since latest takes precedence DUAL HTP There are two independent positions one for each playback within the cue sheet The outputs of the playbacks are combined on a highest takes precedence basis The X Playback Window GeniusPro The X Playback window on the Live display State screen shows the position within the cue sheet for each of the playbacks To show the Live display press lt LIVE gt If the default Live display does not show the X Playback window hold down SHIFT and press lt LIVE gt repeatedly until it appears 10 134 Up Down Wheel This window is mainly used when running the playback Each playback has a title line followed by completed or currently running cues This is followed by a blank line and then all unrun cues The last recorded cue is shown at the bottom in all red This disappears when the console is switched off and on again or when it is disabled in the User Setup Screen by turning the Show Last Recorded Cue field to OFF The X Playback Window Lightpalette The X Playback window on the Live display State screen shows the position within the cue sheet for each of the playbacks To show the Live display press lt LIVE gt If the default Live display does not show the X Playback window hold down SHIFT and press lt LIVE gt repeatedly until it appears 10 135 X Playback 0
279. ent name e Save the show you are working on to a floppy disk at the end of each recording session Rotate floppy disks each day so that you have a record of several days sessions e Save archive copies at the end of a show so that you can reproduce it at some later date if necessary 17 205 Storing Floppy Disks Floppy disks are your ultimate backup and archiving medium A few precautions will ensure that the backup is there when and if you need it e Store floppy disks away from the console even in a different building if possible so that they are not damaged if the console is damaged by some external cause fire pipes bursting etc e Don t store floppy disks near large magnetic sources such as the outputs and power transformers e Don t store floppy disks where there will be extreme fluctuations in temperature and or humidity e Don t leave floppy disks where they may be exposed to direct sunlight e f you archive the show for future use make at least two copies and store them in different locations e Floppy disks are not rated as an archival medium which means that they have a lifetime rating of less than 10 years For important shows make new copies of the show after each season of use even if no changes were made to the show Naming the Show Before you store your show you should name it so that you can easily identify it when you need to load it back into the console Press ARCHIVE to see the Archive dis
280. er controls the levels of all supbmasters The submaster faders and bump buttons can be used from any display They have no effect on the output if the submaster has no recorded levels intensities or attributes The Submasters window at the bottom of the Live display State screen shows the current state of the submasters Note If you experience occasional flicker on the output from submaster channels this is dueto a hardware problem to do with submaster scanning Contact Strand Service for console fix Gang Loading of Subs A sequence of cues effects or groups to be loaded simultaneously to a sequence of subs e g Enter the range of cues effects or groups using the THRU key then press the bump key for the first sub in the range The number of subs required is assigned automatically CUE 1 THRU 1 2 Sub Bump Button 1 All Modes loads cues 1 through 12 in Subs 1 through 12 FX 1 THRU 3 Sub Bump Button 13 All Modes loads effects 1 through 3 in Subs 13 through 16 GROUP 1 THRU 6 Sub Bump Button 19 All Modes loads groups 1 through 6 in Subs 19 through 24 Re assigning cues subs or Groups to Subs already assigned will automatically overwrite the original assignment The Submasters Window The Submasters window in the Live display shows the current state of the submasters and is used to show submaster fader status If the State screen does not show the Submasters window go to the User Setup Screen and chan
281. er levels They cannot be recorded and are not visible on the LIVE screen first 512 dimmers only Channel Mode uses the incoming DMX levels as the contents of a user selectable Submaster A user selectable Submaster fader can master these channel levels The levels are visible on the LIVE screen when they are active and are recordable max 512 channels This section covers the following topics o Setting Up DMX In Submasters 28 312 o Patching DMX In Dimmers o Using DMX In Dimmers o Using DMX In Channels Setting Up DMX In Submasters Set the DMX field in the Console Setup Screen to DMX IN Note Only the last available DMX connector can optionally input 512 signals if it is not outputting signals Select the SUBMASTER screen by pressing the SUB screen key Set the Submaster Function to DMX DIMR or DMX CHAN as follows 1 Use the trackball to move to the Function field of the Submaster to change 2 Use the wheel or the or keys to change it to DMX DIMR or DMX CHAN The Submaster window of the LIVE screen indicates DMX In Submasters by a C DMX Channel or D DMX Dimmer No channel levels need be entered for DMX IN Submasters Patching DMX In Dimmers To patch DMX IN Dimmers go to the PATCH screen by pressing the PATCH screen key DMX IN Dimmers are identified on the display by a trailing D e g 1D 2D 50D and are displayed in magenta To change the default use one of the following commands sel
282. er name and the preset access rights for various aspects of the system as follows Recording Access to record Cues Effects Groups etc YES or NO Patch and Fixtures Access to patch channels and attributes YES or NO Special Groups Access to change special groups YES or NO Setup Access to change the setup values for User Show and Console Setup Screens Individual access rights for each setup screen may be set as required YES or NO Console Mode Printer Show Files Access to show files on the local console or on the file server Individual rights can be set for local and server files YES or NO Channel Dimmer Controls Access to change the channel levels and dimmer controls YES or NO Playbacks Access to run the X Playbacks YES or NO Console Access Rights This window allows the Admin User to check the access rights of the logged on user to operate the consoles on the network By selecting the consoles on the network using the Console field the Admin User can set the access rights for various aspects of the system as described above for each console on the network If access rights for particular aspects of the system have been set to NO the Admin User cannot permit access to this function on any of the consoles on the network While a user may have access to all aspects of the lighting system the Admin User can restrict the access rights to particular consoles within the network Combined User and Console Access Rights
283. er you have deleted channels you may wish to renumber all of the channels so that you don t have any gaps in channel numbers oda cee aoa If you are not already in the LCD Channel menu press CHAN to show the menu Select the channel to renumber and press RENUM CHAN Enter the new channel number Press to renumber the channels or CLR or UNDO to cancel the operation Repeat as necessary Default Patching You can set any output list of outputs or all outputs back to the default patch with default scaling out DEFLT sets the default patch DEFLT is a soft key on the LCD Patch menu 1 THRU 3 DEFLT A Modes Sets output 1 2 and 3 to the default patch If any of these default channels have been deleted they will be re created If there are no free channels the command will fail DEFLT DEFLT All Modes Defaults the whole patch This re creates all the default channels and deletes all other channels This may take considerable time if many channels need to be deleted Clearing Default Patching You may wish to start patching with no outputs assigned to channels instead of tyhe default 1 1 patch You can clear individual patches groups of patches individual universes or the complete patch as follows 1 THRU 1 0 All Modes Clears default patch on channels 1 to 10 1 THRU 5 1 2 All modes Clears default patch on first universe 1 THRU 2 0 4 8 All Modes
284. er_addr 192 168 11 215 IP address of main console to connect to user edited Used by backup and remote consoles to locate the main console console_addr 192 168 11 20 Disable or enable the login display user edited The Server application needs to be installed for this to work 0 disable or 1 enable login_display 1 Disable or enable console outputs user and system edited Offline means all local and network DMX and handhelds are off 0 offline or 1 online on_line 1 Define how this node starts up user and system edited 0 remoete or 1 backup or 2 main console backup_mode 2 Defines how CLR amp SHIFT CLR operate user edited 0 clr deletes single key shift clr deletes whole command line 1 clr deletes whole command line shift clr deletes single key clr_mode 0 Numberof show to load at start up iser and system edited 0 current show or 1 gt 5 listed in lt user_name gt usr file user_show 0 Name of last logged in user user and system edited up to 8 characters no spaces user_name Password of last logged in user user and sytstem edited user_pw 29 325 End of File DMX PRIORITY ON SN10x NODES What is PRIORITY In alighting situation where there is more than one control desk both may be sending out NET DMX to the same DMX PORT on the node If this is the case the user can specify which control desk the node takes t
285. erever you want these four cues you just link the cue before them to cue 800 with a Loop property of 1 cue LINK changes the link assigned to the specified cue to a Rtrn value without changing recorded levels If the cue does not exist this command creates a new cue with no levels but with a Rtrn link value You do not get an overrecord warning with this command To delete an existinglink omit the CUE 1 LINK A Modes Changes cue 1 link value to Rtrn CUE 1 LINK A Modes Deletes the link assigned to cue 1 without changing recorded levels Loops Loops are special cases of links and subroutines that let you go through a series of cues a fixed number of times For instance suppose you need to go through cues 6 7 8 and 9 three times and then proceed with the rest of the cue sheet You can set the Link property in cue 9 to 6 then set the Loop property in cue 9 to 3 In this example the loop will pass through cue 9 three times If you start at cue 5 you get 5 6 7 8 9 5 6 7 8 9 5 6 7 8 9 5 6 7 8 9 10 You actually go through all of the cues 4 times If you use GOTO CUE 9 to get to cue 9 and then start you are already in cue 9 the first time so the sequence goes 6 7 8 9 6 7 8 9 6 7 8 9 10 In this case you only go through the cue sequence 3 times Note f you link back to a cue with its Loop property set to 0 the default the loop will continue forever Now assum
286. ers or a manual desk such as Strand Lighting s LX If the Submasters have been configured as macro triggers then only an external volt free switch contact is required since a 10v supply pin is provided on the Remote Analog Input connector This facility could be used to allow a stage manager to control house lights or to trigger any macro or to run a cue remotely This section includes the following topics o Setting Up External Submasters o Setting Up an External Supbmaster as a Macro Trigger Setting Up External Submasters To set up External Submasters go to the SUBMASTER screen by pressing the SUB screen key Set the Submaster Ext ernal field as follows 1 Use the trackball to move to the Ext field of the Submaster to change 2 Use the wheel or the or keys to change its value 1 12 or OFF External Submasters are not indicated in the Submaster window of the LIVE screen 28 311 On the Console Setup Screen screen external Submasters can have their top level adjusted by an External Subs Scaling factor between 80 and 120 Scaling allows you to compensate for any variations in signal levels between your console and the external equipment to which you are connected External Submaster fader levels are combined with the console Submaster fader levels on a HTP Highest Takes Precedence basis Setting Up External Submasters as a Macro Trigger If a Submaster has been configured as a macro trigger then only a
287. es e Copying Channel Attributes Controlling Intensity and Attributes Examples 1 3 Chan 1 Intensity to 30 1 ATT 5 Channel 1 Colour Attribute 2 to frame 5 1 2 5 7 Chan 1 Colour Attribute 2 to frame 5 1 8 5 Chan 1 Gobo Attribute 8 to frame 5 1 3 6 Chan 1 Pan Attribute 3 to 60 1 2 0 DMX 2 5 0 Chan 1 Reset Attribute 20 to DMX 250 1 THRU 5 4 Chans 1 Through 5 Intensity at 40 1 THRU 5 ATT 2 Chans 1 Through 5 Colour Attribute 2 to frame 2 1 THRU 5 2 2 Chans 1 Through 5 Colour Attribute 2 to frame 2 1 THRU 5 5 ATT 3 F Chans 1 through 5 Iris Attribute 5 to 30 Copying Channel Attributes The COPY FROM soft key on the key menu allows some or all of one channel s attribute levels to be copied to one or more channels This is very useful for copying all of one fixture s settings to one or more other fixtures Select the channel to copy from chan COPY FROM copies all attribute values of channel to the selected channel s e g 1 THRU 5 COPY FROM 1 0 Copy all attribute values from channel 10 to channels 1 to 5 1 THRU 5 2 COPY FROM 1 0 Copy colour only 30 347 Patching Attributes This section describes how Attributes are patched to Outputs DMX from the PATCH screen and covers t
288. estore the file from floppy Or you can connect a ZIP drive to the parallel printer port and add the necessarydevice driver line to the USEREXEC BAT file not AUTOEXEC BAT Changing the Current Drive and Directory Shows are always saved to the current drive and directory The first time you turn on the console the current drive is set to Floppy Disk drive A if there is a disk in the floppy disk drive Otherwise it is set to Local Disk The console saves to the current drive and directory setting when you shut down and tries to use the same drive or directory when you turn the console on again If the current drive was set to Floppy Disk when you shut down and there is no disk in the floppy disk drive when you turn the console on again and open the Archive display the current drive is reset to the last local disk directory you used 1 Press ARCHIVE BROWSE FILES to get to the LCD Browse menu This menu lets you select where you want the console to save shows to and load copy delete and restore shows from 2 Use the Trackball or mouse to highlight a drive or directory To change to the parent directory of the current directory highlight Press to select the drive or directory The new drive and directory appear in the Local Disk Floppy Disk field above the show list Before saving a show to a different drive or directory set up the required drive and directory as follows Press ARCHIVE BROWSE FILES to see the LC
289. et macro conditions P1 P14 or SHIFT P1 P14 These macros can be triggered directly using the panel buttons or from the Macro Display LCD The USER key is mapped to macro 998 The CLR key clears the last command Note The P1 to P14 SP1 to SP14 keys together with the SHIFT and DISPLAY keys are shown on all screens of the 310 Show Controller Where text labels are assigned by the user to the P or S keys the text labels are shown in place of the P or S number on all displays of the 310 Macro Display and Menu The 510i and 310 Macro Display and Menu enables viewing and play back of sequences of commands previously recorded using a Series 300 430 500 LBX or GSX console Up to 2000 macros 0 1999 may have been recorded Refer to Macros Up to eight macros can be displayed at one time on the LCD display the currently selected macro identified with the marker gt after the macro number Pressing SHIFT DISPLAY will enter the Macro Screen Individual macros can be selected from the macro display and run using the softkeys as follows LAST Selects the previous macro in the macro list NEXT Selects the next macro in the macro list MACRO 100 Subtract 100 from the current macro number if applicable and display as the current macro MACRO 100 Add 100 to the current macro number if applicable and display as the current 24 262 macro FIRST MACRO Selects the first macro as current RUN Runs the selected ma
290. evels in this group are controlled by XPlayback 1 All channels are initially set to FL and can only be set to off and FL For channels that overlap with X Playback 2 the higher of the two output levels will be used X Playback 1 X Playback 2 Channels with levels in this group are controlled by XPlayback 1 All channels are initially set to FL and can only be set to off and FL For channels that overlap with X Playback 1 the higher of the two output levels will be used Preheat Controls the preheat level for channels if the Auto Preheat field in the Show Setup Screen is set to ON All channels are initially off blank level Preheat levels for all channels are taken from this group The Current Group The current group is the last group which has been referenced in the Group display or recorded from another display It is shown in the right LCD and can be used in a group selection or in group recording All group recording commands act on a single group which is shown by in the command description If you do not enter a group number the current group is used You can use NEXT and LAST instead of to select a group relative to the current group GROUP Specifies the current group GROUP 1 Specifies group 1 GROUP NEXT If the current group is group 3 this specifies group 4 If the current group is the highest group number this specifies the lowest group number GROUP LAST If the current group is group 3 then this speci
291. evious steps are not sent low Once all of the steps are high they are all sent low and the build starts again 11 140 Recording Effect Direction The effect can be set to run in one of four directions as listed below You can control this property from the Effects display or by pressing FX DIR and selecting the appropriate option from the LCD display Note On consoles without an FX DIR key you require to set up this field using edit mode as described above FX 1 FX DIR FWD Sets FX 1 direction to forward FX 1 FX DIR REV Sets FX 1 direction to reverse FX 1 FX DIR BOUNCE Sets FX 1 direction to bounce FX 1 FX DIR RANDOM Sets FX 1 direction to random Forward The effect steps are played sequentially from the lowest step number to the highest step number and are then repeated from the first step number Reverse The effect steps are played sequentially from the highest step number to the lowest step number and are then repeated from the highest step number Bounce The effect steps are played sequentially from the lowest step number to the highest step number and then from the highest step number back to the lowest step number Steps are then repeated in the same sequence Random Steps are played randomly All steps are played once before a new random sequence is started Effect Fade Times You can enter fade values from one hundredth of a second to 59 59 seconds as
292. fect are the same for all submaster pages When an effect or macro is assigned to a submaster fader the fader controls the levels of the channels running in the effect or macro together with channels recorded in the submaster SUB FX RECORD Direct 1 Digit and Direct 2 Digit RECORD SUB FX Command Line Records levels on the current display into the specified submaster and assigns an effect to it If the submaster has already been recorded an overrecord message gives you the chance to cancel the recording To rerecord the submaster press RECORD again To cancel the recording press CLR or UNDO When the submaster is moved up from zero the effect is automatically started To delete an assigned effect rerecord omitting the effect number SUB 1 FX 2 RECORD Direct 1 Digit and Direct 2 Digit RECORD SUB 1 FX 2 Command Line Records levels into submaster 1 and assigns effect 2 to it SUB 1 FX RECORD Direct 1 Digit and Direct 2 Digit RECORD SUB 1 FX Command Line Records levels into submaster 1 and deletes any assigned effect SUB FX changes the effect assigned to the specified submaster without changing recorded levels You do not get an overrecord warning with this command if the submaster exists SUB 1 FX All Modes Deletes the effect assigned to submaster 1 without changing any levels SUB 1 FX 2 All Modes Changes the ef
293. fect assigned to submaster 1 to effect 2 without changing any levels SUB MACRO records levels on the current display into the specified submaster and assigns a macro to it If the submaster has already been recorded an overrecord message gives you the chance to cancel the recording To rerecord the submaster press RECORD again To cancel the recording press CLR or UNDO When the submaster is moved up from zero the macro is automatically started To delete an assigned macro omit the macro number SUB 1 MACRO 3 RECORD Direct 1 Digit and Direct 2 Digit RECORD SUB 1 MACRO 3 Command Line Records levels into submaster 1 and assigns Macro 3 to it SUB 1 MACRO RECORD Direct 1 Digit and Direct 2 Digit RECORD SUB 1 MACRO Command Line Records levels into submaster 1 and deletes any assigned 7 79 macro SUB MACRO changes the macro assigned to the specified submaster without changing recorded levels You do not get an overrecord warning with this command if the submaster exists SUB 1 MACRO All Modes Deletes the macro assigned to submaster 1 without changing any levels SUB 1 MACRO 2 All Modes Changes the macro assigned to submaster 1 to macro 2 without changing any levels External Faders The numbered submaster fader normally controls the submaster or supermaster directly However each submaster can be set to use one of the 1
294. fies group 2 If the current group is the lowest group number this specifies the highest group number Recording Group Levels GROUP records the levels intensity levels and attribute levels on the current display into the current group GROUP records the levels on the current display the Live Cue Preview Group Effect or Submaster display into the specified group For information on how to set intensity and attribute levels refer to Working with Channel Levels and Basic Recording for examples of recording Groups can be numbered from 1 to 999 9 and you can have up to 1000 groups in a show You can record just intensities or just attributes to a group by adding INTS ONLY or ATTS ONLY to the command line In preset focus terms Attributes are only active if their levels are shown as bright white on the Group display To record a group from a selection with no Intensities you must include a channel list before the Group Record command e g 1 THRU 3 GROUP 5 12 168 Recording Group Properties Groups have only one property which can be specified when recording or edited later You can record a text label caption with each group to help identify the group see Recording Levels and Properties in Basic Recording Using Referenced Groups You can record intensities and attributes in groups 1 through 750 and then use these groups in cues effect steps and submasters as reference groups sometimes called prese
295. formation see Communiqu Pro Software Only one submaster can be the Midi Ratio Supermaster To set the submaster function in the Submaster display press lt SUB gt to see the Submaster display and then change the Function field for the appropriate submaster SUB function RECORD records levels on the current display into the specified submaster and changes the submaster function SUB function changes the function of the specified submaster without changing recorded levels The key sequences represented by function are Pileon submaster SUB FUNC NORMAL Independent submaster SUB FUNC INDEP Exclusive submaster SUB FUNC EXCLUS Inhibitive submaster SUB FUNC INHIB Sound To Light Submaster SUB FUNC SUPER I P SOUND LIGHT DMX Channel Submaster SUB FUNC SUPER I P DMX IN CHAN DMX Dimmer Submaster SUB FUNC SUPER I P DMX IN DIMMER Submaster Supermaster SUB FUNC SUPER SUB SUPER Effect Supermaster SUB FUNC SUPER FX SUPER Flash Supermaster SUB FUNC SUPER FLASH SUPER Audio Threshold Supermaster SUB FUNC SUPER I P AUDIO THRESH Midi Ratio Supermaster SUB FUNC SUPER I P MIDI RATIO Grandmaster 1 SUB FUNC GM 1 Grandmaster 2 SUB FUNC GM 2 500 Series consoles only 7 78 Assigning Effects and Macros Both a macro and an effect can be associated with a submaster fader so that when the fader is reloaded it automatically runs the macro and or effect The macro and ef
296. from the Auto Mod Screen UPDATE UPDATE A MOD FX 5 Updates effect 5 from the Auto Mod Screen Using Automod with Moving Lights Since all associated attribute channels and channels in all cues subs groups and effects are automatically paired Auto Mod can be used to considerable advantage when setting up moving lights For instance when the characteristics of a moving light have been set up for one light you can pair its intensitiy and attribute values to other moving lights and to itself In this way cues subs groups and effects using the same moving lights can be set with the minimum number of keystrokes You can then decide to apply the settings to individual or ranges of cues subs groups and effects using the syntax described above 14 195 Chapter 15 Direct Output Control This section describes how to directly control outputs dimmers An output can control any device capable of taking an AMX192 D54 500 Series Consoles only or DMX512 signal and translating it into a command including scrollers and other moving light fixtures The outputs from the patch system can be further manipulated within this console by DMX signal assignment see Output Connections Window of the Console Setup Screen and again at the input of many dimmer racks Each output is normally patched to a channel so that the output follows the channel level You can use the DIMMER key to unpatch the output from the channel and set its output
297. ftware is loaded SVR The optional Server software is loaded Others may be shown as new software is developed and loaded 1 0 2 sets channel 1 to 2 1 3 0 sets channel 1 to 30 1 4 5 sets channel 1 to 45 Setting Access Rights The Access Rights Screen lets you set the access rights for the current console and user and is only used when the Server software is loaded The Access Rights Screen lets you set the access rights for the current console and user and is only used when the Server software is loaded To show the Access Rights window press REPORT ADV SETUP ACCESS RIGHTS For help on changing values in this screen This display is only available to the Admin User as described under User Logins in the Server Software Section User admin R rding Setup se Show Files Patch amp Fixtures Console Mode Channel Dimmer Control Special Groups Printer Playbacks f y Setup User Show Files Show onsote gt ver Patch amp Fixtures C jle Mode Char wner Control Special Groups d User amp Console Ac ver Patch amp Fixtures C p Mode Chan immer Control Special Groups inter Playbacks 20 239 The Access Rights Screen is divided into three windows e User Access Rights Window e Console Access Rights Window e Combined User and Access Rights Window User Access Rights This window allows the Admin User to check the User Access Rights for the user who is logged on The display shows the us
298. g you will be faced with a dialog box with several fields The fields show The current directory This will change as you use the mouse keyboard in the directory listing to move around the selected disk drive A list of files to translate from You may select one file or several files for simultaneous translation A list of subdirectories in the current directory You can select a new directory or disk drive by double clicking on it A drop down box to select the file type to translate from Click on the arrow to select a new type Note that you are unable to translate between files of the same type Another drop down box to select the file type to translate to A progress bar to show how the conversion is progressing The progress bar will go from 0 to 100 during reading and then from 0 to 100 during writing A log window to show the status of the conversion The Convert button should be clicked to start conversion While converting this button changes to an Abort button which may be clicked to stop conversion ShowPort File Formats 36 396 Strand Show Eile file extension ssf This format is proprietary to Strand Lighting Ltd and will not be discussed here Ascii Light Cues format file extension alq This format is the USITT ASCII Text representation for lighting console data and conforms to version 3 0 March 1992 of the standard ShowPort implements several manufacturer specific keywords for Strand Lighting consoles
299. g Learned Profiles Stopping the Learn Process Assigning Profiles Chapter 20 Report Displays Page 224 e The Channel Summary Screen e The Cue Summary Screen e The Dimmer Summary Screen e The System Report Menu e The System Report Screen e Advanced Setup Menus xii o User Setup a The Control Modes Window Channel Control Mode CC Auto Hold Mode On Level Up Down Wheel Mastering Wheel Sensitivity Stop Key The Display Options Window Display Language Channel Display Smart Channel Display Auto Channel Page Channel Formatting Live Screen Layout X Playback Colours X Playback Order X Playback Format Show Last Recorded Cue Screen Menus The Default Times Window X Back Cut Cue Fade Up Down Cue Delay Up Down Cue Wait FX Step FX Step In Dwell Out FX Up Down Undo Time The Console Window Number of Screens LCD Contrast Backlight Gooseneck Brightness Buzzer Volume Macro Tablet Mouse Console Keys Layout Submaster Layout GeniusPro Lightpalette Default o Show Setup Screen Show Details Window Cue Tracking Playback Modes Auto Move While Dark Auto Move Fade Delay Auto Preheat Auto Preheat Fade Delay Power Up Restore Power Up Macro GM1 Fade Up Down GM2 Fade Up Down Playback Partitioning Cue Sheet Macros a MIDI Window Timecode Options Window a Patch Window Default Scale Default Frame xiii G Default Non Dim Console Time Window
300. g Networker software Multiple patches can be edited off line stored on the PC hard disk printed and downloaded to the nodes as required ShowNet does not download patch information to consoles or PCs The following topics are covered in this section Shownet Software Installation Windows Network Configuration Running Shownet Software Pop Up Speed Menu Editing the Shownet Configuration Shownet Command Buttons ShowNet Software Installation To install ShowNet software on your Windows NT or 95 PC place the first ShowNet disk in the floppy drive and select START RUN A SETUP EXE Follow the on screen prompts for further instructions Once installed you will be able to run ShowNet software but you must also install and configure your PC network adapter before you can download patch information to nodes Note Some new PCs and laptops are shipped with a network component called OSB supplement for USB This needs to be uninstalled for the ioftp32 networker utility to work This utility is needed for Shownet to be able to download node configuration files Windows Network Configuration You must install and configure your PC network adapter before you can download patch information to nodes ShowNet uses standard PC network adapters and the network drivers supplied with Windows NT and 95 to download configurations to SN nodes Configure as follows 1 Install the Ethernet adapter card in you PC Any 10baseT or 10base2 adapter which
301. ge gives you the chance to cancel the recording To rerecord the cue press RECORD again To cancel the recording press CLR or UNDO For information on creating and editing profiles refer to Profiles Separate fade profiles can be assigned to each cue part for attributes To delete an assigned fade profile omit the fade profile number CUE 1 ATT PROFILE 3 RECORD Direct 1 and 2 Digit RECORD CUE 1 ATT PROFILE 3 Command Line Records levels into cue 1 and assigns fade profile 3 to the attributes CUE 1 ATT PROFILE RECORD Direct 1 and 2 Digit RECORD CUE 1 ATT PROFILE Command Line Records levels into cue 1 and deletes any fade profile assigned to attributes cue ATT PROFILE changes the fade profile assigned to the specified cue s attributes without changing recorded levels If the cue doesn t exist this command creates a new cue with no levels but with the specified fade profile assignment You do not get an overrecord warning with this command if the cue exists CUE 1 ATT PROFILE A Modes Deletes the fade profile assigned to cue 1 attributes without changing recorded levels See also Assigning Fade Profiles Assigning an Effect RECORD cue FX RECORD records the levels on the Live display into the specified cue and assigns an effect to it If the effect number is positive the cue starts the effect If the effect number is negative the
302. ge the Live Screen Layout value to PB SUBS or SUBS Then press LIVE to show the Live display 7 84 0001 820304805806078080918011121314 15161718192021 2223248825 00262728293031 323 73839 4 424344454647484990859 895152535 565758596861626364 656667686978717273740675 BBIBIIIBIDBOBLAZBIB4ESBEBIBBBS 09192939495969798998108 01819203048050607080918011121314 1516171819280212223248125 lt Playbar Wheel Page 1 Submasters Sub Text Sub Text Sub Text Sub Text 8 Current Page The current submaster page is shown on the title bar of the Submasters window Submaster Number Each submaster is identified by its number 1 to 24 1 to 30 1 to 54 or 1 to 120 depending on the console The colour of this number shows the state of the submaster blue The submaster has no recorded channels and so has no effect on the console output white The submaster has recorded channels but is not contributing to the output yellow The submaster has recorded channels and is contributing to the output green background The submaster fader is adding channels from a submaster on a different page than the current page This happens if the fader is set higher than 0 when the current page is changed or less than 10 for an inhibitive submaster The green background disappears when the submaster reloads Submaster Function The submaster function is shown beside each submaster number This reflects the Function field in the Submaster display blank Pile
303. ges the level wheel to a rate wheel while the rate function is selected Set the fade progress for Up or Down fade progress or both then press the appropriate RATE key to end the rate adjustment and return the wheel to the normal level function Changing the current fade rate does not change the recorded fade time for any cues or parts Rather it changes the time remaining for cues that are running when you press RATE If there is more than one cue or cue part running when you press RATE the Level Wheel changes their fade rates proportionally The Level Wheel loses control of fades when all fades are completed or when a new fade is started Rate changes you made with the Level Wheel still apply to running cues or parts but the Level Wheel no longer controls any fades Cue Fade Progress in Manual Time Normally cue fades progress automatically Manual Time takes the fade times of all currently running cues and the next cue on the Playback from the time fader The next cue is adjusted to the exact value of the time fader and the currently running cues are adjusted proportionally to their current percent on completion The up and down times can be controlled separately Any new cues automatically come under control of the fader and take their time from the time controls 9 119 To change the playback faders into time controls press MAN TIME over the playback The LCD changes to AUTO INST and MAN FADE in this mode The time
304. ggle Lock Y trackball movement When locked moving the trackball up down will have no effect When Y movement has been locked the Tilt attribute will be displayed in Grey A Tilt Locked warning is also displayed on the Status Window You can lock pan and tilt functions simultaneously Note If the trackball doesn t appear to work in either the left right or up down direction it is likely that the movement is locked Try toggling the lock state as described above Rotary Controls There are four rotary controls located on the right hand side of the console These are referred to as R1 top R2 R3 and R4 bottom and are colour coded as follows same colour used on screen R1 White R2 Blue R3 Red R4 Magenta These are used to master the attribute currently assigned to that control Clockwise increases the attribute value anti clockwise decreases the value They are continuous controls without end stops By default the R1 rotary is permanently assigned to attribute 2 colour while R2 R3 and R4 are assigned to the attributes in the current attribute page as set by the left and right trackball keys see above These defaults can be changed by modifying the ATC page library Refer to Fixture Library List Note Sticky backed coloured dots are supplied with the console They should be placed in the appropriate indents on the rotary controls as per above table 30 343 Mouse Control of Features GeniusPro and Lightpa
305. gh from previous cues When set to 0 levels are forced to zero in the cue You can set levels off ina Cross Fade Blocking Cue to make individual channels track through the cue or at zero ina Move Fade Tracking Cue to block individual channels When you record from the Live display with Tracking on channels at zero are set to zero level in the cue only if they change from the previous cue Otherwise they are recorded off and channel levels track through from the previous cue Setting Channel Tracking Status Normally any channels you record into a cue take on the channel tracking status currently set in the Cue Tracking field of the Show Details window of the Show Setup Screen You can change the tracking status of channels as you set their levels by using the Q ONLY TRACK key If Cue Tracking is set to ON the selected channel levels will be changed only in the current cue If Cue Tracking is set to OFF or THIS CUE ONLY the selected channel levels will be changed in the current cue and track through subsequent cues to where the channel levels are next set 1 5 Q ONLY TRACK 5 Direct 1 and 2 Digit 1 5 Q ONLY TRACK 5 Command Line Sets channels 1 and 5 to 50 and changes the set tracking state for those channels only 9 130 Deleting Cues Cues can be deleted from the Preview display This is a good way to delete cues if you are only going to delete a few To learn how to delete all cues or a range of
306. h 3 attributes only to the levels set in group 5 This command requires a Pentium processor or better and the Tracker software For additional information refer to Tracker Software Viewing and Editing Groups Once you have recorded groups you can view and edit them in the Group display You can also use the Group display to create new groups Note Changing levels while in this display changes the recorded levels in the current group without a record command and without warning you 12 169 Updating and Adding to Groups UPDATE GROUP changes levels in the specified group as necessary based on channels that have been modified live red or purple channels on the Live display This command excludes channels that are not already in the group and channels that have been removed from the modified list by using SHIFT CLR Note When using groups the UPDATE key is set to default to update only channels already in the group Pressing the UPDATE key as part of a group command syntax e g UPDATE GROUP is the same as entering UPDATE CHANS IN GROUP So when updating a group to include only changes in channels already in the group there is no need to use the CHANS IN softkey The CHANS IN softkey is used as necessary when updating cues Channels that are off in the selection will be removed from the group UPDATE GROUP 1 All Modes Updates levels that have been modified in group 1 excl
307. he key before entering the password digits Loading Software The operating software is pre loaded at manufacture You will need to update this software if new versions are released For further information on how to load the operating software refer to Loading Software The OS field in the System Report Screen Configuration window shows the operating software that is currently loaded on the console To show this field press REPORT Note Show files from version 2 4 software cannot be loaded into previous software versions You must load this version of software into the console before loading the show Loading Application Software You will need to load application software if you are loading additional application software e g Server Software or if you are adding channels to your console For information on how to load application software refer to Adding Additional Channels or Applications After you enter a password or if the 21 day period ends this method of loading application software will not work Refer to Password Operations for information on how to enter and save the password The APPL field in the System Report Screen Configuration window shows the application software currently loaded on the console To show this field press REPORT 17 204 Disk Operations Each time you make changes to your show they are stored in an internal hard disk drive drive C the local disk so that when you turn your console on t
308. he group You can usethe following command to record a selection of channels rather than all channels into a new group 12 170 1 THRU 5 UPDATE GROUP All Modes Changes channel 1 through 5 levels in group 1 excluding channels that are not already in the group Updating Groups from the Live Screen When in Group screen you can update groups according to the levels in the Live Screen on stage using the syntax chans LIVE This syntax will set the selected channel levels into currently highlighted Group in the Group Screen including channels not already in the Group Alternatively you can update only the channels in the Group using the syntax Group LIVE 1 THRU 5 LIVE Direct Action Modes 1 THRU 5 LIVE Command Line Mode Sets the levels of channels 1 to 5 in the currently selected Group to the levels in the Live Screen levels on stage If any of the channels are not already in the Group they are added to the group GROUP 1 LIVE Direct Action modes GROUP 1 LIVE Command Line Mode Selects the channels in Group 1 and sets them according to the levels in the Live Screen on stage The Group Display To show the Group display press GROUP in the Display keypad not GROUP in the Levels keypad 12 171 0001 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 0025 a ee 0026 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 4
309. he CHANNEL level from i e who has PRIORITY This is done in the 220NODE CFG file of the node Priority is setup as follows PORT START END NET SLOT PRIORITY HTP DMX 1 l 100 1000 1 DMX 1 l 100 2000 2 This means that if the node receives DMX data on both NETSLOT 1000 and NETSLOT 2000 then the node will use the levels from NETSLOT 1000 This is because 1 is the highest priority If the node stops receiving DMX data from NETSLOT 1000 then it will use the levels from NETSLOT 2000 What is HTP HTP or Highest Takes Precedence means that if two consoles are transmitting NET DMX to the same DMX PORT on the node the highest channel level will be displayed PRIORITY VALUES 1 HIGHEST 3 LOWEST If one instance of a DMX PORT is set to HTP then all instances of that DMX PORT are HTP HTP supercedes PRIORITY SN10X Configuration File Format The configuration file c 220node cfg on the SN10X is responsible for configuring all aspects of the SN10X s operation Each of the fields in the file will now be described In the configuration file lines preceded by a character are comments these lines are ignored The Strand Networker networking software may need to address a specific node on a network The Internet address is the means by which the software can uniquely identify each unit on a network The Internet address of an SN100 is specified by the my_nodeaddr keyword in the 220node cfg file All the devices on a network must
310. he R130 Radio Handheld Remote Installing the R130 Radio Base R130 Base Pinouts 00 0 0 Installing the R130 Wired Remote 1 Plug wired remote into console Aux port only AUX3 is allowed on older consoles At Console Setup screen Handheld Remote Communications Setup set Handheld Remote to R130 Wired and set the Net Node Port Baud Rate and Configuration Address 3 Display will illuminate and keys become active 4 Channels under remote control will be displayed in purple on console screens Installing the R130 Radio Handheld Remote 1 Remove rear cover from handheld be loosening two Phillips screws and connect re chargeable battery pack Replace cover 2 Connect radio handheld to power supply for 12 hours to achieve full charge 3 Press On key top right to power up handheld unit and hold down CLR bottom left amp bottom right keys as unit powers up to gain access to setup menus 4 Using setup menu set COMS as follows Radio Channel 4 default Radio Sub Channel 1 default Internal Radio Sn xxxxxxxx can t change this write it down Destination Sn xxxxxxxx read from lable on base station Display Serial Errors No default Aud Serial Errors No default Support XON XOFF No default Exit amp Store Changes Yes 5 Press On key top right twice to power down unit 26 290 Installing the R130 Radio Base Pee Write down serial number of base station xx
311. he data is still there You can also save copies of a show to a floppy disk for later retrieval You can store up to 200 shows in any one local disk directory and can store one show per floppy disk If the Server application software is installed you will also be able to save shows to a file server For more information refer to Server Software When you save to the local disk the console automatically saves any existing version of the show as a backup copy It will save the last 10 versions of the show as backup copies so that you can easily go back to previous versions if necessary Note When you save a show all data including Setup information is saved regardless of what you check in the Archive display The following topics are covered in this section e Why Save a Show Storing Floppy Disks Naming the Show Changing the Current Drive and Directory Saving a Show Loading a Show Restoring or Deleting a Backup Copy of the Show Local Disk Functions Why Save the Show It s important to save your show frequently both to restore a show if it is lost due to disaster or equipment failure and to retrieve information from previous versions of a show if necessary e Save the show to the local disk several times during a recording session This automatically saves up to 10 backup copies of the show and it s as simple as pressing ARCHIVE SAVE SHOW SAVE SHOW e Save each different show in your current repertory with a differ
312. he following topics Patching Attributes to a Single Channel Fixture Libraries The Copy Patch Menu Range Patching O10 0 G Patching Attributes To a Single Channel Patching attribute channels is the same as normal intensity patching except that the attribute number must be specified From the PATCH screen 1 0 0 4 S 7 Patch Output 100 to Channel 4 Attribute 3 Pan 9 9 4 4 1 Patch Output 99 to Channel 4 Attribute 4 Tilt To invert an attribute i e 0 255 DMX output to 100 0 DMX output use a before the scaling or frame number e g 1 1 0 5 F 0 7 Patch Dimmer 110 to Channel 5 Intensity and flip output 1 3 L 3 E 0 Patch Output 1 to Channel 3 Attribute 3 Pan as continuous and flip output By a combination of swapping Pan amp Tilt and inverting or not any orientation of fixture can be set so Pan left right always pans left right across stage and tilt moves up down stage Continuous attributes 0 entered as frame count display as 0 FL on the output screen and as DMX values 0 255 on the rotary window Patching Fixtures When complete fixtures are patched using the FIXTURE softkey the attribute channels used are shown in blue on the Patch Screen with the function of each attribute channel shown in blue below the channel number If the patch display is in Output Order the name of the fixture is shown in whit
313. he last cue is identified by a after the cue number The softkeys on the LCD display enable the operator to select and run cues as follows Note Pressing the SHIFT key will toggle between X1 Playback and X2 Playback if a dual playback mode is selected in the Show Setup All key actions apply to the playback displayed on the LCD i e X1 or X2 LAST Selects the previous cue on the displayed cue sheet as the cue to be loaded NEXT Selects the next cue on the displayed cue sheet as the cue to be loaded 24 266 LOAD Loads a selected cue into the X Playback and resets any loops to their original loop count This action has no effect on the output until the GO softkey is pressed STOP BACK Press once to stop the current cue Press again to move to the previous cue GO TO CUE 0 Selects cue 0 Blackout GO Runs the current cue Backup Display This display is applicable when the 510i or 310 is used to provide tracking backup to a 500 or 300 Series Lighting Control Console using an Ethernet network Refer to Tracking Backup Networker The 510i and 310 Backup LCD displays the following network information Networker On Mode As specified by 220node cfg This Node Net name node number Backup node Net name node number Status As current network status For information on backup commands refer to Backup Commands Networker Setup Display and Menu The Setup Display and menu
314. hernet cable separating the two nodes This section covers the following topics e Cabling Systems e Network Topology e Ethernet Card Installation on Older Consoles Cabling Systems A cabling system is determined by the type of cable and the topology of the system The cabling also decides the performance installation cost future expansion and in some cases the resilience of a network The following cabling systems are discussed in this section Thick Net Thin Net Thin Wire 1OBASE2 10B2 Backbone Thin Net Thin Wire 1OBASE1 10B2 Star Twisted Pair UTP 10BASET 10BT Star Optical Fibre 00000 In addition this section includes a Comparison Table showing the advantages and disadvantages of each system 34 381 Thick Net This uses relatively expensive cable requires transceivers and drop cables at every node and is now only used for long backbones as its maximum length is 500m 1 64 0ft It is not recommended for Networker applications as Thin Net with repeaters or optical fibre provides a lower cost alternative where very long runs are required Thin Net Thin Wire 1OBASE2 10B2 Backbone BNC 4 anc BNC BNC BNC BNC BNC BNC Terminator Connector Connector Connector Connector Connector Connector Terminator CONSOLE This uses 50ohm coaxial cable with 500hm BNC connectors in linear bus topology The system must be configured with a single segment with nodes connected along the length and 500hm BNC terminators at
315. hite text see also Extending the Current Selection To select channels you specify the selection as shown above and then press e chan makes the specified channels the current selection e 1 2 Select channels 1 and 2 at their current levels e makes all channels which are on those above 0 or on At 0 the current selection This is the same as 1 THRU ON 9 9 9 9 e Select all on channels Extending the Current Channel Selection e chan or chan add or subtract channels from an already existing channel selection e 4 THRU 9 Adds channel 4 through 9 to the existing channel selection e 4 5 Subtracts channel 45 from the existing channel selection Note Providing a channel list has been selected since the console was last switched on the list is held in memory until a new list is created to replace it You can therefore add or subtract channels from the current list even though the Live Screen Channel Display is blank Pressing the or keys will restore the last channel list and allow you to add or subtract channels from the selection Selecting the Next or Last Channel The CHAN field on the right LCD shows the current channel This is the final channel listed when making a selection e The NEXT and LAST keys make the channel after or before the current channel of the same type intensity or attribute the current selection When c
316. hor references up to 9 per screen automatically labelled with 1 to 9 coloured red on grey meaning press the 1 key for the first reference 2 for the second etc eg to jump to anchor setup in the file setup htm lt A HREF setup htm gt setup lt A gt Required at foot of file lt BODY gt lt HTML gt Converting German Galaxy Files to Strand Show Files To transfer shows from a German Galaxy you can connect Galaxy s printer port to Com1 or 2 on a PC use Windows Terminal or Hyperterminal to capture the printout to a file and run a QBASIC program called gal2alq bas available from Strand Service to produce a Strans Show File For more details refer to Strand Service 37 406 Addendum A Set up Screens Console Setup The Console Setup Screen The Console Setup screen is displayed when you press the REPORT key followed by the ADV SETUP softkey then the CONSOL SETUP softkey This display lets you control how the console communicates with other devices to which it is connected Use the trackball to move between fields Change values by using and or the Level Wheel or by typing in numbers where appropriate Choices available for the currently selected field appear at the bottom of the display with the currently selected choice highlighted as white on a red background Only items shown in green text can be modified Yellow text indicates items that are not available with the current system co
317. how many times to run the subroutine Zero means continuous looping Ignored if Link is blank Run the macro Refer to Product Specification for number of macros Start the effect Refer to Product Specification for number of effects Stop the effect Refer to Product Specification for number of effects The playback that will run this cue If the label isn t showing the cue will be assigned to the next available playback The assigned Up Down profile You can assign separate profiles for the up and down fades The profile assigned to attributes Note The text label caption assigned to the cue is shown at the far right end of the first line of cue information without a field label 9 114 Running Timed Cues On power up each playback is positioned on the cue which was the current cue when you shut down the console Press GO to run the next cue and automatically load the cue after that once fading is complete The GO button light flashes while the cue is fading but not during any delay or wait time The light is on if a cue is loaded for playback otherwise the light is off If there are any stopped or reversing cues pressing GO restarts those cues running forwards Continuously pressing GO will step sequentially through the cue sheet Running timed cues will sequence through the cue sheet taking account of link and loop cues When the end of the cue sheet is reached the playback is cleared and no more cues can be run un
318. identical to the other 500 and 300 Series consoles the 510i or 310 can serve as a compact and cost effective tracking backup unit for a main 500 or 300 series lighting control console Refer to Tracking Backup Networker The 501i and 310 runs on the same GeniusPro or Lightpallette operating software as the 500 and 300 Series consoles This section describes the operating features applicable to the 510i and 310 It contains the following topics User Interface Macro Display and Menu Submaster Display and Menu Browse Display and Menu Event Display and Menu Playbacks Display and Menu Backup Display Setup Display and Menu Error Line Off Line Editing e Submaster Macro Inputs User Interface The front panel controls of the 510i provide the minimum user interface required to operate all the GeniusPro Lightpallette Communiqu Pro and Networker playback functions Access to the full software functionality in particular show set up editing and saving is only possible using an external keyboard and video display or a remote control unit 24 261 The 310 Show Controller incorporates a touch screen LCD display incorporating the keys on the 510i in the form of on sceen touch softkeys The 510i LCD display on the front panel provides all the displays and associated softkeys necessary to control the playback functions of the system The Macro display is shown at startup however the operator can select other menus using the DISPLAY
319. ighlighted as white on a red background Only items shown in green text can be modified Yellow text indicates items that are not available with the current system configuration When afield is selected you can apply the default value for the field by pressing the DEFLT softkey The default value in some fields is dependant on the setting of the GENIUSPRO PALETTE field in the Console Window To select the first field in the Setup display press To close the UserSetup Screen and return to the previously displayed screen press the BACK softkey Refer to User Setup Screen for further information regarding the various windows and fields of this screen Locking the Console Memory When the memory is locked you cannot record anything or change anything that is already recorded You can however play back cues effects and macros in any order in manual or auto mode Channel control operations and the movement of submasters is also permitted when the memory is locked This is generally used after a show has been plotted to ensure that accidental changes are not made REPORT ADV SETUP ACCESS RIGHTS MEMORY LOCK 3 1 7 1 REPORT ADV SETUP ACCESS RIGHTS MEMORY LOCK 3 1 7 1 toggles the memory state between locked and unlocked This code is the same for all consoles 16 199 Chapter 17 The Archive Screen The Archive Screen is divided into two windows e The Archive Selection Window e The Show L
320. ight of this field Auto Move Fade Delay Sets the speed for the auto move Fade and the delay between the end of the last cue and when the auto move will start The default values are 1 1 Auto Preheat When ON channels with intensities higher in the next cue than in the Preheat group 999 5 are faded to the levels in the Preheat group when a cue is loaded This lets you preheat large wattage fixtures so that they fade up smoothly Its value is OFF default or ON Auto Preheat Fade Delay Sets the speed for the fade to the preheat level and the delay between the end of the last cue and when the preheat fade starts You can set the speed for the fade in the Fade field and the delay in the Delay field to the right of this field The default values are 1 1 Power Up Restore At power up this restores the output channels to the levels that were present in the Live display when the console was powered off Otherwise the console output levels are all set to 0 at power up Its value is OFF or ON default file Cl LIGHTP HELP ENG PAGE22 HTM 4 of 10 6 17 2005 7 35 13 AM Show Setup Screen Power Up Macro Sets the macro which is run when the console is switched on If the macro does not exist this is ignored OFF default There is no macro The macro number from 0 to 1999 to run GM 1 Fade Up Down The fade time for Grandmaster 1 The up and down times are separate fields They can be any value between 0 and 59 m
321. ilable from Strand Service or an internal link mod can be done to link COM2 connector pins 3 and 2 to remote connector pins 5 and 6 Some SN102s do not update handheld displays from their remote ports but the handheld keys work This is due to a hardware fault caused by the omission of inductor L25 near the COM1 connector This can be fixed by soldering a wire link in place of the missing L25 33 376 I F 1 2 Name Power Ethernet 10BaseT twisted pair Connector Pin number on Unit 6A IEC Plug 85 264v RJ45 Socket Signal Ref Live Earth Neutral ISO IEC 8802 3 1993 edition TD TD RD RD Notes Internal 2A Fuse only serviceable by trained personnel The unit contains automatic receive polarity correction Twisted Pair TX data Twisted Pair TX data Twisted Pair RX data Twisted Pair RX data 4 5 7 8 Not connected Ethernet SO IEC 3 10Base2 BNC Socket 8802 3 1993 thinwire edition Isolated BNC 1 Net_data bentre Isolated BNC 5 Pin panel 4 amp 15 DMX 1 amp 2 in out mounting XLR sockets __ mo omxenrd o ao wae ee 3 DMXAB RS485 ja Back Rsaas __ 5 TBACK RS485 6 Pin panel mounting XLR socket O mo Rewer o Oo a i w as o Ce en ee rr so como ass O e Comain Rs485 COM1 ASCIIIN 9 a 6 7 COM2 PRINTER i ype RS232 plug TX and RX at baud rates of Document 3X32478 issue 3 0 and
322. ile the graph view is replaced with a point list and the Graph Editing function is no longer available for that profile Using DMX 2 3 DMX 4 0 Sets the point represented by the DMX value of 23 to a DMX level of 40 The State screen switches to a point list rather than the standard profile graph DMX 2 3 Clears the above command Graph Editing Graph editing lets you use the trackball or mouse to highlight where you want to place an anchor point and then insert the point You can move the end points this way and easily add more points Each end point and any point you add is an anchor point for a section of the curve and is shown in white rather than green When you add a point the curve is redrawn so that there is a straight line between the new point and the nearest anchor point s 19 228 trackerball or mouse INSERT POINT INSERT POINT sets an anchor point in the profile Anchor points are shown in white All other points in the profile are calculated to create straight lines between adjacent anchor points trackerball or mouse Highlights the location for the new point The trackball or mouse moves the highlight in 5 steps To change point values in 1 steps use and INSERT POINT INSERT POINT Inserts the point and recalculates all points between the end points and the new anchor point DELETE POINT DELETE POINT deletes an anchor point in the profile The profile is recalculat
323. ime during the copy process will return to the Browse menu Loading Operating Software To load new operating software insert the floppy disk in the disk drive and select the SOFT LOAD softkey A software load prompt and confirm message is displayed Pressing the SOFT LOAD softkey again will load the operating software from the floppy disk 24 264 Event Display and Menu The 510i and 310 is designed to operate in conjunction with an externally applied SMTE time code however in the absence of a SMPTE time code the operator can enable an internal clock to control the show events When the external SMPTE clock is selected and running the internal SMPTE clock is automatically synchronised to it This Event Display and Menu enables the operator to select the source of timing of show events and displays each event and programmed event time in sequence as the light show progresses A lt marker indicates the next event to trigger and a marker indicates the last event triggered Select EXT CLK to apply an external SMTE time code input via the 3 pin Audio XLR outlet Select INT CLK to apply the internal time code clock The status of the timing source and SMPTE time is displayed on the LCD as EXTERNAL OVERRIDE internal clock taken over NO CLOCK external clock absent INTERNAL or PAUSE Note The time code source must be set to SMPTE at the Show Setup display before the internal or external clock can be used This section c
324. in the Start DATE field Start DATE The date and month to start the macro Can be OFF the default or any four digit date month number from 0101 1st January to 3112 31st December The first digit can be omitted if it is O 101 is the same as 0101 If this is set to OFF the macro is started today at the time specified in the Start Time field Interval The time between repetitions of the macro Can be OFF the default or any four digit time value between 0 and 23 hours 59 minutes 2400 To run the macro once set this to OFF To run the macro repeatedly between the Start Time Date and the Stop Time Date enter the time desired between repeats To run the macro repeatedly forever set a number in this field and set the Stop Time and Stop Date fields to OFF StopTime The time of day to stop the macro in 24 hour format Can be OFF the default or any four digit time value 0 is midnight 1200 is midday and 2359 is 1 minute before midnight If this is set to OFF the macro is stopped at midnight on the date specified in the Start Date field Stop Date The date and month to stop the macro Can be OFF the default or any four digit date month number from 0101 1st January to 3112 31st December The first digit can be omitted if it is O 101 is the same as 0101 If this is set to OFF the macro is stopped today at the time specified in the Start Time field Macro Show Setup Screen The macro to run at the specified times Can be OF
325. in the blank line below intensity levels If the channel has both an intensity and an attribute then both are shown 10 39 38 27 1 99 gt gt No Title GM FL FL 0001 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 0025 FL FL 80 40 20 20 20 0 0 2 2 f 2 0026 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 0050 0051 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 0075 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 er ae 0076 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 0100 0101 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 1112 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 0125 0126 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 0150 0151 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 7374 0175 0176 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 0200 0201 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 0225 0226 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 0250 GALAXY Column order 30 channels per column 180 channels per page Galaxy is the same as GALAXY except that if the channel has both an intensity and an attribute then both are shown 10 39 38 27 1 99 gt gt GM FLIFL 80 31 p t 151 80 32 152 80 34 i 154 80 35 t 155 30 36 156 30 37 157 20 38 158 39 159 40 160 41 f t 161 42 162 4
326. ine Editor Software Installing Offline Editor Using DOS 3 1 or Later 1 The following procedures assume that the software is being installed from floppy drive A to drive C 2 Insert the appropriate operating software disk in the floppy disk drive and type A C5INSTAL lt Enters for non i 400 or 500 Series consoles or A CIINSTAL lt Enters for 500i Series consoles or A C3INSTAL lt Enters gt for 300 Series consoles 3 You will be given a choice of platform e g 3 300 Series 4 400 Series 5 500 Series B Backup PC 25 270 pi 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 O Offline Editor F File Server To install the Offline Editor software type O Specify either GeniusPro or Lightpalette installation by typing g or i This should match the console software type You will be prompted to enter a destination path for the Offline Editor software By default the software will be installed in C geniusp or C lightp Enter a destination directory name of 8 characters or less or accept the default destination by pressing lt Enter gt You will be prompted to enter a destination path for the show files By default the show files will be stored in C shows Enter a destination path or accept the default location by pressing lt Enter gt The Strand Lighting licence agreement is displayed on screen Press any key to scroll the display If you agree with the terms of the licence press Y or press N to terminate the installation Th
327. ing any levels CUE 1 DELAY 2 Al Modes Changes cue 1 down delay time to 2 seconds without changing any levels The up delay time is set to the time in the User Setup Screen Cue Delay Up field if this is a new cue or left as it is if over recording CUE 1 DELAY 4 All Modes Changes cue 1 up delay time to 4 seconds without changing any levels The down delay time is set to the time in the User Setup Screen Cue Delay Down field if this is a new cue or left as it is if over recording Wait Time Each cue has a wait time which is used when the cue is run These can be set to values from one hundredth of a second to 59 minutes and 59 seconds as shown for Fade Times When a cue s wait time is set the next cue in sequence will start automatically the set time after the start of the cue If the wait time is zero the next cue starts at the same time as the cue with the zero wait time If the wait time is off the next cue will not run automatically In cues with parts each part can have its own fade and delay times but the wait time applies to the whole cue and is the same for each part of the cue cue WAIT RECORD RECORD cue WAIT Records the levels on the Live display into the specified cue and assigns a wait time to it If the cue already exists an overrecord message gives you the chance to cancel the recording Press RECORD again to record over the cue or CLR or UNDO to cancel the ope
328. ing please check you have the following For Off Line Editor and PC Software e Standard VGA display or Strand Dual VGA Card e DOS 3 1 or later or Windows 95 98 25 269 32Mb RAM recommended 10 M Free Hard Disk Space 580k Free Conventional Memory Minimum 486 PC DX for use with a 430 console only Minimum Pentium processor based PC for use with a 520 530 550 or 300 console Minimum PentiumPro or Pentium II PC or use with consoles running i sofware 520i 530i or 550i For PC Software only e Spare ISA slot for network card Supplied e Standard Parallel Port for dongle Supplied Notes The OLE Backup PC software will NOT run under Windows 3 x or Windows NT but will run under Windows 9x To run the OLE Backup PC software using DOS HIMEM SYS must be loaded If it is not an error message 32rtm error Couldnt initialise DPMI32VM OVL will be given when running the software To install HIMEM SYS add the line DEVICESHIMEM SYS at the top of the file C CONFIG SYS The OLE Backup PC software does not change the DOS PATH to include its install directory Edit the PATH line in the file C AUTOEXEC BAT to include the software directory specified if required The OLE Backup PC software will not run on a PC with a 3 COM network card connected to a standard PC network The PC must be taken off the network before running the OLE If the network card is not a 3 COM card it may be run on the PC network Installing the Offl
329. inhibitive submasters black on yellow Shows channels mastered by exclusive submasters hite on black Shows DMX CHAN input levels DMX CHAN inputs require CommuniquePro Software hite on green Shows an intensity controlled by a remote control Dark grey box Channel that has been Auto Preheated When function is enabled by setting Auto Preheat in Show Setup Screen to ON and a value set in Preheat Group 999 5 Cyan on dark grey Attributes that have been automatically moved while dark When function is enabled by setting Auto Move While Dark in Show Setup Screen to On 32 Black on grey Shows channels held by a stopped X Playback 5 57 Channel Type Identification The channel numbers in the Channel Levels window also use colours to indicate what type of channels they are as follows BB van or PA right white shows channels with intensity but no attribute magenta shows channels with a non dim intensity which may also have an attribute Aight grey shows channels with an attribute which may also have an intensity dark grey shows a channel with no dimmers patched to it Notes 1 If the Console Reporter software is installed and a fault occurs on a patched dimmer the channel number is displayed on a red foreground 2 The indicator colours used are different in other displays Selecting Channels The Channel Control acts on a set of channels called the current selection This can be one or more
330. international access data Asia Strand Lighting Asia LTD 20 F Delta House 3 On Yiu Street Shatin N T Hong Kong Tel 757 3033 Fax 757 1767 Canada 2430 Lucknow Dr Unit 15 Mississauga Ontario L5S 1V3 Canada Tel 905 677 7130 Fax 905 677 6859 Germany Ullsteinstrasse 114 142 12109 Berlin Tel 004930 707 9510 Fax 004930 707 95199 Italy Via delle Gardenie 33 Pontia Vecchia KM 33 400 00040 Pomezia Roma Italy Tel 6914 7123 Fax 6914 7136 U K Strand Lighting Ltd Mitchelston Industrial Estate Kirkcaldy Fife KY1 3LY Scotland Tel 01592 652333 Fax 01592 653528 U S A Service amp Support 800 4 STRAND 800 478 7263 U S A 18111 South Santa Fe Ave Rancho Dominguez CA 90221 USA Tel 310 637 7500 Fax 310 632 5519 The information in this manual is for information purposes only and is subject to change without notice Strand Lighting assumes no responsibility for any errors or omissions which may appear in this manual For comments and suggestions regarding corrections and or updates to this manual please contact your nearest Strand Lighting office Safety Warning This equipment is designed to operate from the mains electricity supply and contains voltages which if touched may cause death or injury It should only be operated in accordance with these instructions and for the purpose of a lighting control system Do not open the 500 Series consoles There are no user serviceable parts inside The console configurati
331. inutes 59 seconds and are initially set to 0 0 Times below one minute can be specified in tenths of a second GM 2 Fade Up Down The fade time for Grandmaster 2 The up and down times are separate fields They can be any value between 0 and 59 minutes 59 seconds and are initially set to 0 0 Times below one minute can be specified in tenths of a second Channel Partitioning Determines whether or not channel partitioning is active When channel partitioning is on only one of the logged in consoles can control each channel in the system Channels controlled by each console are determined by groups 998 1 console channels 998 2 console 2 channels 998 3 console 3 channels etc These groups are mutually exclusive Setting a channel in one group removes it from the other groups Its value is OFF the default or ON Playback Partitioning Determines whether or not playback partitioning is active When playback partitioning is on Channels controlled by each X Playback are determined by groups 999 3 and 999 4 By default both groups are set to permit control of all channels by both groups However when the Group display is selected the user can set a channel or range of channels for either or both groups to 0 such that the deselected channels are not controlled by the particular X Playback Show Setup Screen Its value is OFF the default or ON Handheld Remote These fields determine what each of the handheld remotes are allowe
332. ion Only possible on the SN100 and SN102 nodes the other Networker models are supplied without floppy disk drives see next section for install instructions for those units The disk to use is the Networker Operating Software disk included in console operating software packages If you received the installation files by E Mail copy them to a DOS floppy disk high density 1 44Mb and make it bootable using the following DOS command gt SYS C A Assuming that your PC s system files are in drive C and the floppy drive is named A New releases supplied by Strand on floppy disk are already bootable Then to verify the integrity of the installation disk run the crccheck utility from DOS as follows gt A gt CRCCHECK To preserve the 220NODE CFG configuration file you can create a file called RECOVER BAT on a PC then copy it to a floppy disk for copying to the C 220O0S directory on the Networker When ready to do this you must connect a keyboard and monitor to the Networker power the unit up then press Ctrl and X to get back to DOS The file should contain COPY 220NODE OLD 220NODE CFG V Y If you are upgrading a Networker which contains a release earlier than Beta 2v0 then you may need to manually create a new 220NODE CFG as the format has changed In that case delete the batch file RECOVER BAT make a temporary copy so that DMX in out info and the IP address can be transferred to the default 220NODE CFG which is created as part of
333. is only used when the Communiqu Pro 13 177 software is installed For additional information refer to DMX IN Communiqu Pro Software Profiles Each output can have a profile assigned to it This lets you change the fade characteristics of individual outputs if necessary You may need to do this because you are using several different types of dimmers whose dimming characteristics don t match because the output is actually controlling a fixture attribute that needs a non linear fade or because you need an output for a particular special effect etc For further information refer to Profiles Scaling Value Each output has a scaling value assigned The meaning of the scaling value depends on the type of output Unpatched There is no scaling value Intensity Scales the intensity as provided by the channel that the output is patched to Refer to Patching Channel Intensities Non dim The scaling value is the threshold for the non dim Any channel level above the threshold forces the output to Full Any value below the threshold forces the output to 0 zero Refer to Patching Non Dims Attribute The scaling value is the maximum frame number Refer to Patching Attributes 13 178 The Patch Display 13 02 08 21 01 99 OUTPUT ORDERED PATCH 2 nn 0 GM F Status O P 2 3 4 5 8 CHN 2 3 4 5 7 Intensity Total inUse Free Attributes Totai OIP 18 19 20 21 inUse CHN 18 19 20 21 4 ieee OIP 10 11 12 13 CHN 9 10 11 12 13
334. is specifies the highest cue number CUE LAST Specifies the cue part 1 before the current cue CUE LAST PART 3 Specifies the cue part 1 before the current cue The Blackout Cue The first cue in the cue sheet is called the blackout cue and is numbered cue 0 This is an All Fade cue with all intensity levels and times of 0 it does not affect attributes It cannot be modified or deleted Cue Colours GeniusPro Cue fields are green except when they become the next cue The last recorded cue is shown at the bottom in all red if Show Last Recorded Cue is ON in the User Setup Screen When no cues are running cue fields in the next cue are yellow The wait delay and fade times and fade progress of cues are white while a cue is running 9 111 Cue Colours Lightpalette Cue fields are dark cyan and become bright cyan when the cue is loaded The last recorded cue is shown at the bottom in all green if Show Last Recorded Cue is ON in the Setup display When no cues are running cue fields in the current cue are yellow if X Playback Colours is set to LIGHT PALETTE in the User Setup display or black on a yellow bar if X Playback Colours is set to LIGHT PALETTE INVERT The cue is red LIGHT PALETTE or on a red bar LIGHT PALETTE INVERT while a cue is running and the wait delay and fade times and fade progress of the cue are white Cue Properties GeniusPro Each cue has a number of properties which are displayed in the
335. isabled Except as expressly provided in this EULA you may not otherwise make copies of the SOFTWARE PRODUCT including the printed materials accompanying the SOFTWARE 2 DESCRIPTION OF OTHER RIGHTS AND LIMITATIONS Limitations on Reverse Engineering Decompilation and Disassembly You may not reverse engineer decompile or disassemble the SOFTWARE except and only to the extent that such activity is expressly permitted by applicable law notwithstanding this limitation Single SYSTEM The SOFTWARE is licensed with the SYSTEM as a single integrated product The SOFTWARE may only be used with the SYSTEM Rental You may not rent or lease the SOFTWARE Software Transfer You may permanently transfer all of your rights under this EULA only as part of a sale or transfer of the SYSTEM provided you retain no copies you transfer all of the SOFTWARE including all component parts the media any upgrades or backup copies and this EULA and if applicable the Certificate s of Authenticity and the recipient agrees to the terms of this EULA If the SOFTWARE is an upgrade any transfer must include all prior versions of the SOFTWARE Termination Without prejudice to any other rights Manufacturer or MS may terminate this EULA if you fail to comply with the terms and conditions of this EULA In such event you must destroy all copies of the SOFTWARE and all of its component parts 1 27 Single EULA The package for the SOFTWARE may contain
336. ist Window WHOLE SHOW _ Main Current Show Show to Save how to LoadiCopyDeleteRestore The Archive Selection Window The Archive Selection window controls the parts of the show that are loaded printed or cleared Saving a show always saves all show information To select a field use the Trackball to move the red cursor to the field and use the Level Wheel or or to enable it put a tick mark next to it or disable it clear the tick mark Type the desired numbers in the FIRST LAST and NUMBER FROM fields Whole Show This includes the patch cues submasters effects fixtures and macros It does not include the Report Log or Setup Patch The two patches as configured in the Patch display Only one patch on 300 Series consoles Cues The recorded cues from the Cue Preview display A cue range can be specified so that you can load a partial show Initially this is from 0 1 to 999 9 and selects all cues with their parts FIRST The first cue in the range from 0 1 to 999 9 Initially set to 0 1 LAST The last cue in the range from 0 1 to 999 9 Initially set to 999 9 17 200 NUMBER FROM Renumbers the specified range of cues starting with this number This lets you load cues from other shows without erasing the same numbered cues in the current show Groups The recorded groups from the Group display A group range can be specified Initially this is from 1 to 999 9 and selects all groups FIRST The first gr
337. ith no levels but with the specified macro assignment You do not get an overrecord warning with this command if the cue exists CUE 1 MACRO All Modes Deletes the macro assigned to cue 1 without changing recorded levels CUE 1 MACRO 2 A Modes Changes the macro assigned to cue 1 to macro 2 without changing recorded levels 8 101 Links Subroutines and Loops Normally cues are run sequentially from the beginning of the cue sheet to the end Links loops and subroutines can be used to run cues out of sequence These can only be applied to the first part of a cue Links Links are used to jump to any cue in the cue sheet Cues then run sequentially from that cue Their most common usage is as part of a loop discussed later or to rearrange cues without having to rerecord a number of cues For example assume that we have already recorded cues 1 through 20 The director changes the order of some characters entering making it so that you need to run cues 7 8 and 9 before you run cues 5 and 6 Of course you can simply rerecord the cues to put them in the correct order However depending on the complexity of the cues this could time consuming The alternative is to set the Link property in cue 4 to 7 the Link property of cue 9 to 5 and the Link property of cue 6 to 10 The cues will now run as 3 4 7 8 9 5 6 10 11 One of the links in this sequence actually goes backwards in the cue sheet This is OK as
338. ities software Refer to Upgrading Your Console Software The following topics are covered in this section e Technical Assistance Safety Warning DOS License Agreement Introducing GeniusPro and Lightpalette Console RAM Memory Console Differences Conventions Used in This Document Configuring European Keyboards 1 25 Technical Assistance The console requires a minimum of maintenance and servicing If equipment fails to operate properly upon installation or under normal load and temperature conditions and basic troubleshooting procedures are not effective please contact your nearest Strand Authorised Service Centre or Strand Lighting Field Service at the office serving your area For technical questions regarding setup operation or maintenance of this equipment please contact your nearest Strand Authorised Service Centre or the Strand Lighting Field Service office serving your area For purchase of upgrades accessories peripherals or documentation please contact your nearest Strand Authorised Service Centre or the Strand Lighting office serving your area For comments regarding equipment functions and possible improvements or for comments on these instructions please write to the Strand Lighting office serving your area You can access the Strand Lighting World Wide Web site at http www strandlighting com Addresses for all of the Strand Lighting offices are as shown Phone numbers do not include country code or other
339. ities which work on a HTP Highest Takes Precedence basis The following example will help clarify this At the PATCH display create a colour attribute for channel 1 by patching to output 2 2 1 2 On the LIVE display follow this sequence 1 6 ATT 7 Channel 1 intensity 60 colour frame 7 SUB 1 RECORD Record submaster 1 1 4 ATT 2 Channel 1 intensity 40 colour frame 2 CUE 1 RECORD Record cue 1 This has recorded Submaster 1 and Cue 1 each with different intensity and attribute values for channel 1 Next move Submaster 1 to zero then to full Notice how only the intensity level is being mastered the attribute value having snapped to frame 7 when the submaster was moved off zero the default attribute fade time being zero 30 353 Now run Cue 1 Notice that the attribute value has faded to the new position of 2 but the intensity value has not changed This is because the intensity level HTP d and so did not change because the submaster intensity was higher than the cue but the attribute level LTP d Auto Move When Dark Auto Move When Dark AMWD is a time saving feature that automatically moves attributes colour pan tilt etc to the next required position when the light is dark AMWD may eliminate or reduce the need to record and maintain Mark cues cues that move attributes with the light dark AMWD is enabled in the Show Setup Screen sc
340. itle _GM FL FL Epa aa agana En naa a m Effects Pb Fx Step Type Dir Fade Time StepT Stop Next Sub Text The Live Screen Effects Window Lightpalette Fields in the Effects window of the Live display State screen show the current values for effect and step properties The property associated with each display field is indicated by the title line The values for these fields are described in more detail above and are set to the recorded effect values when you load the effect into an effect playback You cannot edit any of these fields though some can be modified by using keys in the Effect keypad If you modify an effect while it is running and wish to save the changes press UPDATE FX where is the effect number without the step number Pb Shows each Playback Refer to Product Specification for number of Effect Playbacks on your console Its colour shows the state of the Playback white on grey This is the current playback blue The playback is unloaded empty green The playback is loaded and is not the current playback yellow The playback is running or paused and is not the current playback Fx Shows the effect loaded onto the playback Its colour shows the state of the playback blank The playback is unloaded empty green The playback is loaded yellow The playback is running flashing yellow The playback is paused Step Shows the effect step which is currently running The colour is the same as for the effect
341. its suppliers including Microsoft Corporation You may not copy the printed materials accompanying the SOFTWARE All rights not specifically granted under this EULA are reserved by MS and its suppliers including Microsoft Corporation 5 PRODUCT SUPPORT Product support for the SOFTWARE is not provided by MS its parent corporation Microsoft Corporation or their affiliates or subsidiaries For product support please refer to Manufacturer s support number provided in the documentation for the SYSTEM Should you have any questions concerning this EULA or if you desire to contact Manufacturer for any other reason please refer to the address provided in the documentation for the SYSTEM 6 LIMITED WARRANTY Limited Warranty Manufacturer warrants that the SOFTWARE will perform substantially in accordance with the accompanying written materials for a period of ninety 90 days from the date of receipt Any implied warranties on the SOFTWARE are limited to ninety 90 days Some states jurisdictions do not allow limitations on duration of an implied warranty so the above limitation may not apply to you Customer Remedies Manufacturer s and its suppliers entire liability and your exclusive remedy shall be at Manufacturer s option either a return of the price paid or b repair or replacement of the SOFTWARE that does not meet the above Limited Warranty and which is returned to Manufacturer with a copy of your receipt This Limited Warranty i
342. iverses configured for the current site Each universe is a subset of the available network DMX range of slots DMX addresses which is currently 4096 in ShowNet Universes allow you to give meaningful names to DMX ranges which you go on to assign to node ports in the Ports window The ShowNet slot at which the universe begins is set by the Start value and the number of DMX addresses in each universe is set by the Length value Shownet Patches Window Each site can have several patches each of which consists of the universe to port assignments shown in the Ports window The contents of the Ports window belong to the currently selected Patch Patches are a way of allowing for alternative mappings of universes to ports using the same set of universes and ports in the current site Shownet Ports Window This window contains a list of universe to port assignments for the current site amp patch The window usually displays all the ports on the current node if a node is selected OR all the ports to which a universe is patched if a universe is selected The Show All option on the right mouse click quick menu can be activated whilst in the Ports windows to display all ports on all nodes The Source tick box determines whether the port is an input or output The Offset value normally 1 determines the first DMX address at the port where the universe is output or input from For example if the 200 slot universe SCROLLERS starts at net slot 700 a
343. ker amp Utilities on a PC using DOS 3 1 or Later To create a standalone file server on a DOS PCs assuming that the PC is fitted with a standard Ethernet card 8COM Etherlink III proceed as follows 1 oe Insert the Networker and Utilities Disk in the floppy drive and type A CNINSTAL above version 2 3f You will be given a choice of platform e g 3 300 Series 4 400 Series 5 500 Series B Backup PC O Offline Editor F File Server To install the File Server type F I f the installation program detects that operating software is present it will prompt you to load into the same directory If not you can specify any directory The Strand Lighting licence agreement is displayed on screen Press any key to scroll the display If you agree with the terms of the licence press Y or press N to terminate the installation The File Server software will install on your PC If the installation was successful Instal Successful is displayed on screen 31 359 9 10 11 To run the file server type the following in order CALL NETON IOFTPDOS To exit the file server type EXIT CALL NETOFF These can be packaged in a batch file for convenience Note If you have a different Ethernet card the packet driver software which NETON loads may not work you will have to provide another packet driver This should work if it conforms to the standard packet driver software interface but Strand Lighting can not guar
344. l at 50 When the channel is at 67 the output reaches full intensity Its intensity will not increase as the channel intensity increases above 67 If no scaling factor is set the default scaling factor is assumed Scaling of 100 is not displayed on the patch screen see Patching Channel Intensities The default scaling is set in the Default Scale field of the Patch Window of the Show Setup Screen Its default is 100 NonDim The channel number is white in Channel Order or grey in Output Order or yellow if it is not a one to one patch The non dim output is patched to a channel intensity or attribute It has a threshold in magenta below the channel number which is the level at which the output turns on or off For example if a non dim has a threshold of 60 channel levels from 0 to 60 will give an output of 0 and levels from 61 to 100 have an output of 100 see Patching Non Dims Basic Attribute The channel number is yellow The output is patched to the basic attribute colour of a channel It has a maximum frame number in green below the channel number which is the full value for the attribute and can range from 1 to 100 see Patching Channel Attributes Tracker Attribute The channel number is blue The output is patched to an attribute controlled by the Tracker Software see Patching Attributes DMX In The channel number is Magenta and has a trailing letter D The output is patched directly to a DMX input channel This
345. l the functions performed by the trackball mouse can be simulated using the four navigation keys on a PC keyboard connected to the console or on 300 Series consoles by pressing SHIFT 0 to enter cursor lock mode and using the arrow keys on the console keypad When you initially connect a mouse to a 300 Series console the mouse will not operate until you set the Mouse Net Node and Port fields in the User Setup Screen To do this press lt SETUP gt then press SHIFT 0 to enter cursor lock mode You can then use the cursor keys on the console keypad to highlight the Net Node and Port fields and the or E keys to set the options Supported Mice Microsoft or Logitech 2 button PS2 or serial mouse Microsoft or Logitech 3 button PS2 or serial mouse Microsoft Intellimouse or Intellitrackball or Logitech equivalents 4 53 Important Note When using a PS2 mouse the mouse must be plugged into the PS2 port before you switch on the console otherwise the mouse will not work When in any of the Setup Screens the screen highlight will move left and right or up and down according to the X and Y movement of the mouse ball When in the Help Screen moving the mouse through the Y axis will scroll the help screen up or down Pressing the left mouse button will activate the help hyperlinks For information on using the mouse to control moving lights refer to Mouse Control of Features 4 54 Chapter 5 Working with Channel Levels Th
346. last entered key when a command is being entered If no command is being entered this has no effect except in the Live display when it clears the current channel selection SHIFT CLR Clears the complete command line when a command is being entered If no command is being entered it has no effect Setting Up the Channel Levels Window The layoutof the Channel Levels Window is determined by the setting of the Channel Display Smart Channel Display and Channel Formatting fields within the User Setup Screen e The Channel Display field sets the Strand console type that the Channel Levels window will mimic e The Smart Channel field sets the format of the display to show all attributes of a fixture e The Channel Formatting field controls whether or not all channels will be shown on screen Hidden channels are indicated in the channel listing with l O 0 5 56 When set to OFF all defined channels are shown When set to COMPACT only channels that are on or moved to zero at the last Channel Control or X Playback action are shown When set to DISPLAY GROUP only channels defined in the special Display Group Group 994 1 are shown When set to AUTO only channels that have been used are shown The Display Group is automatically updated to include channels as they are used When set to CHANNELS IN USE Automatically displays the channels used in all cues submasters and effects not groups or macros When selected the displayed
347. lay The Smart Channel Display field in the User Setup Screen sets a display format that the console automatically switches to when a channel with attributes is selected The available options are OFF TRACKER and TRACKER PRESET With the Smart Channel Display field set to TRACKER and channels with attributes selected the display automatically changes to show the attribute values This display shows 20 channels across the screen The number of rows is dependent on the number of attributes on the displayed channels With the Smart Channel Display field set to TRACKER PRESET and channels with attributes selected the display automatically changes to show the attribute values However this display includes the Preset Group text of any preset group controlling one or more of the attributes of a fixture If no attributes are selected or the Smart Channel Display field is set to OFF the display shows to the default format as set by the Channel Display Format field in the User Setup Screen To make reading channel displays easier the attribute screen labels are coloured to show which controls they are assigned to Screen Background Screen Foreground Attribute Controller Red White Wheel Yellow Black Trackball Grey White Rotary 1 White Grey Blue Rotary 2 Blue Grey Red Rotary 3 Red Grey Magenta Rotary 4 Magenta Not currently under Dark Grey Grey rotary control but in current section Rotary Controls Window Live Display
348. lay press MACRO in the Display keypad not MACRO in the Levels keypad The Macro display Levels screen is the same as the Live display and is not used by macros The Macro display State screen shows the contents of the macros The current macro is highlighted with a red background There is one macro per line and the left hand side identifies the macro 18 219 8 1 t 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 T 2 The macro number from 0 to 1999 P1 through P14 P1 through P14 key macros same as macro 951 964 SP1 through SP14 SHIFT P1 through SHIFT P14 key macros same as macro 971 997 LCD1 through LCD6 Middle LCD key macros same as macro 991 996 On 510 and 520 series consoles there are only 4 keys associated with LCD1 through LCD4 and they are located over the Record keypad USER USER key macro same as macro 998 The title bar shows the date and time display name show name and grandmaster status The date and time format can be set in the Console Time window of the Show Setup Screen The show name is preceded by an asterisk when changes have been made to the show since you last saved it The Wheel window at the right shows the position within the macros The number shows the index of the current macro for example the first second and third macro even if their numbers are 1 971 and 982 have indexes 1 2 and 3 The index is independent of the macro number When the console is first powered up o
349. ld C and press SELECT Press the LAST or NEXT softkey to position the marker alongside the Directory field and press the SELECT softkey until the required directory is displayed The drive and directory is shown on the top line of the display and the shows contained in the selected drive directory are listed below To load a show from the show list use the LAST or NEXT keys to move the gt marker to the required show and press SELECT A Show Load prompt and confirm message will appear Pressing SELECT again will load the show The show files on the disk on the disk browser are identified by their show name and date and time of recording Alternatively the operator can browse long lists of shows by holding down the SHIFT key or toggling the key On 310 and using the LAST 4 or NEXT 4 softkeys to display shows 4 at a time Copying a Show To copy a show firstly move the gt marker as described above using the NEXT LAST and SELECT keys When the marker is on the required show press the COPY SHOW key The menu title will change on the LCD display to Copy Menu The copy function is active when this menu title is present In response to a prompt message use the NEXT LAST and SELECT keys to select destination disk and directory The destination path is shown on the LCD display If the path displayed is correct press the COPY SHOW key again to confirm the copy command Pressing the CLR key at any t
350. ld and the level wheel or or keys to select the option Alternatively the field can be set using the command line as shown in the following example FX 1 PROFILE 3 Sets FX 1 overall fade profiles to 3 Stop After The Stop After property determines what happens when you press FX STOP This property can only be changed from the Effects display and is initially set to FX STOP FX STOP The effect stops and is unloaded when you press FX STOP for its effect playback 11 144 FX LOAD The effect is not unloaded until another effect is loaded onto the same effect playback The effect is only paused when you press FX STOP You can then press FX GO to restart the effect LAST STEP When you press FX STOP the effect continues to run normally until it reaches the last effect step It then fades out and stops in the time specified by the Fade Dn field or cue or submaster time CYCLES The effect stops after the number of cycles specified in the Cycles field TIME The effect stops after the amount of time specified in the Time field You can enter values in the range 0 01 seconds to 59 59 seconds refer to Effect Fade Times This field can be set in edit mode using the trackball to select the field and the level wheel or or keys to select the option Alternatively the field can be set using the command line as shown in the following examples FX 1 STOP AFTER FXLOAD Sets FX 1 to stop only af
351. ld remotes The number of handheld remotes that can be used with your console is shown on the Console Setup Screen Set the type of handheld remote for the appropriate AUX port This can be OFF DESIGNERS REMOTE R120 WIRED R130 WIRED R120 RADIO or R130 RADIO The other fields Net Node Port Baud and Config Address enable you to set up the communication details for each handheld remote For more information on connecting a handheld remote refer to Handheld Remotes ASCII Remote Input Sets the status and the serial port that the ASCII Remote is connected to and is only used when the file Cl LIGHTP HELP ENG PAGE31 HTM 5 of 7 6 17 2005 7 36 12 AM Console Setup Communiqu Pro software is loaded It cannot be set to the same port as the Handheld Remote For more information refer to Communiqu Pro GO Key Output Sets the status and the serial port that the GO Key output is connected to and is only used when the Communiqu Pro software is loaded It cannot be set to the same port as the Handheld Remote For more information refer to ASCII Remote Go Output Macro Trigger Output Sets the status of the serial port that the macro trigger output is connected to and is only used when the Communiqu Pro software is loaded For more information refer to ASCII Remote Control Output Remote Test This is only used for factory testing and should always be set OFF Audio Input Macro Sets the macro that will be run from the audio
352. le between Russian and English character sets start up the console and press both SHIFT keys simultaneously The cursor will change between the different character sets Running on Windows 95 Country specific keyboard handling is dependent on the WIN95 configuration Please refer to the WIN95 manual help You must also add the line setting the 220KEYBOARD environment variable to the USERINIT BAT file e g set 220KEYBOARD fr Note The above examples assume that DOS is installed in the directory c dos if it isn t you must substitute the correct DOS path name in your USEREXEC BAT file Changing the HTML Help Files The htm files in the help eng help ger etc directories under the operating software directory are in HTML format They can be edited using Internet Assistant for Microsoft Word or another HTML editor bearing the following points in mind Required at top of file so that European characters display correctly 37 405 lt HTML gt lt HEAD gt lt META HTTP EQUIV Content Type CONTENT text html charset ISO 8859 1 gt Colour controls lt H1 gt Heading level 1 appears as YELLOW text lt H1 gt lt H2 gt Heading level 2 appears as GREEN text lt H2 gt lt B gt Bold appears as RED text lt B gt lt I gt Italic appears as MAGENTA text lt I gt Anchor names points to jump to eg Anchor name is Index screen line says Help Index lt H1 gt lt A NAME Index gt H lt A gt elp Index lt H1 gt Anc
353. les 18 218 MACRO 982 etc The soft keys under the centre LCD are shortcuts for macros 991 996 Pressing these runs the macro the same as using MACRO MACRO 982 Runs macro 982 macro LCD2 USER Shortcut for macro 998 Pressing it runs macro 998 the same as using MACRO 9 9 8 USER Runs Macro 998 macro USER Running a Macro Automatically You can start macros with cues by assigning the macro to a cue To learn how to assign macros to cues refer to Assigning a Macro You can control macros with submasters by assigning the macro to a submaster Moving the submaster away from zero starts the macro To learn how to assign macros to submasters turn to Assigning Effects and Macros A macro can be configured to run automatically at power up To learn how to run a macro at power up refer to Power Up Macro in the Show Setup Screen A macro can be run at a certain time of days There can be up to 4 At Time macros which are configured in the At Time Macros Window of the Show Setup Screen When a macro runs automatically it uses a command line as determined by Cue Sheet Macros in the Show Setup Screen MAIN CONSOLE runs it on the main console command line to allow screen editing operations LAST HANDHELD runs it on the last available handheld command line when console command lines and displays must not be changed Viewing Macros You can view and edit macros in the Macro display To show the Macro disp
354. leting Effect Steps o Copying Levels from an Effect Step Chapter 12 Groups Predefined Groups Page 138 vil The Current Group Recording Group Levels Recording Group Properties Using Referenced Groups Viewing and Editing Groups Updating and Adding to Groups Updating Groups from the Live Screen The Group Display Creating a New Group Viewing Group Channel Levels Editing Group Levels Deleting Groups Copying Levels from a Group Chapter 13 Patches vill Output Properties The Patch Display Selecting Outputs Changing Live and Edit Patches The Copy Patch Menu o Copying Patch Information o Moving Patch Information o Swapping Patch Information Changing the Output Numbering Style Customising the Patch Display Deleting Channels Deleting Unpatched Attributes Renumbering Channels Default Patching Clearing Default Patching Page 166 Patching Channel Intensities Patching Double Width Outputs Assigning Output Profiles Patching Channel Attributes Patching Non Dims Patching DMX In Unpatching Chapter 14 Auto Mod What is Auto Mod Using Auto Mod Customising the Auto Mod Screen Deleting Auto Mod Channels Updating the Show from the Auto Mod Screen Using Auto Mod with Moving Lights Chapter 15 Direct Output Control The Current Output Selection Setting Levels Setting DMX Levels Repatching Chapter 16 User Setup The Setup Key Changing the User Setup Locking the Console Memory Ch
355. lette software supports a range of mice and trackballs including the intelli type mouse and trackball to mimic the trackball trackball softkeys and rotaries on the 500 series consoles Any of the mouse options can be used with either 500 or 300 series consoles for the control of attributes and to mimic the other functions of the trackball e g moving the highlight on the setup screens scrolling the help screens and activating help hyperlinks PS2 mice should be plugged into the PS2 port and serial mice should be plugged into one of the COM ports unless the mouse is dual function i e PS2 Serial Supported Mice Microsoft or Logitech 2 button PS2 or serial mouse Microsoft or Logitech 3 button PS2 or serial mouse Microsoft Intellimouse or Intellitrackball or Logitech equivalents Important Note When using a PS2 mouse the mouse must be plugged into the PS2 port before you switch on the console otherwise the mouse will not work Using an intellimouse or intellitrackball to control moving lights e The ball of an intellimouse or intellitrackball performs the pan and tilt functions e Moving the ball in a horizontal plane to the right increases the pan value while moving the ball in a horizontal plane to the left decreases the pan value Similarly moving the ball in a verical plane away from you increases the tilt value and moving the ball in a vertical plane towards you reduces the tilt value e Pressing the wheel button and left
356. lling the Help File under Windows 9X Installing the Networker amp Utilities Software Using DOS 3 1 or later 1 Insert the disk CNINSTAL in the floppy drive ant type A CNINSTAL to install Networker amp Utilities software 2 You will be given a choice of platform e g 3 300 Series 4 400 Series 5 500 Series B Backup PC O Offline Editor F File Server 3 Press B to install the Backup PC Software 4 Specify either GeniusPro or Lightpalette installation by typing g or i This should match the console software type 5 You will be prompted to enter a destination path for the Backup PC software By default the software will be installed in C geniusp or C lightp Enter a destination directory name of 8 characters or less or accept the default destination by pressing lt Enter gt 25 275 8 9 10 11 12 You will be prompted to enter a destination path for the show files By default the show files will be stored in C shows Enter a destination path or accept the default location by pressing lt Enter gt The Strand Lighting licence agreement is displayed on screen Press any key to scroll the display If you agree with the terms of the licence press Y or press N to terminate the installation The Networker software will install on your PC If the installation was successful Instal Successful is displayed on screen Press Ctrl F12 followed by F2 three times to return to DOS Proceed to install the Help file
357. logged in at the same time The following topics are covered in this section Configuring Logins Configuring Access Rights Console Access Rights Login Display Logging In Without Using the Login Display Seeing Who Else is Logged In Exit Softkey OO 0 OO 0 31 362 Configuring Logins Each user must be named using up to 8 alpha numeric characters This forms the basis of the user configuration file The admin user s file is called ADMIN USR and is supplied with the operating software You can use this file as a template for all users The act of creating a new user is simply one of copying ADMIN USR to say FRED USR The user file contains five sections Password Access rights User setup preferences Last used show file names Channel partition group APS You can edit the password access rights and partition group channels as required but a new user can log in if no editing is done you can change these settings at any time You can set the initial User Setup values if you like but the software will rewrite this section when the user logs out Do not edit the last used show section the software does this for you Each line in the file starting with is a comment and is ignored by the software The other lines are of the form TOKEN VALUE Do not change the TOKEN names If you do an error User file token is invalid will appear in the status log every time that user logs in You can change the VALU
358. long as you create a way to get yourself out of an infinite loop which we did in this case by linking cue 6 to cue 10 In order to terminate linked cues in a chain set the link field in the last cue to Rtrn This will force an end to the cue sheet and will not start any more cues until you explicitly reload it cue LINK RECORD Direct 1 and 2 Digit RECORD cue LINK Command Line Records the levels from the current display into the specified cue and assigns a link to it If the cue already exists an overrecord message gives you the chance to cancel the recording To rerecord the cue press RECORD again To cancel the recording press CLR or UNDO CUE 1 LINK 1 0 5 RECORD Direct 1 and 2 Digit RECORD CUE 1 LINK 1 0 5 Command Line Records levels into cue 1 and sets the cue to link to cue 105 If you run cues in normal order cue 105 will now be the next cue after cue 1 cue LINK changes the link assigned to the specified cue without changing recorded levels If the cue does not exist this command creates a new cue with no levels but with the specified link assignment You do not get an overrecord warning with this command To delete an existing link omit the linked cue number CUE 1 LINK 1 0 6 A Modes Changes cue 1 so it links to cue 106 CUE 1 LINK A Modes Deletes the link assigned to cue 1 without changing recorded levels Subroutines Subroutines
359. lowing topics The Channel Summary Screen The Cue Summary Screen The Dimmer Summary Screen The System Report Menu The System Report Screen Advanced Setup Menu See Addendum A Setting Access Rights The Dimmer Log Screen The System Diagnostic Menu Exit and System Shutdown The Channel Summary Screen Command Syntax a 1 REPORT No attribute specified b 1 L 8 REPORT Attribute specified The channel summary screen shows the following information for the channel or channel attribute specified and is updated once per second 20 231 Attributes Outputs In Patch 1 Show Up Moves Last Move Down Moves Next Move Redundant Moves Used In Sub Fx Moves Highest Cue Level Lowest Cue Level Control Level Proset Group Controlled By Special Groups Channel Pa z RGR ISTE H ANN ES Bee aes nese PIJACNE Channel The name of the fixture to which the channel is patched Attributes a A list of attributes on the channel b Name of attribute Patched to Outputs a A list of outputs patched to all attributes b Output patched to specified attribute Level a The current channel intensity and the preset group if controlling all or part of the channel b Attribute level or frames Last Move The last cue on stage that changed the specified channel and its intensity or attribute level change a Intensity change b Attribute change or frames Next Move The next cue on stage to ch
360. lues as high as 2048 D54 AMX Sets the output protocol for the analog multiplex output Can be OFF default AMX OUT or D54 OUT Start The starting output number from the patch that is mapped to the analog multiplex connector default 1 Can be 1 to 2048 if the output type is D54 OUT or 1 to 1152 if the output type is AMX OUT Scaling Scaling factor for all levels sent to the AMX or D54 output Adjusts the levels up or down and can be set from 80 to 120 default 100 DMX 1 4 This configures the DMX outputs DMX1 DMX2 DMX3 and DMX4 connectors on the rear panel Note The number of DMX connectors available depends on the type of console Each connector can be set for up to 512 outputs The last available DMX connector DMX 2 DMX3 or DMX4 depending on the type of console can optionally input 512 signals if it is not outputting signals DMX1 through DMX4 default is DMX OUT for DMX1 and OFF for the others This sets the output to OFF or DMX OUT DMX3 can also be set to DMX IN with the Communiqu Pro software Start and End default is 1 512 513 1024 1025 1536 The range of output numbers from the Patch that is mapped to the connector from 1 to 4096 The maximum between each Start and End is 512 outputs Network Window The Network window is in the Console Setup display and lets you configure the outputs that the console is sending to the network The ShowNet system uses SN1xx series network adapters to convert the network ou
361. ly located hub By mixing hubs with thinnet or fibre optic backbones network topologies with two or more stars can be created Ethernet Backbone Backbone is a generic term for LAN or WAN Wide Area Network connectivity between subnetworks Subnetworks are connected to the backbone via bridges and or routers The backbone acts as a communications trunk In permanent installations a backbone topology will provide for greater preconfigured connectivity heavier total data traffic and greater expansion potential A backbone can provide the basis of an Ethernet system The backbone can be either a thinnet or fibre optic 34 386 Typical Ethernet Configurations Small system configuration An example small system would contain a console and an SN100 connected by either a UTP or 10BASE T cable For a system consisting of just two nodes a null HUB must be used A system based on 50W coaxial cable the only additional hardware are the T pieces and the 50W terminators BNC BNC BNC BNC Terminator Connector Connector Terminator Coax Cable CONSOLE Medium size system configuration A medium sized configuration includes 3 or more nodes on the network For a 1OBASE T installation the units can be simply daisy chained together A UTP based installation will require a hub from which the various nodes can take a tap BNC BNC BNC BNC BNC BNC BNC BNC Terminator Connector Connector Connector Connector Terminator CONSOLE Large Sy
362. maintains and terminates all connections between the nodes In a LAN the hub is may be a workstation or in a larger multi port network the hub is most likely to be a multiplexer If a segment in an installation is longer than the length allowed by Ethernet rules a repeater must be used A repeater is a device that connects two or more segments and mirrors whatever it sees on one segment to all the other attached segments A partitioning repeater can recognize a fault on any of its segments and cease to reflect from that until the fault is rectified This prevents wiring problems on one segment interfering with communications on other segments This section covers the following topics Ethernet 4 3 2 Rule Ethernet Hubs Ethernet Backbone Typical Ethernet Configurations OF D 0 O Ethernet 4 3 2 Rule As a rule of thumb when designing an Ethernet topology to a achieve a reliable system you must follow the 4 3 2 Rule e In any LAN there can be no more than four repeaters e In any thinnet LAN only three segments can have active nodes Other segments can only exist as extensions of the overall length of the LAN e in a LAN there can be no more than two repeaters between any two communicating nodes Ethernet Hubs As stated earlier a HUB forms the centre of a star topology network or cabling system A multi node UTP network of more than two nodes require a hub Conceptually the node connections radiate outward from a central
363. may be Local default or the network node name The A4 A Oversize or A3 macro graphic tablet software can be used only when the Communiqu Pro software is installed For further information refer to Macro Tablet The Mode option provides the facility to set up the macro grid on an A4 A4 Oversize or A3 Macro Tablet as shown below Macro Tablet INTUOS A4 MACRO LOW 20 x 10 INTUOS A4 MACRO MED a e P E e ala lalala INTUOS A3 MACRO HIGH 40 x 40 Mouse If a mouse is installed the NET NODE and PORT field must be set The NET NODE may be set to LOCAL Default or the Net Node Name The PORT field can be set to OFF default COM1 or COM2 The software also supports a PS2 mouse Console Keys Layout Sets the keyboard layout for the console Some keys have been moved and the Q Only Track key added to the Record Keypad since the original version of the console You can disable the Q Only Track key by setting this field to NO Q_ONLY KEY Forinformation on the function of the Q Only Tracking key refer to Level Tracking Its value is Q_ONLY KEY default or NO Q _ONLY KEY Submaster Layout Submaster Layout is used when a 530 520 logs into a 550 console or a console with 54 submasters set via the environment variable 220NUMSUBS It allows the 530 520 to have its submasters appear as 1 24 or as 25 48 This allows 2 remote consoles to have their own range of submasters GENIUSPRO PALETTE Determines whethe
364. me into the specified submaster SUB TIME A Modes changes the submaster fade time without changing recorded levels SUB ATT TIME RECORD Direct 1 Digit and Direct 2 Digit RECORD SUB ATT TIME Command Line Mode records levels on the current display and an attribute fade time into the specified submaster SUB ATT TIME All Modes changes the submaster attribute fade time without changing recorded levels 7 75 For specific examples please see Recording Levels and Properties in Basic Recording Fader Properties Submaster faders have the following properties that can be specified when recording or edited later Submaster Functions Assigning Effects and Macros External Faders Submaster Bump Mode Text These properties are associated with the fader and not the submaster so they are common across all submaster pages Submaster Function When a submaster number is set to a function that function applies to the submaster on all submaster pages The same submaster cannot have different functions on different submaster pages Each submaster fader can have one of several functions The submaster function is initially set to Normal for all supbmasters You can eliminate or move any supermaster and change submaster functions for other submaster faders as needed Submaster functions are one of the following values Pileon Submaster Normal Independent Submaster
365. message ID or the MSC ID is set to 127 All Call Note Midi Show Control GO_OFF does not run cue 0 Instead use MSC RESET instead Also Midi Show Control does not support playback 2 Instead fire a macro containing the GOX2 key MIDI Keys And Faders All key and fader changes are transmitted via MIDI OUT and received via MIDI IN simultaneously This will allow a second desk to be used as a full backup unit or as a slave unit It will also allow all key presses and fader movements to be recorded on a sequencer in real time and played back in real time in particular the recording and playback of Cues Effects and Submasters The Channel option in the MIDI Window in the Show Setup Screen will select the MIDI channel on which to receive and transmit the key and faders on When OFF no key or fader events will be received or transmitted across MIDI The Fader and Key Controller selections between 1 and 4 select which MIDI General Purpose Controller is used to transmit and receive keys and faders For tracking backup and slaving the controller numbers must be different The Mode determines if all keys and faders are sent BACKUP or if only a subset are sent SLAVE MIDI Note The Midi Note On and Note Off commands are received and used to flash Submasters or channels The Notes field in the MIDI window of the SHOW SETUP screen can be set as follows OFF Any received Note On or Note Off is ignored FADERS The Note number matches faders 1
366. mory Macro Trigger Card Tracker Library Files Site Configuration Files DOS Utilities DOS Environment Variables Country Keyboard Support Changing the HTML Help Files Converting German Galaxy Files to Strand Show Files Top of Page Page 390 Page 394 Page 400 Chapter 1 Introduction This section introduces GeniusPro and Lightpalette and includes important topics with which the user should be familiar before using these instructions Particular attention should be paid to Console Differences which explains the differences between the Strand Lighting console models highlights operational differences between older and newer consoles and points out mechanical and functional differences between models GeniusPro and Lightpalette Operating Software are control software products for Strand Lighting s 24 submaster 520 and 520i lighting control consoles for the 30 submaster 430 530 and 530i consoles for the 54 submaster 550 and 550i consoles for the 510i rack mounted show control backup unit and for the new 300 series consoles and the 310 show controller GeniusPro and Lightpalette software is copyright Strand Lighting Ltd 1994 to 2001 All rights reserved The software is supplied under the terms of and may only be used with the License Agreement This version of software should be loaded on all consoles PCs and remote consoles to take advantage of improvements Load both Operating Software and Networker amp Util
367. mounting plate supplied with the bolts supplied the SN100 can be screwed to any wall Once secured to the wall mains line feed conduit may be connected to the mounting plate A re wireable plug and terminal strip are provided to which the incoming power should be connected Once connections are made the cover plate should be refitted before applying power By fitting the mounting plate supplied with the bolts supplied and a hook clamp and safety chain not supplied the SN100 may be located in rigging When used in this configuration make sure you fit a safety chain of adequate rating Note If using the wall plate and supplying power by conduit ensure the cover plate is fitted before applying power SN102 Installation The SN102 can be mounted in two configurations e Table top e 19 Rack Mount cabinet SN100 and SN102 Connections 33 374 SN100 Rear Connections 1 GA REVEQAAD ABON NE GED dE E E D aG aa aaa oa i e E ma e SN100 Right side Connections E mar 1 E DAX R DHX a To 0 0 0 sss SN100 Left sideConnections SN102 Front Connections 33 375 amt Gaz 8 etme yet _s Phase Oio ome SN100 and SN102 Interface List omme ste aGere SN102 Rear Connections Note Some SN100s do not work with handheld remotes This is due to an old internal PCB revision main board issue 1 1 issue 2 is OK An external link cable is ava
368. n Spread Sheet Mode GeniusPro The Preview display State screen shows a page of cues and their associated fields The current cue is highlighted with a red background The title bar shows the date and time display name show name and grandmaster status The date and time format can be set in the Console Time window of the second Setup display State screen The show name is preceded by an asterisk when changes have been made to the show since you last saved it The Wheel window at the right shows the position within the cue sheet The number shows the index of the current cue For example the first second and third cues have index 1 2 and 3 The index is independent of the cue number If no cues have been recorded the cue sheet automatically records cue 1 as a cross fade with no levels and default fade and delay times To go directly to a cue press CUE where is the cue number If the cue does not exist you will be warned that you are creating a new item Press again to create the new cue or CLR or UNDO to cancel the command To move between existing cues move the Trackball to any field in the cue you want to edit Levels for the highlighted cue will be displayed on the Levels screen but to edit these levels you will need to highlight the cue number You can also use NEXT LAST or the up or down keys to change cues if the highlight is on the cue number The Cue XRef display When you are in the Preview di
369. n a network and Networker software is installed the map file for the remote console must be renamed in the DOS command line in order to prevent problems associated with the order of log ins of remotes The following DOS command line is entered copy 220map cfg 220map xxx where xxx is the last three digits of the remote console s IP address The map file can then be amended as necessary from the remote console as described above When the MAP CONFIG softkey is selected from the remote console the new map file 220map xxx is automatically loaded and the VGA configuration can be edited as previously described If the console control surface has been partitioned by remapping all map configuration commands relating to the partitioned area must contain the same remote console number Remapping VGA Screens You can remap a console to view VGA screen outputs other than its own This is an essential function where a console s control surface has been remapped to create a virtual remote console In this case the user must be able to view the functions carried out by the virtual remote console as well as the main console s functions It may also be desirable to view the functions carried out by a remote console connected to a network refer to Network Video The maximum number of screens per console is four fitted with Quad Video Card The following example shows a 550 main console with two screen where the second screen has to be remapped to sho
370. n external volt free switch contact such as MIDI RS232 RS485 audio perhaps a click track or via an approved digital input card is required since a 10v supply pin is provided on the Analogue Input connector This facility could be used to allow a stage manager to control house lights or to trigger any macro or to run a cue remotely To set up go to the SUBMASTER screen and set the relevant Submaster Ext field the same as for External Submasters 1 SUB Go to SUBMASTER screen 2 Press SHIFT and move the trackball or mouse 3 Use the trackball to move to the Ext field of the Submaster to change 4 Use the wheel or the or keys select the external channel 1 12 or OFF 5 Next set the Macro field to the macro number you wish to associate with this external Submaster 6 Use the trackball to move to the Macro field of the Submaster 7 Use the wheel or the or keys or enter the number to change it to the macro number The selected macro will be run whenever either the remote or console submaster faders move off 0 DMX In This is one of the console s most powerful communication features and allows an external DMX source for instance an FX desk to be combined with the existing console dimmer patch DMX IN has two operating modes which can be used together DMX In Dimmer Mode patches the incoming DMX levels to outgoing DMX via the dimmer patch A user selectable Submaster fader can master these dimm
371. n recording cues Its value is OFF GeniusPro Default ON Lightpalette Default or THIS CUE ONLY For an explanation of Cue Tracking refer to Level Tracking Playbacks Controls the number of X Playbacks and their mode SINGLE default Single cue sheet position for the X1 Playback Only the X1 Playback is enabled SPLIT SINGLE Single cue sheet position Both the X1Playback and the X2 Playback are enabled Intensity and attribute levels from playbacks are combined on a latest takes precedence basis DUAL LTP Separate cue sheet positions Both the X1 Playback and the X2 Playback are enabled Intensity and attribute levels from playbacks are combined on a latest action takes precedence basis DUAL HTP Separate cue sheet positions Both the X1 Playback and the X2 Playback are enabled Intensity levels from playbacks are combined on a highest takes precedence basis Attribute levels are file Cl LIGHTP HELP ENG PAGE22 HTM 3 of 10 6 17 2005 7 35 13 AM Show Setup Screen combined on a latest takes precedence basis Auto Move While Dark When ON scrollers and other moving fixtures move to new positions at the end of a cue while the fixtures are dark Its value is OFF default or ON The console looks ahead to the next cue to see which fixtures if any have attribute changes and makes the attribute change while those fixtures are still dark You can set the speed for the change in the Fade field and the delay in the Delay field to the r
372. n the Effect display and delete steps either a single step or a single THRU range can be specified The highlight must be on the step number This can be used with and THRU keys DELETE DELETE Direct Entry 1 and 2 Digit DELETE Direct Entry 1 and 2 Digit DELETE DELETE DELETE Command Line DELETE Command Line Deletes the current step FX 1 2 DELETE DELETE A Modes Deletes effect 1 step 2 FX 1 2 THRU 3 4 DELETE DELETE A Modes Deletes effect 1 step 2 through effect 3 step 4 11 164 Copying Levels From an Effect Step You can record submasters cues groups and effect steps while you are in the Effect display The highlight must be on the step number the FX STEP field Using recording commands while you are in the Effect display copies the Effect display levels to the target submaster cue group or effect step For example if effect step 1 1 is highlighted in the Effects display then entering SUB 2 RECORD will copy the levels from effect 1 step 1 into cue 2 This also allows steps to be copied from one step to another for example if the screen highlight is on effects 1 step 1 entering FX 3 4 RECORD will copy the levels from effect 1 step 1 into effect 3 step 4 11 165 Chapter 12 Groups Groups are used to store sets of levels which can be used later as building blocks but which do not show up on the cue sheet The only way t
373. n the fade completes The colour indicates their state Time 9 112 Link Used for cue linking and looping blank There is no link The number of the cue that will be run after this cue if the loop count is not exhausted Rtrn This is a loop return cue and marks the end For cues linked to previous cues indicates how many time the loop will pass through this cue For cues linked to the start of a subroutine indicates how many times to run the subroutine Zero means continuous looping Ignored if Link is blank A macro to be run or an effect to start or stop This is one of the following Loop Cmd blank No macro or effect M Run the macro Refer to Product Specification for number of macros F Start the effect numbered Refer to Product Specification for number of effects f Stop the effect Refer to Product Specification for number of effects The assigned Up Down profile You can assign separate profiles for Profile the up and down fades Note The text label caption assigned to the cue is shown at the far right end of the second line of cue information without a field label Cue Properties Lightpalette Each cue has a number of properties which are displayed in the Live display State screen When the X Playback Format field in the User Setup Screen is SPREAD SHEET the property associated with each display field is indicated by the title line When the X Playback Format field is EXPANDED or EXPA
374. n two locations without the need to load them as the current show 1 2 Press ARCHIVE BROWSE FILES to get to the LCD Browse menu Switch to the drive and directory containing the show you want to copy as described under Changing the Current Drive and Directory Use the Trackball or mouse to highlight the show Press COPY SHOW to request the copy You will be asked to select a destination directory Select the destination drive and directory or create a new directory as described under Create a Local Disk Directory Ensure that the name of the target disk and directory is displayed alongside the highlighted field LOCAL DISK or FLOPPY DISK Press COPY SHOW You will be asked to confirm this action Press COPY SHOW again to copy the show to the selected directory or CLR or UNDO to cancel the operation Delete a Show from the Local Disk You can delete a show from the local disk by using the DELETE key This deletes the show and all of its backups You may wish to copy the show to a floppy disk before you delete it from the local disk Age o Press ARCHIVE BROWSE FILES to get to the LCD Browse menu Switch to the drive and directory containing the show you want to delete as described under Changing the Current Drive and Directory Use the Trackball or mouse to highlight the show Press DELETE to request the delete You will be asked to confirm this action Press DELETE to delete the show or CLR or
375. n you install a new operating system or software The softkeys available when you press LOAD FILES are NOTES PAGES README FIRST ATC PAGE FIXT LIB CONF FILES and BACK The BACK softkey returns to the previous notes menu 22 251 Viewing and Editing Configuration Files Pressing LOAD FILES and CONF FILES softkey allows you to edit the Network Configuration 220node cfg Network Configuration File the Map Configuration File 220map cfg Console Key Wheel VDU mapping configuration and the Rack Configuration File for console reporter 220rack cfg Reporter Rack Configuration File Softkeys available when you press the CONF FILES softkey are NET CONFIG MAP CONFIG RACK CONFIG and BACK The BACK softkey returns to the previous notes menu Notes Opening a new file automatically saves the file you are currently working on 2 Changes to the Notes Pages the ATC Page the Fixture Library the Map Network and the Rack Configuration files are saved in a show file when the show is saved New shows access the original Fixture Library ATC Page and configuration files until they are edited 22 252 Chapter 23 Key Wheel and VGA Remapping Pressing lt MORE gt NOTES DISP LOAD FILES CONF FILES and MAP CONFIG softkeys from the allows the user to edit the configuration file 220map cfg and to assign alternative functions to the console keys and controls This facility in its simplest form allows th
376. n your console and wait for it to initialize Insert upgrade disk and press lt ARCHIVE gt SOFT LOAD SOFT LOAD SOFT Write the date and the serial number of the console on the disk This disk now contains a record of your console configuration and password in electronic form and should be stored in a safe place Insert a blank formatted disk in the floppy drive and press lt ARCHIVE gt SOFT SAVE PASSW SAVE SAVE to save the password Complete the Software Registration Form supplied and return it to Strand Lighting Note Version 2 2 or later software and some software products that include a security device dongle do not require a unique security number however the software should be registered to ensure that details of upgrades are received Adding Additional Channels or Applications to a Console by Entering a Password from the Keypad 1 Complete the Software Registration Form supplied and return it to Strand Lighting Your registration will be verified and a password issued to you Turn on your console and wait for it to initialize Press lt ARCHIVE gt SOFT PASSW and enter your password number with no spaces or other keys Press This process will enable the software upgrade Insert a blank formatted disk in the floppy drive and press lt ARCHIVE gt SOFT SAVE PASSW SAVE SAVE to save the password 3 45 5 Press lt ARCHIVE gt SOFTHSAVE PASSW SAVE SAVE This process will save the password to the upgrad
377. nal Faders o Submaster Bump Mode o Text Labels o Updating and Adding to Submasters o Updating Submasters from the Live Screen o Quick Recording e Assigning Effects and Macros e Using Submaster Faders e Gang Loading of Subs e The Submaster Window e Viewing and Editing Submasters o The Submaster Screen o The State Screen o Viewing Submaster Channel Levels o Editing Submaster Channel Levels o Clearing Submasters o Copying Levels from a Submaster e One and Two Scene Preset Chapter 8 Recording Cues Page 72 e Cue and Part Numbering e Recording Cue Levels e Recording Cue Properties iv o Fade Time o Delay Time o Wait Time o Assigning Fade Profiles o Assigning Fade Times to Attributes o Asigning Fade Profiles to Attributes o Assigning an Effect o Assigning a Macro o Links Subroutines and Loops o Fade Types Cue Types o Creating a New Cue o Copying an Existing Cue o Level Tracking o Recording a Text Label Chapter 9 Running Cues Page 93 e The Current Cue e Running Timed Cues e Running Manual Cues e Loading a Cue e Loading a Cue with Overrides e Changing Cue Direction e Jumping Directly to a Cue e Using the Rate Level Wheel to Change Fade Progress 500 Series Consoles e Using the Level Wheel to Change Fade Progress 300 Series Consoles e Cue Fade Progress in Manual Time e Updating and adding to Cues e Updating Cues from the Live Screen e Changing Cues Temporarily e Fading Cues with the Level Wheel e
378. name Cues The number of cues in the show Date The date the show was last saved Time The time of day the show was last saved Filename The file name of the show on the disk All shows are saved with a ssf extension Backups Shows whether any backup copies are stored on the disk 17 202 You can access all software disk printing and clearing operations from one of the Archive displays Pressing ARCHIVE brings up the LCD Archive menu This shows the soft keys SAVE SHOW LOAD SHOW BROWSE FILES PRINT CLR and SOFT The section covers the following topics Software Operations Disk Operations Print Operations Clear Operations Software Operations Press ARCHIVE SOFT to show the LCD Software menu This is used to load new operating and application software and to password enable the application software Operating Software is the GeniusPro and Lightpalette operating system Application software is any optional software which runs on the operating software e g CommuniquePro Tracker Server Networker Shownet Showport and PC Software In this display the LCD changes to the Software menu witha number of soft keys SAVE PASSW ENTER PASSW LOAD SOFT and BACK BACK sends you back to the LCD Archive menu The following topics are covered in this section e Password Operations e Loading Operating Software e Loading Application Software Password Operations SAVE PASSWORD Allows you to sa
379. nd click web browser interface and is the most powerful part of a ShowNet network Over 18 000 DMX addresses are supported on all Strand Networks 26 297 Chapter 27 Console Connectors 500 Series Consoles 300 Series Processor Unit oa Cl ee er eS e AMX _ l e D54 SD udio e COMI e Remote _ Ssis e PS2 Keyboard PMA i Oeeetsti i oe e SMPTE Input oe iE eE St ee e Submaster Macros 1 24 310 ES ee e Submaster Macro Inputs 510i 300 Series Modules PO e Serial Port command panel only Pe e PS2 Port commmand panel only Pe e TFT Panellink TFT Panel only e gt 27 298 DMX female 5 pin XLR Pin Description Pin 1 Ground Pin 2 Data Pin 3 Data Pins Noconnection gt o Pin5 Noconnection gt o DMX512 input or output up to 512 channels AUX female 6 pin XLR Pin Description Pin 1 Ground Pin 2 10VDC 100mA Pin 3 Data Pin 4 Data Pin 5 RS 232 transmit data Pin 6 RS 232 receive data Auxiliary class 1 up to 19200 baud There are 3 AUX ports each port having a line termination switch ON Terminated for the last item on the daisy chain AMX male 4 pin XLR Pin Description Pini Ground display Pin 2 Clock Pin 3 Data Pind oke AMX192 analog 5 volt output with 192 channels D54 female 3 pin XLR Pin Description Pint Ground display Pin 2 No connection Pin 3 Data 27 299 D54 an
380. nd groups can be changed by editing property fields in the State screen of the appropriate display To select a field use the Trackball to move the highlight to the field To reset a field in the Effect Screen press DEFLT Copying From a Preview Blind Display You can record submasters cues groups and effect steps while you are in the Submaster Preview Group or Effect displays This takes the currently displayed levels and records them into another item The destination item can be of any type Using recording commands while you are in a preview blind display copies the display levels to the target submaster cue group or effect step For example if you are in the Submaster display and the current submaster is 1 then CUE 2 RECORD Direct Entry Mode or RECORD CUE 2 Command Line will copy the levels from submaster 1 into cue 2 To learn how to copy a submaster to another submaster page refer to Copying Levels from a Submaster in Submasters Recording clears the current selection from the Channel Control 6 71 Chapter 7 Submasters and Channel Faders Submaster faders let you manually fade in a lighting state called a submaster which can have both intensity and attribute levels with an associated fade time Note Although the terms are often used interchangeably a submaster is different from a submaster fader A submaster fader is the physical device on which you play a submaster Since there are
381. nd it is mapped to port SN100_1 with an offset of 10 the resulting SN node configuration file could contain the lines DMX Port Direction in out Start End NetSlot DMX 1 out 10 209 700 The first 9 addresses making up the physical DMX frame would still be output from the port but would contain zero levels An offset of 1 would give instead DMX Port Direction in out Start End NetSlot 32 370 DMX s1 ot it 2000 Shownet Command Buttons Downloads currently selected patch across network to one node or to all nodes set in a dialogue box which appearswhen Download is selected An entry field allows you to select a specific node or to leave it blank if all nodes are to be downloaded Progress is indicated as each node is accessed and status reported Print Print preview using current settings sorts etc Exit Exits program Download to SN nodes only 32 371 Chapter 33 SN100 and SN102 Network Nodes The SN100 and SN102 are Ethernet lighting concentrators which provide lighting services remote from the console over Ethernet cable To ELIT ELLEL et See eS ES oN102 The following topics are covered in this section SN100 and SN102 Safet SN100 amp SN102 Controls and Displays SN100 Installation SN102Installation SN100 and SN102 Interface List SN100 and SN102 Safety SN100 and SN102 are designed and manufactured to comply with international safety standards
382. next sub on the page PAGE Increments the sub pages e g 1 gt 2 gt 3 gt 4 gt 5 gt 6 gt 1 etc DOWN Decrements the level of the currently selected sub by 5 UP Increments the level of the currently selected sub by 5 BUMP SUB Bumps the currently selected sub While the SHIFT key is depressed or toggled On 310 an alternative set of softkeys is displayed as follows LAST 8 Displays the previous eight subs on the selected page NEXT 8 Displays the next eight subs on the selected page PAGE Decrements the sub pages e g 6 5 4 3 2 1 6 etc TO 0 Sets level of currently selected sub to 0 TO 100 Sets level of currently selected sub to 100 BUMP SUB Bumps the currently selected sub Browse Display and Menu 24 263 The Browse Display and Menu lists all light shows stored within the 510i or 310 hard disk or floppy disk or server if used and enables the operator to browse through the list of shows either on the hard disk or floppy disk or server to load a show for playback or to copy a show between disks and or directories This menu is also used in conjunction with the floppy disk drive to load new operating software This section covers the following topics o Loading a Show o Copying a Show o Loading Operating Software Loading a Show To load a show from floppy or hard drive use the LAST and NEXT softkeys to position the gt marker alongside the drive field A or the hard drive fie
383. next user s current display The console is identified on the display panel under the wheel bar Keep pressing SHIFT MORE to get back to your own display The Exit Soft Key When the login display is disabled in 220NODE CFG pressing the EXIT soft key at the Report Menu display results in a prompt to press it again to confirm shutting down the console When the login display is enabled in 220NODE CFG pressing the EXIT key provides a range of softkeys as follows LOGOUT Takes you back to the login display SHUT DOWN Shuts the console down and returns to DOS SAVE SETUP If you have changed your User Setup you are prompted to save it by pressing this soft key If you do your User Setup preferences will be restored at your next login If you do not your User Setup changes will be lost Other Setup screens are not affected by this SAVE SHOW If you have changed any other show data you are prompted to save the show by pressing this soft key If you do the show file for the current working show will be updated If you 31 365 do not the working show remains in the console in the DAT files until it is changed or replaced with an other show but its show file will not have been updated If you are shutting down a main console which still has other users logged in you are warned that you will log them out too Integrating File Server and Logins lf you have a file server you can take advantage of the centralisation and securi
384. nfiguration When a field is selected you can apply the default value for the field by pressing the DEFLT softkey The default value in some fields is dependant on the setting of the GENIUSPRO PALETTE field in the Console Window To select the first field in the Setup display press file Cl LIGHTP HELP ENG PAGE31 HTM 1 of 7 6 17 2005 7 36 12 AM Console Setup End Sealing ts Networker DMS AMX DMOUT 1 H Net Video Slot Start End Net Stot DMx4 DAL Hi es HET1 peat Hoare Est OMRI OF ZBI AGA NET or se ee E OMAT Re Tha ee NETS Pa Be hoe DME AEE TRS ie NETH OOF ies ea ies eee sos CG OMMuUNnICAaArans Reporter DFE Het Mode Port Handheld Remote Pr se ae E eR ee Handheld Remote a Fe E T AS A OPF Se Handheld Remote a SB Pe Gib Sree Handheld Remote Sacer Fi aol e So 0 1 ci oe commas a ASCH Remote input GP Rie se AL DFR ee Br Figs GO Key Output IF Be GE she caer 24UXn RS232 Macro Trigger Output vi ed reacts WE y D EE URG fs Zi UxneR SARS Remote Test GEE PRO ECB i Trigger Bytes Remote Trigger Macro GER See poo ae EP eee Oe Audio briput Macro DEF External Submasters Extemal 1 ote cere eS Ra ERa S oh BG Ai Extena a ellie ate YY E M Extemal2 eee ARIE Sik bE Schein o BOA External t0 ae ae Extemaks creer erat R aT EDA External Ti crisps fn apt eh External 4 DHEN External 8 Boe Externa 12 peg ee te Note The above screen shows the options available on 300 500 Series consoles fitted with an Intel Pentium II o
385. ng The Effect Supermaster All effect output levels are mastered by the Effect Supermaster if one is assigned Moving the Effect Supermaster to 0 stops any effects from contributing to the output Moving it to 10 puts the full effect levels onto the output The Effect Supermaster is normally one of the last 6 submasters You can change it to another fader or eliminate it altogether by changing the Function properties of the submaster faders involved If there is no Effect Supermaster its level is set to 100 To learn about the submaster function property refer to Submasters and Channel Faders Effect Playback Selection All effect playback commands act on a single playback The selection can be the current playback an effect number a playback number or a combined effect and playback number in the following format FX fx PB pb If you leave out fx the current effect is assumed If you leave out pb and the specified effect is not loaded the next available playback is used If you don t include pb and the specified effect is loaded the effect playback on which it is loaded is assumed If you don t include pb and multiple copies of the effect are loaded the lowest numbered effect playback on which the effect is running is assumed Note Since these examples are only part of a command they do not have concluding key The THRU THRU ON LAST and NEXT keys cannot be used in an effect playback selection
386. ng down the SHIFT key and moving the rollball to change the fields from non editable yellow to editable green You can then change individual field values by moving the highlight to the required field using the rollball and changing the field value using the level wheel or keys or by entering a numerical value where applicable from the keypad 6 69 Alternatively you can change item properties from the command line without changing any levels The general command format for doing this is type properties Properties that are not listed in the command remain unchanged You do not get an overrecord warning with this command if the item exists You can use these commands to change the properties of existing items and to create new items without recording any intensities or attributes Confirmation is required when cues are created You can use these commands to change properties for existing items in another preview blind display but you cannot use this syntax to create an item in another preview blind display From anywhere CUE 1 2 TIME 4 A Modes CUE 1 2 TIME 4 REC TIME All Modes will change the cue 12 up and down fade times if cue 12 exists but will result in an error message if cue 12 does not exist If you do not enter an item type and number before the TIME key cue is assumed Entering TIME will change the fade time to the entered value in the current cue Changing
387. ng order Sort Down Sorts current field in descending order Show All Shows all ports on all nodes in Ports window only Cut Copies current field to clipboard and deletes Copy Copies current field to clipboard Paste Pastes from clipboard to current field Editing the Shownet Configuration ShowNet configuration information is entered displayed and manipulated through a series of windows shown below Shownet Sites Window Shownet Nodes Window Shownet Universes Window Shownet Patches Window Shownet Ports Window O U 0 O Shownet Sites Window This window contains information relating to one single installation of nodes and or consoles All the configuration information for each site is stored in a separate file named SITE MDB in the ShowNet directory These files can be archived or moved to other PCs as required This window also indicates when and by whom a site configuration was last changed Each site is the collection of all nodes universes patches and ports on the rest of the screen The same site can have alternative definitions if you like just create a new site name and start again Shownet Nodes Window 32 369 This window contains a list of all the nodes SN nodes or 500 series consoles or PCs connected to the network in the current site Each node must have a unique name and unique IP address Node types can be selected from a pick list Shownet Universes Window This window contains a list of all the un
388. ng to show control such as cue tracking and channel partitioning are handled Use the trackball mouse or the cursor keys on the PC keyboard to move between fields Change values by using and or the Level Wheel or by typing in numbers where appropriate Choices available for the currently selected field appear at the bottom of the display with the currently selected choice highlighted as white on a red background Only items shown in green text can be modified Yellow text indicates items that are not available with the current system configuration When a field is selected you can apply the default value for the field by pressing the DEFLT softkey The default value in some fields is dependant on the setting of the GENIUSPRO PALETTE field in the Console Window To select the first field in the Setup display press file Cl LIGHTP HELP ENG PAGE22 HTM 1 of 10 6 17 2005 7 35 13 AM Show Setup Screen Show Details Cue Tracking ON Playbacks STS LE Fade Delay Auto Move While Dark OFF 1 fy Auto Preheat OFFA ii Power up Restore OW Power up Macro ORE GM 1 Fade UpiDowne lt 19 GM 2 Fade Up Down fi MIDI Channel Mode Net Node Fader Key Controller Notes Velocity Trigger Macro Trigger Bytes MSC ID Rx Tx Che BACK LAL t z DFE EF OFF ORE OFF ORF OFF OFF OFF Timecode Options Source Frame Rate Channel Partitioning OFF Playback Partitioning OFF Clock Override SMPTE Net N
389. nless Cue Tracking is On in which case they are shown as blank Cross Fade GeniusPro Only A cross fade remembers levels for all channels and forces all cue levels to the recorded levels A blank channel level is equivalent to a zero level If you go back and record a new channel on in cue 4 that was never used before channel levels in all cues are zero it is only on in that one cue and then it is forced back to zero If you change a Move Fade to a Cross Fade you can change it back to a true Move Fade by changing the fade type Channels that were tracking before you changed to a Cross Fade will now track again Cross Fades are abbreviated as XF on displays and are the same as Hard Block Cues All Fades AF GeniusPro and Lightpalette An All Fade is the same as a Cross Fade except that when it runs it is combined with other output sources on a latest takes precedence basis that is it fades all channels on all playbacks It is only useful when the Playback mode in the Show Setp Screen is set to Dual HTP mode Otherwise it is the same as a Cross Fade All Fades are abbreviated as AF on displays Tracking Cues Lightpalette Only When cues are recorded only the levels that changed in the cue are remembered If you change a level in a cue and that cue level wasn t changed for the rest of the show the new level will now track through the entire show By default Lightpalette records all cues as Tracking Cues 8 105 To avoid
390. nt selection omit chans 1 0 1 Direct 1 Digit 1 0 1 Direct 2 Digit 1 0 1 Command Line Makes channel 1 the current selection and sets its level to 1 1 3 1 Direct 1 Digit 1 3 1 Direct 2 Digit 1 3 1 Command Line Selects channels 1 and 3 and sets their levels to 10 1 1 Direct 1 Digit 1 1 Direct 2 Digit 1 1 Command Line Changes the levels of the current selection to 11 chans selects the listed channels and increases their intensity levels by the specified level To set levels for the current selection omit chans 1 1 Direct 1 Digit 1 1 0 Direct 2 Digit 1 1 Command Line Makes channel 1 the current selection and increases its level by 10 For example a channel at 55 would go to 65 Any levels over 100 are limited at 100 1 1 Direct 1 Digit 1 1 Direct 2 Digit 1 1 Gommand Line The existing current selection is unchanged but their levels are increased by 11 chans selects the listed channels and decreases their intensity levels by the specified level To set levels for the current selection omit chans 1 F 1 Direct 1 Digit 1 L 1 0 Direct 2 Digit 1 H 1 Command Line Makes channel 1 the current selection and decreases its level by 10 For exampl
391. o Cue Attributes Moving Loop Count Attributes Set But Unchanged Fade Type Part Part 1 Up Down Delay Command Up Down Fade Up Down Profile The cue summary screen shows the following information for the cue or cue part specified and is updated once per second Cue a b Cue number c Cue and part number Status NOT PRESENT if not recorded or AUTO FADING or MAN FADING if on X playback or CURRENT if just completed or COMPLETE if before current cue or NOT RUN if after the current cue Used in Time Code Events a b List of events that use the cue or NONE c Blank Parts Recorded List of parts This acts as a heading for those data items that cover the cue as a whole a b List of all parts in cue c Blank Playback Playback assignment a b 1 2 ANY c Blank 20 234 Wait Time a b Times in seconds or blank if playback is in manual fade mode c Blank Link to Cue a b Cue number c Blank Loop Count a b Loop count c Blank Intensities Moving Up Down Total intensities moving up down in this cue Intensities Set but Unchanged Total intensities set to the same level as the last cue Attributes Moving Up Down Total attributes moving in this cue Attributes Set but Unchanged Total attributes set to same level as previous cue Part 1 Acts as a heading for the part specific data items a o Data for first part c Data for selected part Fade Type a b
392. o Timed FX 1 STEP CTR MANUAL Sets FX 1 step control to Manual FX 1 STEP CTR MIDI Sets FX 1 step control to MIDI FX 1 STEP CTR AUDIO Sets FX 1 step control to Audio Step Default Values Step Default Values are the values initially set for the effect step properties When you create a new step these values are applied You can change values for any individual step if required Changing the default value changes the value for the property in all steps where it has not been specifically overridden Step properties at their default values are shown in black text Step properties that have been overridden are shown in green text You can set default values for all of the step properties Recording Effect Step Properties Individual effect steps have the following properties that can be specified when recording or edited later Step Time Field In Dwell and Out Times Field Attribute Fade Time Field Low_and High Scaling Field D O 0 G These properties apply to each effect step individually Effects as a whole also have properties including the default values for steps When you create a step all step properties take on the values set in the Step Defaults for the effect These defaults are set from the The Default Times Window of the User Setup Screen when you create the effect All step values that you don t change will automatically track the Step 11 146 Defaults values Step propertie
393. o base handheld Pin 6 TX data from base handheld 26 287 Operating the R120 Handheld Remote Examples of basic operation when in Single Digit Direct Entry mode are given below For further details regarding specific commands refer to the appropriate section in the Table of Contents or Index Level Setting 1 5 Direct 1 Digit 1 50 Command Line channel 1 at 50 2 9 4 Direct 1 Digit 2 9 4 0 Command Line channels 2 amp 9 at 40 9 THRUJ 1 2 4 Direct 1 Digit 9 THRUJ 1 2 4 0 Command Line channels 9 thru 12 at 40 5 Direct 1 Digit 5 0 Command Line set 50 ON Al Modes set on level FULL A Modes set 100 level Up All Modes increase level Down All Modes decrease level NEXT A Modes next channel if channel currently selected else next cue LAST A Modes last channel if channel currently selected else last cue REM DIM Al Modes selected channels to on level and all other channels off Recording amp Playback REC CUE 1 A Modes record cue 1 CUT CUE 1 A Modes cut to cue 1 GO All Modes run next cue Function Keys F1 to F4 The functions of keys F1 to F4 are determined by a combination of the F5 SHIFT softkey and the F1 MODE softkey which is available when the F5 SHIFT softkey is selected There are three Live Menus and one Patch Menu which are toggled using the F1 F5 key combin
394. o get group information to the console output is to call up group levels as part of a channel command and show them in the Live display or to record them in a submaster cue or effect The following topics are covered in this section Predefined Groups The Current Group Recording Group Levels Recording Group Properties Using Referenced Groups Viewing and Editing Groups Updating and Adding to Groups Updating Groups from the Live Screen The Group Display Creating a New Group Viewing Group Channel Levels Editing Group Levels Deleting Groups Copying Levels from a Group Predefined Groups There are several predefined groups that provide levels for console components You can also call them up and use them like any other group if necessary These are Group 993 1 ON console Group 993 2 ON 2 Group 993 3 ON 3 Group 993 6 ON Handheld Group 994 1 Display console Group 994 1 Display 2 Group 994 1 Display 3 Group 998 1 Partition console Group 998 2 Partition 2 Group 998 3 Partition 3 Group 999 1 Grand Master 1 Group 999 2 Grand Master 2 Group 999 3 X Playback 1 Group 999 4 X Playback 2 Group 999 5 Preheat O00 0 e E o 0 OO e 0 0 0 Oo OO 12 166 ON console Controls the ON level for channels controlled from the main console All channels are initially off blank level If a channel has a level in this group the ON level is taken from the group If not the ON level is taken from th
395. o run WINPKT 0x7e before starting Windows so that the interrupt service routine in the packet driver remains at a fixed address This is assuming that the packet driver has been attached to the 0x7e software interrupt vector normal case in os bat WINPKT is a Windows utility located in your Windows mdirectory If you can t find it you can download a copy from Strands Web Site http www strandlight com 2 If you run the software under Windows 9X and other applications complain that they are short of memory you can reduce the amount of memory which the program uses by changing the DOS environment variable 220maxmem in userinit bat for example set 25 278 220maxmem 64 This sets the number of 16k memory pages the program uses for its read cache The program will allocate up to 256 pages 4 Mbytes for fastest operation but this total can be reduced to as low as 11 pages with some performance reduction The above example restricts the read cache to 1 Mbyte 3 It is best to run in full screen mode otherwise certain screen font characters and colours are incorrect in a reduced DOS box although the software runs correctly 4 When running the software you may get an error message saying you do not have enough memory You must have at least 16M bytes of ram fitted in your PC to run the software However if you are running smartdrv it may use up too much memory giving you insufficient memory to run the software The smartdrv command lin
396. o the channel list This shows the higher priority of THRU THRU ON only adds channels which are on have levels above 0 to the channel list THRU ON is a soft key on the LCD Live menu It has a higher priority than and and the same priority as THRU You cannot only use THRU ON to specify a range of channels not a range of cues groups effect steps or submasters 1 THRU ON 3 Adds channels 1 2 and 3 to the channel list if they are on NEXT and LAST can be used when selecting a cue group effect step or submaster to select the item after or before the current cue group effect step or submaster The current cue group effect step and submaster are shown on the right LCD SUB NEXT Adds channels recorded in the submaster after the current submaster to the channel list CUE LAST Adds channels recorded in the submaster before the current submaster to the channel list THRU ON is most often used to adjust the level of all lights that are on in a given cue The designer may require all on light to be increased or decreased by say 5 This is easily achieved by the commands GOTO CUE and THRU THRU ON UP or DOWN the Up and Down value is set in the Up Down field of the User Setup Screen 5 59 Current Channel Selection The Channel Control only modifies channels in the current selection The channels in the current selection are shown on the Live display with a red background w
397. o the previous page For example if at page 3 this will change to page 2 At the first page this changes to the end page SUB PAGE 2 500 series consoles only Changes the current page directly to page 2 The Current Submaster The last referenced submaster is known as the current submaster It can be used in submaster selection All submaster recording commands act on a single submaster which is shown by in the command description If you do not enter a submaster number the current submaster is used You can also use NEXT and LAST to select a submaster relative to the current submaster SUB Specifies the current submaster SUB 1 Specifies submaster 1 SUB NEXT If the current submaster is submaster 3 then this specifies submaster 4 If the current submaster is the highest submaster number this specifies submaster 1 SUB LAST If the current submaster is submaster 3 then this specifies submaster 2 If the current submaster is submaster 1 this specifies the highest submaster number 7 73 Recording Submaster Levels SUB RECORD Direct 1 Digit and Direct 2 Digit RECORD SUB Command Line Records the levels on the current display the Live Cue Preview Group Effect or Submaster display into the currently specified submaster page For information on setting intensity and attribute levels refer to Working with Channel Levels and Basic Recording for examples of recording You can reco
398. ode MIDI Net Node DEF 25 frares OFF LOCAL LOCAL Handheld Remotes Mode Full nabbed Full naked Full Grabted Pull Enki Patch Default Scale Default Frame Default N Dim Yo BO Console Time 24 HOUR Ba M REE FE E PE BS Time Display Date Display Set Time HH MM Set Date DOIMMITY At Time Macros Time Date Interval ir Ree OFF OFF AEE Tid at j OPEOGEE OEF QEF QET OFF GRE NEF ORE GEE JON THIS CUE ONLY Cue Sheet Macros bast Handheld Stop Time Date FRR E ie tao a Trig Macro OFF OFF OFF OFF The fields within the six windows of the Show Setup Screen are descibed under the window title as follows o Show Details Window o MIDI Window Timecode Options Window Patch Window Console Time Window At Time Macros Window O O O O The Show Details Window The Show Details window is in the Show Setup display and lets you configure how shows are file C LIGHTP HELP ENG PAGE22 HTM 2 of 10 6 17 2005 7 35 13 AM Show Setup Screen recorded and run The fields within the Show Details Window are desribed as follows Cue Tracking a Playback Modes a Auto Move While Dark Auto Move Fade Delay a Auto Preheat Auto Preheat Fade Delay Power Up Restore Power Up Macro a GM1 Fade Up Down a GM2 Fade Up Down Channel Partitioning a Playback Partitioning a Handheld Remote Cue Sheet Macros Cue Tracking Controls tracking whe
399. ol of a submaster it must be moved to match the position of the fader on the other console which currently controls the submaster The faders on a remote console can also be used to control submasters 31 54 on a 530 main console or 25 54 on a 520 main console To do this add the line 29 338 set 220numsubs 54 in the file USERINIT BAT on the 530 or 520 and set the submaster layout setup field to 25 36 amp 37 48 on the remote console Remote Console Status The node name of each console together with the name of the main console which the remote is logged into is displayed on most screens below the wheel bar Remote Console Controls Control interaction between main and remote is summarized below Control Mode Command Line separate Channel Controls separate Screens separate Macro Execution separate Cue Playbacks shared Fx Playbacks shared Submasinre a Ser ala layout Grandmasters shared Supermasters shared Channel Partitioning This is an important productivity aid to help users of main and remote consoles work together more easily It allows channels to be assigned to only one or other user for all channel control and record operations So one user could plot moving light cues while the other plots dimmer cues without recording or changing the other s channels To enable channel partitioning define the contents of each user s channel partition group and enable Channel Partitioning in the Show Setup Scr
400. ole to perform the function PB 1 and 300_KEY_9 BKEYS LATCH Remapping Console Wheels Rotaries and Trackball 500 Series In normal operation Rate Wheel 1 is a Playback Rate Wheel and Rate Wheel 2 is a Channel Control Wheel However you can remap the functionality of the wheels as follows 500_PB_WHL CC 500_CC_WHL PB Reverses the functionality of the two console wheels on a 500 series console The following names are used to identify the rotary controls and the co ordinates of the trackball 500_ROTARY1_WHL 500_ROTARY2_WHL 500_ROTARY3_WHL 500_ROTARY4_WHL 500_TRACKBALL_X 500_TRACKBALL_Y It is possible to remap one rotary control to perform the functionality of another however it is unlikely that it would be desireable to reverse the X and Y co ordinates of the trackball The trackball cannot be remapped to perform the function of the rotaries or rate wheels however the rotaries can be remapped to perform the functions of the trackball Console Identification Each line of the Map Configuration file must contain the user identity of the console to which the mapping or remapping command refers If this field is left blank or a 0 is entered the command refers to the current console which may be a main or remote console If a 1 is entered the command refers to the Main console 2 3 4 or 5 in this field refers the commands to remote consoles 1 2 3 or 4 23 258 Where one or more remote console is used i
401. om number specified CUE 5 FROM 4 0 RENUM RENUM Al Modes Renumbers all cues starting at cue 5 Cue 5 will now be numbered cue 40 and subsequent cues will be numbered accordingly Note After renumbering cues you can still insert cues as necessary using numbers after a decimal point e g 3 5 Copying from a Cue 9 131 You can record submasters cues groups and effect steps while you are in the Preview display The syntax is the same as for recording from the Live display The highlight must be on the cue number the CUE field Using recording commands while you are in the Preview display copies the Preview display levels to the target submaster cue group or effect step For example if the current cue is 1 then SUB 2 RECORD will copy the levels from cue 1 into submaster 2 This also lets you copy cues For example CUE 2 RECORD copies the levels from cue 1 into cue 2 9 132 Chapter 10 X Playbacks See Also Recording Cues Running Cues The X Playbacks function lets you automatically or manually fade between recorded lighting states called cues which contain intensity and or attribute levels with associated fade delay and wait times profiles and other attributes There are 2 X playbacks labelled X1 and X2 each with its own keys and sliders The console can be configured to use one or both of these Each X playback runs cues in order from the cue sheet by fading from one cue to the nex
402. on CUE 2 8 SOFT BLOCK RECORD Creates a new cue numbered 28 changes the Cue Type to Soft Block BL and copies the field values of the cue alongside the cursor position CUE 2 9 ALL FADE RECORD Creates a new cue numbered 29 changes the Cue Type to Soft Block BL and copies the field values of the cue alongside the cursor position When in the Live Screen or any of the Preview Screens Cue Group Effect or Sub you can copy the levels of a cue to another cue using the COPY FROM softkey e g CUE 5 COPY FROM CUE 2 You can expose the record mode soft keys at any time by using the REC MODE key This key is a toggle and switches the centre LCD consoles with 3 LCD displays or the left LCD consoles with 2 LCD displays or the LCD Consoles with one LCD between its normal display and the record mode soft keys Level Tracking Since Cross Fades and All Fades Block Cues record all channels whether they change or not to change levels in a series of Cross Fades or All Fades Block Cues you must re record each one of the cues 8 108 Move Fades Tracking Cues on the other hand are easy to modify When the Cue Tracking field in the Show Setup Screen is set ON Lightpalette default all level changes track through subsequent cues to wherever the channel level is next changed Also when Cue Tracking is set to ON all cues are automatically recorded as Move Fades Tracking Cues unless another type is
403. on can be changed as described in the Installation manual for the 300 Series consoles Before attempting to reconfigure the consoles ensure that the mains supply is isolated and that the mains plug is removed Avoid spilling liquid on the console If this should happen switch the console off immediately 1 26 DOS License Agreement END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT FOR MICROSOFT SOFTWARE IMPORTANT READ CAREFULLY This End User License Agreement EULA is a legal agreement between you either an individual or a single entity and the manufacturer Manufacturer of the special purpose computing device SYSTEM you acquired which includes certain Microsoft software product s installed on the SYSTEM SOFTWARE PRODUCT or SOFTWARE The SOFTWARE includes computer software the associated media any printed materials and any online or electronic documentation Any software provided along with the SOFTWARE PRODUCT that is associated with a separate end user license agreement is licensed to you under the terms of that license agreement By installing copying downloading accessing or otherwise using the SOFTWARE you agree to be bound by the terms of this EULA If you do not agree to the terms of this EULA Manufacturer and Microsoft Licensing Inc MS are unwilling to license the SOFTWARE to you In such event you may not use or copy the SOFTWARE and you should promptly contact Manufacturer for instructions on return of the unused product
404. on for the number of effects number of effect steps per effect and the total number of effect steps for your console Effects are numbered with the effect number and the effect step number 1 to 99 e g 1 25 Recording an effect does not change the output until the playback is reloaded When you record a new step in an existing effect its values are set using the Step Defaults values for the effect If this is the first step of a new effect the Step Default values for the effect are first set from the FX Step FXStep In Dwell Out and FXUp Down fields in the Setup display and then the step values are set from these Step Default values The APPEND FXSTEP soft key which appears when you switch to the Effect display appends a new step to the current effect and switches you to the new step in the Effect display The new step has default values for step time in dwell and out times attribute fade time low and high settings and scaling It has no assigned levels You cannot create a new effect using this command Recording Effect Properties Effects have the following properties that can be specified when recording or edited later Effect Text Effect Type Effect Direction Effect Fade Times Effect Mode Effect Level Next Ex O 0 0 O Os 0 Q 11 139 Assigning Fade Profiles to Effects Stop After Field Step Control Field Step Default Values Field ooog These properties apply to the whole effect not to individual steps
405. on mode i Independent mode e Exclusive mode I Inhibitive mode S Sound To Light mode C DMX Channel Supermaster M Submaster Supermaster L Flash Supermaster G Grandmaster F Effect Supermaster 7 85 D DMX Dimmer Supermaster A Audio Threshold Supermaster R MIDI Ratio Supermaster Submaster Fader Level The current fader level of each submaster is shown beside the submaster number after the mode This ranges from 0 to 99 or FL for 100 and shows the level as it fades not just the fader position Viewing and Editing Submasters You can view and edit submasters and supermasters in the Submaster display Note Changing levels while in this display changes the recorded levels in the current submaster without a record command and without warning you The following topics are covered in this section The Submaster Screen The State Screen Viewing Submaster Channel Levels Editing Submaster Channel Levels Clearing Submasters Copying Levels from a Submaster 000000 The Submaster Screen To show the Submaster screen press SUB in the Display keypad not SUB in the Levels keypad The Submaster display State screen shows a page of submasters and their associated fields The current submaster number is highlighted with a red background The current page is shown at the top of this window 7 86 11 1213 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 0025 O 0026 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
406. onditions such that Reporter will ignore the filtered fault for the output specified By default all dimme faults are reported You can filter out fault reporting using the DIMMER key to display the Dimmer Softkey Menu and the FILTER softkey to display the Dimmer Filter Softkey Menu Using the softkeys as part of a command enables you to filter out specific fault conditions for an output or range of outputs The following filter softkeys are available HIGH DC OVERLOAD OVERHEAT OUTPUT ERROR LOAD LIMIT TRIP The following shows examples of the filter function DIMMER 6 FILTER OUTPUT ERROR Filter out any output fault reports for output 6 All Modes DIMMER 1 THRU 5 FILTER HIGH DC OVERHEAT Filters out any high DC fault and overheat reports for outputs 1 to 5 All Modes DIMMER 6 SHIFT FILTER Inhibits all reporting for output 6 All Modes DIMMER 6 FILTER Removes all filters from output 6 All Modes Note Alternatively you can remove some of the filters from an output while retaining others by using the key as shown DIMMER 6 FILTER LOAD LIMIT Removes the load limit filter from output 6 All Modes Pressing lt REPORT gt DIMMER LOG OUTPUT FILT shows the Output Filter screen This screen shows a list of fault types that have been filtered out for particular outputs The output 21 249 numbers are listed down the left hand column and filtere
407. ontrolling channels these buttons are most commonly used for channel checks by setting the first desired channel to Full and then using NEXT and LAST to step through the channels e NEXT selects the channel after the highest numbered channel in the current selection e 1 THRU 3 Wheel NEXT Selects channels 1 2 3 adjusts them to the desired level and then selects the next intensity channel channel 4 in this case e 1 THRU ON 3 NEXT Selects the next intensity channel after channel 3 regardless of whether channel 3 is on e LAST selects the channel before the lowest numbered channel in the current selection e 1 THRU 3 ATT LAST Selects attribute channels 1 2 3 then selects the previous attribute channel e g channel 2 if this has attributes Another LAST selects the previous attribute channel e g channel 1 if this has attributes 5 60 Clearing the current selection The current selection can be cleared so that no channels are selected The Channel Control will then have no effect CLR removes all channels from the selection list When a command is being entered CLR instead deletes the last key entry Setting Levels With the Keypad Channel levels can be set directly from the command line by using the Levels keypad to select channels and specify levels chans selects the listed channels and sets their intensity levels to the specified level To set levels for the curre
408. op After Mode Step Defaults Step Control FX Step Time in Dwell Out Att ow High Scaling 2 1 9 The Effects Screen Lightpalette The Effect display Levels screen shows the recorded channel levels intensity levels and attribute levels of the current effect step The Levels screen background is grey rather than black to show that levels changed in this display are not being changed live To change output levels using an effect you must load and play back the effect on an effect playback In the Effect display State screen the Effect Settings window shows the effect properties for the current effect and the FX Step window shows a page of steps and their associated properties Use EDIT STEPS and EDIT FX to switch between these windows The title bar shows the date and time display name show name and grandmaster status The date and time format can be set in the Console Time window of the second Setup display State screen The show name is preceded by an asterisk when changes have been made to the show since you last saved it The Wheel window at the right of the State screen indicates the position within the effect sheet The number shows the index of the current effect step for example the first second third steps etc have index 1 2 3 etc the index is independent of the step number To move between effects highlight the FX field and use NEXT or LAST To go directly to an effect step press FX where i
409. operties when you create a step These values can be changed if necessary after the step is created Included fields for step time Step TIME step in dwell and out times In Dwell Out attribute fade time Att step low and high values Low High and scaling Scaling Scaling is not implemented at this time Effect Step Fields Fields in the Effect display FX Step window show the current values for effect step properties The property associated with each display field is indicated by the title line To change any of the effect step properties 1 Make sure that the highlight is in the lower part of the State display press EDIT STEPS if it isn t 2 Use the Trackball to move the highlight to the field you want to change 3 Type a new value or use and to increment or decrement the value The new value is recorded when you move the highlighting out of the field To move between steps use the Trackball to move the highlight to the FX Step field and then use NEXT and LAST to move between steps FX Step The number of the effect step These are fixed and cannot be changed Step Time Step time for the step In Dwell Out The in dwell and out times for the step The in time is the time from step start until the step is at its high setting The dwell time is the time the step stays at its high setting The out time is the time from the end of the dwell time until the step is back at its low setting Att The time it
410. or lightp lt Enter gt to run the software Type Ctrl F12 followed by F2 three times to return to DOS You must now proceed to install the Networker amp Utilities software from the disk supplied Refer to Installing the Networker and Utilities Software Using DOS 3 1 or Later and Installing the Help file under DOS 3 1 or later ing the Backup PC Software from Windows 9X The following procedures assume that the software is being installed from floppy drive A to drive C Open the A drive window and double click on the installation icon as follows C5INSTAL lt Enters gt for non i 400 or 500 Series consoles or CIINSTAL lt Enters gt for 500i Series consoles or C3INSTAL lt Enter gt for 300 Series consoles You will be given a choice of platform e g 3 300 Series 4 400 Series 5 500 Series B Backup PC O Offline Editor F File Server To install the Offline Editor software type O 5 Specify either GeniusPro or Lightpalette installation by typing g or i This should match the console software type 6 You will be prompted to enter a destination path for the Backup PC software By default the software will be installed in C geniusp or C lightp Enter a destination directory name of 8 characters or less or accept the default destination by pressing lt Enter gt 7 You will be prompted to enter a destination path for the show files By default the show files will be stored in C shows Enter a destination path or accept th
411. or trackball is not available the functions can be performed using the navigation keys on a standard ASCII keyboard connected to the keyboard connection on the processor unit or to the PS2 port on the back of the command module For details on how to control moving lights using a Microsoft Intellimouse Trackball refer to Mouse Control of Features Panel Configuration 300 Series Consoles When you purchase a 300 Series console the configuration of the fader modules supplied is set at the factory The maximum number of fader panels is 7 so if you have 5 fader panels and a 1 33 command module in your system the fader panels are numbered in the 220node cfg file as fdr1 to fdr 5 If you purchase additional fader panels and connect them to the system or you remove one or more fader panels you must reset the panel configuration To reset the panel configuration after adding or removing fader panels proceed as follows e With all panels connected to the command module press lt REPORT gt ADV SETUP then PANEL SETUP This will cause each fader panel to display its fader number by illuminating the number of LEDs in red on the left hand side of the top row of the fader panel according to its fader number 1 7 For instance fader number 3 will illuminate three LEDs e You can change the fader panel number by pressing one of the first 7 bump keys on the on the top row of the fader panel For instance to change a fader panel to Fader
412. ore intensity and attribute levels In addition each item type has properties that you can set This section discusses recording channel levels and text for cues groups effects and submasters and recording up and down fade times for cues effects and submasters This chapter contains the following topics Recording Levels and Properties Changing Properties Without Recording Levels Editing in a Preview Blind Displa Copying from a Preview Blind Displa Recording Levels and Properties You can record levels and properties into cues groups effects and submasters from the Live Cue Preview Group Effect or Submaster displays Levels are always taken from the current display and recorded into the item type specified by one of the selection keys SUB CUE GROUP or FX In this section type is used to mean one of the selection keys The general format for recording levels and properties is type properties RECORD Properties that are not listed in the command are recorded at default values for new items and remain unchanged when you are re recording If the specified item has already been recorded an overrecord message gives you the chance to cancel the recording Press again to rerecord or CLR or UNDO to cancel the command If you do not enter an item type cue is assumed The CUE key in all of the examples below is optional Recording clears the current selection from the Channel Control The following recor
413. ort Selection Node Addresses Broadcast Communication Point to Point Communication Default IP Addresses 220node cfg Network Configuration File SN10X Configuration File Format Network Node Configuration File Example SN10X Node Self Test Software Preserving Configuration Files Network DMX Network Video Tracking Backup Remote Consoles e Remote Ports Network Port Selection Consoles with newer electronics have built in Ethernet ports rather than use a plug in card By default the RJ 45 port phone style is enabled To enable the BNC port instead an empty flag file needs to be present in the operating software directory To do this add this line to the file USERINIT BAT in that directory ECHO gt BNC_IF FLG To change the port selection on the plug in 3Com card use the EtherDisk floppy supplied with the card and run the 3c5x9cfg exe utility 29 322 Node Addresses All consoles nodes and PCs on the network have individual Internet Protocol IP addresses IP address are expressed as a series of four three digit numbers separated by periods for example 192 168 000 069 Typically the first three sets of numbers determined by the Net Mask identify the network and the last set of numbers identifies the device on that network Network Address Device Address 192 168 000 069 192 168 000 068 Broadcast Communication For broadcast communication used for DMX and Video distribution only IP addresses are not used and
414. ot all the printout may print correctly Remote Analogue Input The Analogue connector on an SN100 or SN102 may be used by setting the NET NODE fields of the External Submasters Window on the Console Setup Screen Each external submaster may be set to a different NET NODE if required Remember to also assign external submasters and their contents at the submaster display Remote ASCII Input This NET NODE can be set to any SN100 or SN102 COM1 or COM2 port Remote GO key output which sends a message whenever GO is pressed and remote macro trigger output which sends the contents of the text string of the text label of any macro which starts with are similar Remote MIDI SN100 and SN102 MIDI ports can be used instead of local ports 29 340 Chapter 30 Tracker Software Tracker is a standard software package for Strand Lighting s Consoles using GeniusPro or Lightpalette Operating software and provides the following features Intelligent Control of any DMX Moving Light Pan amp Tilt on the trackball or mouse Rotary Control and mouse control of attributes Up to 99 pages of rotary control assignments Continuous e g Pan or Discrete Attributes e g frame True 16 Bit DMX fades for Pan and Tilt Copy move and swap levels and attributes between channels Attribute Display Formats Automatic Display Format Switching Patch All Attributes of one fixture to a single channel Fixture Library for easy patching
415. ot there the console restarts as normal You can use it to copy back your customised fixture library which is normally renamed to FIXTURE OLD during installation and your network configuration files The batch file could look like this COPY FIXTURE OLD FIXTURE LIB Y COPY ATCPAGE OLD ATCPAGE LIB Y COPY 220NODE OLD 220NODE CFG Y Note that installing software at DOS does NOT run RECOVER BAT DOS Utilities 220CLEAN BAT This is a useful tool for cleaning up the console s hard disk You are advised to save your current show before running it Run it by typing 220CLEAN and it prompts you if you want to e Check and display the console s PC resources e Delete the working files used to hold the current show This is useful if you are experiencing erratic or unusual operation e Check AND FIX any hard disk corruption You may need to reload the Operating Software if errors appear e Defragment the hard disk which may result in a significant increase in console speed after this is done e Check AND FIX any hard disk corruption caused by defragmentation e Check that the Operating Software files are correctly installed You may need to reload the Operating Software if errors appear NETON Loads the packet driver for the console network interface Do this before running IOFTPDOS NETOFF Unloads the network card packet driver Do this after running IOFTPDOS and before restarting the Operating Software OS Starts the Operating Software f
416. ote This procedure will erase any data already on the floppy disk 1 Press ARCHIVE BROWSE FILES to get to the LCD Browse menu Insert the floppy disk 3 Press FORMAT FLOPPY to request formatting You will be asked to confirm this action 4 Press FORMAT FLOPPY to start the format operation or CLR or UNDO to cancel the operation A progress indicator appears while the console is formatting the disk Write Protecting the Floppy Disk After saving the floppy disk can be write protected by moving the write protect tab so that the hole is open This stops it being accidentally formatted or overwritten by another save Print Operations The Print display lets you configure your printer and print show information Although you can use the Print Screen macro SHIFT P1 to print the current contents of all screens 1 screen per page the archive print functions are provided for printing whole cues and shows Pressing ARCHIVE PRINT shows the Print display and the LCD Print menu 17 211 NUMBER FROM WHOLE SHOW _ pw to Save Show to Load Copy Delete Restore To select a field use the Trackball to move the red cursor to the field and use the Level Wheel or or keys to change the field value The following topics are covered in this section o Printer Setup o Printing Printer Set Type EPSON FX An Epson FX or compatible printer IBM PRO An IBM Proprinter or compatible printer HP DESKJE
417. ou can lock the console faders and keys The right LCD shows Locked in the upper right corner when the console keys and faders are locked The Live Display also shows Console Locked with a red background at the top of the screen when the console keys and faders are locked When a show has been recorded the memory can be locked to ensure that accidental changes cannot be made For further information refer to Locking the Console Faders and Keys and Locking the Console Memory Save Indicator Show data is held on the system internal hard disk the local disk When recording or updating cues effect steps submasters etc data is automatically saved to the local disk The symbol between grandmaster levels changes to a flashing magenta box to indicate that automatic saving is taking place Locking the Console Faders and Keys In order to avoid accidental changes to a show you can lock the console faders and keys The right LCD shows LOCKED in the upper right corner when the console keys and faders are locked or when memory is locked see below The display also shows CONSOLE LOCKED in yellow with a red background on the title bar on the top of all screens when the console keys and faders are locked or when the console and memory are locked SHIFT lt HELP gt toggles the console keyboard and fader state between locked and unlocked 510i and 310 Show Controllers DISABLE keylock switches the console keyboard and fader state between locked
418. oup in the range from 1 to 999 9 Initially set to 1 LAST The last group in the range from 1 to 999 9 Initially set to 999 9 NUMBER FROM Renumbers the specified range of groups starting with this number This lets you load groups from other shows without erasing the same numbered groups in the current show Effects The recorded effects from the Effect display An effect range can be specified Initially this is from 1 to 600 and selects all effects Individual effect steps cannot be specified only whole effects with all their steps FIRST The first effect in the range from 1 to 600 Initially set to 1 LAST The last effect in the range from 1 to 600 Initially set to 600 NUMBER FROM Renumbers the specified range of effects starting with this number This lets you load effects from other shows without erasing the same numbered effects in the current show Submasters All pages of the recorded submasters from the Submaster display A submaster range can be specified Initially this is from 1 to the highest submaster number for the console and selects all submasters Individual submaster pages cannot be specified If you select all submasters the last 6 submasters in the recorded show will appear as the last 6 submasters on your console regardless of how many submasters there were on the console that saved the show FIRST The first submaster in the range from 1 to the highest submaster number for the console Initially set to 1 LAST
419. ource channels are shown in black Deleting Auto Mod Channels You can delete specified destination channels from the Automod Screen or delete all Automod pairing using the DELETE softkey as shown 3 DELETE Deletes the destination channel 30 All Modes Note Where only one destination channel is paired to one source channel deleting the destination channel will clear the source channel from the display source channel no longer paired in Automod Where more than one destination channel is paired to a source channel and one of the destination channels is deleted the remaining destination channel s will remain paired to the source channel You cannot delete source channels from the Automod Screen AUTOMOD FROM 3 DELETE Deletes source channel 3 DELETE DELETE Deletes all auto mod entries from the Auto Mod Screen 14 194 Updating the Show from the Auto Mod Screen Automod channels shown on the Automod Screen will remain paired while in the USE AUTOMOD mode Pressing the A MOD OFF key will remove the Automod pairing from the show You can permanently update cues subs groups or effects from the Live screen to incorporate the pairing set in the AutoMod Screen as shown UPDATE UPDATE AMOD CUE 1 THRU 8 Updates cues 1 to 8 from the Auto Mod Screen UPDATE UPDATE AMOD SUB 2 THRU 4 Updates submaster 2 to 4 from Auto Mod Sceen UPDATE UPDATE A MOD GROUP 3 Updates group 3
420. ouse to highlight each item you want to load and use to turn its SELECT field on Type the desired numbers in the FIRST LAST and NUMBER FROM fields as desribed under The Archive Selection Window 3 Press BROWSE FILES to get to the LCD Browse menu 4 Switch to the drive and directory containing the show you want to load as described under Changing the Current Drive and Directory 5 Use the Trackball to highlight the show 6 Press to request the load You will be asked to confirm this action 7 Press again to load the show or CLR or UNDO to cancel the operation Once you load a show if you don t change the current drive and directory you can use ARCHIVE SAVE SHOW SAV E SHOW to save the show periodically to the same drive and directory Restoring or Deleting a Backup Copy of the Show Each time you save the show to the local disk it makes a backup copy of the show The console automatically saves the last 10 copies of the show Only one backup is saved for 300 Series consoles You can restore or delete a particular backup copy of a show as follows 1 Press ARCHIVE to get to the LCD Archive menu 2 If you don t want to load the whole show use to turn the WHOLE SHOW field off Then use the Trackball or mouse to highlight each item you want to load and use to turn its SELECT field on Type the desired numbers in the FIRST LAST and NUMBER FROM fields as described under The Archive Selection Win
421. output is already a non dim 1 NON 5 A Modes Patches output 1 as a non dim to channel 5 intensity out NON NON patches the output as a non dim to the selected channel intensity and sets the threshold to the default threshold 1 NON 5 NON All Modes Patches output 1 as a non dim with the default threshold to channel 5 intensity out NON NON thold patches the output as a non dim to the selected channel intensity and sets the threshold to the specified value 1 NON 5 NON 4 0 Al Modes Patches output 1 as a non dim with a threshold of 40 to channel 5 intensity 13 191 out NON NON changes the output to a non dim with the default threshold without changing the channel it is patched to 1 THRU 5 NON NON All Modes Changes outputs 1 to 5 to non dims with the default threshold out NON NON thold sets the outputs to non dim with the specified threshold without changing the channels they are patched to 1 NON NON 8 0 A Modes Sets output 1 to non dim with an 80 threshold out 2 or out ATT patches the output s to the channel attribute out NON NON thold can then set the output s to non dim with the specified threshold without changing the channels they are patched to 2 0 0 1 ATT 6 2 0 0 1 NON NON 9 0 Al Modes Assigns output 2001 to the channel 6 colour at
422. overs the following topics Time Format Setting Resetting the Internal Clock Stepping the Light Show Timing Time Format The time format for the internal clock is in the same format as the SMPTE input time code and is set at Show Setup Form HH MM SS FF where HH Hours 0 23 MM Minutes 0 59 SS Seconds 0 59 FF Frames per second 0 24 0 25 0 30 drop or 0 30 non drop Setting Resetting the Internal Clock When the clock is INTERNAL or PAUSED the SET CLOCK softkey may be used to display alternative softkeys used to increment decrement or reset the internal clock as follows HH Add one hour to the internal clock time 24 265 MM Add one minute to the internal clock time SS Add one second to the internal clock time FF Add one frame to the internal clock time 5FF Add 5 frames to the internal clock time BACK Return to the Events Display and Menu SHIFT HH Subtract one hour from the internal clock time SHIFT MM Subtract one minute from internal clock time SHIFT FF Subtract one frame from the internal clock time SHIFT 5FF Subtract 5 frames from the internal clock time SHIFT RESET TIME Reset internal clock to 00 00 00 00 Stepping the Light Show Timing Selecting PAUSE CLOCK stops the internal or external clock at the time of the displayed event Pressing STEP will manually trigger the next event Alternatively with PAUSE CLOCK selected the oper
423. ower voltages socket outlets shall be installed near to the equipment and be easily accessible e Working Voltage Current 100 120 2A 220 240 1A e Frequency 50 60 Hz e Max Ambient Temp 350C e Do not restrict ventilation This manual describes the installation and operational procedures for Strand Lighting s 300 and 500 series Control Console Offices and Service Centers Phone numbers do not include country code or other international access data World Wide Web http www strandlighting com Berlin Strand Lighting GMBH Ullsteinstrasse 114 142 HAUS C D 12109 Berlin Germany Tel 49 30 707 9510 Fax 49 30 707 95199 Hong Kong Strand Lighting Asia LTD 20 F Delta House 3 On Yiu Street Shatin N T Hong Kong Tel 852 2757 3033 Fax 852 2757 1767 London Strand Lighting Limited Unit 3 Hammersmith Studios Yeldham Road Hammersmith London England W6 8JF Tel 44 20 8735 9790 Fax 44 20 8735 9799 Los Angeles Strand Lighting Inc 6603 Darin Way Cypress CA 90630 U S A Tel 1 714 230 8200 Fax 1 714 230 8173 Moscow Strand Lighting Novinsky Boulevard 20A Building 3 6 12069 Moscow Russia Tel 7 095 234 42 20 Fax 7 095 234 42 21 Rome Strand Lighting Italia Via Delle Gardenie S N C Pontina Vecchia KM 33 400 00040 Pomezia Italy Tel 39 0691 9631 Fax 39 0691 47138 Toronto Strand Lighting Canada Inc 2430 Lucknow Drive 15 Mississauga Ontario L5S 1V3 Canada Tel 1 905 677
424. pecified channels and sets their levels to the specified output where is 0 to 255 DIMMER 1 DMX 0 1 2 Direct 1 and 2 Digit DIMMER 1 DMX 1 2 Command Line Makes Output 1 the current selection and sets its level to 12 about 4 i e 12 255 Repatching An output can be patched back so that it uses the channel level again DIMMER out REPATCH or DIMMER out DIMMER repatches the selected outputs to use the channel level To repatch all previously patched outputs omit out REPATCH is a soft key on the LCD Patch menu DIMMER 1 DIMMER Al Modes DIMMER 1 REPATCH A Modes Repatches Output 1 DIMMER DIMMER A Modes DIMMER REPATCH A Modes Repatches all outputs 15 198 Chapter 16 The Setup Key When the SETUP key is pressed the User Setup Screen is displayed and the Setup menu is shown on the right hand LCD This section covers the following topics e Changing the User Setup e Locking the Console Memory Changing the User Setup The User Setup Screen determines the way that the console operates and displays information Use the trackball the cursor keys on the PC keyboard or the console cursor keys on 300 Series consoles to move between fields Change values by using and or the Level Wheel or by typing in numbers where appropriate Choices available for the currently selected field appear at the bottom of the display with the currently selected choice h
425. play You can customise the Patch Display to show threshold data or load data in Output order or Channel order Press SET on the LCD Patch menu to show the LCD Set Patch menu Press SET DISP to show the Set Patch menu Press OUTPUT ORDER to show the Patch display in output order Press CHAN ORDER to show the Patch display in channel order Press LOADS ON to display Learned Loads for outputs or channels Press LOADS OFF to display Threshold values for outputs or channels Press BACK to return to the LCD Patch menu SOV E oO he Only outputs patched to an intensity channel with a learned load will display load values Refer to Console Reporter Deleting Channels Deleting an intensity or attribute channel increases the number of free channels of that type This is necessary if you want to create a new channel number but there are no free channels You can delete channels from the LCD Channel menu which is a submenu on the LCD Patch menu Press CHAN to show this menu The BACK soft key returns you to the LCD Patch menu chan DELETE CHAN This deletes the channel s including levels from all cues submasters and effects If this is currently used in a cue or patch you will be prompted to press the DELETE CHAN key a second time to confirm the deletion 13 186 Note Submasters and effects are not checked for channel usage Deleting can sometimes take a considerable time over a minute The command prompt shows a message
426. play Ensure that the required disk local or floppy is highlighted in red and that the correct directory is shown to the right of the highlighted disk If you require to change directories or create a new directory refer to Changing the Current Drive or Directory before naming the show Type TEXT show name entering the show name from the external keyboard To clear a name type TEXT The name you set here willl appear at the very top of each screen to the right of the display name Now that you have set up the show name you can save the show as described below Saving a Show When you save a show the current show is saved in the current drive and directory All data including the setup is saved Before you save a show ensure that the correct disk and directory that the show will be saved into is shown in the Local Disk Floppy Disk field above the show list If you require to change the drive or directory proceed as described below before saving the show To save a show to the current drive and directory press ARCHIVE to display the Archive Screen if it is not already displayed then press SAVE SHOW and press SAVE SHOW to confirm action or CLR or UNDO to cancel 17 206 Note Some show files are too big to fit on the floppy disk At DOS use the msbackup command to create a compressed backup of the file on a new floppy Select the show file as the file to backup and do a full backup You must use msbackup to r
427. playback or played from a cue or submaster Refer to the Product Specification for number of effect playbacks on your console This section covers the following topics The Effects Window The Effect Supermaster Effect Playback Selection The Current Playback Loading an Effect Running an Effect Pausing an Effect Stepping an Effect Changing Effect Times While Effect is Running Changing Effect Types Changing Effect Direction Updating Effects Updating Effects from the Live Screen Unloading an Effect The Effects Window 11 149 The Effects window in the Live display State screen shows the current state of the effects and is used when running effects playbacks To show the Live display press LIVE If the Live display State screen does not show the Effects window shown below go to the Setup display and change the Live Screen Layout field to FX PB FX or PB SUBS FX Then press LIVE to show the Live display 11 150 50 5050 50 5 rity TIT ikiii uiii 0026 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 0050 0051 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 0075 0076 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 0100 0101 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 0125 Effects Wheel Pb Fx Step Type Dir Fade Time StepT Stop Next Sub Text The Live Screen Effects Window GeniusPro 8 32 28 24 01 99 gt gt LIVE No T
428. prising 24 submaster faders Channel fader sections comprising 24 faders can be physically connected to the control surface up to a maximum of 168 faders 6 additional fader modules LCD monitor modules are also available for use in place of the standard VGA monitors and are provided as standard on Memory 400 and 600 models Model 310 The 310 Show Controller Backup Unit is designed primarily to serve the lighting requirements of the themed environment market and to operate over a network as a backup unit to a main console The unit is similar to the Processor Unit of the 300 series consoles but includes an operator interface comprising a touch screen Refer to refer to 510i 310 Show Controller Backup Unit Models 430 530 and 530i 30 Submaster Faders These consoles are similar in style and have the same mechanical features The difference between the consoles is the type and speed of the processor used in the motherboard as follows e 430 Consoles 486 Processor or Pentium Processor e 530 Consoles Pentium Processor e 530i Consoles Pentium Pro or Pentium Il Processor Models 550 and 550i 54 Submaster Faders Again these models are similar and have the same mechanical features The difference is the type and speed of the processor used in the motherboard as follows e 550 Consoles Pentium Processor e 550i Consoles Pentium Pro or Pentium Il Processor Models 520 and 520i 24 Submaster Faders 1 31 Again these mod
429. r Pentium Pro i Range processor Where options are not available on your console they are omitted from the Console Setup Screen The fields within the four windows of the Console Setup Screen are descibed under the window title as follows a Output Connections Window Network Window a Communications Window a External Submasters Window Output Connections Window The Output Connections window is in the Console Setup Screen and lets you configure the output connectors on the rear panel of the console The DMX connectors are output only in the standard software However the last available DMX connector DMX2 DMX3 or DMX4 depending on the console can be configured for input or output if the Communiqu Pro software is loaded For more file Cl LIGHTP HELP ENG PAGE31 HTM 2 of 7 6 17 2005 7 36 12 AM Console Setup information refer to Communiqu Pro The AMX and D54 connectors on 500 Seies Consoles are output only and can be configured as AMX192 or D54 outputs The following fields are described in this section a D54 AMX a DMX1 4 D54 AMX 500 Series Consoles only This enables the AMX 192 channels or D54 884 channels output connector on the rear panel The AMX192 and D54 outputs cannot be assigned output numbers higher than the number of console outputs 2048 Since AMX192 always transmits 192 channels it cannot have a Start value higher than 1857 Since D54 can transmit a short frame it can have start va
430. r default settings in the Setup display will be determined by your password or will be default GeniusPro or Lightpalette settings Changing this setting changes the settings immediately DEFAULT The defaults in the Setup display are determined by your password whether you bought GeniusPro or Lightpalette operating software LIGHT PALETTE The defaults in the Setup display are changed to Lightpalette settings GENIUSPRO The defaults in the Setup display are changed to GeniusPro settings Top of Page
431. r remote from Strand Lighting it is already configured and loaded with operating software and only requires charging in preparation for use Systems provided by others will require system operating software to be installed on both a console and the iPaq Software installation remote Strand s iPaq focus remote application software installs like any other Pocket PC application A disk is provided with each unit for copying to the computer that has the iPaq base station connected to it and ActiveSync software installed Insert your iPaq into its base station and select the Set up icon on the diskette supplied from Windows Explorer The applications will install automatically Strand Lighting updates all operating software for its systems and new versions are regularly posted to our website at www sitrandlighting com Use this procedure to install any software updates as they become available Software installation console Each console that you wish to use with a wireless remote must have its own unique copy of the remote application software A disk is provided with each software package to enable one console See your console operations manual for software loading instructions If you have more than one console in your system you must purchase additional operating software for each console Additional software packages may be ordered from your local Strand Lighting distributor 26 293 Configuration All remotes supplied by Strand Lighting
432. r the whole show is cleared the SP2 SP7 P1 to P7 and USER macros macro numbers 972 977 991 997 and 998 are present but with no contents To go directly to a macro press MACRO where is the macro number If the macro does not exist you will be warned that you are creating a new item Press again to create the new macro or CLR or UNDO to cancel the command To move between existing macros use the Trackball 18 220 Creating a New Macro To create a new macro while you are in the Macro display press MACRO where is the new macro number You will be warned that you are creating a new item Press again to create and display the new macro or CLR or UNDO to cancel the command To switch to the Macro display and create a new macro press MACRO MACRO where is the new macro number You will be warned that you are creating a new item Press again to create and display the new macro or CLR or UNDO to cancel the command The MACRO display key is at the top of the console Do not confuse it with the lower MAC RO key Creating a macro automatically puts it into edit mode Editing Macros The macro contents are shown in red as the macro is being edited MACRO MACRO puts the macro into editing mode To start editing select the macro with the Trackball and then press MACRO MACRO MACRO P1 or SHIFT P1 or USER selects an existing macro and starts editing you
433. r when not on zero or 100 are used to calculate the fade profiles Note During learning the Status Window will show PROFILE LEARN in flashing white text ona red background The Playback LCD on 500 Series consoles will show the profile numbers being learned and the VGA title bar in the Profile Screen will show PROFILE PP LEARNING PB PROFILE 5 PB 1 LEARN Learns intensity and attribute profiles on X Playback 1 All Modes Where 5 is the Upfade profile and attribute fade and 5 1 is the Downfade profile PB PROFILE 6 7 PB 2 LEARN Learns intensity profiles on X Playback 2 All Modes Where 6 is the Upfade profile 7 is the Downfade and the attribute fade is not affected Note If Playbacks field in the Show Setup Screen is set to Single or Split Single and Playback 2 is selected An error message is generated PB PROFILE 3 PB 1 LEARN Learns intensity profile on X Playback 1 All Modes Where 3 is the Downfade profile and the Upfade and attribute profiles are unaffected 19 229 Viewing and Editing Learned Profiles When you have created the profile s you can view and edit them in the Profile Display using End Editing only as previously described Stopping the Learn Process You can stop an active learn on either playback as shown PB 2 PROFILE PROFILE Assigning Profiles You can assign the same profile or different profiles to the up fade and attribute fades and
434. ration The wait time cannot be split In multi part cues only the wait time in the first part is used To delete an assigned wait time omit the time value CUE 1 WAIT 4 RECORD Direct 1 and 2 Digit 8 97 RECORD CUE 1 WAIT 4 Command Line Records cue 1 with levels and a wait time of 4 seconds cue WAIT changes the wait time of the specified cue without changing recorded levels If the cue doesn t exist creates a new cue with no levels but with the specified wait time You do not get an overrecord warning with this command if the cue exists CUE 1 WAIT A Modes Resets cue 1 wait time to the setting of the Cue Wait field in the User Setup Screen Default OFF CUE 1 WAIT 4 All Modes Changes the cue 1 wait time to 4 seconds without changing any levels Assigning Fade Profiles Profiles let you change the fade characteristics of cues You can assign a profile to the cue or assign separate profiles to the up fade and down fade cue PROFILE RECORD Direct 1 and 2 Digit RECORD cue PROFILE Command Line Records the levels on the current display into the specified cue and assigns a fade profile to it If the cue already exists an overrecord message gives you the chance to cancel the recording Press RECORD again to record over the cue or CLR or UNDO to cancel theoperation For information on how to create and edit profiles refer to Profiles If you only enter
435. rations which access the floppy or you will lose sync Ensure that the same version of the operating software is installed on the main and backup Edit main 220NODE CFG file in addition to the general settings on_line 1 backup_mode 2 Edit backup 220NODE CFG file in addition to the general settings 29 332 on_line 1 backup_mode 1 console_addr 192 168 0 aaa aaa must match my_nodeaddr of the main console Start main console 1 Power up or run os from c 2200s at DOS If you are using the login display enter OnLine YES Mode MAIN Main LOCAL 2 Press F1 to log in The default admin user password is blank Start backup console or PC 4 Power up or run os from c 220os at DOS If you are using the login display enter OnLine YES Mode BACKUP Main Console1 Both consoles should then show Main Ok Backup Ok No Sync D To Achieve Sync On Main or Backup at the Backup Commands menu under the More key or Alt R on the alpha keyboard press M Give Sync or M Take Sync main give sync to backup or main take sync from backup The console giving sync saves the current show the shows file is transferred and the other console loads the show file Both consoles should then show Main Active In Sync Demonstrate Backup Taking Over Disconnect the main console from the network After a few seconds backup shows Backup in control no sync Main will show Backup Gone Offline Resync Main After Backup
436. rd just the intensities or just the attributes to a submaster by adding INTS ONLY or ATTS ONLY to the command line Before recording a submaster make sure that you are in the correct submaster page Recording is always done to the current page Recording a submaster immediately reloads it so if the submaster fader is up the levels appear at the console output immediately Recording Submaster Properties The only properties that can be specified for submasters separately on each submaster page are the text the up and down fade times and the attribute fade time All other properties are common to all submaster pages The following topics are covered in this section Setting Submaster Properties Fade Times Fader Properties Submaster Functions Assigning Effects and Macros External Faders Submaster Bump Mode Text Labels Updating and Adding to Submasters Updating Submasters from the Live Screen Quick Recording Setting Submaster Properties Submaster properties can be set from the command line using the console keypad Alternatively the properties can be set by holding down the SHIFT key and moving the trackball to change the edit fields from yellow non editable to green editable then positioning the highlight over the field to be set and using the level wheel or or keys to change the value Values for the Up Down and ATT fields can be entered directly from the keyboard Press to cancel edit mode 7 74
437. re comes pre loaded on all SN100 SN102 SN103 and SN104 nodes 2 You should upgrade your SN10x nodes to at least version 2 3 software before installing version 2 4 software on your console 3 There is now an easier way to download new SN Networker software over the network from a DO console or PC Refer to the file SW2ALL gt BAT supplied on the Networker Utilities disk or the Networker for SN100 disk This section covers the following topics Displaying the Current Version Number Floppy Disk Installation Remote Installation Remote Installation from an SN100 SN102 Remote Install from aPC Assigning New IP Addresses Displaying Current Version Number The version of the current Networker software is displayed on the no DMX video activity dialog box on the SN100 amp SN102 It is displayed at startup and can be forced onto the screen by temporarily removing the node from the network by disconnecting the network cable Networker Version 2 4 Software Build Mon dd Year Hardware Platform SN10x Node Name SN100_1 Node Address ddd ddd ddd ddd ddd Ethernet Address dd dd dd dd dd dd c Strand Lighting Ltd 2000 All rights reserved Warning No Dmx Activity DMX Output Suppressed Connect a single SN104 SN103 node to a ShowNet network and use IOFTPDOS or IOFTP32 to determine the software version number for these nodes The who command displays the software version of each node 35 390 Floppy Disk Installat
438. reen option by setting Auto Move While Dark to ON and entering the required Fade and Delay times The Fade time is the time for all attributes to fade in all AMWD fades The Delay time is the time after all parts of a normal cue fade have complete before an AMWD fade starts Note AMWD Fade and Delay times are set per show not per fade AMWD fades are not recorded and do not appear in the cue sheet However they can be seen as running fades grayed out on some output formats If an attribute has not completed moving when the next cue starts the attribute will fade to the next recorded position in the cue attribute fade time often zero For an attribute to Auto Move the following must be true e AMWD must be enabled e The intensity of the channel on stage must be zero e The intensity of the channel in the next cue must be non zero e The attribute value in the next cue must differ from the current value on stage AMWD can be overridden on a cue by cue basis by setting non zero intensity values 1 is sufficient to disable AMWD Any Manual recorded Mark cues cues that move attributes with the intensity off will still be executed as normal Referenced Groups Preset Focus Note Preset Groups is only available with Tracker on Pentium based consoles 486 based consoles do not support this feature Preset allows individual channels or attributes in Cues Effects and Submasters to be recorded as links to the same intensity or attribut
439. rnet card as Parameter Settings Note I O Base Address 300h Interrupt 10 Ethernet Port RJ45 or BNC Plug and Play BIOS OFF This must be turned off To change the defaults or run the Ethernet card self test software follow these instructions Noe SN Pe Power up the PC From the DOS prompt run the 3C5X9CFG EXE program supplied on a floppy disk with the network card Using the on screen menus change the parameters as shown Select the test option and ensure that all tests pass Exit from the network card configuration utility Power down the PC When configured and tested connect the Ethernet card to the network Installing the Dongle PC Software only For PC Software plug the supplied dongle into the parallel port of the PC Applications are registered to the Dongle Security Number stored inside the dongle and marked on the outside of the dongle The number will be composed of 6 groups of 3 digits between 0 and 255 e g 001 002 003 002 003 004 Dongles can be moved between PCs and when plugged into consoles are used instead of the internal Console Security Number Installing the Backup PC Software from DOS 1 Zi The following procedures assume that the software is being installed from floppy drive A to drive C Insert the appropriate operating software disk in the floppy disk drive and type A C5INSTAL lt Enters for non i 400 or 500 Series consoles or A CIINSTAL lt Enters gt for 500i Series consoles or A C3
440. ro LOAD CUE 2 PB 2 GO Command Line Loads cue 2 into playback 2 irrespective of load type 9 116 Changing Cue Direction Running cues can be stopped and then cut backwards The backwards cut time is given by the X Back Cut field in the User Setup display or by the playback faders if you are in Manual Time mode When cutting backwards the previous cue in the cue sheet is always cut to rather than the previously run cue To stop any forward running cues press STOP BACK A second press cuts stopped cues backwards to the previous cue If there are no running or stopped cues the first press cuts backwards to the previous cue While there are cue fades which are stopped or cutting the GO light flashes Jumping Directly to a Cue Normally a cue waits and then delays and finally fades to completion When going to or cutting to a cue wait and delay times are ignored and the fade time is taken from the X Back Cut field in the Default Times window of the User Setup Screen CUT has the same effect as GO if there are stopped or reversing cues The stopped or reversing cues are restarted forwards Otherwise it cuts to the next unrun cue Unlike GO if you are on the last cue in the cue sheet and you press CUT it cuts to the first cue in the cue sheet CUT All Modes Cuts to the next unrun cue CUE CUT or GOTO CUE cuts to the specified cue If the cue does not exist a warning is given an
441. rofiles 99 SMPTE Events 3000 Patches 2 Atts Channel 99 Fixture Library 99 Handheld Remotes 4 Remote Video 9 No of Show File Backups 10 Notes All consoles have the ability to use two VGA monitors as standard All consoles can use either 3 or 4 VGA monitors with an optional additional dual VGA card Additional channels can be purchased in lots of 50 or 200 intensity channels up to the maximum of 600 300 Series and 6000 500 Series The maximum number of DMX outputs using Networker software and the maximum number of network slots 2 42 Number of Attribute Channels Available The number of attribute channels available on your console is dependent on the number of intensity channels purchased Consoles with a 486 processor are limited to 350 Intensity channels 250 Attribute channels The maximum number of channels supported currently is 6000 intensity channels hence 2000 attribute channels Intensity Channels Attribute Channels 2000 or more 2000 1900 1500 1800 1250 1700 1000 po 16000 750 800 500 600 400 400 400 250 250 200 200 so 10S nn o a 100 100 50 50 Note Intensity channels can be used as attribute channels but not vice versa 2 43 Chapter 3 Loading Software Your Strand Lighting Control System is software based to allow you to upgrade and add capabilities as new or enhanced programs are introduced Some software products include a security registration fe
442. rom DOS LIGHTP GENIUSP Starts the Off Line Editor software from DOS DOS Environment Variables 37 403 DOS environment variables are used to configure the operating software for special site or test requirements They are usually defined in USERINIT BAT so that they are preserved when new software is installed To set a variable to a value the batch file command format is SET VARIABLE VALUE To clear a variable the batch file command format is SET VARIABLE All these variables are normally absent Variable Values Use 220NUMSUBS 24 30 54 or 120 Forces a different number of submasters than detected at startup 220MAXMEM 10 255 Limits the number of read 1 page 16k cache pages allocated at startup to free up memory for other programs MACRO_CARD_IO_BASE 310 Sets io base address for the macro trigger card if fitted 220KEYBOARD US UK FR Set the type of the external GR RU or SV keyboard in use on the console Two letter codes are those used by the keyb DOS program See Country Keyboard Support below AUTOTEST 1 or x absent Remote Test only 1 when COM1 or COM2 set to Remote Test all control events are echoed to the test port 1 Network drives ignored x Events not echoed This is normal case for MIDI operation where MIDI in events must not be echoed to MIDI out port x Network drives recognised 220TRACE any value If defined enables tracking state tracing to btrace log 220TYPEASCFG any value If defined prevents the
443. run the Offline Editor software by double clicking on the geniusp exe or lightp exe files in the geniusp or lightp directory or alternative location 16 Close the Offline Editor and return to the desktop to instal the Helpfile press Ctrl F12 followed by F2 three times 17 Instal the Help file as described under Installing the Help file under Windows 9X 18 Double click on the shortcut or the geniusp bat lightp bat to run the Offline Editor software 19 Refer to the Keyboard Map or to the template at the back of the Operator Guide to simulate the console keys using the PC keyboard Installing the Backup PC Kit PC Software is supplied with a 100 channel application disk and a Networker Application disk You must register these disks with Strand s Software Registration Centre and load the password with the dongle connected The dongle is then programmed with the password facilities If the dongle is disconnected the PC software becomes the OffLine Editor with maximum channels and other facilities but no Networker Installing the Ethernet Card PC Software only Install the supplied Ethernet card in your desktop PC following the instructions supplied with the card This procedure should only be carried out by qualified personnel If in doubt please refer to your dealer supplier or Strand Service to arrange installation by qualified personnel 25 272 Configuring the Ethernet Card PC Software only For PC Software configure the Ethe
444. ry the faster the console executes commands although mux outputs always transmit at the normal rate Up to 64Mbytes of RAM is supported in consoles fitted with new CS electronics or in the PC Refer to Console Differences See also Fitting RAM memory Password Registration If your current version of Operating Software is earlier than version 2 0 you will need to re register your console and PC if fitted with a CS card or dongle in order to use this release Refer to Upgrading Your Console Software Console Differences This section covers the following topics o Model Numbers and Processor Speed 1 30 o Features Available with New Electronics o 520 Series Differences o 300 Series Differences Model Numbers and Processor Speed Over recent years Strand Lighting have improved the performance and ability of the hardware and software associated with their range of lighting control consoles Since most of the functions described in this manual are software based many of the new functions developed in recent years can be added to older consoles simply by updating the software albeit that some of the newer functions will not operate as efficiently on older consoles as they were designed to run on newer and faster processors Models 300 These consoles are designed on a modular basis using S bus network protocol and a Pentium processor The standard memory console comprises a processor unit acommand module and a submaster module com
445. s Loading the Server Password Disk The Server Password Disk is Used to Enable Communication between a console on a network and the file server and to provide User Logins Before installing the Server Password disk check that the Server Software is already installed on the console Press lt REPORT gt and check the configuration window at the bottom of the screen The word NET should appear on the list of applications 1 Insert Server disk and press lt ARCHIVE gt SOFT LOAD SOFT LOAD SOFT Write the date and the serial number of the console on the disk This disk now contains a record of your console configuration and password in electronic form and should be stored in a safe place 3 Insert a blank formatted disk in the floppy drive and press lt ARCHIVE gt SOFT SAVE PASSW SAVE SAVE to save the password Complete the Software Registration Form supplied and return it to Strand Lighting 31 358 Setting Up a File Server This section covers the following topics Creating a Standalone File Server Using a PC Loading Networker amp Utilities on a PC using DOS 3 1 or later Windows 95 NT PC Server Configuring a File Server Operating a File Server Accessing a File Server O0 0 0 0 0 Creating a Standalone File Server Using a PC For a minimal installation only Networker amp Utilities need be loaded In this case it is the ioftp family of programs which provide all standalone file server functionality Loading Networ
446. s Sbus RJ45 Pin Description Pin 1 Data channel A Pin 2 Data channel A Pin 3 Data channel B Pin 4 24VDC Pind a BAVDG Pin 6 Data channel B Pin s lt lt it lt O O UNG Ping Jfer i lt 72 P lt Serial port Pin Description 27 308 Pin 1 No connection Pin 2 Receive Data Pin 3 Transmit Data Pin 4 5 VDC Pin 5 Signal Ground Pin 6 No connection Pin 7 Request to Send Pin 8 No connection Pin 9 No connection PS 2 port Pin 1 Data Pin 2 No connection Pin 3 Ground Pin 4 5V DC Pin 5 Clock Pin 6 No connection TFT Panellink Pin 1 RXO Pin 2 RXO Pin 3 GND Pin 4 GND Pin 5 RX2 Pin 6 RX2 Pin 7 Sbus data Pin 8 Sbus data Pin 9 24V 27 309 Pin 10 GND Pin 11 RXC Pin 12 RXC Pin 13 GND Pin 14 GND Pin 15 RX1 Pin 16 RX1 Pin 17 5V Pin 18 GND Pin 19 5V Pin 20 GND 27 310 Chapter 28 Communiqu Pro See Also Communiqu Pro Continued Communiqu Pro is a standard software package for Strand Lighting s 500 Series Consoles and GeniusPro or Lightpalette Operating software It provides the following communication features The following topics are covered in this section External Submasters DMX In MIDI ASCII Remote Control Output ASCII Remote Go Output ASCII Remote Control Input SMPTE Time Code Events Audio Input Macro External Submasters Up to 12 Submasters can be remotely controlled by external fad
447. s 24 e Sub Pages 6 e Cues 2000 e Cue P Backs 2 e Max Simult Fades 200 e Macros 3000 e Groups 1000 e Preset Focus Groups 750 e Effects 600 e Effect Steps Effect 99 e Max Effect Steps 14850 e Effect Playbacks 30 e Profiles 99 e SMPTE Events 3000 e Patches 2 e Atts Channel 99 e Fixture Library 99 e Handheld Remotes 4 e Remote Video 9 e No of Show File Backups 10 530i Console e Intensity Channels 350 or 800 e Attribute Channels 250 or 500 e VGA Monitors as Standard 2 e DMX Outputs 1024 1536 e No of Subs Super G Masters 24 6 2 e Sub Pages 6 e Cues 2000 e Cue P Backs 2 e Max Simult Fades 200 e Macros 3000 e Groups 1000 e Preset Focus Groups 750 e Effects 600 e Effect Steps Effect 99 e Max Effect Steps 14850 e Effect Playbacks 30 e Profiles 99 e SMPTE Events 3000 e Patches 2 2 41 Atts Channel 99 Fixture Library 99 Handheld Remotes 4 Remote Video 9 No of Show File Backups 10 550i Consoles Intensity Channels 800 or 2000 or 6000 Attribute Channels 400 or 500 or 2000 VGA Monitors as Standard 2 DMX Outputs 1024 1536 No of Subs Super G Masters 48 6 2 Sub Pages 6 Cues 2000 Cue P Backs 2 Max Simult Fades 200 Macros 3000 Groups 1000 Preset Focus Groups 750 Effects 600 Effect Steps Effect 99 Max Effect Steps 14850 Effect Playbacks 30 P
448. s for a refund SOFTWARE LICENSE The SOFTWARE is protected by copyright laws and international copyright treaties as well as other intellectual property laws and treaties The SOFTWARE is licensed not sold 1 GRANT OF LICENSE This EULA grants you the following rights Software You may use the SOFTWARE as installed on the SYSTEM Application Sharing The SOFTWARE may contain technology that enables applications to be shared between two or more SYSTEMS even if an application is installed on only one of the SYSTEMS You should consult your application license agreement or contact the application licensor to determine whether sharing the application is permitted by its licensor Storage Network Use If the SOFTWARE PRODUCT is installed on the SYSTEM over an internal network from a server you must acquire and dedicate a license for the SOFTWARE PRODUCT for each SYSTEM on which the SOFTWARE PRODUCT is used or to which it is distributed A license for the SOFTWARE PRODUCT may not be shared or used concurrently on different SYSTEMS Back up Copy If MANUFACTURER has not included a copy of the SOFTWARE on separate media with the SYSTEM you may make a single copy of the SOFTWARE for use solely for archival purposes with the SYSTEM Back up Utility If the SOFTWARE PRODUCT includes a Microsoft back up utility you may use the utility to make the single back up copy After the single back up copy is made the backup utility will be permanently d
449. s Layout Submaster Layout GeniusPro Lightpalette Default Number Screens Sets the number of console screens Can be 1 2 default 3 or 4 Note All consoles can support one or two video monitors in the standard configuration and up to four monitors with an optional video card fitted LCD Contr Backlit The first field changes the contrast on all three LCD s 2 on a 520 Use the Level Wheel to adjust this for the best display contrast A number from 1 to 100 default 4 giving maximum to minimum contrast The second field changes the backlight brightness on all three LCD s Use the Level Wheel to adjust this for the best visibility A number from 1 to 100 default 50 giving maximum to minimum brightness Goosneck Bright not available on 300 Series Consoles Sets the brightness of the console gooseneck lights A number from 1 to 100 default 100 giving maximum to minimum brightness Buzzer Volume Enables or disables the buzzer which is used to signal errors Its value is OFF or ON default Macro Tablet Sets the optional macro tablet to OFF default INTUOS A4 INTUOS A4 OS or INTUOS A3 Setting this field to INTUOS A4 INTUOS A4 OS or INTUOS A3 enables the use of the A4 A4 Oversize or A3 macro tablet to activate preset macros If set to INTUOS A4 INTUOS A4 OS or INTUOS A3 the Port must be set OFF COM1 or COM2 NET NODE identifies the nework node to which the Macro tablet is connected an
450. s Remote Pad Strand Lighting This section refers to the Designer s Remote for use with the Strand 300 400 and 500 series consoles and GeniusPro or Lightpalette software Installing the Designer s Remote Plug wired remote into console Aux port only AUX is allowed on older consoles At Console Setup Screen set Handheld Remote to DESIGNERS and set the Net Node Port Config and Address for the remote Refer to Handheld Remote Communications Setup 1 Display will illuminate and keys become active 2 Channels under remote control will be displayed in purple on console screens 26 283 3 To alter the display contrast use the thumbwheel on the right hand side of the unit Operating the Designer s Remote Operation of the Designer s Handheld Remote uses the same syntax as the command line on the main console A few examples of commands when the console is set to Command Line mode are shown below Refer to Alternative keys to use the alternative function for keys having a function in blue above the main key function in grey Note From Version 2 4 the F1 to F4 keys on all handhelds will fire pre assigned macros HHM1 to HHM4 Refer to Pre Assigned Macros Setting Levels 1 5 Set channel 1 to 50 2 9 4 5 Set channels 2 and 9 to 45 9 THRU 12 4 Set channels 9 through 12 to 40 5 Set current selection to 50 ON Set current selection to ON level FULL Set current selection to 100 Increase lev
451. s Screen or window is also determined by the setting of the Channel Display Smart Channel Display and Channel Formatting field of the Display Options window on the User Setup screen Depending on the setup and number of screens the Live Screen s will display either a single function or multiple functions as shown below 4 49 Note Holding down the SHIFT key and pressing the lt LIVE gt key will toggle the Live display to the next screen format shown below for the number of screens Also holding down the SHIFT key and pressing the LAST SCREEN key will swap screens 1 and 2 if the Number of Screens field in the User Setup Screen is set to 2 3 or 4 The following shows the live screen layout for 1 2 3 and 4 screen sytems Single Screen Channel Levels X Playback s Channel Levels Submasters Channel Levels Effects Channel Levels X Playback s Effects Channel Levels X Playback s Submasters Effects Channel Levels Events Channel Levels X Playback s Events Channel Levels X Playback s Events Effects Two Screens Screen 1 Screen 2 X Playback s Channel Levels Submasters Channel Levels Effects Channel Levels X Playback s Submasters Channel Levels X Playback s Submasters Effects Channel Levels Events Channel Levels X Playback s Events Channel Levels X Playback s Events Effects Channel Levels Three Screens Screen 1 Screen 2 Screen 3 X Playba
452. s already in the submaster screen in accordance with the levels in the Live Screen using the syntax SUB LIVE SUB 1 LIVE Direct Action Modes SUB 1 LIVE Command Line Mode Selects the channels in submaster 1 and updates them to the values in the Live Screen Quick Recording Pressing the bump button for a submaster this is below the submaster fader is a quick way of recording a submaster This does not actually bump the submaster SUB Sub 1 button Records submaster 1 This is the same as SUB 1 RECORD chan SUB Sub 1 button Adds the specified channels to the submaster and sets their levels to match the current Levels screen 1 THRU 5 Sub 1 button All Modes Adds channels 1 through 5 to submaster 1 and sets their levels to the levels on the current Levels screen If the channels are already in the submaster the levels are changed to match the current Levels screen chan SUB Sub 1 button Deletes the specified channels from the submaster sets their levels off 4 5 SUB Sub button 1 All Modes Deletes channels 4 and 5 from submaster 1 and returns the current Levels screen to it s levels without the submaster 7 83 Using Submaster Faders Each submaster is controlled by a submaster fader and the bump button below the fader Refer to the Product Specification for number of submasters Each submaster fader has two lights to show submaster status A Submaster Supermast
453. s of DOS variables 37 401 Tracker Library Files The console software uses some text files on disk when it starts up to read in Tracker library information You can edit these files at the Notes display or with the DOS EDIT command to meet your own requirements and the changes you make will take effect at the next startup The files are in the program directory normally c 220os Files you can edit FIXTURE LIB The Fixture library used in FIXTURE patching ATCPAGE LIB The Attribute Controller Page library used to group attributes into pages for the trackball keys If the console can not read ATCPAGE LIB it uses a single default page with 1 intensity and 1 colour FIXTURE BAK A backup of FIXTURE LIB made by the Notes editor ATCPAGE BAK A backup of ATCPAGE LIB made by the Notes editor Files installed when new Operating Software is loaded FIXTURE NEW The release version used to reset FIXTURE LIB when Fixtures are cleared extra fixtures you inserted in LIB are retained ATCPAGE NEW The release version used to reset ATC PAGE LIB when Setup is cleared extra pages you inserted in LIB are NOT retained FIXTURE LIB A copy of FIXTURE NEW ATCPAGE LIB A copy of ATCPAGE NEW FIXTURE OLD Your old FIXTURE LIB file from the previous version ATCPAGE OLD Your old ATCPAGE LIB file from the previous version The LIB files are saved inside show files the ATC pages are part of Setup and are also updated when a show is loaded or
454. s of whether or not they have been modified Excludes channels that are not already in the submaster regardless of whether or not they have been modified Channels that are off in the selection will be removed from the submaster 1 THRU 5 UPDATE SUB All Modes Changes channel 1 through 5 levels in submaster 1 excluding channels that are not already in the submaster If the submaster fader is not at 0 then the updated levels are adjusted to avoid output bumps For example if the submaster fader is at 50 and a channel level of 10 from the output is updated the level recorded into the submaster is actually 20 so that the submaster output is 10 The maximum level that can be recorded into the submaster is 100 so output bumps can still occur with a low fader and high levels Note To clear the changed indicator and set red channel levels back to cyan press SHIFT CLR Updating Submasters from the Live Screen When in the Submaster Screen you can update the current submaster in accordance with levels in the Live Screen using the syntax chans LIVE 1 THRU 5 LIVE Direct Action Modes 1 THRU 5 LIVE Command Line Mode Updates channels 1 to 5 inthe currently selected submaster in the Submaster Screen according to the levels in the Live Screen If any of the channels are not already in the submaster they are added tothe submaster Alternatively you can update the value of only the channel
455. s that you have modified in the step will not change when you change the Step Defaults even if you reset them to the current Step Defaults value To set a property back to its default black text use the trackball to highlight it and then press DEFLT Step Time The step time controls the time from the start of a step until the next step is activated Step time can be default black text or any value between 0 01 and 5 minutes and is initially set to the value of the FX Step field of the Default Times window of the User Setup Screen Times below one second can be specified in hundredths of a second This field can be set in edit mode using the trackball to select the field and the level wheel or or keys to select the option Alternatively the field can be set using the command line as shown in the following example FX 1 2 TIME STEP TIME 3 Sets FX1 step 2 Step Time to 0 3sec In Dwell and Out Times The in dwell and out times determine the actual length of each step time from when the step is activated until it is deactivated rather than the time until the next step The total length of a step is the sum of these three values The sum of these values does not need to equal the step time making it possible to have steps that overlap with the next step or have a distinct gap between them and the next step The In property is the time from when the step starts until the channel levels ar
456. s the effect step If you don t specify a step number step 1 will be highlighted If the step does not exist you will be warned that you are creating a new item Press again to create the new step or CLR or UNDO to cancel the command 11 160 To change values in effect fields hold down the SHIFT key and move the trackball to change from non edit mode green to edit mode yellow then use the trackball to highlight the field to be edited Edit the field using the wheel or or key to change the field or enter a value from the keypad as apprpriate Press to return to the non edit mode green Effect Setting Fields Fields in the Effect display Effect Settings window show the current values for effect properties and the Step Defaults To change any of the effect properties 1 Make sure that the highlight is in the upper part of the State display press EDIT FX if it isn t Use the Trackball to move the highlight to the field you want to change Type a new value or use and to increment or decrement the value The new value is recorded when you move the highlighting out of the field To move between effects use the Trackball to move the highlight to the FX field and then use NEXT and LAST to move between effects id aac a FX The number of the effect Cannot be changed but if you highlight it you can use NEXT and LAST to move between effects Text The text label caption associated with
457. s void if failure of the SOFTWARE has resulted from accident abuse or misapplication Any replacement SOFTWARE will be warranted for the remainder of the original warranty period or thirty 80 days whichever is 1 28 longer No Other Warranties EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PROVIDED IN THE LIMITED WARRANTY SECTION ABOVE THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED TO THE END USER AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF NON INFRINGEMENT MERCHANTABILITY AND OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE THE ENTIRE RISK OF THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE IS WITH YOU No Liability for Consequential Damages MANUFACTURER OR MANUFACTURER S SUPPLIERS INCLUDING MS AND ITS SUPPLIERS SHALL NOT BE HELD TO ANY LIABILITY FOR ANY DAMAGES SUFFERED OR INCURRED BY THE END USER INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO GENERAL SPECIAL CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES INCLUDING DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF BUSINESS PROFITS BUSINESS INTERRUPTION LOSS OF BUSINESS INFORMATION AND THE LIKE ARISING FROM OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE DELIVERY USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE 7 NOTE ON JAVA SUPPORT THE SOFTWARE PRODUCT MAY CONTAIN SUPPORT FOR PROGRAMS WRITTEN IN JAVA JAVA TECHNOLOGY IS NOT FAULT TOLERANT AND IS NOT DESIGNED MANUFACTURED OR INTENDED FOR USE OR RESALE AS ON LINE CONTROL EQUIPMENT IN HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTS REQUIRING FAIL SAFE PERFORMANCE SUCH AS IN THE OPERATION OF NUCLEAR FACILITIES AIRCRAFT NAVIGATION O
458. se any other output source to set a channel level higher than the low effect setting for the channel but lower than the high effect setting for the channel the channel will switch between the other output source level and the high effect setting LTP Latest Takes Precedence mode lets other effects cues and the Channel Control steal channels from the effect When you select a channel its current state high or low is frozen and the channel is assigned to the Channel Control Its level then follows the Channel Control not the effect until you reload and restart the effect Effect Level The Level property determines how the effect channel levels are interpreted This property can only be changed from the Effects display and is initially set to NORMAL NORMAL Channels in active steps are set high and channels in inactive steps are set low NEGATIVE Channels in active steps are set low and channels in inactive steps are set high NRM NEG Normal Negative Levels start as Normal and then alternate between Negative and Normal for each successive effect cycle NEG NRM Negative Normal Levels start as Negative and then alternate between Normal and Negative for each successive effect cycle RANDOM Steps are randomly set to any level between the high and low levels These options can be set in edit mode using the trackball select the field and the level wheel or or keys to select the option or using the command line as shown in
459. shown in the table Values of less than one second can be set in hundredths of a second Key Entry Shown as Value 0 01 0 01 One hundredth of a second 0 1 0 1 One tenth of a second 1 1 One second 10 10 Ten seconds 100 1 00 One minute 11 141 1000 10 00 Ten Minutes 5959 59 59 Fifty nine minutes 59 seconds When the effect is run or stopped on the playback instead of by a cue or submaster the effect levels are faded up and down over this period of time The default fade times are 0 5 seconds When you run the effect the console output fades to its full level over the time in the Fade Up field When you stop an effect the console output fades out over the time in the Fade Dn field once the down fade is complete the effect stops and is unloaded from the playback If you run an effect from a cue or submaster the effect fade in and fade out times are those assigned to the cue or submaster the Fade Up and Fade Dn fields in the effect are ignored Note This does not control the fade time of individual steps It applies to the effect as a whole The In Dwell Out fields control the time required to fade steps in and out These options can be set in edit mode using the trackball select the field and the level wheel or or keys to select the option or the numeric keypad to enter a fade time Alternatively you can use the command line as shown in the following examples FX 1 TIME 0 0 1 F Sets FX 1 overall intensity
460. shows Remember that each backup copy of a show counts as one copy of the show The console already has a directory on the local disk called Shows where the shows are most commonly stored The topics covered in this section are as follows e Creating a Local Disk Directory e Copy a Show e Delete a Show from the Local Disk e Delete a Local Disk Directory e Formatting a Floppy Disk e Write Protecting the Floppy Disk Create a Local Disk Directory You can create a subdirectory within the current directory by using the MAKE DIR key You may want to do this to help organize your show database and save similar shows in separate directories Press ARCHIVE BROWSE FILES to get to the LCD Browse menu 1 If you want to create a subdirectory in a directory other than the current directory change to the desired directory 2 Press MAKE DIR 3 Type the new directory name from the external keyboard It must follow standard MS PC DOS 8 3 file name rules i e up to 8 alphanumeric characters and _ underscore e g show_12 Do not use spaces dots or the following characters 4 Press ENTER on the keyboard You will be asked to confirm this action 17 209 5 Press ENTER on the keyboard to create the new directory or CLR or UNDO to cancel the operation Copy a Show You can copy a show from any drive or directory to any other drive or directory This feature lets you copy files directly betwee
461. shows the current software version the unit serial number the software applications loaded and the number of submasters detected The display also shows the backlight and contrast settings for the panel LCD display The following softkeys are displayed CONTR DOWN Decreases the LCD contrast CONTR UP Increases the LCD contrast BACKLT DOWN Decreases the LCD backlight brightness BACKLT UP Increases the LCD backlight brightness SHUTDOWN Displays warning confirm message Press SHUTDOWN to shut down the system or the CLR key to cancel Error Line Text that would appear on the error line of a 500 Series or 310 video monitor is displayed on the 510i or 310 LCD display Pressing the CLR button cancels the error message Off Line Editor The 510i and 310 incorporates the GeniusPro and Lightpallette Off line Editor and PC Software providing full emulation of the 500 Series or 300 Series console operating software on a standard PC 24 267 Submaster Macro Inputs Forty eight submaster macro inputs are provided via four 25 pin female D type sockets on the back of the 510i panel Twenty four submaster macro inputs are provided via two 25 pin D type sockets on the back of the 310 panel These inputs provide simple On Off logic switching and are designed to act functionally as individual submaster bump buttons Each input can be used to trigger a macro or an effect To use these inputs to trigger macros their corresponding s
462. splay you can choose to have channel levels displayed in the cross reference format rather than the standard Levels screen format To show the Cue XRef display press lt PREVIEW gt in the Display keypad and then the X REF soft key This automatically puts the State screen into Spread Sheet mode 9 126 0007 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 013 014 015 016 017 0018 1 0001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 013 014 015 016 017 0018 Li j lyr jp Down itt Cue XRef Screen GeniusPro 9 127 Cue XRef Screen Lightpalette The XREF softkey changes the Channel Levels Screen to display a cross reference between channels and cues When you press the XREF softkey to display the Cue X Ref screen a set of softkeys are available enabling you to move the display LEFT and RIGHT to display all the channels in a particular cue Alternatively you can move the display to show a specific channel by entering the channel number and pressing the CHAN softkey To move to new cues if there is more than one page of cues use the trackball or PAGE UP and PAGE DOWN To go directly to a cue press CUE where is the cue number If the cue does not exist you will be warned that you are creating a new item Press again to create the new cue or CLR or UNDO to cancel the command You can also go directly to a cue part using the PART softkey The Cue XRef Display Levels screen shows 18 channels at time
463. start date set a stop time and stop date for after the macro will be complete and set the interval to OFF To run a macro every day at specific times forever set the start time Leave start date interval stop Show Setup Screen time and stop date set to OFF To run a macro every day at specific times for a specific length of time enter a start time and date and set the stop time and stop date to when you want the macro stopped Leave interval set to OFF To run a macro at specific intervals forever enter a start time and date set the interval to the time you want between repeats and set the stop time and stop date to OFF To run a macro at specific intervals for a specific length of time enter a start time and date set the interval to the time you want between repeats and set the stop time and stop date to when you want the macro stopped To run a macro only on specific days of the week during the times you have set above uncheck the days of the week on which you don t want it to run MTWTFSS The day of the week or days on which the macro will run The value is tick default if enabled or _ if disabled The macro will be run each enabled weekday at the start time Start Time The time of day to start the macro in 24 hour format Can be OFF the default or any four digit time value 0 is midnight 1200 is midday and 2359 is 1 minute before midnight If this is set to OFF the macro is started at midnight on the date specified
464. stem A Large LAN installation may contain one or more lighting consoles and remote video and DMX distribution nodes 34 387 CONSOLE BNC Terminator BNC Connector BNC BNC Connector Terminator UTP Cable RJ45 Connector Coax Cable RJ45 Connector CONSOLE Ethernet Card Installation on Older Consoles Both 10baseT and 10base2 Ethernet ports are built into all new 500 Series Console usually those with green soft keys Older consoles usually with purple soft keys do not have Ethernet ports as standard and the following procedure should be carried out to install them Before you can use Networker software the network interface card supplied with Networker must be installed in your console IMPORTANT This procedure should only be carried out by qualified personnel If you have not been trained in Strand Console hardware support please refer to your dealer supplier or Strand to arrange installation by qualified personnel 1 Use an ESD protective workmat and wriststrap to ensure that the console and Ethernet card are not subjected to damaging electrostatic voltages 2 Release the lid by loosening and removing the three large pan head screws in the base towards the front of the console This can best be accomplished by positioning the console so that the front protrudes over the edge of a table 3 Once the three screws are removed the top of the console can be gently raised It is supported by g
465. such a disk by copying the files EDIT COM and QBASIC EXE from the DOS directory on a console or PC However a SN104 cannot have a video or keyboard attached and therefore the following special procedure MUST be followed when assigning a unique address 1 Disconnect all Networkers from the network except the one to be reconfigured and a PC or SN100 102 on which to run IOFTPDOS or IOFTP32 2 Create a file called 220NODE SN and modify it appropriately Note if you call your file 220NODE CFG then you will overwrite the config file for the IOFTP program 3 Create a file called INSTALL BAT and let it contain a single line as follows COLDBOOT 4 Download the config file using the following 35 393 35 394 IOFTPxxx LOGIN SN100_1 PUT 220NODE SN 220NODE CFG LOGOUT Download the install batch file using the following IOFTPxxx LOGIN SN100_1 PUT INSTALL BAT LOGOUT Wait for up to a minute for the new values in the new downloaded 220node cfg to take effect Connect the next Networker back onto the network and follow steps 2 through 6 Chapter 36 Showport File Conversion The Showport file conversion tool runs on a PC under DOS It can also be run in a DOS box in Windows 3 1 NT and 95 Showport converts show files between the following formats This Showport File Conversion utility is intended to be used to translate show files from any manufacturers lighting console to from Strand lighting consoles It also allows output of d
466. surprises resulting from tracking particularly in blackouts you can record a Soft Block Cue or a Hard Block cue or change a tracking cue into a Soft Block Cue or Hard Block Cue You can use the TRACK THRU soft key to change a Soft Block Cue or Hard Block Cue back into a Tracking cue Soft Block Cues GeniusPro and Lightpalette Soft Block Cues record explicit levels for every channel in the system so that any changes made to cues before the cue will track only up to the cue You can set individual channels to tracking by explicitly setting them off use or OFF in the Cue Preview display Once set to off channels in a Soft Block Cue will continue to track changes in previous cues Soft Block Cues show all zero levels with an explicit zero in the Cue Preview display Channel levels are white because they are set in the cue not tracking from the previous cue In GeniusPro selecting the BLOCK CUE softkey sets the cue as a soft block cue shown as MF Move Fade in the Cue Type Field Hard Block Cues Lightpalette Only Hard Block Cues record explicit levels for every channel in the system so that any changes made to cues before the cue will track only up to the cue You can force individual channels to track changes in previous cues by explicitly setting them off use or OFF in the Cue Preview display However unlike Soft Block Cues once the selected channels are matched to the previous
467. t press APPEND FXSTEP when in the Effect display This adds a new step to the current effect and puts the cursor on the newly created step The new step has default values for step time in dwell and out times attribute fade time low and high settings and scaling It has no assigned levels Viewing Step Channel Levels To view the recorded levels in a step If the cursor is in the Effect Settings window press EDIT STEPS to put it on the first effect step number in the FX Step window If the cursor is in the FX Step window but not on the effect step number use the Trackball to highlight the step number rather than timing or level data Once the cursor is on the effect step number use NEXT and LAST to move between steps and view channel levels Editing Step Channel Levels First select the step and ensure that the highlight is on the step number the FX STEP field The channels can then be selected and modified using the same commands as for Channel Control for example 1 1 SUB 1 5 and so on The Level Wheel and some of the soft keys in the Channel Control cannot be used to change levels Deleting Effect Steps Steps can be deleted from the Effect display This is a good way to delete effects if you are only going to delete a few For information on how to delete all effects or a range of effects from the Archive display turn to Clear Operations DELETE appears on the LCD Effect menu when you are i
468. t focus groups Channels inserted into cues effect steps and submasters using reference groups are automatically updated in the recorded item when you update the group This lets you reference the group in multiple locations and then change the referenced values only in one place to update the entire show chans GROUP sets intensities and attributes for the selected channels to the levels set in the specified group The cue effect step or submaster then takes levels for the selected channels from the group so if you change the group the recorded item will also change 1 THRU 4 GROUP 1 2 3 Sets channels 1 through 4 intensities and attributes to the levels set in group 123 chans GROUP INTS ONLY sets intensities only for the selected channels to the levels set in the specified group The cue effect step or submaster then takes levels for the selected channels from the group so if you change the group the recorded item will also change 1 THRU 4 GROUP 3 INTS ONLY Sets channels 1 through 4 intensities only to the levels set in group 3 chan GROUP ATTS ONLY sets attributes only for the selected channels to the levels set in the specified group The cue effect step or submaster then takes levels for the selected channels from the group so if you change the group the recorded item will also change 1 THRU 3 GROUP 5 ATTS ONLY Sets channels 1 throug
469. t playback mode as selected by the soft keys below the LCD If the cue is fading it shows AUTO FADING MAN TIMING or MAN FADING If the cue has completed it shows AUTO MAN TIME or MAN FADING If the cue is stopped it shows STOPPED MAN TIME STOP or MAN FADE STOP X Playback in Manual Fade Mode To change the playback to Manual Fade mode press MAN FADE Normally cue fades progress automatically Manual Fade takes the current fade progress from the progress faders for the last fade on the playback The scale for fade progress is between the two playback faders and is marked from 0 to 100 The left fader controls up fades and the right fader controls down fades Going to Manual Fade mode stops the fades The fader must be moved to 0 then moved to pick up the current position of the cue after which it moves the progress between 0 and 100 When the fade reaches 100 the fader loses control of it Moving both faders to 0 then starts the next cue running Any cue wait or delay times are ignored This automatic sequencing can be turned off To change to Manual Fade mode press MAN FADE above the playback The up and down fade progresses are controlled by the faders The LCD changes to AUTO MAN TIME and SEQ To toggle automatic sequencing of manually faded cues press SEQ When automatic sequencing is enabled a bar appears over the soft key To return the faders to automatic fade mode press AUTO New cues will use their r
470. t unless you explicitly load a cue out of order By default cue ordering is by cue number but you can change the cue ordering by using links subroutines and loops In this section playback is used to mean one of the X playbacks This section covers the following topics Assigning Cues to X Playbacks Playback Mode The X Playback Window GeniusPro The X Playback Window Lightpalette Using the X Playbacks X Playback in Manual Fade Mode Assigning Cues to Playbacks Normally cues can be run on either playback They can however be assigned to a particular one The other playback will then treat the cue as if it does not exist cue PB RECORD Direct Digit RECORD cue PB Command Line Records the levels on the current display into the specified cue and assigns the cue to the specified playback If the cue already exists an overrecord message gives you the chance to cancel the recording To rerecord the cue press RECORD again To cancel the recording press CLR or UNDO In multi part cues only the playback set in part 1 is used If the console is set for two playbacks cues will only run on their assigned playback If the console is set for a single playback this assignment has no effect To delete a playback assignment omit the playback number CUE 1 PB 2 RECORD Direct 1 and 2 Digit RECORD CUE 1 PB 2 Command Line Records levels into cue 1 and assigns it to Playback 2 CUE 1
471. t up Patch This display gives the user full access to the console patch allowing direct access to all dimmers and patch functions This mode is particularly useful for stage crew that need to check circuits that need to be re plugged during a performance or for independent maintenance and focus work BF No console selected x 19 30 X EA A a A AI Channel Contro Record X Playback Patch Console Mode SN 110 Node Configuration Users whose systems have SN110 nodes may configure their nodes using their wireless remote Each SN110 node can generate its own Web page for configuration allowing the handheld to access all node functions To configure any SN110 node select the X in the top corners of the screen in the focus remote application to return to the Start Screen Select Start Internet 26 296 Explorer from the Start menu Enter the IP address for the node you wish to configure this number can be found on the LCD display of any node The node will now generate a web form on your handheld Enter information as desired on the fom and select submit at the bottom of the form Your node is now configured rg Internet Explorer mx 17 10 x http 192 168 3 78 cgi bin cfgget v Type Label Monitor O Off 1 512 Start End NetSlot Priority HTP Type Label REPORTER DmrRm 1 View Tools g G e This graphic illustrates how easy it is to route DMX using a simple point a
472. takes to change attribute levels once the step has started Low High The low and high settings for the step The high setting is the level that channels go to when a step is active with the Level field set to NORMAL Scaling Not implemented at this time Creating a New Effect To switch to the Effect display and create a new effect or step press lt FX gt FX where is an unused effect or step number To create a new effect or step while you are in the Effect display press FX where is an unused effect or step number You will be warned that you are creating a new item Press again to create the new effect or step or CLR or UNDO to 11 162 cancel the command If this is a new effect and you did not specify a step step 1 is created automatically The cursor is on the newly created step Note The lt FX gt display key is at the top of the console Do not confuse it with the lower FX key Assigning Fade Times to Effects fx TIME changes the fade time of the specified effect without changing recorded levels If the effect doesn t exist this command creates a new effect with no levels but with the specified fade times You do not get an over record warning with this command if the effect exists If you only enter one number for time it is used for both the up and down fade times To enter separate up and down fade times use to separate the two numbers The first number becomes the up fade time an
473. te Level Wheel to Change Fade Progress 500 Series Consoles Using the Level Wheel to Change Fade Progress 300 Series Consoles Cue Fade Progress in Manual Time Updating and adding to Cues Updating Cues from the Live Screen Changing Cues Temporarily Fading Cues with the Level Wheel Viewing and Editing Cues The Current Cue The CUE field in the right LCD shows the current cue This is the last cue which has been referenced It can be used in a cue selection All cue recording commands act on a single cue part When you press CUE the soft keys change to include PART which lets you select one of the cue parts PART is a hard key on 300 Series consoles If you do not include a cue part part 1 is assumed for a new cue and the current part is assumed for an existing cue A cursor gt shows the current cue This is the cue that will be recorded if you use recording commands and do not specify a cue number It is also the cue that will appear when you press lt PREVIEWs gt to see the Preview display and LCD menu e When you record a new cue the cursor moves to the newly recorded cue e When you load a cue onto a playback the cursor moves to the loaded cue 9 110 e When you shift into the live display the cursor moves to the last completed cue or if a cue is in progress to the cue in progress e When you press GO or STOP BACK the cursor moves to the cue in progress e When you press NEXT or LAST with no channels sel
474. ter can be the Effect Supermaster If no submasters are assigned as the Effect Supermaster all effects run at their recorded levels FLASH SPR Flash Supermaster The submaster fader controls the level for bumps and flashes Only one submaster can be the Flash Supermaster If no submaster is assigned as the Flash Supermaster channels and submasters always flash to Full GM1 GM2 Grandmaster 1 and 2 530 and 550 consoles are supplied with two grandmaster faders while 520 consoles and consoles in the 300 series have no dedicated grandmaster faders You can however select one submaster fader GM1 to perform the function of a grandmaster fader 300 series consoles or two submaster faders 500 series consoles to perform the function of grandmaster fader GM1 and GM2 AUDIO THR Audio Threshold Supermaster 500 Series Consoles only The submaster fader controls the sensitivity of the Audio Input The Audio Input can be used to control the stepping of an effect Recorded submaster levels are ignored This facility is only available with the Communiqu Pro Software For more information see Communiqu Pro Software Only one submaster can be the Audio Threshold Supermaster MIDI RATI Midi Ratio Supermaster The submaster fader sets the number of MIDI sync pulses which the effect must count before it will move to the next step Recorded submaster levels are ignored This facility is only available with the Communiqu Pro software For more in
475. ter next Fx loaded FX 1 STOP AFTER 1 2 Sets FX 1 to stop after 12 complete cycles FX 1 STOP AFTER TIME 1 2 Sets FX 1 to stop after 12 seconds FX 1 STOP AFTER SUB Sets FX 1 to stop when the submaster fader it is attached to is brought to 0 FX 1 STOP AFTER Sets FX 1 to stop when the last step is run after the FXSTOP key is pressed Step Control The Step Control determines how the console knows when to take the next effect step This property can only be changed from the Effects display and is initially set to TIMED TIMED The effect playback takes stepping cues from the timer which uses the Step Time settings for each step MANUAL The effect playback takes stepping cues from the FX STEP button MIDI 11 145 The effect playback takes stepping cues from the MIDI input This option requires the Communiqu Pro software Refer to Communiqu Pro Software for more information AUDIO 500 Series Consoles only The effect playback takes stepping cues from the base track of the Audio input This option requires the Communiqu Pro software Refer to Communiqu Pro Software for more information This field can be set in edit mode using the trackball to select the field and the level wheel or or keys to select the option Alternatively the field can be set using the command line as shown in the following examples FX 1 STEP CTR TIMED Sets FX 1 step control t
476. ternal submasters serial and other means of communication The Tracker software supports advanced facilities for automated fixture control including additional types of attributes for 1 29 instance pan and tilt preset focus groups and fixture libraries The Networker software provides remote video remote DMX via Ethernet and access to all SN node ports Console Reporter is an add on software package used to monitor and report temperature electronic status and system and load information for all SV Series dimmers This facility allows the user to know the status of all lamps on a rig and to record rack based backup cues simply and easily Other software can be easily added as it is developed Regardless of your level of lighting knowledge this complete family of software lets you grow as your experience increases or start at a significantly higher level all as economically as possible Refer to the Product Specification section for full list of all software features available on 300 and 500 series control consoles Software updates and manuals are available on the internet at htto www strandlighting com FTP File Transfer browsers may also be used The internet address is 193 129 67 250 Some of the download items require a user name and password to be entered Console RAM Memory The i version now requires at least 32Mbytes of RAM installed in the console or PC The non i version still operates in 8Mbytes or more The more memo
477. than one console broadcasts to the same net slots then unwanted light flicker will occur The NET1 4 connections may be set to OFF DMX OUT PREVIEW or DMX IN Once enabled output of Network DMX is immediate If the NET4 port is set to IN then the Start and End addresses refer not to Output numbers on the patch display but to the magenta input numbers if they are patched The Slot address sets the point in the network DMX slot range from where the DMX IN range is received Network Video Note Network Video uses Broadcast communication in which IP addresses are not used 29 330 First in the Network section of the Console Setup Screen set Networker to ON Then set the NET Video Slot address to 1 This outputs the console s first screen in Net Video Slot 1 second screen in Net Video Slot 2 and so on If there are multiple main consoles on the same network it may be necessary to set a NET Video Slot number other than 1 to avoid conflicts Once enabled output of Network Video is immediate Tracking Backup Note Tracking Backup uses Point to Point communications in which IP addresses are used and MUST be unique This section covers the following topics Overview of Tracking Backup Configuration for Tracking Backup Tracking Backup Status Tracking Backup Commands Shifted Backup Commands Testing Backup Takeover Console Lock on Backup 0O Or O sO O O Overview of Tracking Backup Tracking Backup allows 2 consoles PCs
478. the Cue Sheet version though you can modify them Att Profile The assigned attribute time and profile one on each cue line Creating a New Cue To switch to the Preview display and create a new cue press lt PREVIEW gt CUE where is the new cue number To create a new cue while you are in the Preview display press CUE where is the new cue number You will be warned that you are creating a new item Press again to create and display the new cue or CLR or UNDO to cancel the command 9 129 Viewing Cue Channel To show the recorded levels of a cue in the Levels display select the required cue For a Move Fade Tracking Cue channels which are off are shown with a blank level channels which are on at 0 are shown with a level of 0 For a cross fade both of these are shown as blank and treated as a level of 0 since all channels are used in the fade Editing Cue Channels First select the cue and ensure that the highlight is on the cue number Use the Channel Control commands for example 1 1 CUE 1 5 to set channel levels once you set channel levels in this display they are automatically recorded The Level Wheel and some soft keys cannot be used to change levels in the Preview display Note When you set channel levels in the Preview display with Tracking on you can set them off chans OFF or set them to zero chans 0 When set off levels track throu
479. the Up or Down keys over the X playback The cursor gt follows the current cue Cue Sheet Mode 9 122 0151 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 0175 0176 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 0200 0201 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 0225 0226 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 0250 Cue Preview Screen Cue Sheet Mode GeniusPro The Preview display State screen shows a page of cues and their associated fields The current cue is highlighted with a red background The title bar shows the date and time display name show name and grandmaster status The date and time format can be set in the Console Time window of the second Setup display State screen The show name is preceded by an asterisk when changes have been made to the show since you last saved it The Wheel window at the right shows the position within the cue sheet The number shows the index of the current cue For example the first second and third cues have index 1 2 and 3 The index is independent of the cue number If no cues have been recorded the cue sheet automatically records cue 1 as a cross fade with no levels and default fade and delay times To go directly to a cue press CUE where is the cue number If the cue does not exist you will be warned that you are creating a new item Press again to cre
480. the decimal part denoting the attribute number Channel levels are in the range 0 255 decimal so that maximum accuracy is available Submaster numbers are shown as Sub Page Effect steps are shown as Fx Step Patch number are shown as Dimmer Page Some special numbers are used to denote special flags in some fields A wait value of 2 denotes no wait time An effect value of 2 denotes no effect for a cue A macro value of 2 denotes no macro for a cue 36 399 Chapter 37 Additional Information This section covers the following topics Notes on Upgrading Old Software Tracking Backup Notes Fitting RAM Memory Macro Trigger Card Tracker Library Files Site Configuration Files DOS Utilities DOS Environment Variables Country Keyboard Support Changing the HTML Help Files Notes on Upgrading Old Software If your current version of operating software is earlier than 2 0 you need to re register your console and PC if fitted with a CS card or dongle in order to use release 2 4 Important Note If you are installing over software which is older than 2v0 you must delete 220NET CFG files and edit 220NODE CFG files on all consoles and SN100s to match the format in 220NODE NEW supplied with the new software If you forget to change these consoles may not start and backup PCs may not have control of their keyboard Editing the 220NODE CFG Network Configuration File All devices used on the ShowNet network must have the follo
481. the effect Type The type of effect Can be one of CHASE or BUILD Dir The direction of the effect Can be one of FWD forward REV reverse BOUNCE or RANDOM Mode The way in which the effect interacts with other output sources such as the X playbacks and submasters Can be one of indHTP Independent Highest Takes Precedence or LTP Latest Takes Precedence Level The way in which the high and low effect settings are interpreted Can be one of NORMAL NEGATIV NEG NRM NRM NEG or RANDOM Next Fx The next effect to be started when this effect stops Only applies to effects where the Stop After field is set to TIMED or CYCLES Can be OFF or an effect number Fade Up The time it takes the effect to fade in after you press FX GO Can be from 0 to 59 minutes 59 seconds Fade Dn The time it takes the effect not an effect step to fade out after you press FX STOP Can be from 0 to 59 minutes 59 seconds Profile The profile assigned to the effect fade times Applies to both the fade up and fade down times Stop After How the effect will stopped Can be one of FX STOP on Fx stop FX LOAD on Fx load 11 161 LAST STEP on last step TIME after XXX seconds or CYCLES after XXX cycles For CYCLES set the number of cycles in the Cycles field For TIME set the time in the Time field Step Control The way steps are started Can be one of TIMED MANUAL MIDI or AUDIO Step DefaultsThe values that will be assigned to step pr
482. the installation process Then the latest software can be installed by inserting the release disk in the floppy drive and rebooting the Networker by either typing CTRL ALT amp DEL keys on the keyboard simultaneously or pressing the recessed RESET switch using a pen On completion of installation you will be prompted to reset the SN10X again so that the new software can be operational Remote Installation Download is achieved using one of the following ioftp programs supplied on the installation disk IOFTPDOS EXE IOFTP32 EXE SW2ALL BAT Along with appropriate packet drivers or Windows based TCP IP protocol stacks The IOFTP program used must be the same software version as on the SN10X node being downloaded to Note Network compatibility between different versions is not guaranteed Remote download is possible on all SN10Xs which are installed with software releases Beta 2v0 and later It is NOT possible to do a remote download on SN10Xs with production release 1 5 nor maintenance release 1 55 In those cases only a floppy disk installation is possible You will require a PC with an Ethernet network card or use an existing SN100 or SN102 which already come supplied with networking capability 35 391 1 Go to DOS at the console and make a new directory C SN100 If it already exists delete its contents 2 In C SN100 edit the SW2ALL BAT 3 Change REM CALL SW2NODE Nodename ORipAddress1 to CALL SW2NODE sn100_1 CALL SW2NO
483. thout a SUB PAGE key refer to Console Differences To move between submasters move the Trackball to any field in the submaster Levels for the highlighted submaster will be displayed on the Levels screen To edit these levels you will need to highlight the submaster number 7 87 You can also use NEXT and LAST to change submasters if the highlight is on the submaster number State Screen Fields on the Submaster display State screen show the current values for submaster properties To learn more about these properties refer to Recording Submaster Properties and Fader Properties The fields are shown below SUB The number of the submaster These are fixed and cannot be changed Refer to the Product Specification for number of submasters See also One and Two Scene Preset TEXT The text label caption attached to this submaster Up Down The intensity up and down fade times Can be from one hundredth of a second to 59 minutes and 59 seconds Ait Attribute fade times The same time is used for both up and down fades Can be from one hundredth of a second to 59 minutes and 59 seconds Fx OFF if no effect is associated with this submaster Otherwise the effect number to start when the submaster is moved off zero Ext OFF if no external fader is used Otherwise the analog input number which is combined with this fader on a highest takes precedence basis Mac OFF if no macro is associated with this submaster Otherwis
484. til the playback is reloaded Note A link to a non existent cue or any other link loop error will also clear the playback Cues do not have to complete before another cue is run However a maximum of refer to Product Specification for number of simultaneous fades can be run where each cue part counts as a fade and split cues and parts count as 2 fades Note GeniusPro Running a Cross All Fade immediately steals channels from all previous Cross All or Move Fades Note Lightpalette Running a Block Cue immediately steals channels from all previous Move Fades Running Manual Cues Manual cues are sequenced and loaded by the X playbacks the same as timed cues except that the playback will not actually run the cue 1 Press GO to load the manual cue Make sure that the fader is not in Rate mode by pressing UNRATE if required 500 Series Consoles only 3 Move the playback faders all the way to the bottom 0 4 Move the playback faders up to fade the cue in You can start the two faders at different times and move them at different rates if required Loading a Cue If you need to run cues out of their normal cue sheet order you can load a cue onto the X Playback Individual cue parts cannot be loaded 9 115 If the cue does not exist a warning is given and the command is ignored Loading a cue resets any loops to their initial loop count CUE LOAD Direct 1 and 2 Digit LOAD CUE Command Line Lo
485. tion Remapping VGA Screens Chapter 24 510i and 310 Show Controller User Interface Macro Screen Submaster Screen Disk Browse Screen o Loading a Show o Copying a Show o Loading Operating Software Timecode Events Screen Time Format Setting Resetting the Internal Clock Stepping the Light Show Timing Cues and X Playbacks Screen Backup Screen Panel Setup Video Line Error PC Editing Submaster Macro Inputs Chapter 25 Offline Editor amp PC Software xvi Prerequisites Installing the Offline Editor Software o Installing Offline Editor Using DOS 3 1 or later o Installing Offline Editor Using Windows9X Installing the Backup PC Kit o Installing the Ethernet Card o Configuring the Ethernet Card o Installing the Dongle o Installing the Backup PC Software from DOS Page 261 Page 269 o Installing the Backup PC Software from Windows 9X o Installing the Networker amp Utilities Software Using DOS 3 1 or Later o Installing the Networker amp Utilities Software Using Windows 9x e Installing the Help File Using DOS 3 1 or Later e Installing the Help File Using Windows 9X e Running the Software Offline Editor or Backup PC e Notes on Running Offline Editor or Backup PC Software e Designer Keypad e Keyboard Map Chapter 26 Handheld Remotes Page 283 e Designer s Remote o Installing the Designer s Remote o Operating the Designer s Remote e The R120 Handheld Remote o Installing and Configuring the R120 Han
486. tion path for the Offline Editor software By default the software will be installed in C geniusp or C lightp Enter a destination directory name of 8 characters or less or accept the default destination by pressing lt Enter gt 7 You will be prompted to enter a destination path for the show files By default the show files will be stored in C shows Enter a destination path or accept the default location by pressing lt Enter gt 8 The Strand Lighting licence agreement is displayed on screen Press any key to scroll the display 9 If you agree with the terms of the licence press Y or press N to terminate the installation 10 The Offline Editor software will install on your PC 11 If the installation was successful Instal Successful is displayed on screen 12 Open Windows Explorer and locate the Offline Editor filename geniusp or lightp or the aternative name allocated in step 6 13 If the default filename was used a shotcut gp_95 or Ip_95 is available within the directory Drag the shortcut to the desktop or cut paste to another location You can rename the shortcut to as required You can now run the software by double clicking on the shortcut icon 14 If you used a different name in step 6 locate the shortcut gp_95 or Ip_95 and use the right mouse button and select Properties Select the Program tab and change the Cmd Line and Working Directory to match the alternative location 15 Alternatively you can
487. tions Window The Timecode Options window is in the Show Setup display and lets you configure the way the console reads SMPTE and MIDI time codes These settings are only used when the Communiqu Pro software is loaded For more information refer to Communiqu Pro Show Setup Screen The Patch Window The Patch window is in the Show Setup display and lets you set defaults used during patching To learn how to set up the show patches refer to Patches This section describes the following fields a Default Scale a Default Frame a Default Non Dim Default Scale The default scaling from 1 to 200 when patching an intensity or DMX input channel Initially set to 100 Default Frame The default maximum number of frames from 2 to 100 when patching an attribute channel Initially set to 10 Default N DIM The default threshold from 0 to 100 when patching a non dim channel Initially set to 80 The Console Time Window The Console Time window is in the Show Setup display and lets you set the time and date and configure how it is displayed at the top of all displays The following fields are described in this section lime Display Date Display Set Time Set Date Time Display Sets the way that the time is displayed The default value for GeniusPro is 24 HOUR The default for Lightpalette is 12 HOUR 24 HOUR Time is displayed in 24 hour format Show Setup Screen AM PM Time is displayed in 12 hour format with
488. tive In Sync M TAKE CTRL Main take control from backup the main s outputs are enabled and the backup s outputs are disabled New state e Main Active In Sync 29 335 BREAK SYNC Break sync the tracking connection between main and backup is broken which is necessary in order to shut down either console Only the main s outputs are enabled New state e Main Ok Backup Ok No Sync RESET DESK Reset Desk resets many console parameters to power up defaults It is run automatically at the end of the Give Take Sync commands but is available manually here Shifted Backup Commands Two other commands are available by holding down the SHIFT key first M GIVE SYNC Quick Main Give Sync To Backup Main and backup are connected without the show data or console state being transferred Only available in the Main OK Backup OK No Sync state State sequence e Sync Connect To Backup e Sync Connect To Main e Main Active In Sync M TAKE SYNC Quick Main Take Sync From Backup Main and backup are connected without the show data or console state being transferred Only available in the Backup Active No Sync state i e when the backup has taken control automatically and the main has now restarted State sequence e Sync Connect To Backup e Sync Connect To Main e Main Active In Sync Note Give or Take Sync may occasionally fail after the sync show has loaded on the destination machine with the message Sync Fail
489. to 12 SUBS All Note On Off messages will cause a Submaster to be flashed ssed of the MIDI note message is acted upon When Velocity is OFF any velocity greater than 0 is treated as full on and 0 is off When Velocity is ON the velocity determines the The Velocity option determines if the velocity strength at which a key is deprelevel to which the bump key is flashed press a key hard the level is high press a key lightly and the level is low MIDI Messages This section is for experienced MIDI programmers only Control Change Consists of two General Purpose Controllers 1 for faders the other for keys General Purpose Controller 1 MSB Controller 10h and LSB controller 30h is used for faders and General Purpose Controller 2 MSB Controller 11h and LSB controller 31h is used for keys 28 316 Message Bytes Lighting Event Dir Bn 10 01 30 xx Bn 10 36 30 xx Channel Submaster Fader 1 54 Rt Bn 10 17 30 xx Bn 10 60 30 xx Channel Fader 55 96 Ft Bn 10 61 30 xx X1 Up Fader Rt Bn 10 62 30 xx X1 Down Fader ht Bn 10 63 30 xx Effects Master Fader ht Bn 10 64 30 xx A Crossfader ht Bn 10 65 30 xx B Crossfader kt Bn 10 66 30 xx Flash Level Master Fader ht Bn 10 67 30 xx Grand Master 1 Fader rt Bn 10 68 30 xx GrandMaster2Fader ft Bn 10 69 30 xx C Crossfader rt Bn 10 6A 30 xx D Crossfader rt Bn 10 6B 30 xx C Time Fader ht Bn 10 6C 30 xx D Time Fader ht Bn 10 6D 30 xx Bn 10 78 30 xx
490. to OFF are ignored so triggers of from 1 to 3 bytes can be used Audio Input Macro Communiqu Pro also supports triggering of a predefined macro number when the amplitude of the audio input exceeds a threshold determined by the setting of an Audio Threshold Supermaster The macro number is set in the Audio Input Macro field of the Communications Window of the Console Setup Screen 28 320 See Also Communiqu Pro Continued 28 321 Chapter 29 Networker Networker is a standard software package for Strand Lighting s 500 Series Consoles and GeniusPro or Lightpalette Operating software It uses an Ethernet network to provide the following features e Tracking Backup Tracks state and changes from one console to another Backup console will automatically take over running the show when the main console fails e Remote Consoles Multiple consoles can operate together on the same show e Remote Video Distributes console video information over the network to SN network nodes e Remote DMX Distributes DMX data over the network to SN network nodes e Remote Handhelds Use Remote port on SN100 and SN102 network nodes to connect handheld remotes e Remote Faders Use Analogue port on SN100 and SN102 network nodes to connect remote faders or to use the faders fitted to the SN100 e Remote MIDI Use MIDI ports on SN100 and SN102 to extend the range of your MIDI connections This section covers the following topics Network P
491. to a fixed level While any output s are unpatched the command prompt includes OUTPUTS UNPATCHED You can easily repatch the outputs so that they follow their channel settings You can use the DIMMER key in any display except Setup Archive Notes Report and Help This chapter contains the following topics The Current Output Selection Setting Levels Setting DMX Levels Repatching The Current Output Selection Most output commands act on a selection of 1 or more outputs The examples shown immediately below are output selections that you can use to replace out where it appears in full command descriptions Outputs are not actually selected until you press to end the output list Outputs can be specified as output numbers 0 to 4096 on 500 Series or 2048 on 300 Series or in Universe Dmx format In Universe Dmx format each output connector has its own number from 1 to 8 1 to 4 on 300 Series consoles and each signal from the connector has its own number from 1 to 512 The two numbers are used together so that the 123 rd output from the 3 rd DMX connector is addressed as 3 123 DMX connectors 1 through 4 are output from the console The remainder of the DMX connectors are output from network nodes Note Since these examples are only part of a command they do not have a concluding key puts the specified output on the output list DIMMER 1 Puts output 1 on the output list DIMMER 1 6 Puts output 6 on the ou
492. to console Aux port only AUX3 is allowed on older consoles Red power LED on base will illuminate At the Console Setup screen Handheld Remote Communications Setup set Handheld Remote to R120 Radio and set the Net Node Port Baud and Configuration Address Green TX LED will flash approximately once per second Installing the R120 Radio Handheld Remote PADE nN Connect radio handheld to power supply for 12 hours to achieve full charge Press On key top right to power up handheld unit Display should illuminate and keys become active Handheld will display Unit Address n for approximately 3 seconds Change the unit address to match the address set at the console by pressing number keys 1 to 8 within first 3 seconds Adjust display contrast using up and down keys Unit address and contrast can be changed at any time by simultaneously pressing and holding and keys 2 bottom right keys Channels under remote control will be displayed in purple on console screens Unit auto powers down after a period of inactivity or can be manually powered down by simultaneously pressing and holding and keys 2 bottom right keys then pressing On key top right Unit will beep every 3 seconds when battery power is low and recharge required R120 Base Pinouts 6 pin XLR male RS232 Signal Name Pin 1 Ground amp Screen Pin 2 10V Power Input Pin 3 N C Pin 4 N C Pin 5 RX data t
493. to replace steps where they appears in full command descriptions Note Since these examples are only part of a command they do not show a concluding key FX selects the specified effect and step If the effect number is missing the current effect is used The step number must always be present FX 1 2 Selects effect 1 step 2 FX 9 Selects current effect step 9 For example if the current effect step is 1 2 then this will select 1 9 FX SHIFT NEXT selects the next step after the current step This cannot be used if the current step is 99 11 138 FX NEXT When recording effects selects the next step after the current step For example if the current effect step is 1 2 then this will select 1 3 FX SHIFT LAST selects the previous step to the current step This cannot be used if the current step is 1 FX LAST When recording effects selects the previous step to the current step For example if the current effect step is 1 2 then this will select 1 1 Recording Effect Steps Levels FX RECORD Direct 1 Digit and Direct 2 Digit RECORD FX Command Line Records the levels on the current display the Live Cue Preview Group Effect or Submaster display into the current effect step Refer to Working With Channel Levels for information on how to set intensity and attribute levels and Basic Recording for examples of recording Refer to the Product Specificati
494. to scroll the display 9 If you agree with the terms of the licence press Y or press N to terminate the installation 10 The Help file will install on your PC 11 If the installation was successful Instal Successful is displayed on screen Running the Software Offline Editor or Backup PC In DOS type cd geniusp or cd lightp lt return gt to open the directory then type geniusp or lightp lt return gt for GeniusPro software or lightp lt return gt for Lightpalette software In Window 9X double click on the shortcut or open Windows Explorer and double click on geniusp exe or lightp exe in the geniusp or lightp directory Note The dongle will allocate 100 channels to the software You will require to upgrade the number of channels according to the number of channels purchased with the Backup PC Kit Refer to Adding Additional Channels or Applications to Version 2 2 or Later Software or Adding Additional Channels or Applications to Version 2 1 or Earlier Software To simulate the console keys and controls refer to Keyboard Map or use the appropriate template at the back of the Operator s Manual Before using the PC to backup a console the Networker On Off field in the The Network Window of the Console Screen must be set to ON Refer also to Tracking Backup in the Networker section of this manual Notes on Running Offline Editor and PC Software 1 If you run the software with Networker in a Windows DOS box you need t
495. tput list puts the listed outputs to the output list DIMMER 1 3 Puts outputs 1 and 3 on the output list 15 196 DIMMER 3 4 6 S 5 6 Puts outputs 1070 and 1080 on the output list THRU puts a range of outputs to the output list DIMMER 1 THRU 3 or DIMMER 3 THRU 1 Puts outputs 1 2 and 3 on the output list DIMMER 2 4 THRU 5 1 8 or DIMMER 5 1 6 THRU 2 6 Puts outputs 516 through 518 on the output list removes the listed outputs from the output list It only removes outputs that are listed before it in the command DIMMER 1 THRU 3 2 Puts outputs 1 and 3 on the output list DIMMER 1 THRU 3 2 4 Puts outputs 1 3 and 4 on the output list Setting Levels Output levels can be set directly from the command line The level format depends on the Entry Mode You cannot enter fractions of 10 e g 5 1 in Direct 1 Digit entry mode If you are in the Live or Patch display you can use the Level Wheel to change the selected dimmer levels until a new command or the CLR key deselects them DIMMER out or out UNPATCH selects the outputs If already unpatched i e set by the Output Control they remain at their unpatched level Otherwise if patched they are unpatched and initially set to the level of the channel they are being unpatched from DIMMER 1 2 Al Modes DIMMER
496. tput signals to DMX These outputs require a network adapter and the file Cl LIGHTP HELP ENG PAGE31 HTM 3 of 7 6 17 2005 7 36 12 AM Console Setup Networker software Although newer consoles come with the network adapter installed older consoles need to have one installed to take advantage of ShowNet features For more information refer to Networker The following fields are described in this section Networker On Off Networker Video Slot a NET 1 NET 4 Networker On Off Controls whether the Networker software features are enabled This is only used when the Networker software is loaded For more information refer to Networker Its value is OFF default or ON Note Do not turn this on without first consulting the Networker Turning on an improperly connected system may significantly slow console operations Network Video Slot Controls whether the network video slot is enabled and its slot number from 1 to 8 This is only used when the Networker software is loaded For more information refer to Networker Its value is OFF default or ON Note Do not turn this on without first consulting the Networker Turning on an improperly connected system may significantly slow console operations NET1 through NET4 This configures the network DMX outputs Since the console has only 4 active DMX connectors but up to 4096 outputs the most common use of these is to use the network for the additional outputs NET1 through NET
497. trailing AM or PM Date Display Sets the way that the date is displayed The default value for GeniusPro is DD MM YY The default for Lightpalette is MM DD YY DD MM YY Date is displayed in day month year format MM DD YY Date is displayed in month day year format Set Time Changes the time It must always be entered in 24 hour format where 0 is midnight 12 00 is midday and 23 59 is 1 minute before midnight The DEFLT key has no effect here You cannot enter seconds or tenths of seconds in this field The hours and minutes as a 1 to 4 digit number where 0 is 00 00 and 2359 is 23 59 Set Date Changes the date This is split into 2 separate fields The first must always be entered in day month format the second is the year The DEFLT key has no effect here The day and month as a 4 digit number from 0101 1st January to 3112 31st December The first digit can be omitted if it is O 101 is the same as 0101 The year as a 4 digit number from 1981 to 2099 The At Time Macros Window The At Time Macros window is at the bottom of the Show Setup display and lets you configure up to 4 macros to automatically run at predetermined times Each of these can be configured to start at a particular time and date or day of the week Optionally they can also run periodically until a stop time Macros are run on the weekdays specified from the start time and date to the stop time and date To run a macro once enter a start time and
498. tribute and then makes output 2001 into a non dim with an 90 threshold 2 0 0 2 6 4 2 0 0 2 NON NON All Modes Assigns output 2002 to attribute 4 of channel 6 and then makes the output into a non dim with the default threshold 2 0 0 1 NON NON 5 0 Al Modes Changes non dim threshold for output 2001 to 50 without changing the channel it is patched to Patching DMX In If you have the Communiqu Pro software you can patch outputs to a DMX input channel and set their scaling If you omit the scaling the console uses the default from the Default Scale field in the Show Setup Screen Refer to Patching DMX In Dimmers CommuniqePro Unpatching An output can be unpatched in which case it has a level of 0 zero out out ATT and out NON unpatch the selected output s regardless of whether they are currently an intensity or attribute etc 1 All Modes 1 ATT Ali Modes 1 NON All Modes Unpatches output 1 An output is automatically unpatched if you use the DIMMER key to directly set a level on it from either the Live display or from a preview display To set an output level directly press DIMMER level To repatch all outputs controlled this way press DIMMER RE PATCH 13 192 Chapter 14 Auto Mod The following topics are covered in this section What is Automod Using Auto Mod Customising the
499. ts 66129 Wired Remote UK EU_ Wired Remote epee PARIO RETOR De A A A e 66124 Base Station UK iia a a 1340 sorer pado Remote EU 8292 MHz for Ene ETS 300 220 66123 Base Station EU 433 92 MHz for Europe ETS 300 220 Base Station Cable All parts require Operating Software V1 4 or later Please contact your dealer or Strand if you do not have this software Check with local licensing authority before using radio units outside licence exempt areas This section covers the following topics Instal Installing and Configuring the R120 Handheld Remote Operating the R120 Handheld Remote ling and Configuring the R120 Handheld Remote This section describes the installation and configuration of the following Install 1 Ge 26 286 Installing the R120 Wired Remote Installing the R120 Radio Base Installing the R120 Radio Handheld Remote R120 Base Pinouts ing the R120 Wired Remote Plug wired remote into console Aux port only AUX is allowed on older consoles At Operating Software setup screen set Handheld Remote to R120 Wired and set the port that the handheld remote is plugged into Display will illuminate and keys become active Channels under remote control will be displayed in purple on console screens Simultaneously press and hold and keys 2 bottom right keys to adjust display contrast using up and down keys Installing the R120 Radio Base 1 3 4 Plug radio base station in
500. ty it offers to help manage your user and console configuration files This is particularly important if your network has several consoles or PCs Automatic downloading of confi guration files over the network itself beats walking round with floppy disks First set up directories on the file server to hold all your USR and CON files Then modify or create the USERINIT BAT file in all the consoles to automatically download their own CON file and all USR files when they start up as in the following examples Let s say that your server has these directories c ioftp Where ioftpdos or ioftp32 has been installed c users Where all your USR files are kept c consoles Where all your CON files are kept Assuming that the server s node name is SERVER add these lines to console MAIN s USERINIT BAT file CALL NETON IOFTPDOS login SERVER cd c users get usr cd c consoles get main con CALL NETOFF This procedure will download all user login files and console main s login file every time the operating software starts Remember that all USR files must be present on all consoles and PCs which support logins but each one only needs its own CON file 31 366 Chapter 32 Shownet Configuration Software ShowNet configuration software runs on a PC running Windows NT or 95 and compatible network software ShowNet manages the patching of DMX information across a ShowNet network between SN series nodes and or 500 series consoles runnin
501. ual outputs The 2048 console outputs can be assigned to different ranges of the 4096 virtual outputs This could for example allow two consoles to each control half of the network system e g one console for moving lights the other for conventional lights without interfering with each other Outputs can be specified and or displayed as output numbers 0 to 4096 or in Universe Dmx format In Universe Dmx format each output connector has its own number from 1 to 8 and each signal from the connector has its own number from 1 to 512 The two numbers are used together so that the 123 rd output from the 3rd DMX connector is addressed as 3 123 DMX connectors 1 through 4 are output from the console The remainder of the DMX connectors must be on the network Output Numbers 300 Series Consoles A 300 Series console can control 1024 outputs in two banks of 512 through the two DMX ports In addition using Networker Software the outputs can be sent via the network The network has 2048 virtual outputs The 1024 console outputs can be assigned to different ranges of the 2048 virtual outputs This could for example allow two consoles to each control half of the network system e g one console for moving lights the other for conventional lights without interfering with each other Outputs can be specified and or displayed as output numbers 0 to 2048 or in Universe DMX format In Universe Dmx format each output has its own number 1 to 4 and
502. ubmasters must either have the bump field set to Mac Macro recommended or have an external submaster assigned in the Ext field Each of the 48 24 submaster macro inputs consist of a signal ground pair on adjacent pins of a D type connector The required number of contact closure devices are coupled to the connector s using twisted pair cables It is recommended to use 24AWG twisted pair wires for each contact CAT5 UTP cable is suitable 510i and 310 i Submaster 1 to 12 macros Sub 1 12 macros Pineto Pins 13 to 25 Ground i 1 24 Sub 13 24 macro Pins 1 to 12 Submaster 13 to macros Pins 13 to 25 Ground 510i only i Submasters 25 to 36 macros Sub 25 36 macros eis ole Pins 13 to 25 Ground Sub 37 48 macros Pins 1 to 12 Submaster 37 to 48 macros Pins 13 to 25 Ground Note In order to ensure safety and integrity of operation installation of submaster macro inputs should only be undertaken by a competent and experienced electrician Shielded cable may be required in areas of exceptional electrical noise Each of the 48 24 submaster macro inputs consist of a signal ground pair on adjacent pins of a D type connector The required number of contact closure devices are coupled to the connector s using twisted pair cables It is recommended to use 24AWG twisted pair wires for each contact CAT5 UTP cable is suitable 24 268 Chapter 25 Offline Editor amp PC Software GeniusPro and Lightpalette Off line Editor and PC Backup Software provi
503. uding levels of channels that were not already in the group GROUP 7 UPDATE GROUP 1 All Modes First selects all of the channels in group 7 then updates their levels in group 1 excluding levels of channels that were not already in the submaster Including the ADD ALL softkey in the update command includes level changes in channels that are not already in the group UPDATE ADD ALL GROUP All Modes Updates levels in the specified group for channels that have been modified Includes modified channels that are not already in the group and channels that have been removed from the modified list by using SHIFT CLR Channels that are off in the selection will be removed from the group UPDATE ADD ALL GROUP 1 All Modes Updates all channels that have been modified in group 1 including channels that are not already in group 1 GROUP 7 UPDATE ADD ALL GROUP 1 All Modes First selects all of the channels in group 7 then records their levels in group 1 including channels that are not already in the group 7 chan UPDATE GROUP updates levels of the specified channels in the specified group to match the current Levels screen for the selected channels regardless of whether or not they have been modified Excludes channels that are not already in the group regardless of whether or not they have been modified Channels that are off in the selection will be removed from t
504. ue 0 255 if Max lt Min attribute is inverted hProfile Profile Law number Lines starting with are comment lines and are not processed The Fixture Library file is read when the console is started or the fixture library changed The file is updated when a show is loaded that has different fixture assignments For further information refer to Tracker Library Files 30 357 Chapter 31 Server Software The optional file server application provides a central place on the ShowNet network to store show files user login configuration files Networker configuration files archive copies of operating software in fact anything you like You can use any console or PC on the network as the file server although many people use a PC DOS or Win9X or NT which can be fitted with a tape drive or other backup device for added security Controlling user access to the file server is another issue in some sites and using a PC running NT means that the security features of NT can be used to prevent unauthorised users from making unwanted changes to the file server Another feature that Server provides is a central place on the network to direct all archive printing operations Note File Server uses Point to Point communications in which IP addresses are used and MUST be unique The following topics are covered in this section e Loading the Server Password Disk Setting Up a File Server e User Logins e Integrating File Server and Login
505. ue between 0 and 59 minutes 59 seconds and is initially set to OFF Times below one minute can be specified in the range 0 1 to 59 seconds FX Step The default step time recorded in a newly created effect step It can be any value between 0 and 5 minutes 0 seconds and is initially set to 0 50 1 Times below one minute can be specified in the range 0 1 to 59 seconds FX Step In Dwell Out The default In Dwell and Out times for a newly created effect step three separate values They can be any value between 0 and 5 minutes 0 seconds and are initially set to 0 OFF 0 Times below one minute can be specified in the range 0 1 to 59 seconds FX Up Down The default up and down fade times for a newly created effect The up and down times are separate fields They can be any value between 0 and 5 minutes 0 seconds and are initially set to 0 5 0 5 Times below one minute can be specified in the range 0 1 to 59 seconds Undo Time The time for an undo action to complete It can be any value between 0 and 59 minutes 59 seconds and is initially set to 2 Times below one minute can be specified in the range 0 1 to 59 seconds Console Window The Console window is in the User Setup display and lets you configure the displays LCD buzzer and other miscellaneous functions The fields within the Console Window are desribed as follows Number of Screens LCD Contrast Backlight Gooseneck Brightness Buzzer Volume Macro Tablet Mouse Console Key
506. um of 200 date stamped fault reports in chronological order The log is automatically updated The log shows the date and time that each fault occurred the rack and dimmer number and a description of the fault The lower portion of the screen shows a map of all configured racks max 99 colour coded as follows to show their status Green Online Red Fault on rack or on one or more of its dimmers Grey Offline Blank Not configured Yellow Console is trying to find rack If a rack number is flashing at least one dimmer in that rack is load learning 21 248 CLEAR Clears all logged faults e g CLEAR command mode or CLEAR CLEAR direct action Confirmation is required RE SYNC Re synchronizes dimmer log to current rack status E g RE SYNC command mode or RE SYNC RE SYNC direct action LEARN LOAD Used as part of command line as follows LEARN LOAD RACK Learns load on specified rack number LEARN LOAD DIMMER 4 Learns load on specified dimmer number LEARN LOAD DIMMER AT CHAN 4 4 4 C Learns load at specified channel number LEARN LOAD DIMMER AT CHAN C Learns loads on all dimmers on the specified channel number RACK Allows selection of Rack as above OUTPUT FILT Displays Output Filter screen BACK Returns to previous menu Output Filter Display You can filter out particular fault c
507. used intensity channels using the CHAN DELETE syntax e g CHAN 1 0 0 THRU 1 9 9 DELETE CHAN DELETE CHAN BACK Note Deleted intensity channels may be used as attribute channels but deleted attribute channels cannot be used as intensity channels Recording and Playback The recording and playback of attribute channels is exactly the same as for intensity channels Refer to Basic Recording and Recording Cues Because attribute channels are treated differently there are a few things to be aware of when working with attributes These are explained in the following topics 30 352 e Attributes in Cues e Attributes in Submasters e Attributes LTP Intensities HTP e Auto Move While Dark Attributes In Cues Cues have separate fade times for intensities and attributes Attributes can be recorded and edited in Cues in exactly the same way as intensities Attributes In Submasters Submasters have separate fade times for intensities and attributes If the submaster contains both intensities and attributes then the fader will continuously master the intensities but the attributes will fade in the attribute fade time starting at the point when the fader handle is moved off the zero position If a submaster consists only of attributes then the submaster fader will continuously master the attributes Attributes LTP Intensities HTP Attributes work on a LTP Latest Takes Precedence basis This is different to intens
508. ve been modified ignoring channels that are not already in the cues Channels that are off in the selection are removed from the cues The cues must already exist UPDATE CHANS IN CUE 1 A Modes Records all channels that have been modified live into cue 1 ignoring channels that are not already in the cue SUB 7 UPDATE CHANS IN CUE 1 All Modes First selects all of the channels in submaster 7 then records their levels in cue 1 ignoring channels that are not already in the cue chan UPDATE cue changes levels of the specified channels in the specified cues to match the current Levels screen Adds channels that are not already in the cues Channels that are off in the selection are removed from the cues The cues must already exist 1 THRU 5 UPDATE CUE 1 A Modes Changes channel 1 through 5 levels in cue 1 adding channels that are not already in the cue 1 THRU 5 UPDATE CUE 1 THRU 4 A Modes Changes channel 1 through 5 levels in cues 1 through 4 adding channels that are not already in the cues Note To clear the changed indicator and set red channel levels back to cyan press SHIFT CLEAR Updating Cues from the Live Screen When in one of the two Cue Preview screens Cue Sheet or X Ref you can update cues according to the levels in the Live Screen on stage using the syntax chans LIVE This syntax will set the selected channel levels into currentl
509. ve one part numbered 1 since otherwise all parts would have all channels and the last one would over ride all previous parts Parts are always Move Fades GeniusPro or Tracking Cues Lightpalette Recording Cue Levels RECORD records the levels intensity levels and attribute levels on the current display into the current cue 8 93 CUE RECORD RECORD Direct Digit Modes RECORD CUE Command Line Mode Records the levels on the current display the Live Cue Preview Group Effect or Submaster display into the specified cue For information on setting intensity and attribute levels refer to Working With Channel Levels For examples of recording refer to Basic Recording Note When you set channel levels in the Preview display with Cue Tracking on you can set them off hans OFF or set them to zero hans 0 When set off levels track through from previous cues When set to 0 levels are forced to zero in the cue Thus you can set levels off in a Cross Fade Blocking Cue to make individual channels track through the cue or at zero in a Move Fade Tracking Cue to block individual channels When you record from the Live display with the Cue Tracking field in the Show Setup display set ON channels at zero are set to zero level in the cue only if they change from the previous cue Otherwise they are recorded Off and channel levels can track through from the previous cue in later editing e
510. ve the application password to floppy disk When you press the SAVE PASSW softkey you will be prompted to insert a formatted floppy disk in the disk drive and to press the SAVE softkey on the Password LCD Menu For information on formatting a floppy disk refer to Formatting a Floppy Disk ENTER PASSWORD Entering the password enables application software A registration form is included with the application software Complete this including your console serial number and fax it to the Software Registration Centre at Strand Lighting UK who will verify it and issue your password 17 203 To find the console serial number press REPORT and look at the CONS field in the System Report Screen Configuration window This password is unique to your console with its application software and is not transferable Keep a record of your password If you change the password for additional application software entering the old password will revert to the previous configuration ENTER PASSW lets you enter the password If you are not already in the Software menu press ARCHIVE SOFT Type in the supplied password number with no spaces or other keys then press If the password is entered incorrectly a Password Please Re enter message appears To cancel the operation press BACK Once entered the password cannot be displayed again Note A new password is sometimes rejected with incorrect ILLEGAL CONSOLE error If this happens press t
511. w ones added by modifying the file FIXTURE LIB Fixture Library with the console notes editor Warning Installing new Operating Software or entering a new password will overwrite the changes you have made to the FIXTURE file The old file will be saved as FIXTURE OLD Any modifications you have been made should be edited into to the new file otherwise you can rename the OLD file to LIB thereby using your old file in full See also Site Configuration Files The fixture library file is composed of several sections one for each fixture type Each section starts with a unique fixture number hFixture followed by the fixture name Each successive line in the section describes one DMX address for the fixture Each DMX line starts with the attribute number hAtt which describes what this DMX byte controls see ATCPAGE LIB for list The remainder of each DMX line provides parameters which describe how this attribute is used by the fixture for example whether it is a continuous or stepped control and which profile if any to apply to the attribute hFixture FixtureName hAtt Steps Ndim Max Min hProfile etc hAtt Steps Ndim Max Min hProfile hFixture Fixture Number 1 99 FixtureName Fixture Name for each DMX address used hAtt Attribute number 1 99 Steps Number of Steps Frames 0 continuous Ndim Non dim threshold 0 255 Scale Maximum DMX output value 0 255 Scaling factor 255 100 Min Minimum DMX output val
512. w the functions of VGA1 from a remote 520 console Console 2 on VGA2 Screen 1 Screen2 Screen1 Screen 2 Remapped Configuration Configuration 550 Console 520 Console Main Remote 1 Map Configuration File Command line Standard VGA Screen Console to View Screen to View 500_VGA2 2 1 e g 500_VGA2 2 1 The following example shows a 4 screen 550 main console whose control surface has been remapped to create a virtual console within the same console The virtual console is referred to as remote 1 Two of the four screens require to be remapped to show the functions of the virtual remote 23 259 E Remapped virtual Remote 1 550 Console 23 260 Chapter 24 The 510i and 310 Show Controller Backup Unit The 510i is a 19 inch rack mounted unit and the 310 may be desk wall or 19inch rack mounted Both units are designed to match the lighting needs of the themed environment market where the requirement is for repetitive playback of shows controlled by one of the following SMPTE Audio or Video Timecodes MIDI Show Controller 48 Contact Closure Inputs Internal Clock Manual Playback The 510i and 310 also supports playback of shows recorded on GSX and LBX The creation of a light show based on SMPTE time stamped events and MIDI Show Control is described in Communiqu Pro Software SMPTE Time Code Events In addition since the software configuration of applications and channel capacity of the 510i and 310 is
513. wing defined my_nodeaddr 192 168 0 aaa These are the four decimal numbers of the IP address aaa can be 1 to 254 my_nodetype 530 For example see the list of types in the file See also 220TYPEASCFG enviroment variable my_nodename abcdefgh Any name up to 8 characters no spaces or punctuation netmask 255 255 255 0 Do not change this CREATE lt nodename gt CON FILE This is the console setup defaults file You can create one for each console and PC by copying CONSOLE NEW which is installed with the software So for console1 create CONSOLE1 CON at DOS by doing copy CONSOLE NEW CONSOLE1 CON 37 400 Problems Starting the Software If the console freezes or gives errors over the startup screen In the unlikely event of the show data becoming corrupt the console can be completely cleared down by either deleting all the DAT files using 220 CLEAN BAT or by clearing the Whole Show and setup together at the Archive clear display To get to DOS during start up press Ctrl and Break together as soon as the start up screen appears Enter Y at the prompt Terminate Batch Job Y N Fitting RAM Memory Software version 2 2 and later require more than 16Mb of RAM memory for the i software version to run The non i version 2 2 operating software will still run in 8Mb of RAM All consoles have at least 8Mb but a few early i consoles had 16Mb To see how much memory your console has ah the screen messages at powerup
514. with two channels at 10 and 40 wheeling by 50 will increase these to 15 and 60 that is each level is increased by half as much again Channels in the selection that are set to zero move up 2 with a 50 increase in other channel levels Wheel Sensitivity Controls the sensitivity of the Level Wheel The value can be SLOW MEDIUM default or FAST Stop Key Controls the function of the STOP key at the top of the console OFF default The key is disabled BLACKOUT Sets all intensities to 0 at the first press and restores them at the second press Attributes are unaffected STOP ATTS Stops all attribute fades while intensity fades continue Pressing it again re enables attribute fades when the next cue or effect is run or Channel Control action is taken Display Options Window The Display Options window is in the User Setup display and lets you see how level and state information appear in the various displays The fields within the Display Options Window are desribed as follows Display Language Channel Display Smart Channel Display Auto Channel Page Channel Formatting Live Screen Layout X Playback Colours X Playback Order X Playback Format Show Last Recorded Cue Screen Menus Display Language Sets the language used for the display and LCD displays Its value is ENGLISH default FRANCAIS French DEUTSCH German ITALIANO Italian ESPANOL Spanish SVENSKA Swedish NEDERLAND
515. ws the current show status Such as number of cue parts groups Effect Steps Macros Profiles and Event in use If a print out is initiated a print job will be listed until it is completed For information about the use of this display when the Networker option is configured refer to Networker The Network Configuration window in the System Status display shows the network setup information for this console This information is only relevant when the optional Networker software is loaded Please refer to Networker for more details The Configuration window in the System Status display shows the loaded operating software version number and date together with the application software installed CONS The console serial number This is used when filling out the registration form for software Os The GeniusPro Lightpalette version number The format of this is for example 2 3 A trailing character is used to indicate minor versions for example 2 2c Beta testing versions have 20 238 a character instead of the period for example 2b3 APPL This lists the application software loaded one or more of these are generally listed If this is blank no application software is loaded GENPRO The GeniusPro software is loaded shows the number of channels COMPRO The optional Communiqu Pro software is loaded TRK The optional Tracker software is loaded NET The optional Networker software is loaded REP The optional Reporter so
516. xxxxxx you will need it later Connect PSU to base station amp red power LED will illuminate Plug radio base station into console Aux port only AUX3 is allowed on older consoles At Console Setup screen Handheld Remote Communications Setup set Handheld Remote to R130 Radio and set and set the Net Node Port Baud Rate Set the configuration address 8 digit number up to 4 digits In the left field and 4 digits in the right field to Internal Radio Sn previously recorded R130 Base Pinouts Pin 1 Pin 2 Pin 3 Pin 4 Pin 5 Pin 6 6 pin XLR male RS232 Signal Name Ground amp Screen 10V Power Input N C N C RX data to base handheld TX data from base handheld Operating the R130 Handheld Remote Examples of basic operation when in Single Digit Direct Entry mode are given below For further details regarding specific commands refer to the appropriate section in the Table of Contents or Index Level Setting 1 5 Direct 1 Digit 1 50 Command Line channel 1 at 50 2 9 4 Direct 1 Digit 2 9 4 0 Command Line channels 2 amp 9 at 40 9 THRU 1 2 4 Direct 1 Digit 9 THRU 1 2 4 0 Command Line channels 9 thru 12 at 40 5 Direct 1 Digit 5 0 Command Line set 50 ON Al Modes set on level FULL A Modes 26 291 set 100 level Up All Modes increase level Down All Modes decrease level NEXT Ali Modes next
517. y highlighted cue in the Preview Screen including channels not already in the cue Alternatively you can update only the channels in the cue using the syntax cue LIVE 1 THRU 5 LIVE Direct Action Modes 1 THRU 5 LIVE Command Line Mode Sets the levels of channels 1 to 5 in the currently selected cue to the levels in the Live Screen levels on stage If any of the channels are not already in the cue they are added to the cue CUE 1 LIVE Direct Action modes CUE 1 LIVE Command Line Mode Selects the channels in cue 1 and sets them according to the levels in the Live Screen on stage Changing Cues Temporarily You can change levels and properties for the next cue temporarily by using the Playback display These changes are not recorded in the cue so the next time you run it the recorded properties and levels will be used This does not modify the current cue the cue with gt next to it It modifies the cue currently loaded and ready for playback when you press GO PB opens the Playback display for the specified playback so that you can modify the next cue Press LIVE to return to the Live display PB 1 Opens the Playback display for X Playback 1 You can now change properties or levels for the next cue that will be run on the playback Changes you make in this display are temporary and are not recorded into the cue 9 121 Fading Cues with the Level Whe

500 Series Console (Discontinued) - User

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents